You are on page 1of 588

Parameters Table Recommended value Default

Frequency Band Cell_Common GSM900&DCS1800


Administrative State Cell_Common Unlocked
Layer of the Cell Cell_Common 3 3
MCC Cell_Common 470 None
MNC Cell_Common 02 None
NCC Cell_Common 0~7 0
BCC Cell_Common 0~7 0
Cell Priority Cell_Common Prior-1 Prior-1
Activity Status Cell_Common Activated Activated
PCU Cell_Common 255 255
GPRS Support Cell_Common support GPRS not support GPRS
Support Baseband FH and EDGE
simultaneously
Cell_Common Yes Yes
EDGE Support Cell_Common No No
8PSK power attenuation grade Cell_Common 0 0
Support NACC Cell_Common No No
Support PACKET SI STATUS Cell_Common No No
Support NC2 Cell_Common No No
PCU Support 64 Neighbor Cells Cell_Common No No
Level report switch Cell_Common Support Support
Cellband Cell_Common 0 0
RAC Cell_Common As per plan As per plan
Support DTM Cell_Common Not Support Not Support
Support Enhanced DTM Cell_Common Not Support Not Support
Encryption Algorithm Cell_Common 00000001 1
FH MODE Cell_Common As per frequency plan
As per frequency
plan
DL DTX Cell_Common
No (tunable based on
performance)
Yes
MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km)) Cell_Common 63 62
Cell Extension Type Cell_Common Normal cell Normal Cell
Cell Antenna Hopping Cell_Common None None
Enhanced Concentric Allowed Cell_Common No Yes
Cell Type Cell_Common Normal Cell Normal cell
Attributes of UL And OL Subcells Cell_Common NONE NONE
BCCH Concentric Attribute Cell_Common None None
UL DTX Cell_Common Shall Use Shall Use
Call Reestablishment Forbidden Cell_Common Yes Yes
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN Cell_Common 1 1
TCH Immediate Assignment Cell_Common No No
Direct Retry Cell_Common Yes Yes
SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed Cell_Common Yes Yes
UL PC Allowed Cell_Common Yes Yes
DL PC Allowed Cell_Common Yes Yes
Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power
Amplifier
Cell_Common Yes Yes
Allow Dynamic Voltage Adjustment Cell_Common Yes Yes
TRX Index TRx Depend on invidual site 65535
TRX No. TRx Depend on invidual site 255
Cell Index TRx Depend on invidual site None
Site Index TRx Depend on invidual site 65535
Board Type TRx Depend on invidual site None
Active State TRx Activated Activated
Abis Mode TRx Auto Auto
Cabinet No. TRx Depend on invidual site 0
Subrack No. TRx Depend on invidual site 0
Slot No. TRx Depend on invidual site None
TEI TRx Depend on invidual site 0
Out-BSC Subrack No. TRx Depend on invidual site 0
Out-BSC Slot No. TRx Depend on invidual site None
Out-BSC Port No. TRx Depend on invidual site None
Out-BSC Timeslot No.(8K) TRx Depend on invidual site 255
RSL In Site Port No. TRx Depend on invidual site 255
RSL In Site Timeslot No.(8K) TRx Depend on invidual site 255
RSL Logic No. TRx Depend on invidual site 2048
Hop Type TRx As per frequency plan None
Power Level TRx 0 0
Power Type TRx
Depends on BTS/site
configuration
Default
HW_Concentric Attribute TRx
Depends on BTS/site
configuration
None
TRX Priority TRx Level0 Level0
Shut Down Enable TRx Enable Enable
TCH Rate Adjust Allow TRx Yes No
TRX 8PSK Level TRx 0 0
Wireless Link Alarm Flag TRx No No
Abnormal Release Statistic Base TRx 100 100
Abnormal Warn Threshold TRx 100 100
Abnormal Release Threshold TRx 50 50
Statical Period of No-traffic(5min) TRx 48 48
Wireless Link Alarm Critical Permit TRx Yes Yes
WLA Prompting Recover Period(5min) TRx 12 12
Begin Time of WLA Detection(hour) TRx 8 8
End Time of WLA Detection(hour) TRx 22 22
Up Down Balance Basic Difference TRx 8 8
Up Down Balance Floating Range TRx 30 30
Up Down Balance Alarm Threshold TRx 80 80
Receive Mode TRx
Depends on BTS/site
configuration
None
Send Mode TRx
Depends on BTS/site
configuration
None
Allow Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier TRx Yes No
Antenna Hopping Index TRx No No
Power Finetune TRx Default Default
TRX Antenna Hopping TRx None None
Reverse Out-BSC Slot No. TRx 255 255
Reverse Out-BSC Port No. TRx 255 255
Reverse Out-BSC Timeslot No.(8K) TRx 255 255
Reverse RSL In Site Port No. TRx 255 255
Reverse RSL In Site Timeslot No.(8K) TRx 255 255
Transmission Type of Abis Interface TRx TDM TDM
Maximum PDCH numbers of carrier TRx 8 8
MaxAbisTSOccupied TRx 32 32
Co-TRX for Dynamic Transmission
Diversity(PBT)
TRx 255 255
InHDLCIndex TRx 65535 65535
HubHDLCIndex TRx 65535 65535
TRXNoInHub TRx 255 255
XPUSlotNo TRx 0 0
TRX Ability TRx 1
PhysicalPassNo TRx 1
Priority TRx NONE
QTRU Priority TRx 255
RevInHDLCIndex TRx 65535 65535
Time Slot Power Rerserve TRx 0 0
Allow Dynamic Voltage Adjustment Basic_Parameter Yes Yes
Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power
Amplifier
Basic_Parameter Yes Yes
MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km)) Basic_Parameter 63 62
DL DTX Basic_Parameter
No (tunable based on
performance)
Yes
Encryption Algorithm Basic_Parameter 00000001 1
DL PC Allowed Basic_Parameter Yes Yes
UL PC Allowed Basic_Parameter Yes Yes
Direct Retry Basic_Parameter Yes Yes
TCH Immediate Assignment Basic_Parameter No No
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN Basic_Parameter 1 8
Call Reestablishment Forbidden Basic_Parameter Yes Yes
UL DTX Basic_Parameter Shall Use Shall Use
GSM900 Band Traffic Load Share
Threshold
CH_MGT 25 25
Channel Assignment Allowed for
Insufficient Power
CH_MGT No Yes
Qtru Down Link Path Loss Compensation CH_MGT 4 4
Qtru Estimate Bts Power CH_MGT 35 35
Qtru Down Power Inadequate Last Time CH_MGT 3 3
Qtru Down Power Inadequate Stat Time CH_MGT 5 5
Qtru Power Sharing CH_MGT None None
Observed time of uplink received level
difference
CH_MGT 5 5
Duration of uplink received level difference CH_MGT 4 4
Smooth factor of uplink received level CH_MGT 6 6
Threshold of the difference between uplink
received levels
CH_MGT 100 100
Allow Rate Selection Based on
Overlaid/Underlaid Subcell Load
CH_MGT Yes Yes
Tch Traffic Busy Underlay Threshold CH_MGT 50 50
Busy Threshold of TCH Traffic in Overlaid
Subcell
CH_MGT 30 50
Flex HSN Switch CH_MGT Close Close
Flex MAIO Switch CH_MGT Close Close
Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load
Threshold(%)
CH_MGT 80 80
Flex Abis Prior Choose Abis Load
Threshold(%)
CH_MGT 80 80
TCH req suspend interval(s) CH_MGT 60 60
AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold CH_MGT 2 40
AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed CH_MGT Yes As per plan
Update Freq.of CH Record CH_MGT 2 2
Update Period of CH Record(min) CH_MGT 30 30
Filter Length for SDCCH Qual. CH_MGT 2 2
Filter Length for SDCCH Level CH_MGT 2
As per frequency
plan
Filter Length for TCH Qual. CH_MGT 6 6
Filter Length for TCH Level CH_MGT 6 4
Interf.of DL Qual.Threshold CH_MGT 50 40
Interf.of DL Level Threshold CH_MGT 25 25
Interf.of UL Qual. Threshold CH_MGT 50 40
Interf.of UL Level Threshold CH_MGT 30 10
History Record Priority Allowed CH_MGT Yes Yes
Allocation TRX Priority Allowed CH_MGT Yes Yes
Active CH Interf. Meas.Allowed CH_MGT Yes Yes
Interf. Priority Allowed CH_MGT Yes Yes
TCH Traffic Busy Threshold(%) CH_MGT 50 50
TIGHT BCCH Switch CH_MGT No No
Dynamic Transmission Diversity(PBT)
Supported
CH_MGT Not Support Not Support
Channel Allocate Strategy CH_MGT Capability preferred
Capability
preferred
Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed CH_MGT Yes Yes
TCH Minimum Recovery Time(s) CH_MGT 60 60
Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum CH_MGT 80 80
Idle SDCCH Threshold N1 CH_MGT 2 2
AMR Starting Mode(H) Call_Control 2 2
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H) Call_Control 3 15
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H) Call_Control 3 4
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H) Call_Control 2 4
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(H) Call_Control 26 63
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(H) Call_Control 18 26
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H) Call_Control 12 16
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H) Call_Control 3 15
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H) Call_Control 3 4
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H) Call_Control 2 4
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(H) Call_Control 26 63
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(H) Call_Control 18 24
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(H) Call_Control 12 14
AMR ACS(H) Call_Control 15 1101
AMR Starting Mode(F) Call_Control 2 2
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) Call_Control 3 3
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F) Call_Control 3 3
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F) Call_Control 2 2
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) Call_Control 26 30
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(F) Call_Control 18 22
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) Call_Control 12 As per plan
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) Call_Control 3 1
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F) Call_Control 3 2
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F) Call_Control 2 2
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) Call_Control 26
As per frequency
plan
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(F) Call_Control 18 18
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) Call_Control 12 12
AMR ACS(F) Call_Control 165 11100100
Max Assignment Retry Times Call_Control 2 1
Frequency Band of Reassign Call_Control Tunable Different Band
Short Message Downlink Disabled Call_Control No No
Immediate Assignment Opt. Call_Control No No
Abis Resource Adjustment TCHH Function
Switch
Call_Control No No
Allow EMLPP Call_Control No No
Allow Reassign Call_Control Yes Yes
TDD Cell Threshold Call_Control 3G Parameter 0
TDD Cell offset Call_Control 3G Parameter 0
Best TDD Cell Number Call_Control 3G Parameter 1
TDD Cell Reselect Diversity(dB) Call_Control 3G Parameter 8
FDD Reporting Threshold Call_Control 3G Parameter 0
FDD Reporting Offset Call_Control 3G Parameter 0
1800 Reporting Threshold Call_Control 3G Parameter 0
1800 Reporting Offset Call_Control 3G Parameter 0
900 Reporting Threshold Call_Control 3G Parameter 0
900 Reporting Offset Call_Control 3G Parameter 0
Qsearch C Call_Control 3G Parameter 15
Scale Order Call_Control 3G Parameter +0dB
Invalid BSIC Reporting Call_Control 3G Parameter No
3G Search PRIO Call_Control 3G Parameter Yes
Qsearch P Call_Control 3G Parameter 15
FDD Qmin Call_Control 3G Parameter 0
FDD MULTIRAT Reporting Call_Control 3G Parameter 2
FDD REP QUANT Call_Control 3G Parameter RSCP
FDD Q Offset Call_Control 3G Parameter 8
Qsearch C Initial Call_Control 3G Parameter Use Qsearch_I
Qsearch I Call_Control 3G Parameter 15
Serving Band Reporting Call_Control 3G Parameter 3
Power Deviation(2dB) Call_Control 1 1
Power Deviation Indication Call_Control Yes Yes
MBR Call_Control
0(for normal cell); 2(near
to Dualband cell)
0
ECSC Call_Control Yes NO
Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period
(480ms))
Call_Control 24 52
Emergent Call Disable Call_Control No No
Special Access Control Class Call_Control Not selected 00000
Common Access Control Class Call_Control Not selected 0000000000
MS MAX Retrans Call_Control 4 4 Times
Max Transmit Times of Imm_Ass Call_Control 2 2
Max Delay of Imm_Ass Retransmit(ms) Call_Control 4 4
Use Imm_Ass Retransmit Parameter Call_Control No No
N200 of FACCH/Full rate Call_Control 34 34
N200 of FACCH/Half rate Call_Control 29 29
N200 of SDCCH Call_Control 23 23
N200 of SACCH Call_Control 5 5
N200 of Release Call_Control 5 5
N200 of Establish Call_Control 5 5
Use LAPDm N200 Call_Control No No
T200 SDCCH SAPI3(5ms) Call_Control 60 60
T200 SACCH SDCCH(10ms) Call_Control 60 60
T200 SACCH TCH SAPI3(10ms) Call_Control 200 200
T200 SACCH TCH SAPI0(10ms) Call_Control 150 150
T200 FACCH/H(5ms) Call_Control 50 50
T200 FACCH/F(5ms) Call_Control 50 50
T200 SDCCH(5ms) Call_Control 60 60
RACH Min.Access Level(dbm) Call_Control -115 -115
Random Access Error Threshold Call_Control 200 180
TRX Aiding Function Control Call_Control
Allowed & Recover
When Check Res.
TRX Aiding Not
Allowed
Speech Version Call_Control 47 11
AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period
(480ms))
Call_Control 24 52
AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period
(480ms))
Call_Control 24 64
AHR SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH period
(480ms))
Call_Control 24 32
AFR SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH period
(480ms))
Call_Control 24 48
Directed Retry Load Access Threshold Call_Control 75 85
Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable Call_Control Disable Disable
Paging Times Call_Control 1 4
RACH Busy Threshold Call_Control 16 16
SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH period
(480ms))
Call_Control 24 31
T3105(10ms) HO 7 7
Max Resend Times of Phy.Info. HO 30 30
TDD Better 3G Cell HO Allowed HO 3G Parameter 0
TDD 3G Better Cell HO Valid Time(s) HO 3G Parameter 4
TDD 3G Better Cell HO Watch Time(s) HO 3G Parameter 5
TDD RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell
HO
HO 3G Parameter 50
TDD HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell HO 3G Parameter 25
TDD Inter-RAT HO Preference HO 3G Parameter
Preference for 2G
Cell By Threshold
Quick Handover Offset(dB) HO 3G Parameter 68
Quick Handover Punish Value(dB) HO 3G Parameter 63
Quick Handover Punish Time(s) HO 3G Parameter 10
Ignore Measurement Report Number HO 3G Parameter 1
Neighbor Cell Filter Length MR Number HO 3G Parameter 4
Serving Cell Filter Length MR Number HO 3G Parameter 4
Quick Handover Last Time (0.5s) HO 3G Parameter 3
Quick Handover Static Time(0.5s) HO 3G Parameter 4
Quick Move Speed Threshold(m/s) HO 3G Parameter 80
Quick Handover Down Trigger Level(dB) HO 3G Parameter 63
Quick Handover Up Trigger Level(dB) HO 3G Parameter 63
Inner Cell Serious OverLoad Threshold(%) HO 90 90
Number of Satisfactory Measurements(s) HO As per plan As per plan
Total Number of Measurements(s) HO 5 5
Inter UL And OL Subcells HO Penalty
Time(s)
HO 5 5
Outgoing OL Subcell HO level
Threshold(dB)
HO 25 25
Incoming OL Subcell HO level
Threshold(dB)
HO As per frequency plan
As per frequency
plan
Step Length of OL Subcell Load HO(dB) HO Yes 5
OL Subcell Load Diversity HO Period(s) HO 10 10
Load HO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell
Enabled
HO No No
Modified Step Length of UL Load HO
Period(s)
HO 1 1
Step Length of UL Subcell Load HO(dB) HO 5 5
UL Subcell Load Hierarchical HO Period(s) HO 5 5
Distance Hysteresis Between Boundaries of
UL And OL Subcells(dB)
HO 2 2
Distance Between Boundaries of UL And
OL Subcells(dB)
HO 10 10
Allowed Flow Control Level of UL And OL
Subcell HO
HO 10 10
UL Subcell Serious Overload Threshold(%) HO 90 90
UL Subcell General Overload Threshold(%) HO 80 80
Assignment Optimization of OL Subcell
Allowed Or Not
HO No No
Assignment Optimization of UL Subcell
Allowed Or Not
HO Yes Yes
UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold(%) HO 50 50
Better 3G Cell HO Allowed HO No No
3G Better Cell HO Valid Time(s) HO 3G Parameter 4
3G Better Cell HO Watch Time(s) HO 3G Parameter 5
Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO HO 3G Parameter 35
RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO HO 3G Parameter 50
HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell HO 3G Parameter 25
Inter-RAT HO Preference HO 3G Parameter
Preference for 2G
Cell By Threshold
Ps UtoO HO Received Level Threshold HO 35 35
Ps OtoU HO Received Level Threshold HO 25 25
ReceiveQualThrshAMRHR HO 60 60
ReceiveQualThrshAMRFR HO 65 65
En Iuo In Cell Load Classification HO Step HO 5 5
En Iuo In Cell Load Classification HO
Period
HO 5 5
En Iuo Out Cell Serious OverLoad
Threshold
HO 90 90
En Iuo Out Cell General OverLoad
Threshold
HO 85 85
En Iuo Out Cell Low Load Threshold HO 30 20
MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail HO 3 3
Penalty Time after OtoU HO Fail(s) HO 5 10
Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail(s) HO 30 40
Penalty Time of UtoO HO(s) HO 5 10
Underlay HO Step Level HO 5 5
Underlay HO Step Period(s) HO 5 5
UtoO Traffic HO Allowed HO Yes Yes
UtoO HO Received Level Threshold HO 35 35
OtoU HO Received Level Threshold HO 20 25
Incoming-to-BSC HO Optimum Layer HO Underlaid Subcell Underlaid Subcell
Pref. Subcell in HO of Intra-BSC HO System Optimization
System
Optimization
TA Threshold of Imme-Assign Pref. HO 0 0
TA Pref. of Imme-Assign Allowed HO No No
TA Threshold of Assignment Pref. HO 63 63
Assign-optimum-level Threshold HO 35 35
Assign Optimum Layer HO System Optimization
System
Optimization
UO HO Valid Time(s) HO 4 4
UO HO Watch Time(s) HO 5 5
TA Hysteresis HO 0 0
TA Threshold HO 62 63
RX_QUAL Threshold HO 50 60
RX_LEV Hysteresis HO 5 5
RX_LEV Threshold HO 40 35
UO Signal Intensity Difference HO 0 0
TA for UO HO Allowed HO NO Yes
RX_QUAL for UO HO Allowed HO Yes No
RX_LEV for UO HO Allowed HO Yes Yes
OL to UL HO Allowed HO Yes Yes
UL to OL HO Allowed HO Yes Yes
Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO HO 80 80
RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH
HO
HO 4 3
K Bias HO 0 0
UL Expected Level at HO Access HO 35 30
Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO(s) HO 40 40
Penalty on MS Fast Moving HO HO 30 30
Interval for Consecutive HO Jud. HO 6 6
Forbidden time after MAX Times HO 20 20
MAX Consecutive HO Times HO 3 3
MS Fast-moving Time Threshold HO 15 15
MS Fast-moving Valid Cells HO NA 2
MS Fast-moving Watch Cells HO 3 3
Load HO Step Level HO 5 5
Load HO Step Period HO 10 10
Load HO Bandwidth HO 25 25
Load Req.on Candidate Cell HO 75 75
Load HO Threshold HO 85 85
System Flux Threshold for Load HO HO 10 10
ULQuaLimitAMRHR HO 60 60
DLQuaLimitAMRHR HO 60 60
ULQuaLimitAMRFR HO 60 65
DLQuaLimitAMRFR HO 60 65
RXLEVOff HO 5 5
RXQUAL12 HO 50 50
RXQUAL11 HO 51 51
RXQUAL10 HO 52 52
RXQUAL9 HO 53 53
RXQUAL8 HO 54 54
RXQUAL7 HO 55 55
RXQUAL6 HO 56 56
RXQUAL5 HO 57 57
RXQUAL4 HO 58 58
RXQUAL3 HO 59 59
RXQUAL2 HO 60 60
RXQUAL1 HO 70 70
Cons.No Dl Mr.HO Allowed Limit HO 8 8
No Dl Mr.Ul Qual HO Limit HO 60 60
No Dl Mr.HO Allowed HO Yes No
Filter Parameter B HO 0 0
Filter Parameter A8 HO 10 10
Filter Parameter A7 HO 10 10
Filter Parameter A6 HO 10 10
Filter Parameter A5 HO 10 10
Filter Parameter A4 HO 10 10
Filter Parameter A3 HO 10 10
Filter Parameter A2 HO 10 10
Filter Parameter A1 HO 10 10
UL Qual. Threshold HO 50 60
DL Qual. Threshold HO 50 60
Emergency HO TA Threshold HO 255 255
DtxMeasUsed HO Open Open
CfgPenaltyTimer HO 255 255
UmPenaltyTimer HO 10 10
RscPenaltyTimer HO 5 5
Filter Length for TCH
NBR_RCVD_BLOCK
HO 6 6
Filter Length for SDCCH
NBR_RCVD_BLOCK
HO 2 2
Penalty Time after AMR TCHF-H HO
Fail(s)
HO 30 30
Filter Length for TCH REP_QUANT HO 6 6
Filter Length for SDCCH REP_QUANT HO 2 2
Filter Length for TCH CV_BEP HO 6 6
Filter Length for SDCCH CV_BEP HO 2 2
Filter Length for TCH MEAN_BEP HO 6 6
Filter Length for SDCCH MEAN_BEP HO 2 2
Penalty Time after TA HO(s) HO 10 30
Penalty Level after TA HO HO 63 63
Penalty Time after BQ HO(s) HO 15 15
Penalty Level after BQ HO HO 30 63
Penalty Level after HO Fail HO 30 30
Filter Length for TA HO 6 4
Filter Length for Ncell RX_LEV HO 6 4
Filter Length for SDCCH Qual HO 3 2
Filter Length for SDCCH Level HO 2 2
Filter Length for TCH Qual HO 6 4
Filter Length for TCH Level HO 6 4
Allowed M.R Number Lost HO 4 4
Min Power Level For Direct Try HO 25 16
Sent Freq.of preprocessed MR HO Once Every Second
Twice every
second
Transfer BS/MS Power Class HO Yes Yes
Transfer Original MR HO No No
MR.Preprocessing HO Yes No
MS Power Prediction after HO HO No No
Penalty Allowed HO Yes Yes
Inter-BSC SDCCH HO ALLowed HO No No
Min Interval for Emerg.HOs HO 2 4
Min Interval for Consecutive HOs HO 6 4
Min Interval for SDCCH HOs HO 2 2
Min Interval for TCH HOs HO 4 2
ATCBHoSwitch HO Open Open
TIGHT BCCH HO Valid Time(s) HO 2 2
TIGHT BCCH HO Watch Time(s) HO 3 3
Quick Handover Enable HO NO NO
H2F HO Threshold HO 10 10
F2H HO Threshold HO 30 25
Intracell F-H HO Last Time(s) HO 4 4
Intracell F-H HO Stat Time(s) HO 5 5
Intracell F-H HO Allowed HO Yes YES
Min DL Power on HO Candidate Cell HO 15 15
Min UP Power on HO Candidate Cell HO 10 10
Inter-layer HO Hysteresis HO 3 3
Inter-layer HO Threshold HO 25 25
Inter-System Handover Enable HO No No
PBGT Valid Time(s) HO 4 2
PBGT Watch Time(s) HO 5 3
Layer HO Valid Time(s) HO 4 2
Layer HO Watch Time(s) HO 5 3
Edge HO AdjCell Valid Time(s) HO 2 2
Edge HO AdjCell Watch Time(s) HO 3 3
Edge HO Valid Time(s) HO 4 2
Edge HO Watch Time(s) HO 5 3
Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold HO 20 20
Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold HO 15 10
Interference HO Allowed HO Yes Yes
Concentric Circles HO Allowed HO
Yes (for MB cell), No for
othres
Yes
TA HO Allowed HO Yes Yes
BQ HO Allowed HO Yes Yes
Fringe HO Allowed HO Yes Yes
Level HO Allowed HO No Yes
PBGT HO Allowed HO Yes Yes
Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed HO No No
MS Fast Moving HO Allowed HO No No
Load HO Allowed HO Yes No
Intracell HO Allowed HO Yes No
SDCCH HO Allowed HO No No
Co-BSC/MSC Adj HO No Yes
PT(s) Idle_Mode 0 0
TO Idle_Mode 0 0
ACS Idle_Mode No No
CRO(2dB) Idle_Mode 0 0
Cell_Bar_Qualify Idle_Mode 0 No
PI Idle_Mode Yes Yes
CRH Idle_Mode 6dB 6dB
Period of Periodic Location Update(6
minutes)
Idle_Mode
60(should same for same
LAC)
20
BS-PA-MFRAMS Idle_Mode 4 Multiframe Period
2 Multiframe
Period
BS_AG_BLKS_RES Idle_Mode 1 2
NCC Permitted Idle_Mode 255 11111111
Cell_Bar_Access Idle_Mode 0 No
Tx-integer(RACH Timeslot(equals to a
TDMA frame,4.615ms))
Idle_Mode 20 32
ATT Idle_Mode Yes Yes
Timer for UL Data Forward(ms) Other_Properties 10 10
WaitforRelIndAMRHR Other_Properties 26000 26000
WaitforRelIndAMRFR Other_Properties 34000 34000
T3103C(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000
T3122(s) Other_Properties 10 10
TREESTABLISH(ms) Other_Properties 15000 15000
T3111(ms) Other_Properties 1000 1000
T3109(ms) Other_Properties 27000 27000
T8(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000
T3121(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000
T3107(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000
T7(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000
T3103A(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000
ImmAss A Interf Creation Timer(ms) Other_Properties 5000 5000
T3101(ms) Other_Properties 3000 3000
Send Classmark Enquiring Result To MSC
Enable
Other_Properties No No
Enquire Classmark After In-BSC Handover
Enable
Other_Properties No No
Base Hop Support Close TRX Allowed Other_Properties No No
Qtru Signal Merge Switch Other_Properties No No
MAX Paging Message Number 0f Cell In
Period
Other_Properties 220 220
Average Paging Message Number 0f Cell In
Period
Other_Properties 180 180
Paging Numbers of one Optimizing Msgs Other_Properties 5 5
Interval For Sending Paging Optimizing
Msgs
Other_Properties 2 2
Paging Messages Optimize at Abis Interface Other_Properties Forced turn-on Forced turn-on
Interfere Band Stat Algorithm Type Other_Properties
Interference Band
Measurement Algorithm
II
Interference Band
Measurement
Algorithm II
Cell Out-of-Service Alarm Switch Other_Properties Yes Yes
Lower-level sublink resources preemption
switch
Other_Properties No No
Sublink resources preemption switch Other_Properties No No
Force MS to Send Ho Access SWITCH Other_Properties Yes Yes
IntraCellHo to Ass SWITCH Other_Properties No No
Frequency Scan Result Type Other_Properties Maximum/Mean Value
Maximum/Mean
Value
Drop Optimize Intra-Cell Handover
Timeout
Other_Properties 1 1
Drop Optimize Intra-Bsc Out-Cell
Handover Timeout
Other_Properties 1 1
Drop Optimize Out-Bsc Handover Timeout Other_Properties 1 1
Drop Optimize Into-Bsc Handover Timeout Other_Properties 1 1
Drop Optimize Resource Check Other_Properties 1 1
Drop Optimize No MR For Long Time Other_Properties 1 1
Drop Optimize Forced Handover Failure Other_Properties 1 1
Drop Optimize Equipment Failure Other_Properties 1 1
Drop Optimize ABIS Territorial Link
Failure
Other_Properties 1 1
Drop Optimize Release Indication Other_Properties 1 1
Drop Optimize Connection Failure (other) Other_Properties 1 1
Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio
resource not available)
Other_Properties 1 1
Drop Optimize Connection Failure (OM
intervention)
Other_Properties 1 1
Drop Optimize Connection Failure (HO
access fail)
Other_Properties 1 1
Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio
link fail)
Other_Properties 1 1
Drop Optimize Error Indication (sequence
error)
Other_Properties 1 1
Drop Optimize Error Indication (unsolicited
DM response)
Other_Properties 1 1
Drop Optimize Error Indication (T200
timeout)
Other_Properties 1 1
Directly Magnifier Site Flag Other_Properties No No
Aiding Delay Protect Time(min) Other_Properties 15 15
Abis Flow Control Permitted Other_Properties Yes Yes
Support Half Rate Other_Properties Yes No
MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH Other_Properties 5(900), 0(1800) 5
PWRC Other_Properties Yes Yes
ActGene Other_Properties 5 5
PS LowPri ServicePRI Other_Properties 6 6
PS HighPRI ServicePRI Other_Properties 4 4
CS Data ServicePRI Other_Properties 5 5
CS Voice ServicePRI Other_Properties 3 3
Included Angle(Degree) Other_Properties 360 360
Antenna Azimuth Angle(Degree) Other_Properties 360 360
Average RACH Load Timeslot Number Other_Properties 5000 5000
Overload Indication Period Other_Properties 15 15
CCCH Load Threshold Other_Properties 80 80
CCCH Load Indication Period(s) Other_Properties 15 15
Radio Resource Report Period(s) Other_Properties 10 10
Frequency Adjust Value Other_Properties 36671 36671
Frequency Adjust Switch Other_Properties NO NO
VSWR TRX Error Threshold Other_Properties 2 2
VSWR TRX Unadjusted Threshold Other_Properties 2 2
Power Output Reduction Threshold Other_Properties 2 2
Power Output Error Threshold Other_Properties 2 2
DC Bias Voltage Threshold Other_Properties 3 3
Frame Start Time Other_Properties 65535 65535
Max RC Power Reduction(2dB) Other_Properties 0 5
Interf.Calculation Period(SACCH
period(480ms))
Other_Properties 20 20
Interf. Band Threshold 5 (-dBm) Other_Properties 85 85
Interf. Band Threshold 4 (-dBm) Other_Properties 87 87
Interf. Band Threshold 3 (-dBm) Other_Properties 92 92
Interf. Band Threshold 2 (-dBm) Other_Properties 98 98
Interf. Band Threshold 1 (-dBm) Other_Properties 105 105
Interf. Band Threshold 0 (-dBm) Other_Properties 110 110
Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold Other_Properties 0 50
SMCBC DRX Other_Properties Yes Yes
Data service Allowed Other_Properties 118 118
Power boost before HO enabled or not Other_Properties StartUp not StartUp
Voice quality report switch Other_Properties report not report
Diversity LNA Bypass Permitted Other_Properties 0 Yes
HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 8(dB) Power_Control 53 53
HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 7(dB) Power_Control 50 50
HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 6(dB) Power_Control 47 47
HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 5(dB) Power_Control 43 43
HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 4(dB) Power_Control 40 40
HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 3(dB) Power_Control 30 30
HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 2(dB) Power_Control 20 20
HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 1(dB) Power_Control 0 0
HwIII UL MAX UpStep(dB) Power_Control 8 8
HwIII UL MAX DownStep(dB) Power_Control 8 8
HwIII UL AHS Rex Qual.Lower
Threshold(dB)
Power_Control 12 12
HwIII UL AHS Rex Qual.Upper
Threshold(dB)
Power_Control 16 16
HwIII UL AFS Rex Qual.Lower
Threshold(dB)
Power_Control 12 12
HwIII UL AFS Rex Qual.Upper
Threshold(dB)
Power_Control 16 16
HwIII UL HS Rex Qual.Lower
Threshold(dB)
Power_Control 16 16
HwIII UL HS Rex Qual.Upper
Threshold(dB)
Power_Control 22 22
HwIII UL FS Rex Qual. Lower
Threshold(dB)
Power_Control 16 16
HwIII UL FS Rex Qual. Upper
Threshold(dB)
Power_Control 22 22
HwIII UL RexLev Lower Threshold Power_Control 20 20
HwIII UL RexLev Upper Threshold Power_Control 30 30
HwIII UL Rex Qual.Adjust Factor Power_Control 6 6
HwIII UL RexLev Adjust Factor Power_Control 4 4
HwIII UL Rex Qual. Slide Window Power_Control 1 1
HwIII UL RexLev Slide Window Power_Control 1 1
HwIII UL Rex Qual.Exponent Filter Length Power_Control 3 3
HwIII UL RexLev Exponent Filter Length Power_Control 3 3
HwIII DL MAX UpStep (dB) Power_Control 8 8
HwIII DL MAX DownStep(dB) Power_Control 8 8
HwIII DL AHS Rex Qual. Lower
Threshold(dB)
Power_Control 12 12
HwIII DL AHS Rex Qual.Upper
Threshold(dB)
Power_Control 16 16
HwIII DL AFS Rex Qual.Lower
Threshold(dB)
Power_Control 12 12
HwIII DL AFS Rex Qual.Upper
Threshold(dB)
Power_Control 16 16
HwIII DL HS Rex Qual. Lower
Threshold(dB)
Power_Control 16 16
HwIII DL HS Rex Qual. Upper
Threshold(dB)
Power_Control 22 22
HwIII DL FS Rex Qual. Lower
Threshold(dB)
Power_Control 16 16
HwIII DL FS Rex Qual. Upper
Threshold(dB)
Power_Control 22 22
HwIII DL RexLev Lower Threshold Power_Control 25 25
HwIII DL RexLev Upper Threshold Power_Control 35 35
HwIII DL Rex Qual. Adjust Factor Power_Control 6 6
HwIII DL RexLev Adjust Factor Power_Control 6 6
HwIII DL Rex Qual. Slide Window Power_Control 1 1
HwIII DL RexLev Slide Window Power_Control 1 1
HwIII DL Rex Qual. Exponent Filter Length Power_Control 3 3
HwIII DL RexLev Exponent Filter Length Power_Control 3 3
HwIII Traffic Channel Discard MR Number Power_Control 3 3
HwIII Signal Channel Discard MR Number Power_Control 1 1
HwIII Down Link Power Control Adjust
Period
Power_Control 3 3
HwIII Up Link Power Control Adjust
Period
Power_Control 3 3
HwIII Number of lost MRs allowed Power_Control 5 5
AMR BTS PC Class Power_Control 16 16
AMR DL Qual Bad UpLEVDiff Power_Control 10 0
AMR DL Qual Bad Trig Threshold Power_Control 5 5
AMR UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff Power_Control 10 0
AMR UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold Power_Control 5 5
AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual. Power_Control 8 8
AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value by RX_LEV Power_Control 16 16
AMR MAX Down Adj. PC Value by Qual. Power_Control 6 4
AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone 2 Power_Control 2 4
AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone 1 Power_Control 4 4
AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone 0 Power_Control 6 4
AMR DL Qual. Lower Threshold Power_Control 4 3
AMR DL Qual. Upper Threshold Power_Control 0 1
AMR DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold Power_Control 20 25
AMR DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold Power_Control 30 35
AMR UL Qual. Lower Threshold Power_Control 4 3
AMR ULQual. Upper Threshold Power_Control 0 1
AMR UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold Power_Control 25 20
AMR UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold Power_Control 35 30
AMR DL MR. Number Predicted Power_Control 1 0
AMR UL MR. Number Predicted Power_Control 1 0
AMR MR. Compensation Allowed Power_Control Yes Yes
AMR Filter Length for DL Qual. Power_Control 4 6
AMR Filter Length for UL Qual Power_Control 4 6
AMR Filter Length for DL RX_LEV Power_Control 4 6
AMR Filter Length for UL RX_LEV Power_Control 4 6
AMR PC Interval Power_Control 3 3
BTS PC Class Power_Control 16 16
DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff Power_Control 10 0
DL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold Power_Control 5 5
UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff Power_Control 10 0
UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold Power_Control 5 5
MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual. Power_Control 8 8
MAX Up Adj. PC Value by RX_LEV Power_Control 16 16
MAX Down Adj. PC Value by Qual. Power_Control 6 4
MAX Down Adj.Value Qual.Zone 2 Power_Control 2 4
MAX Down Adj.Value Qual.Zone 1 Power_Control 4 4
MAX Down Adj.Value Qual.Zone 0 Power_Control 6 4
DL MR. Number Predicted Power_Control 1 0
UL MR. Number Predicted Power_Control 1 0
MR. Compensation Allowed Power_Control Yes Yes
Filter Length for DL Qual. Power_Control 5 5
Filter Length for UL Qual. Power_Control 4 5
Filter Length for DL RX_LEV Power_Control 5 5
Filter Length for UL RX_LEV Power_Control 4 5
Power Control Algorithm Switch Power_Control HWII Power Control
HW-II Power
Control
DL Qual. Lower Threshold Power_Control 4 3
DL Qual. Upper Threshold Power_Control 0 1
DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold Power_Control 20 25
DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold Power_Control 30 35
UL Qual. Lower Threshold Power_Control 4 3
UL Qual. Upper Threshold Power_Control 0 1
UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold Power_Control 25 20
UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold Power_Control 35 30
PC Interval Power_Control 3 3
Constant of Filtering the Collision Signal
Strength for Power Control
Data_In_PCU 2 2
Measured Receive Power Level Channel Data_In_PCU pdch pdch
BTS Power Attenuation on PBCCH Data_In_PCU -2dB -2dB
Signal Strength Filter Period in Transfer
Mode
Data_In_PCU 10 10
Signal Strength Filter Period in Idle Mode Data_In_PCU 10 10
Initial Power Level Data_In_PCU 14 14
Alpha Parameter Data_In_PCU 1 1
Maximum Value of N3105 Data_In_PCU 10 10
Maximum Value of N3103 Data_In_PCU 3 3
Maximum Value of N3101 Data_In_PCU 20 20
Release Delay of Downlink TBF(ms) Data_In_PCU 2400 2400
Inactive Period of Extended Uplink
TBF(ms)
Data_In_PCU 2000 2000
Release Delay of Non-extended Uplink
TBF(ms)
Data_In_PCU 120 120
Load Reselect Level Threshold Data_In_PCU 40 40
GPRS Quality Threshold Data_In_PCU 5 5
EDGE 8PSK Quality Threshold Data_In_PCU 16 16
EDGE GMSK Quality Threshold Data_In_PCU 7 7
Cell Reselect Interval(s) Data_In_PCU 2 2
Normal Cell Reselection Worsen Level
Threshold
Data_In_PCU 1 1
Normal Cell Reselection Watch Period Data_In_PCU 10 10
Cell Normal Reselection Allowed Data_In_PCU Permit Permit
Cell Load Reselection Allowed Data_In_PCU Permit Permit
Cell Urgent Reselection Allowed Data_In_PCU Permit Permit
2G/3G Cell Reselection Strategy Data_In_PCU Preference for 2G Cell
Preference for 2G
Cell
Filter Window Size Data_In_PCU 6 6
Allowed Measure Report Missed Number Data_In_PCU 4 4
Load Reselection Receive Threshold(%) Data_In_PCU 60 60
Load Reselection Start Threshold(%) Data_In_PCU 85 85
MS Rx Quality Worsen Ratio Threshold(%) Data_In_PCU 30 30
MS Rx Quality Statistic Threshold Data_In_PCU 200 200
Cell Penalty Last Time(s) Data_In_PCU 10 10
Cell Penalty Level Data_In_PCU 30 30
Cell Reselection Hysterisis Data_In_PCU 6 6
Min Access Level Threshold Data_In_PCU 15 15
Support QoS Optimize Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support
PS Concentric Cell HO Strategy Data_In_PCU
No handover between
underlaid subcell and
overlaid subcell
No handover
between underlaid
subcell and
overlaid subcell
Transmission Delay of POC Service Data_In_PCU 650 650
Max. GBR for POC Service Data_In_PCU 16 16
Min. GBR for POC Service Data_In_PCU 6 6
Move Packet Assignment Down to BTS Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support
Move Immediate Assignment Down to BTS Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support
Support Gbr QoS Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support
Downlink Default MCS Type Data_In_PCU MCS6 MCS6
Downlink Fixed MCS Type Data_In_PCU UNFIXED UNFIXED
Uplink Default MCS Type Data_In_PCU MCS2 MCS2
Uplink Fixed MCS Type Data_In_PCU UNFIXED UNFIXED
BEP Period Data_In_PCU 5 5
Link Quality Control Mode Data_In_PCU LA LA
Down TBF threshold From CS4 to CS3 Data_In_PCU 5 5
Down TBF threshold From CS3 to CS2 Data_In_PCU 5 5
Down TBF threshold From CS2 to CS1 Data_In_PCU 10 10
Down TBF threshold From CS3 to CS4 Data_In_PCU 2 2
Down TBF threshold From CS2 to CS3 Data_In_PCU 2 2
Down TBF threshold From CS1 to CS2 Data_In_PCU 5 5
Downlink Default CS Type Data_In_PCU CS2 CS2
Downlink Fixed CS Type Data_In_PCU UNFIXED UNFIXED
Up TBF threshold From CS4 to CS3 Data_In_PCU 5 5
Up TBF threshold From CS3 to CS2 Data_In_PCU 5 5
Up TBF threshold From CS2 to CS1 Data_In_PCU 10 10
Up TBF threshold From CS3 to CS4 Data_In_PCU 2 2
Up TBF threshold From CS2 to CS3 Data_In_PCU 2 2
Up TBF threshold From CS1 to CS2 Data_In_PCU 5 5
Uplink Default CS Type Data_In_PCU CS1 CS1
Uplink Fixed CS Type Data_In_PCU UNFIXED UNFIXED
Background Service Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 5 5
THP3 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 1 1
THP2 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 3 3
THP1 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 5 5
ARP3 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 1 1
ARP2 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 3 3
ARP1 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 6 6
Timer of Releasing Abis Timeslot Data_In_PCU 15 15
Reservation Threshold of Dynamic Channel
Conversion
Data_In_PCU 2 2
Level of Preempting Dynamic Channel Data_In_PCU
All dynamic channels can
be preempted.
All dynamic
channels can be
preempted.
Timer of Releasing Idle Dynamic Channel Data_In_PCU 20 20
Dynamic Channel Conversion Parameter of
Concentric Cell
Data_In_PCU
only convert dynamic
channel at UL
only convert
dynamic channel
at UL
PDCH Downlink Multiplex Threshold Data_In_PCU 80 80
PDCH Uplink Multiplex Threshold Data_In_PCU 70 70
Downlink Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic
Channel Conversion
Data_In_PCU 20 20
Uplink Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic
Channel Conversion
Data_In_PCU 20 20
Maximum Ratio Threshold of PDCHs in a
Cell
Data_In_PCU 30 30
MultiBand reporting Data_In_PCU
Report the frequencies of
six strongest cells
Report the
frequencies of six
strongest cells
Threshold of HCS Signal Strength Data_In_PCU -110dB -110dB
Cell HCS Prior Class Data_In_PCU 2 2
Maximum TX Power for Access PCH Data_In_PCU 2 2
Minimum Receiving level for Access Data_In_PCU 2 2
Exclusive Access Data_In_PCU Not Exclusive Not Exclusive
Cell Access Bar Switch Data_In_PCU Permit Cell Access
Permit Cell
Access
Accessorial Hysteresis of Cell Selection In
New Routing Area
Data_In_PCU 2dB 2dB
Cell Reselection Forbidden Time Data_In_PCU 10sec 10sec
Allow MS to Access to another Cell Data_In_PCU Yes Yes
Exceptional Rule for GPRS Reselect Offset Data_In_PCU 0 0
GPRS Cell Reselect Hysteresis Applied to
C31 Criterion or not
Data_In_PCU c31standard c31standard
GPRS Cell Reselect Hysteresis Data_In_PCU 2dB 2dB
Support PSI Status Message Data_In_PCU No No
Allow MR Command or not Data_In_PCU No No
PSI1 Repetition Period Data_In_PCU 6 6
Persistence Level 4 Data_In_PCU 16 16
Persistence Level 3 Data_In_PCU 14 14
Persistence Level 2 Data_In_PCU 13 13
Persistence Level 1 Data_In_PCU 12 12
Extension Transmission Timeslots of
Random Access
Data_In_PCU 20 20
Minimum Timeslots between Two
Successive Channel Requests
Data_In_PCU 20 20
Maximum Retransmissions for Radio
Priority 4
Data_In_PCU 7 7
Maximum Retransmissions for Radio
Priority 3
Data_In_PCU 7 7
Maximum Retransmissions for Radio
Priority 2
Data_In_PCU 7 7
Maximum Retransmissions for Radio
Priority 1
Data_In_PCU 7 7
Access Control Class Data_In_PCU 0 0
PRACH Blocks Data_In_PCU 1 1
PAGCH Blocks Data_In_PCU 4 4
PBCCH Blocks Data_In_PCU 1 1
Cell Reselection MR Period in Packet
Transfer Mode
Data_In_PCU 0.96sec 0.96sec
Cell Reselection MR Period in Packet Idle
Mode
Data_In_PCU 15.36sec 15.36sec
Non-DRX Period Data_In_PCU 0.24sec 0.24sec
GPRS Reselection Offset Data_In_PCU -2dB -2dB
GPRS Penalty Time Data_In_PCU 10sec 10sec
GPRS Temporary Offset Data_In_PCU 10dB 10dB
Extension MR Period Data_In_PCU 60sec 60sec
Extension MR Type Data_In_PCU type1 type1
Interference Frequency Data_In_PCU 1 1
NCC_PERMITTED Data_In_PCU 1 1
Extension Measurement Command Data_In_PCU em0 em0
BSS Paging Coordination Data_In_PCU Yes Yes
Support 11BIT EGPRS Access Data_In_PCU Yes Yes
Routing Area Color Code Data_In_PCU 1 1
Packet Access Priority Data_In_PCU Packet access of level 4
Packet access of
level 4
Support SPLIT_PG_CYCLE on CCCH Data_In_PCU No No
Network Control Mode Data_In_PCU nc0 nc0
Pan Max. Data_In_PCU 12 12
Pan Increment Data_In_PCU 4 4
Pan Decrement Data_In_PCU 2 2
BS_CV_MAX Data_In_PCU 10 10
Control Acknowledge Type Data_In_PCU
Four access pulses by
default
Four access pulses
by default
Access Burst Type Data_In_PCU 8bit 8bit
Max. Duration of DRX(s) Data_In_PCU 4s 4s
T3192 Data_In_PCU 500ms 500ms
T3168 Data_In_PCU 500ms 500ms
Network Operation Mode Data_In_PCU
Network Operation Mode
II
Network
Operation Mode II
Description
This parameter specifies the layer where a cell is located. The network
designed by Huawei has four layers: Pico, Micro, Macro, and Umbrella,
numbered 1-4 respectively.
The Pico layer is a microcell layer on the 900 MHz and 1800 MHz
frequency bands. It m
This parameter specifies the mobile country code (MCC), for example, the
MCC of China is 460.
This parameter specifies the mobile network code (MNC).
This parameter specifies the network color code, which is provided by the
telecom operator. The NCC is used to identify networks from area to area.
The NCC is unique nationwide.
The NCC and the BCC form the base station identification code (BSIC).
This parameter specifies the base station color code. The BCC identifies the
cells with the same BCCH frequency in the neighborhood. The BCC and the
NCC form the BSIC.
This parameter specifies the handover between the cells at the same layer.
If this parameter is set to a small value, the priority is high. Generally, the
cells at the same layer have the same priority.
For details, refer to Layer of the Cell.
This parameter specifies the activation status of a cell. The activation status
can be Not Activated or Activated.
This parameter specifies the number of the PCU that is connected to the E1
link on the Pb interface.
This parameter specifies whether to enable the general packet radio service
(GPRS) in a cell. The GPRS requires the support of the BTS. In addition, a
packet control unit (PCU) must be configured on the BSS side, and a
serving GPRS support node (SGSN) mus
The parameter specifies whether the PCU supports baseband FH and EDGE
simultaneously.
This parameter specifies whether to enable the EDGE function in a cell.
Compared with GSM, EDGE supports high-rate data transmission. The
enhanced data rates for GSM evolution (EDGE) consists of EGPRS and
ECSD. The EGPRS is the enhanced GPRS, which improv
This parameter specifies the power attenuation level of a timeslot when
8PSK is used by an EDGE-enabled TRX. The attenuation value has 50
levels. Each level attenuates by 0.2 dB.
The EDGE-enabled TRX transmits 8PSK signals with less power than
transmits
This parameter specifies whether the cell support the Network Assisted Cell
Change (NACC) function.
In network control mode NC0, NC1, or NC2, when the MS is in the packet
transmission mode, the network informs the MS of the system information
about neighb
This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the PACKET SI
STATUS procedure.
When the cell is configured with the PBCCH, the MS sends the Packet
PSI/SI Status message to the BSC, indicating that the MS has stored the
system message. The BSC sends th
This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the Network Control 2
(NC2) function.
In NC2, the MS reports the measurement report of the reference cell and
neighbor cells to the BSC. The BSC controls cell reselection (including
normal reselections a
This parameter specifies whether the PCU supports 64 neighbor cells.
In the NACC and NC2 functions, this parameter affects the ability of the
BSC to report the number of neighbor cells.
For the BTS3002C, BTS3001C, BTS3001C+,BTS22C and BTS20, the
default value is Invalid and cannot be manually modified. That is, the main
and diversity level cannot be reported. For other types of BTSs, the default
value is Support and can be manually modif
This parameter specifies the frequency band of new cells. Each new cell can
be allocated frequencies of only one frequency band. Once the frequency
band is selected, it cannot be changed.
GSM900: The cell supports GSM900 frequency band.
DCS1800: The cell
This parameter specifies that the network service (NS) in the GPRS packet
service state performs location management based on the routing area.
Each routing area has an ID. The routing area ID is broadcast in the system
message.
For example, value 0 indic
This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the Dual Transfer Mode
(DTM) function. The DTM function enables an MS to provide both the CS
service and the PS service at the same time. The function requires the
support of the BSC.
This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the enhanced DTM
function. Compared with the DTM function, the enhanced DTM function
enhances the CS setup and release. When the CS service is set up, the PS
service is not disrupted.
This parameter specifies the encryption algorithm supported on the BSS
side.
The value of this parameter has eight bits. The eights bits (from the least
significant bit to the most significant bit) specify whether to support the
A5/0, A5/1, A5/2, A5/3, A
This parameter specifies whether the TRX adopts FH and specifies the FH
mode used.
If this parameter is set to Not FH, even if the TRX is configured with FH
data, the cell where the TRX serves does not perform FH. FH can be used to
average the interferen
This parameter specifies whether to enable the DTX function in a cell.
This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell.
After receiving the channel request message or handover access message,
the BTS determines whether the channel assignment or handover is
performed in the cell by comparing the TA and the value
This parameter specifies whether a cell is an extension cell and specifies
how to implement the extended cell.
A double-timeslot extension cell regards the additional TDMA frame as
access delay. Theoretically, TA equals 219, that is, a delay of about 120
This parameter specifies whether a cell supports the antenna hopping
function.
In a GSM cell, the frequency, frame number, system information, and
paging group are transmitted on the BCCH of the main BCCH TRX. If the
MS is in an unfavorable position or t
This parameter specifies whether the enhanced concentric cell handover is
allowed in a concentric cell.
If the cell supports the enhanced concentric cell function, compare the
receive level of the MS with OtoU HO Received Level Threshold and with
UtoO HO
This parameter specifies whether a cell is a normal cell or a concentric cell.
TRXs in a concentric cell differ in coverage; thus, two subcells with
different radiuses form a concentric cell.
Due to the difference in coverage, the OL subcell and the UL
This parameter specifies whether a cell is the OL subcell or the UL subcell.
This parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell.
This parameter specifies whether the main BCCH is configured in the OL
subcell or the UL subcell.
In the scenario of the wide coverage of the UL subcell and the aggressive
frequency reuse of the OL subcell, this parameter is set to Underlaid
Subcell.
In
This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous
Transmission (DTX) function. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.
This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. Blind spots
caused by tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio
links. Thus a call may drop. In this case, the MS can initiate a call
reestablishment procedure to resu
This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the
BSS. For details. see GSM Rec. 05.08.
The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110
dBm to -47 dBm).
If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC can assign a TCH and an SDCCH
when receiving an initial access request. If this parameter is set to No, the
BSC can assign only an SDCCH when receiving an initial access request.
This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry. In directed retry, a
handover procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell.
Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the
local wireless network. It is n
This parameter specifies whether the SDCCH dynamic allocation is
allowed.
When the number of GSM subscribers in a cell increases rapidly, many
subscribers may fail to access the network due to insufficient SDCCH
resources. In this case, the TCHs (includi
This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the MS power is
allowed.
This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the BTS power is
allowed..
This parameter specifies whether the BSC determines to enable or disable
the power amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume.
This parameter specifies whether to select different working voltages for the
TRX power amplifier in a cell based on different TRX modulation modes.
This parameter specifies the unique index number of each TRX in a BSC.
This parameter specifies the TRX number, which must be unique in one
BTS.
The following two points should be paid attention to:
1. If the logical TRX is not separated from the physical board, This
parameter specifies the TRX number in a cabinet. For such BTSs as the
BTS3012II and BTS3002E, the TRX numbers may be discontinuous.
2. If the logical TRX is separated from the physical board, one-to-one
mapping between them is not mandatory.
Cell Index must be unique in one BSC. It is used to uniquely identify a cell.
The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 8047.
Internal 2G cells: 0-2047
External 2G cells: 2048-5047
External 3G cells: 5048-8047
This parameter specifies the index number of a BTS. Each BTS is
numbered uniquely in a BSC.
This parameter is used to differentiate boards with unique identifiers in the
BTS.
This parameter specifies the operating status of the BTS, not-activated and
activated.
This parameter specifies the Abis mode of OML.
The default value is calculated automatically, that is, the BSC assigns the
Abis time slot of OML automatically.
This parameter specifies the number of a cabinet.
This parameter specifies the number of a subrack.
This parameter specifies the number of the slot where a board is located.
This parameter specifies the terminal equipment identifier on the link layer.
This parameter is used to identify multiple signaling links on the same
physical link when the LAPDs are multiplexed on the highway timeslot.
This parameter specifies the number of the TC subrack where the
GEIUT/GOIUT is located.
This parameter specifies the number of the slot where the GEIUT or
GOIUT is located in the TC subrack, which is connected to the local
subrack.
This parameter specifies the out-BSC port number on the interface board
used by the semi-permanent link.
When the semi-permanent link is configured on the electrical interface
board, each electrical interface board is configured with 32 E1 ports, which
are numbered from 0 to 31.
When the semi-permanent link is configured on the optical interface board,
each optical interface board is configured with 63 E1 ports, which are
numbered from 0 to 62.
This parameter specifies the number of the out-BSC timeslot occupied by
the E1 port over the Abis interface.
The bandwidth of each E1 is divided into 32 timeslots. Generally, timeslot 0
is used for synchronization and cannot be otherwise used.
The E1 timeslot is numbered by 8 kbit/s, and the range is 0-255.For
example, 0-3 specifies the first to the fourth 8 kbit/s sub-timeslot of the first
64 kbit/s timeslot. Accordingly, the timeslot numbering is likewise.
If the forward ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the
number of the port occupied by the LAPD link (corresponding to the RSL
link) on the Abis interface.
If the forward ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the
number of the timeslot occupied by the LAPD link (corresponding to the
RSL link) on the Abis interface.
This parameter specifies the logical link number of the LAPD link
(corresponding to the RSL link) in the BSC. When the BTS works in ring
topology, the forward and reverse links share one number.
Each LAPD link is uniquely numbered in one BSC.
This parameter specifies whether the TRX adopts FH and specifies the FH
mode used.
If this parameter is set to Not FH, even if the TRX is configured with FH
data, the cell where the TRX serves does not perform FH. The FH can
realize average interference and frequency diversity.
This parameter specifies the transmit power level of the TRX. The greater
this parameter is, the smaller the transmit power is.
When this parameter is set to 0, the transmit power level of the TRX is the
greatest. Each time this parameter increases by one level, the transmit power
reduces by 2 dB.
For different types of BTSs, the value range of this parameter is different.
BTS3X: 0-10
BTS3001C: 0-13
BTS3002C: 0-10
Double-transceiver BTSs (BTS3012BTS3012AEBTS3006C): 0-10
DBS3900 GSM, BTS3900 GSM, BTS3900A GSM0-10
This parameter specifies the power levels supported by a TRX. The macro
BTS and the mini BTS support different power levels.
This parameter specifies the concentric attribute of a cell. For a concentric
cell, this parameter is set to UL subcell or OL subcell according to actual
conditions; if the cell is not a concentric one, this parameter is set to None
by default.
This parameter specifies the TRX priority. It is used for Huawei II channel
assignment algorithm.
This parameter specifies whether to turn off the power amplifier of the TRX
automatically for saving power when the BTS is powered by batteries after
the external power supply is cut off.
This parameter specifies whether a cell can convert full rate channels to half
rate channels, or convert the half rate channels to full rate channels.
If this parameter is set to Yes, the conversion is allowed; if the parameter is
set to No, the conversion is not allowed. the TCHF that has been converted
to the TCHH will be forcedly restored; the TCHH that has been converted
to the TCHF will be forcedly restored.
This parameter also specifies whether the channel supports the dynamic
adjustment priority in the channel assignment algorithm. In the channel
assignment, the channels on the TRX not supporting the dynamic
adjustment are assigned first, to ensure the channels on the TRX supporting
the dynamic adjustment are used for dynamic adjustment. Thus, the access
requests of users are satisfied.
This parameter specifies the power attenuation levels of the EDGE TRX.
There are 50 levels, and the attenuation between levels is 0.2 dB.
The EDGE-enabled TRX transmits 8PSK signals with less power than
transmits GMSK signals. Thus, this parameter needs to be set to meet the
frequency requirements.
This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the wireless link alarm
parameter to the BTS. If the parameter is set to Yes, the wireless link alarm
parameter is sent; otherwise, the wireless link alarm parameter is not sent.
This parameter specifies the statistics base of a sub-channel (the statistical
times that a sub-channel that is activated). B (the statistics base of a sub-
channel on a timeslot) x N (the number of sub-channels on a timeslot) = S
(the total times that channels on a timeslot that are activated).
For the latest S times of channel activation, if the percentage of abnormally
released channels exceeds Abnormal Warn Threshold, an alarm is
generated.
If the percentage of abnormally released channels is less than or equal to
Abnormal Release Threshold, the BSC sends the corresponding recovery
alarm.
If the percentage of abnormally released channels exceeds the total
successful channel activation threshold of a timeslot, an abnormally release
alarm is generated.
If the percentage of abnormally released channel in the total successful
channel activation is less than or equal to this threshold, an abnormal release
clear alarm is sent.
If the duration of continuous (not accumulated) no-traffic reaches this
threshold, the no-traffic alarm is generated.
This parameter specifies whether a critical wireless link alarm is sent.
If this parameter is set to Yes, the BTS sends a critical wireless link alarm if
the wireless link prompt alarm is not cleared during the period specified by
WLA Prompting Recover Period.
If the radio link prompt alarm is cleared in the WLA Prompting Recover
Period, the corresponding recovery alarm is sent by the BTS. If the radio
link prompt alarm is not cleared in the WLA Prompting Recover Period, the
critical wireless link alarm is sent or not sent according to the settings of the
parameter Wireless Link Alarm Critical Permit.
The BTS detects the start time of wireless link alarm, such as 08:00:00 and
14:00:00 in each day. Starting from the period specified by this parameter,
the BTS detects the wireless link alarm, and sends an alarm related.
The BTS detects the start time of wireless link alarm, such as 08:00:00 and
14:00:00 in each day. Until the end of the period specified by this
parameter, the BTS stops detecting the wireless link alarm and sending the
alarm related. The detection starts again until the next Begin Time of WLA
Detection(hour).
This parameter specifies the basic difference value caused by the specified
level difference between the uplink channel and the downlink channel.
Together with Up Down Balance Floating Range, this parameter is used to
calculate the number of uplink and downlink unbalance.
Assume that Up Down Balance Basic Difference is set to 8 and Up Down
Balance Alarm Threshold is set to 30. If the downlink level minus the
uplink level after the power control compensation is greater than 8+30 or
less than 8-30, the uplink and the downlink are not balanced; otherwise, the
uplink and downlink are balanced.
This parameter specifies the permissible uplink and downlink balance
floating range relative to Up Down Balance Basic Difference. The uplink
and downlink is not balanced only when the uplink and downlink level
exceeds the Up Down Balance Floating Range.
Assume that Up Down Balance Basic Difference is set to 8 and Up Down
Balance Alarm Threshold is set to 30. If the downlink level minus the
uplink level after the power control compensation is greater than 8+30 or
less than 8-30, the uplink and the downlink are not balanced; otherwise, the
uplink and downlink are balanced.
When the percentage of the uplink-and-downlink balance measurement
reports in the total valid measurement reports is greater than or equal to the
value of this parameter, the uplink and downlink unbalance alarm is
generated.
This parameter specifies the RF receive mode of the DTRU.
The RF receive mode can be Not Support, Independent Receiver, Dividing
Receiver, Four Diversity Receiver, or Main Diversity.
The BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3012II, BTS3006C, and BTS3002E do
not support Main Diversity.
The DBS3900 GSM and BTS3900 GSM support Four Diversity Receiver
and Main Diversity.
This parameter specifies the RF transmit mode of the TRX.
The RF transmit mode can be Not Support, No Combining, Power Booster
Technology, Wide Band Combining, Diversity Transmitter, DDIVERSITY,
DPBT, or Transmitter Independent or Combining.
The BTS3006C and BTS3002E support No Combining, Diversity
Transmitter, DDIVERSITY and DPBT.
The DBS3900 GSM GRRU supports No Combining, Diversity Transmitter
and DDIVERSITY.
The BTS3900 GSM and BTS3900A GSM support No Combining, Power
Booster Technology, Wide Band Combining, Diversity Transmitter,
DDIVERSITY and DPBT.
The BTS3012 supports No Combining, Power Booster Technology, Power
Booster Technology, Diversity Transmitter, DDIVERSITY and DPBT.
The BTSs not included above do not support the RF tranmsit modes listed
above.
This parameter specifies whether the BSC determines to enable or disable
the power amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume.
This parameter specifies the following: When the antenna hopping function
is used, the signals of one TRX can switch between different antennas
instead of one TRX corresponding to one antenna. Therefore, the signals on
certain frequencies are less affected by Rayleigh fading compared with
those without antenna hopping. The Antenna Hopping Index corresponds to
a TRX number.
This parameter specifies the following: Currently, when the BSC performs
the static power control on the TRX, the step of increasing or reducing the
power of the TRX is 2 dB. In some scenarios, the TRX has different losses
if it is combined on different tributaries, and the output power difference
before and after the combination is not an integral multiple of 2 dB. Thus,
the cabinet top output power of the BTS cannot be adjusted in the step of 2
dB, so the TRX output power may be different from the cabinet top output
power of the BTS.
Therefore, through the setting of this parameter, a finer step can be
provided for adjusting the cabinet top output power of the BTS.
This parameter specifies whether the TRX supports antenna hopping.
In a GSM cell, the frequency, frame number, system information, and
paging group are transmitted on the BCCH of the main BCCH TRX. If the
MS is in an unfavorable position or the antenna for the main BCCH TRX is
faulty, then the MS cannot receive the broadcast control messages from the
main BCCH TRX properly.
The antenna hopping function enables the data on all the timeslots of the
BCCH TRX to be transmitted on the antennas of all the TRXs in the cell in
turn. Thus the quality of the BCCH TRX data received by the MS is
improved and the network performance is enhanced. Only the double-
transceiver BTS can be configured with the antenna hopping function.
This parameter specifies the number of the out-BSC slot where the BSC
interface board is located when the BTS works in reverse link mode. That
is, the number of the slot that holds the interface board, which connects the
BTS to the BSC.
This parameter can be modified according to the actual requirements.
However, it must be set to the number of the slot that is configured with the
interface board.
This parameter specifies the number of the out-BSC port where the BSC
interface board is located when the BTS works in reverse link mode. That
is, the number of the port on the interface board that connects the BTS to
the BSC.
When the monitoring timeslot is configured on the electrical interface
board, each electrical interface board is configured with 32 E1 ports, which
are numbered from 0 to 31.
When the monitoring timeslot is configured on the optical interface board,
each optical interface board is configured with 63 E1 ports, which are
numbered from 0 to 62.
If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the
number of the RSL timeslot on the GEIUB/GOIUB/GEHUB port.
If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the
number of the port occupied by the LAPD link corresponding to the RSL
link on the Abis interface.
If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the
number of the timeslot occupied by the LAPD link corresponding to the
RSL link on the Abis interface.
This parameter specifies the transmission bearer mode of a TRX: 0-TDM, 1-
HDLC, 2-HDLC_HUB, or 3-IP.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of PDCHs allocated to a
TRX.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of Abis timeslots occupied
by the PDCHs on a TRX.
This parameter specifies the number of the TRX that supports the PBT
together with the current TRX. When this parameter is set to the default
value 255, you can infer that no TRX supports the PBT together with the
current TRX.
This parameter specifies the index of the in-BTS HDLC channel. The in-
BTS HDLC channel connects to the BTS TMU.
This parameter specifies the index of an HDLC channel between the PEU
and the PTU.
This parameter specifies the unique number of a TRX in the HUB domain
in HUB HDLC transmission mode.
This parameter specifies the number of the slot where the GXPUM
(processing the RSL signaling) is located.
This parameter specifies the priority of the clock reference source.
This parameter specifies the HDLC channel index of reverse link in an
HDLC ring network.
This parameter specifies the allowed power difference between the
maximum output power of the QTRU and the maximum nominal output
power.
This parameter specifies whether to select different working voltages for the
TRX power amplifier in a cell based on different TRX modulation modes.
This parameter specifies whether the BSC determines to enable or disable
the power amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume.
This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell.
After receiving the channel request message or handover access message,
the BTS determines whether the channel assignment or handover is
performed in the cell by comparing the TA and the value of this parameter.
This parameter specifies whether to enable the DTX function in a cell.
This parameter specifies the encryption algorithm supported on the BSS
side.
The value of this parameter has eight bits. The eights bits (from the least
significant bit to the most significant bit) specify whether to support the
A5/0, A5/1, A5/2, A5/3, A5/4, A5/5, A5/6, and A5/7 encryption algorithms
respectively. If a bit is set to 1, you can infer that the BSS supports the
corresponding encryption algorithm. If a bit is 0, you can infer that the BSS
does not support the corresponding encryption algorithm.
The eights bits cannot be all zeros and the least significant bit must be 1.
This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the BTS power is
allowed..
This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the MS power is
allowed.
This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry. In directed retry, a
handover procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell.
Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the
local wireless network. It is not a primary method of clearing traffic
congestion. If directed retry is preformed frequently in a local network, you
must adjust the TRX configuration of the BTS and the network layout.
If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC can assign a TCH and an SDCCH
when receiving an initial access request. If this parameter is set to No, the
BSC can assign only an SDCCH when receiving an initial access request.
This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the
BSS. For details. see GSM Rec. 05.08.
The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110
dBm to -47 dBm).
This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. Blind spots
caused by tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio
links. Thus a call may drop. In this case, the MS can initiate a call
reestablishment procedure to resume the call. The number of call drops is
not incremented if the call reestablishment is successful or if the subscriber
hooks on.
This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous
Transmission (DTX) function. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.
This parameter specifies: for the channel assignment, suppose the MS
supports multiple sub frequency bands of the 900 MHz frequency band. The
BSC ignores the priority of P-GSM/E-GSM/R-GSM sub frequency bands if
the cell load is smaller than and equal to this threshold. The BSC assigns
channels on the TRXs with priority of R-GSM, E-GSM, P-GSM frequency
bands if the cell load is greater than this threshold. That is, the BSC
preferentially assigns channels on the R-GSM TRXs if the MS supports P-
GSM/E-GSM/R-GSM sub frequency bands and the cell is configured with
TRXs operating on the P-GSM/E-GSM/R-GSM sub frequency bands.
This parameter determines when the channel is assigned on the QTRU:
When the channel is assigned on the QTRU board by using the dynamic
power sharing algorithm, and when the remaining power of QTRU board is
less than the call required power of cell,
If this switch is set to Yes, this is allowed to assign the channel; otherwise,
this is not allowed to assign the channel.
The value of this parameter should be added in estimated power when the
downlink path loss is estimated by the uplink path loss.
This parameter specifies the downlink signal strength estimated by the
QTRU power sharing algorithm together with downlink power control
target threshold.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63
(corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).
The P/N criterion determines whether the statistics time of QTRU downlink
power is insufficient. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.
The P/N criterion determines whether the observation time of QTRU
downlink power is insufficient. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N
criterion.
This parameter specifies the following definitions:
1. The QTRU power sharing algorithm is disabled.
2. Static power sharing algorithm.
3. Dynamic power sharing algorithm.
The difference between static power sharing algorithm and dynamic power
sharing algorithm is that the dynamic power sharing algorithm uses the
MCPA power sharing technology, the static power specification is different
from dynamic power specification. When there are several carriers, the
maximum output power of single carrier in dynamic power specification is
greater.
In the network swapping, the static/dynamic power on the top of cabinet
needs to compare with the competitor power on the top of cabinet. If the
static power on the top of cabinet competitor power on the top of cabinet,
the static power sharing algorithm is used; if the dynamic power on the top
of cabinet competitor power on the top of cabinet static power on the
top of cabinet, the dynamic power sharing algorithm is used.
If the uplink received level difference of calls in the same timeslot exceeds
the Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels, the situation
must be recorded. During the observation of P seconds, if this situation lasts
N seconds, the call with the lowest uplink signal strength in the timeslot
should be handed over to another timeslot.
If the uplink received level difference of calls in the same timeslot exceeds
the Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels, the situation
must be recorded. During the observation of P seconds, if this situation lasts
N seconds, the call with the lowest uplink signal strength in the timeslot
should be handed over to another timeslot.
The value is 0-1 in fact; however, the data in the host and BSC should be
simultaneously multiplied by 10 times to prevent the floating-point values.
This parameter specifies the QTRU signal merge algorithm, that is, the BSC
monitors the high-level signal and overwhelms the low-level signal per 0.5
second.
If the highest uplink signal strength of a timeslot the lowest uplink signal
strength of this timeslot > Threshold of the difference between uplink
received levels, the situation must be recorded.
During the observation of P seconds, if this situation lasts N seconds, a
forced handover is initiated on the calls with the highest uplink signal
strength in the timeslot, and the calls should be handed over to another
timeslot.
P specifies the Observed time of uplink received level difference, and N
specifies the Duration of uplink received level difference.
This parameter specifies whether the BSC is allowed to assign the half-rate
channels and full-rate channels to the MS according to the channel seizure
ratio of the underlaid subcell and overlaid subcell.
The BSC assigns channels in the overlaid subcell to the MS in a concentric
cell. If the channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is greater than the value
of this parameter, half-rate channels are assigned. Otherwise, full-rate
channels are assigned.
Channel seizure ratio = (Num. of busy TCHF + Num. of busy TCHH/2)/
(Num. of available TCHF + Num. of available TCHH /2) x 100%. This
parameter is valid for the concentric cell. When the Allow Rate Selection
Based on Overlaid/Underlaid Subcell Load is set to Yes, the TCH Traffic
Busy Threshold (%) is invalid for the concentric cell.
The BSC assigns channels in the overlaid subcell to the MS in a concentric
cell. If the channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is greater than the value
of this parameter, half-rate channels are assigned. Otherwise, full-rate
channels are assigned.
Channel seizure ratio = (Num. of busy TCHF + Num. of busy TCHH/2)/
(Num. of available TCHF + Num. of available TCHH /2) x 100%.
This parameter is valid for the concentric cell. When the Allow Rate
Selection Based on Overlaid/Underlaid Subcell Load is set to Yes, the TCH
Traffic Busy Threshold (%) is invalid for the concentric cell.
This parameter specifies whether the dynamic HSN is permitted to be used.
When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are
enabled in a cell, this parameter is set to YES. Thus, the inter-frequency
interference among channels can be reduced.
Only when the FlexMAIO is set to YES, this parameter can be configured.
This parameter specifies whether to enable Flex MAIO.
In tight frequency resuse, the adjacent-channel interference and co-channel
interference among channels occur.
When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are
enabled in a cell, the inter-frequency interference among channels can be
reduced partially.
In the case of aggressive frequency reuse, the recommended value is set to
Yes.
This parameter specifies the static Abis resource load threshold. When the
static Abis resource load is lower than Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load
Thred(%), the full-rate channel is preferentially assigned. Otherwise, the full-
rate or half-rate channel is preferred according to the dynamic Abis resource
load.
When the static Abis resource load is higher than Fix Abis Prior Choose
Abis Load Thred(%) and the dynamic Abis resource load is higher than
Flex Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%), the half-rate channel is
preferred. Otherwise, the full-rate channel is preferred.
This parameter specifies when the BSC fails to convert the dynamic PDCH
back to the TCH, this operation is not performed during the period specified
by this parameter. The parameter is valid for both built-in PCH and external
PCU.
The channel type to be assigned is decided according to the channel types
that are allowed by the MSC and the percentage of seized TCHs in the cell.
During the channel assignment, the TCHF or TCCH, TCHH Prior channels
are required in the following conditions: Half rate and full rate channels are
allowed to be assigned by the MSC, the AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed is set
to Yes, and the percentage of seized TCHs in the cell is greater than the
value of AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold. In other cases, the TCHF
or TCCH, TCHF Prior channels are required.
For details about cell load levels, refer to the Cell Load Threshold.
Relevant algorithm: AMR call channel assignment algorithms
This parameter specifies whether the TCH/H is preferentially assigned on
the basis of the channel type and current service channel seizure ratio that
are allowed by the MSC.
During the channel assignment, the TCHF or TCCH, TCHH Prior channels
are required in the following conditions: Half rate and full rate channels are
allowed to be assigned by the MSC, the AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed is set
to Yes, and the percentage of seized TCHs in the cell is greater than the
value of AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold. In other cases, the TCHF
or TCCH, TCHF Prior channels are required.
The updating of the history record starts when the Update Period of CH
Record times out. Update Freq of CH Record is subtracted from the history
priority of each channel to improve the priority of the channel.
Principles of taking values are as follows:
Generally, set this parameter to 2.
If a fixed interference source exists or an equipment fault occurs, the
update frequency for the affected cells can be set to 4 or 6.
The Update Period of CH Record is used together with Update Freq of CH
Record, In this way, the channel can be assigned even if the channel priority
is continuously lowered within a period of time.
When the Update Period of CH Record expires, the process of updating the
history record of channel occupancy is started. That is, the history priority
of each channel is reduced by Update Freq.of CH Record at the interval of
the setting value of this parameter to increase the channel priority.
Principles of taking values are as follows:
Generally, a high-frequency adjustment is used. For example, the update
period should be set in such a way that it ranges from half an hour to one
hour because several busy hours are the major concerns during the actual
operation in a day. If the parameter is set to a too small value, the result of
the history record is meaningless. If the parameter is set to a too great value,
the result cannot be seen in time during busy hours.
If a fixed interference source exists or an equipment fault occurs, the
update period for the affected cells can be set in such a way that it ranges
from several hours to one day.
This parameter is used together with Update Freq. of CH Record so that the
channel can be assigned even if the history record priority decreases.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports that are used to
determine the signal quality on signaling channels.
The signal quality on signaling channels should not be determined based on
only one measurement result. To eliminate the influence of accidental
factors, you need to obtain the average value of signal quality in several
successive measurement reports of signaling channels, and then determine
the signal quality on signaling channels.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for
averaging the signal strength on the SDCCH.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports that are used to
clculate the signal quality on speech/data TCHs.
The signal quality on TCHs should not be determined based on only one
measurement result. To eliminate the influence of accidental factors, you
need to obtain the average value of signal quality in several successive
measurement reports of TCHs, and then determine the signal quality on
speech/data TCHs.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for
averaging the speech/data TCH signal strength.
This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the
downlink interference is existed.
The higher the level, the greater the signal strength is. The greater the value,
the lower the signal quality is.
If the downlink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf
of DL level Threshold and the quality grade of the uplink channel is greater
or equal to the value Interf of DL Qual Threshold. The downlink
interference occurs.
This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the
downlink interference is existed.
The higher the level, the greater the signal strength is. The greater the value,
the lower the signal quality is.
If the downlink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf
of DL level Threshold and the quality grade of the uplink channel is greater
or equal to the value Interf of DL Qual Threshold. The downlink
interference occurs.
The value range of Rank 0-63 corresponds to the range of -110 dBm to -47
dBm.
This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the
uplink interference is existed.
The higher the level, the greater the signal is. The greater the value, the
lower the quality is.
If the uplink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of
UL level Threshold and the quality grade of the uplink channel is greater or
equal to the value Interf of UL Qual Threshold. The uplink interference
occurs.
This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the
uplink interference is existed.
The higher the level, the greater the signal is. The greater the value, the
lower the quality is.
If the uplink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of
UL level Threshold and the quality grade of the uplink channel is greater or
equal to the value Interf of UL Qual Threshold.this indicates the signal is
good, but the quality is poor, that is, the uplink interference occurs.
The value range of Rank 0-63 corresponds to the range of -110 dBm to -47
dBm.
This parameter specifies whether the history record priority is considered in
channel assignment.
If this parameter is set to YES, the history record priority is effective. If this
parameter is set to NO, the history record priority is ineffective.
Usually this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high
history record priority preferentially.
This parameter specifies whether the TRX priority is considered during
channel assignment.
If this parameter is set to YES, the TRX priority factor is effective. If this
parameter is set to NO, the TRX priority factor is ineffective.
Usually, this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high TRX
priority preferentially.
This parameter specifies whether the channel interference is considered in
channel assignment.
If this parameter is set to NO, the channel interference measurement is not
performed and the interference indication is not sent. If this parameter is set
to YES, the channel interference measurement is performed.
If this parameter is set to YES, the channel with little interference is
selected preferentially.
This parameter specifies whether the interference priority is considered
during channel assignment.
By default, this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with little
interference.
In Huawei II channel assignment algorithm, if the current channel seizure
ratio reaches or exceeds this value, the half-rate TCH is assigned
preferentially; otherwise, the full-rate TCH is assigned preferentially.
This parameter specifies whether to turn on the switch for the tight BCCH
algorithm, and thus controls whether to enable the BCCH aggressive
frequency reuse algorithm.
Yes: Open
No: Close
This parameter specifies whether the current cell supports the dynamic
transmission diversity or dynamic PBT:
0: not supported
1: dynamic transmission diversity supported
2: dynamic PBT supported
This parameter sets the priority of different types in channel allocation.
These types include:
Capacity with a higher priority
Quality with a higher priority
PS coordination with a relatively higher priority
PS coordination with an absolutely higher priority
The priority of different types is as follows:
Priority by capacity: capacity factors > quality factors > PS cooperation
factors > management factors
Priority by quality: quality factors > capacity factors > PS cooperation
factors > management factors
Relative priority by PS domain: capacity factors > PS cooperation factors >
quality factors > management factors
Absolute priority by PS domain: PS cooperation factors > capacity factors
> quality factors > management factors
This parameter specifies whether the combination of two half-rate TCHs
into one full-rate TCH is allowed in a cell.
If this parameter is set to No, the forced handover and call delay caused by
timeslot arrangement can be avoided, but there may cause some TCHF-only
calls to fail because the timeslot arrangement is unavailable.
If this parameter is set to Yes, calls may fail when the timeslot arrangement
fails and when the MS does not select the TCHF in the concentric cell.
This parameter specifies the minimum time for the recovery of a TCH from
an SDCCH.
The processing for the SDCCH recovered to the TCH is as follows: each
cell is configured with a counter. Each time the TCH is converted to the
SDCCH, the counter is set to ResTime. The value of the counter is adjusted
every three seconds. If the number of idle SDCCHs > 8 + N1, the counter
descreases by 3; if the number of idle SDCCHs < 8 + Idle SDCCH
Threshold N1, the counter increases by 12 within the setting value; if the
number of idle SDCCHs = 8 + N1, the counter remains unchanged. If the
value of the counter is equal to or lower than 0 after adjustment, the
SDCCH is converted to the TCH.
When the BSC determines whether to initiate the conversion from the TCH
to the SDCCH, it needs to determine whether the number of SDCCHs after
the conversion exceeds the Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum. If the number
of SDCCHs exceeds the value of this parameter, the BSC does not initiate
the conversion.
If the number of idle SDCCHs in the cell is smaller than or equal to the
value of this parameter, the BSC tries to find a TCHF that can be converted
to the SDCCH.
This parameter specifies one of the conditions for converting the TCHF to
the SDCCH.
Besides this parameter, the other three conditions for initiating the
conversion from TCHFs to SDCCHs are as follows:
1.The cell allows the SDCCH dynamic adjustment.
2.(Number of idle TCHFs + number of idle TCHHs/2) 4 or the number of
TRXs in the cell, and the cell must have at least one idle TCHF.
3.The sum of the number of SDCCHs in the cell plus eight is smaller than
the maximum number of SDCCHs allowed in the cell.
This parameter specifies the coding rate adopted on a half-rate channel
when a call is initially established. Since there are at most four coding rates
in the ACS, this field have four values 0, 1, 2, and 3, representing the
lowest, low, high, and highest coding rates in the ACS respectively.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS
automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related
algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.
The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI
equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth.
Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment
threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding
rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS
automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related
algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.
The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI
equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth.
Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment
threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding
rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS
automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related
algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.
The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI
equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth.
Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment
threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding
rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS
automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related
algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.
The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI
equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth.
Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment
threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding
rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS
automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related
algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.
The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI
equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth.
Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment
threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding
rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS
automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related
algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.
The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI
equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth.
Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment
threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding
rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS
automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related
algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.
The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI
equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth.
Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment
threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding
rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS
automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related
algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.
The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI
equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth.
Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment
threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding
rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS
automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related
algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.
The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI
equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth.
Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment
threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding
rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS
automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related
algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.
The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI
equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth.
Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment
threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding
rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS
automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related
algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.
The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI
equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth.
Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment
threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding
rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS
automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related
algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.
The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI
equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth.
Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment
threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding
rates.
This parameter specifies the set of active coding rates. The active coding set
(ACS) is a set of coding rates currently available for calls. Use a BIT map to
present the speech coding rates contained in the ACS, wherein a BIT
corresponds to a coding rate. If a bit is 1, the coding rate is included in the
ACS. Otherwise, the ACS does not include the coding rate. The value of
this parameter has five bits.
This parameter specifies the coding rate adopted on a full-rate channel when
a call is initially established. Since there are at most four coding rates in the
ACS, this field have four values 0, 1, 2, and 3, representing the lowest, low,
high, and highest coding rates in the ACS respectively.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS
automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related
algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.
The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI
equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth.
Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment
threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding
rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS
automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related
algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.
The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI
equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth.
Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment
threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding
rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS
automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related
algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.
The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI
equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth.
Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment
threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding
rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS
automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related
algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.
The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI
equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth.
Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment
threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding
rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS
automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related
algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.
The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI
equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth.
Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment
threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding
rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS
automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related
algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.
The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI
equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth.
Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment
threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding
rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS
automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related
algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.
The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI
equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth.
Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment
threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding
rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS
automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related
algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.
The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI
equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth.
Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment
threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding
rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS
automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related
algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.
The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI
equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth.
Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment
threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding
rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS
automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related
algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.
The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI
equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth.
Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment
threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding
rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS
automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related
algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.
The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI
equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth.
Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment
threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding
rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS
automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related
algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.
The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI
equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth.
Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment
threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding
rates.
This parameter specifies the set of active coding rates. The active coding set
(ACS) is a set of coding rates currently available for calls. Use a BIT map to
present the speech coding rates contained in the ACS, wherein a BIT
corresponds to a coding rate. If a bit is 1, the coding rate is included in the
ACS. Otherwise, the ACS does not include the coding rate. The value of
this parameter has eight bits.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of reassignments after the
assignment on the Um interface fails.
In normal assignment procedure, after receiving the assignment failure
message from the MS on the SDCCH, the BSC does not report the message
to the MSC immediately. Instead, the BSC re-assigns radio channels and re-
originates the assignment on the Um interface. Thus the success rate of
assignment can be increased.
Reassigning radio channels can be performed in the carriers with the same
frequency band or of different frequency bands.
If this parameter is set to Same Band, the frequency band of the
preferentially reassigned channel is the same as what is used before the
reassignment.
If the parameter is set to Different Band, the frequency band of the
preferentially reassigned channel is different from what is used before the
reassignment.
You can set this parameter to improve the deterioration of QoS caused by
the interference, carrier channel fault, or engineering fault.
This parameter specifies whether to disable the sending of point-to-point
short messages. In specific cells, sending point-to-point short messages on
the downlink is disabled to ensure sufficient radio channels for calls.
The channel activation and immediate assignment commands are sent at the
same time to accelerate the signaling processing rate, thus improving the
response speed of the network.
This parameter specifies whether to enable the Abis resource adjustment
TCHH function.
This parameter determines whether the BSC preferentially assigns a half-
rate TCH to an MS when the Abis resources are insufficient.
When this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC preferentially assigns a half-rate
TCH to the MS if the Abis resource load is higher than Flex Abis Prior
Choose Abis Load Thred(%) or than Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load
Thred(%).
This parameter specifies whether to allow the enhanced multi-level
precedence and preemption (eMLPP) function. In eMLPP, the network can
use different policies such as queuing, preemption, and directed retry based
on the priorities of different calls when network resources are occupied.
If the Allow EMLPP is set to Yes, when preemption occurs, the MS with
the lowest priority performs handover, and the MS with higher priority
seizes the idle channel after handover. If the Allow EMLPP is set to No, a
certain MS with lower priority releases the channel, the MS with higher
priority seizes the idle channel after release.
This parameter specifies whether to allow the reassignment function.
This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR
about a TDD cell is valid.
The measurement report is valid if the receive level of the TDD cell in the
measurement report is greater than the value of this parameter.
After the valid measurement report is filtered, the TDD cell joins in the cell
prioritization.
0: 0 dB
1: 6 dB
...
6: 36 dB
7:
This parameter specifies the signal level offset of a TDD cell.
Add the value of this parameter to the receive level of the TDD cell in the
measurement report, and then sequence the TDD cells.
0: 0 dB
1: 6 dB

...
7: 42 dB
This parameter specifies the number of UTRAN TDD cells that should be
contained in the best cell list or in the measurement report.
A TDD cell can become a candidate cell only when the average receive
level of the TDD cell is greater than the TDD Cell Reselect Diversity of the
serving cell.
0: - (always select a cell if acceptable)
1: -28 dB
2: -24 dB
...
15: 28 dB
This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR
about an FDD cell is valid.
If the receive level of the 3G cell in the measurement report is greater than
the value of this parameter, the measurement report is valid.
After the valid measurement report is filtered, the 3G cell joins in the cell
priority sequence.
0: 0 dB
1: 6 dB
...
6: 36 dB
7:
This parameter specifies the signal level offset of an FDD cell.
When the priority of a 3G cell is sequenced, it is recommended that the
value of this parameter be added to the receive level of the 3G cell in the
measurement report.
0: 0 dB
1: 6 dB

...
7: 42 dB
This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR
about a DCS1800 cell is valid.
If the receive level of the 1800 MHz cell in the measurement report is
greater than the value of this parameter, the measurement report is valid.
After the measurement report is filtered, the cell joins in the cell priority
sequence.
0: 0 dB
1: 6 dB
...
6: 36 dB
7:
This parameter specifies the signal level offset of a DCS1800 cell.
When sequencing the priority of a DCS1800 cell based on its frequency
band, the value of this parameter should be added to the receive level in the
measurement report.
0: 0 dB
1: 6 dB
...
7: 42 dB
This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR
about a GSM900 cell is valid.
When the receive level of the GSM900 cell in the measurement report is
greater than the value of this parameter, the measurement report is valid.
After the measurement report is filtered, the cell joins in the cell priority
rank.
0: 0 dB
1: 6 dB
...
6: 36 dB
7:
This parameter specifies the signal level offset of a GSM900 cell.
When the priority of a GSM900 cell is sequenced on the basis of its
frequency band, the value of this parameter should be added to the receive
level in the measurement report.
0: 0 dB
1: 6 dB
...
7: 42 dB
This parameter specifies the level threshold for cell reselection in
connection mode.
In connection mode, if the signal level in the serving cell is below [0, 7] or
above [8, 15], the MS starts to search for 3G cells.
For example:
If this parameter is set to 5 and if the signal level of the serving cell is lower
than 5, the MS starts to search for 3G cells.
If this parameter is set to 10 and if the signal level of the serving cell is
higher than 10, the MS starts to search for 3G cells.
0: -98 dBm
1: -94 dBm
...
6: -74 dBm
7: (always)
8: -78 dBm
9: -74 dBm ...
14: -54 dBm
15: (never)
This parameter indicates that when the MS reports the EMR, it adds the
value of this parameter to the received signal level, and then converts the
result into the RXLEV value. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.
If the SCALE_Order reported by the MS is 10 dBm, level values 0-63 map
with -100 dBm to -37 dBm.
If the SCALE_Order reported by the MS is 0 dBm, level values 0-63 map
with -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
If the SCALE_Order reported by the MS is Automatic, the MS chooses the
least SCALE while ensuring that the MS can report the most strong level.
This parameter specifies whether the EMR can contain the information
about a cell with an invalid BSIC.
This parameter specifies whether the MS is allowed to search for a 3G cell
when the BSIC must be decoded.
This parameter specifies one threshold of the signal level for cell reselection
in packet transfer mode.
In packet transfer mode, if the signal level in the serving cell is below [0, 7]
or above [8, 15], the MS starts to search for 3G cells.
For example:
If this parameter is set to 5 and if the signal level of the serving cell is lower
than 5, the MS starts to search for 3G cells.
If this parameter is set to 10 and if the signal level of the serving cell is
higher than 10, the MS starts to search for 3G cells.
0: -98 dBm
1: -94 dBm
...
6: -74 dBm
7: (always)
8: -78 dBm
9: -74 dBm
...
14: -54 dBm
15: (never)
This parameter specifies one threshold of the signal level for 3G cell
reselection.
Only when the receive level of a 3G cell is greater than FDD Qmin, the 3G
cell can be one candidate cell for cell reselection.
0: -20 dB
1: -6 dB
2: -18 dB
3: -8 dB
4: -16 dB
5: -10 dB
6: -14 dB
7: -12 dB.
Default value: -20 dB.
This parameter specifies the number of UTRAN FDD cells that should be
contained in the best cell list or in the measurement report.
This parameter specifies the measurement report counter of an FDD cell.
Only when the average receive level of a 3G cell is FDD Q Offset greater
than that of the serving cell, the 3G cell becomes a candidate cell.
0: - (always select a cell if acceptable)
1: -28 dB
2: -24 dB

15: 28 dB
This parameter specifies the threshold of the signal level for cell reselection
in connection mode before Qsearch C is obtained.
This parameter specifies the level threshold for cell reselection in idle mode.
In idle mode, if the signal level in the serving cell is below [0, 7] or above
[8, 15], the MS starts to search for 3G cells.
For example:
If this parameter is set to 5 and if the signal level of the serving cell is lower
than 5, the MS starts to search for 3G cells.
If this parameter is set to 10 and if the signal level of the serving cell is
higher than 10, the MS starts to search for 3G cells.
0: -98 dBm
1: -94 dBm
2: -90 dBm
3: -86 dBm
4: -82 dBm
5: -78 dBm
6: -74 dBm
7(always), that is, the MS keeps searching for 3G cells
8: -78 dBm
9: -74 dBm
10: -70 dBm
11: -66 dBm
12: -62 dBm
13: -58 dBm
14: -54 dBm
15(never), that is, the MS does not search for 3G cells
If the system information indicates "MBR", the MS reports the number of
neighbor cells on different frequency bands.
When the MS reports the number of neighbor cells on the same frequency
band with the serving cell, a maximum of the value of Serving Band
Reporting can be reported.
These neighbor cells must meet the following requirements:
1. The receive levels of the neighbor cells must be higher than 900
Reporting Threshold or 1800 Reporting Threshold.
2. The BSIC of a neighbor cell must be valid.
3. The signals of the neighbor cells must be the strongest among all the
neighbor cells on the same frequency band.
When Power Deviation Indication is set to Yes, the transmit power of an
MS is the MS maximum transmit power level plus the power calculated
from the power deviation if the class 3 MS on the DCS1800 band does not
receive the original power command after random access. For details, see
GSM Rec. 05.08.
The MS does not receive the original power command after random access.
This parameter indicates whether the power deviation is added to the class 3
MS on the DCS1800 band on the basis of the maximum MS transmit power.
This parameter is used for the MS to report neighbor cell explanation of
multiple bands. It is sent in the system information 2ter and 5ter.
The early classmark sending control (ECSC) specifies whether the MSs in a
cell use early classmark sending. For details, see GSM Rec. 04.08.After a
successful immediate assignment, the MS sends additional classmark
information to the network as early as possible. The CM3 (classmark 3)
information contains the power information of each band of multi-band
MSs. In the inter-band handover, power class must be correctly described.
When paging is made or the BA2 table is sent between different bands, the
CM3 message must be known. For dual-band MSs, if ECSC is set to No, the
MSC sends a CLASSMARK REQUEST message after the MS reports an
EST IND message. The MS then reports the CLASSMARK UPDATE
message. The connection time of the MS is affected.
This parameter specifies when an MS disconnects a call if the MS
unsuccessfully decodes the SACCH message. For details of this parameter,
see GSM Rec. 0408 and 05.08.
Once a dedicated channel is assigned to the MS, the counter S is enabled
and the initial value is set to this parameter value.
Each time an SACCH message is not decoded, the counter S decreases by 1.
Each time an SACCH message is correctly decoded, the counter S increases
by 2.When the counter S is equal to 0, the downlink radio link is considered
as failed.Therefore, when the voice or data quality is degraded to an
unacceptable situation and it cannot be improved through power control or
channel handover, the connection is to be re-established or released.
This parameter specifies whether to allow emergency calls. For MSs whose
access class is from 0 to 9, if this parameter is set to No, emergency calls
are allowed.
For MSs whose access class is from 11 to 15, emergency calls are not
allowed only when the access control bit is set to 0 and Emergent Call
Disable is set to Yes.
This parameter specifies whether to allow the MSs of special access classes
to access the network. This parameter is used for load control. Value 1
indicates that access is not allowed. Value 0 indicates that access is allowed.
For example, 000001 indicates that users of all classes except class 10 are
allowed to access the network. In the cell where the traffic volume is heavy,
congestion may occur in busy hours. For example, more RACH burst
occurs, the AGCH flow is overloaded, or the Abis interface flow is
overloaded.If this parameter is set to 1 for the MSs of some classes, the
traffic volume in this cell may be reduced.
This parameter specifies whether to allow the MSs of common access
classes to access the network. This parameter is used for load control.
Value 1 indicates that access is not allowed. Value 0 indicates that access is
allowed.For example, 0000000001 indicates that the MSs of all classes
except class 0 are allowed to access the network.
During the BTS installation, activation, or cell maintenance test, this
parameter can be set to 1. All MSs are not allowed to access the network,
thus reducing the impact on installation or maintenance.
In the cell where the traffic volume is heavy, congestion may occur in busy
hours. For example, more RACH burst occurs, the AGCH is overloaded, or
the Abis interface is overloaded.If this parameter is set to 1 for the MSs of
some classes, the traffic volume in this cell may be reduced.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of Channel Request
messages that can be sent by an MS in an immediate assignment procedure.
After the MS initiates the immediate assignment procedure, it always listens
to the messages on the BCCH and all the common control channels
(CCCHs) in the CCCH group to which the MS belongs.If the MS does not
receive Immediate Assignment messages or Immediate Assignment Extend
messages, the MS re-sends Channel Request messages at a specified
interval.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions of the
immediate assignment message. When this number is reached, the
immediate assignment message is not retransmitted even if the Max Delay
of Imm_Ass Retransmit (ms) is not exceeded.
Within the period specified by this parameter, the immediate assignment
message is dispatched and retransmitted. Otherwise, the message is not
dispatched or retransmitted.
This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the immediate assignment
retransmission parameter to the BTS.
Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer
between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS
should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum
retransmission times of frame I on the FACCH (a full-rate channel).
For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the
descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.
Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer
between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS
should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum
retransmission times of frame I on the FACCH (a half-rate channel).
For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the
descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.
Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer
between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS
should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum
retransmission times of frame I on the SDCCH.
For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the
descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.
Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer
between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS
should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum
retransmission times of frame I on the SACCH.
For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the
descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.
Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer
between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS
should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum
retransmission times of frame I during the multi-frame release.
For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the
descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.
Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer
between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS
should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum number of
retransmissions of the I frame.
For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the
descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.
This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the LAPDm N200
parameter to the BTS.
This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 when the SDCCH
supports SAPI3 services.
For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the
descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.
This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the
SACCH on the SDCCH.
For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the
descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.
This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the
SACCH over the Um interface when the TCH supports SAPI3 services. For
details of the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the
descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. SAPI0 maps with
speech services, and SAPI3 maps with short message services.
This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the
SACCH over the Um interface when the TCH supports SAPI0 services. For
details of the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the
descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. SAPI0 maps with
speech services, and SAPI3 maps with short message services.
This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the
FACCH/TCHH over the Um interface. For the function of timer T200 and
the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms)
parameter.
This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the
FACCH/TCHF over the Um interface. For the function of timer T200 and
the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms)
parameter.
This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the
SDCCH over the Um interface.
T200 prevents the data link layer from deadlock during data transmission.
The data link layer transforms the physical link that is vulnerable to errors
into a sequential non-error data link. The entities at the two ends of this data
link use the acknowledgement retransmission mechanism.
Each message must be confirmed by the peer end.In unknown cases, both
ends are waiting if a message is lost. At this time, the deadlock of the system
occurs.Therefore, the transmit end must establish a timer. When the timer
expires, the transmit end regards that the receive end does not receive the
message and then the transmit end retransmits the message.The number of
retransmissions is determined by N200.T200 and the N200 ensure that the
data link layer sequentially transmits data and that the transmission is free
from errors.
For the BTS3X in 03.0529 or later and the double-transceiver BTSs, this
parameter specifies the level threshold for the random access of the MS. If
the receive level of the RACH burst is smaller than the value of RACH
Min.Access Level, the BTS regards this access as an invalid one and no
decoding is performed. If the receive level of the RACH burst is greater
than the value of RACH Min. Access Level, the BTS considers that an
access request exists on this timeslot, and determines together with the value
of Random Access Error Threshold whether the RACH access is valid.
Generally, RACH Busy Threshold is higher than RACH Min.Access Level.
Therefore, for the BTS24, RACH Min.Access Level is shielded. For the
BTS2X (excluding the BTS24), the RACH Min.Access Level parameter is
invalid.
This parameter specifies the correlation between training sequences.
According the GSM protocols, the system determines whether the received
signal is the random access signal of an MS through the correlation between
training sequences (41 bits) and calculates the TA value.
This parameter specifies the following rules for TRX aiding function
control:
TRX Aiding Not Allowed: The TRX aiding function is disabled.
Allowed & Recover Forbidden: The TRX aiding is allowed but the
switchback is forbidden after the faulty TRX is restored.
Allowed & Recover Immediately: The TRX aiding is enabled but the
switchback is performed immediately after the faulty TRX is restored.
Allowed & Recover When Check Res: The TRX aiding is enabled and the
switchback is not immediately performed after the faulty TRX is restored.
Instead, the switchback is performed during the resource check in the early
morning, usually 2 o'clock.
This parameter specifies the speech version supported by the BSC. The
value of this parameter has six bits.
The six bits (from the most significant bit to the least significant bit)
indicate the following speech versions respectively:
half-rate version 3, half-rate version 2, half-rate version 1, full-rate version
3, full-rate version 2, and full-rate version 1. Here, versions 3, 2, and 1
indicate AMR, EFR, and FR respectively.
If a bit is 1, you can infer that the BSC supports the corresponding speech
version. If a bit is 0, you can infer that the BSC does not support the
corresponding speech version.
For example, if the parameter is set to 001011, you can infer that full-rate
versions 1-2 and half-rate version 1 are supported.
In the HDLC networking mode, if only full-rate version 1 among the three
full-rate versions is selected, it is recommended that the AEC delay of all
the DSPs in the DPUX and DPUC be set to 141 so that the downlink traffic
flow is further decreased.
This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under half-rate
AMR calls. For details, see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)).
This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under full-rate
AMR calls. For details, see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)).
This parameter specifies the number of SACCH multi-frames under half-
rate AMR calls. For details, see the description of SACCH multi-frames.
This parameter specifies the number of SACCH multi-frames under full-rate
AMR calls. For details, see the description of SACCH multi-frames.
This parameter is used to adjust candidate target cells for directed retry.
When target cells are selected during direct retry, only the cells whose loads
are smaller than or equal to the Directed Retry Load Access Threshold are
selected as candidate target cells.
When Assignment Cell Load Judge Enabled is set to Yes, the directed try
procedure is started if the following two conditions are met: The cell
supports directed try. The load of the cell is greater than or equal to Cell
Direct Try Forbidden Threshold.
This parameter specifies the total number of paging times. The parameter
and the paging times configured on the MSC side together determine the
number of retransmissions of the paging message. The total paging times is
approximately equal to this parameter multiplied by the paging times
configured on the MSC side. At present, the Paging Times is set to 4 in the
MSC. The BSC does not support the mechanism for resending the paging
message; therefore, it processes a paging message each time it receives the
paging message. The BTS2X, BTS3X, and double-transceiver BTS support
paging retransmission.
For the BTS3X series and double-transceiver BTSs, this parameter
specifies the level threshold for the MS random access when the BTS
determines the RACH busy state. When the receive level of the random
access burst timeslot is greater than this threshold, the BTS considers that
the timeslot is busy. For the BTS3X series and the double-transceiver BTSs,
this parameter only indicates whether the timeslot is busy. The threshold
setting does not affect the normal access of the MS.
For the BTS2X series (excluding the BTS24), this parameter specifies the
level threshold for the BTS to determine an MS random access.When the
receive level of the random access burst timeslot is greater than this
threshold and the access demodulation is successful, the BTS considers that
the timeslot is busy and determines whether the RACH access is valid based
on the parameter Random Access Error Threshold. For the BTS2X, the
parameter RACH Busy Threshold is used to determine whether the timeslot
is busy. In addition, the parameter affects the normal access of the MS. The
MS access is allowed only when the level of the MS random access burst is
greater than the RACH Busy Threshold.
For the BTS24, this parameter has two functions. One function is indicating
the level threshold of the MS random access for the system to determine the
RACH busy state. When the receive level of the random access burst
timeslot is greater than this threshold, the BTS considers that the timeslot is
busy. The other function is indicating whether the MS access is allowed.The
MS access is allowed only when access level (including random access and
handover access) is greater than the threshold.
The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110
dBm to -47 dBm).
This parameter is used by the BTS to inform the BSC of radio link
connection failure.
When the BTS receives the SACCH measurement report from the MS, the
counter for determining whether a radio link is faulty is set to the value of
this parameter. Each time the BTS fails to decode the SACCH measurement
report sent by the MS, the counter decreases by 1. If the BTS successfully
decodes the SACCH measurement report, the counter increases by 2.
When the value of the counter is 0, the radio link fails.The BTS sends a
connection failure indication message to the BSC.The number of SACCH
multi-frames and the radio link failure counter in the system message
specify the radio link failure time on the uplink and that on the downlink
respectively. The judgment standard is whether the SACCH message is
correctly decoded.
This parameter specifies the length of timer T3150. For details, see GSM
Rec. 08.58 and 04.08.
When the BTS sends physical information to the MS, the BTS starts the
timer T3105.If the timer T3105 expires before BTS receives the SAMB
frame from MS, BTS resends physical information to MS and restarts the
timer T3105. The maximum times for resending physical information is
Ny1.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of Physical information
retransmissions. Assume that the maximum number is Ny1. If the number of
retransmissions exceeds Ny1 before the BTS receives any correct SAMB
frame from the MS, the BTS sends the BSC a connection failure message,
which can also be a handover failure message. After receiving the message,
the BSC releases the newly assigned dedicated channel and stops the timer
T3105.
During asynchronous handover, the MS constantly sends handover access
bursts to the BTS. Usually, the Timer T3124 is set to 320 ms. Upon
detecting the bursts, the BTS sends a Physical information message to the
MS over the main DCCH/FACCH and sends the
MSG_ABIS_HO_DETECT message to the BSC. Meanwhile, the timer
T3105 starts.
The Physical information containing information about different physical
layers guarantees correct MS access. If the timer T3105 expires before the
BTS receives the SAMB frame from the MS, the BTS resends the Physical
information message to the MS.
For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58 and 04.08.
This parameter specifies whether the 3G better cell handover algorithm is
allowed.
Yes: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed.
No: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is forbidden.
According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of TDD 3G
better cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a
TDD 3G better cell handover is triggered.
This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.
According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of TDD 3G
better cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a
TDD 3G better cell handover is triggered.
This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.
If both the Inter-System Handover Enable and the Better 3G Cell HO
Allowed parameters are set to Yes, a 3G better cell handover is triggered
when the RSCP of an adjacent 3G cell is greater than the TDD RSCP
Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO during a period of time. The value of this
parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).
If the Inter-RAT HO Preference parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell
By Threshold, and if the receive level of the first candidate cell among 2G
candidate cells is lower than or equal to the HO Preference Threshold for
2G Cell, the 3G cell handover is preferred. Otherwise, the 2G cell handover
is preferred.
The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
This parameter specifies whether an MS is preferentially handed over to a
2G cell or to a 3G cell.
During a measurement period, a fast handover occurs only if the difference
of path loss between a chain neighbor cell and the serving cell is greater
than or equal to the value of this parameter.
The level values 0 to 127 map with -64 dB to 63 dB.
This parameter specifies the penalty that is performed on the downlink level
of the original serving cell after a successful fast handover.
This parameter specifies the duration of penalty that is performed on the
original serving cell after a successful fast handover.
This parameter specifies the allowed number of invalid measurement reports
when the BSC uses the measurement reports for filtering. If the number of
received measurement reports is smaller than or equal to the value of this
parameter, no filtering is performed and no fast handover decision is made.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for
filtering after the BSC receives the measurement reports of the adjacent cell
from the BTS. This helps to avoid improper handover decision based on a
single inaccurate measurement report.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for
filtering after the BSC receives the measurement reports of the serving cell
from the BTS. This helps to avoid improper handover decision based on a
single inaccurate measurement report.
The fast handover must comply with the P/N criterion. That is, the
triggering conditions of fast handover must be met for N consecutive
seconds within P seconds.
This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion, that is, the period
during which the triggering conditions of fast handover are met. Such a
period is within the value defined by this parameter.
The fast handover must comply with the P/N criterion. That is, the
triggering conditions of fast handover must be met for N consecutive
seconds within P seconds.
This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. That is, if the
triggering conditions of fast handover is met for a period longer than or
equal to the value of this parameter, a fast handover is triggered.
During a measurement period, if the MS moves at a speed greater than the
value of this parameter, a fast handover is triggered.
During a measurement period, if the compensated downlink level of the
serving cell is smaller than the value of this parameter, a fast handover is
triggered.
The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
During a measurement period, if the filtered uplink level of the serving cell
is smaller than the value of this parameter, a fast handover is triggered.
The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
During the UL subcell to the OL subcell handover in the enhanced dualband
network, if the traffic load in the OL subcell is higher than the Inner Cell
Serious Overload Threshold, a load handover from the UL subcell to the OL
subcell cannot be triggered.
According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of enhanced
dualband handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, the
corresponding handover decision is triggered.
This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.
According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of enhanced
dualband handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, the
corresponding handover decision is triggered.
This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.
After a handover between the UL subcell and the OL subcell is successful,
no handover can be triggered within the period defined by this parameter.
This parameter specifies the level step of the load handover from the OL
subcell to the UL subcell.
This parameter specifies the hierarchical handover period of the load
handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell.
In Enhanced dualband If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is lower
than the UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold, all the calls in the cell send
handover requests at the same time and the load on the BSC increases in a
short time. Thus, congestion may occur in the target cell and call drops may
be caused. Through the hierarchical load handover algorithm, the calls in
the cell are handed over to the UL subcell by level.
This parameter specifies the period of load handover for each level.
This parameter specifies whether the load handover from the OL subcell to
the UL subcell is enabled.
If the traffic load of the UL subcell is higher than the UL subcell serious
overload threshold, the handover period from the UL subcell to the OL
subcell is decreased by the value of this parameter per second on the basis
of UL subcell load hierarchical HO period.
This parameter specifies the hierarchical level step of the load handover
from the UL subcell to the OL subcell.
This parameter specifies the hierarchical handover period of the load
handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell.
If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the UL subcell
general overload threshold, all the calls in the cell send handover requests at
the same time and the load on the BSC increases in a short time. Thus,
congestion may occur in the target cell and call drops may be caused.
Through the hierarchical load handover algorithm, the calls in the cell are
handed over to the OL subcell by level.
This parameter specifies the period of load handover for each level.
To prevent ping-pong handovers, this parameter should be decided before
the handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell. Suppose the signal
strength of serving cell is SS(s) and the signal strength of the adjacent cell is
SS(n). The decision condition for a handover from the OL subcell to the UL
subcell is as follows: SS(s) - SS(n) < Distance between Boundaries of UL
And OL Subcells - Distance Hysterisis Between Boudaries of UL And OL
Subcells.
This parameter is a relative value, which specifies the size of blank zone
between the UL subcell and the OL subcell. The greater the value of this
parameter is, the larger the blank zone is.
For the enhanced dualband handover algorithm, the boundaries of the OL
and UL subcells are determined according to the relative value between the
signal strength of serving cell and that of the adjacent cell. Suppose the
signal strength of serving cell is SS(s) and the signal strength of the adjacent
cell is SS(n). When SS(s) = SS(n), the system considers that it is the
boundary point of the UL subcell. When SS(s) - SS(n) > Distance between
Boundaries of UL And OL Subcells, it is the coverage area of the OL
subcell.
If the flow control level in the current system is greater than the value of this
parameter, the handover between the UL subcell and the OL subcell due to
low or high UL subcell load is not allowed.
If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this
parameter, the load handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell
is decreased by the value of Step length of UL subcell load HO(dB) per
second on the basis of UL subcell load hierarchical HO period, thus
speeding up the load handover.
If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this
parameter, some calls of the UL subcell is handed over to the OL subcell.
Moreover, the MS that sends the channel request message in the UL subcell
is preferentially assigned to the OL subcell.
This parameter specifies whether the channel request in the OL subcell is
preferentially processed over the channel request the UL subcell according
to the UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold. If the traffic load in the UL
subcell is lower than the UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold, the MS access
to the OL subcell is preferentially assigned to the UL subcell. This
parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell.
This parameter specifies whether the access request in the UL subcell is
preferentially processed over the access request in OL subcell according to
the UL subcell general overload threshold. If the traffic load in the UL
subcell is higher than the UL subcell general overload threshold, the MS
access to the UL subcell is preferentially assigned to the OL subcell. This
parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell.
In an enhanced dualband cell, if TCH seizure ratio of the UL subcell is
smaller than the value of this parameter, some calls of the OL subcell is
handed over to the UL subcell. Moreover, the MS that sends the channel
request message in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned to the UL
subcell.
This parameter specifies whether the 3G better cell handover algorithm is
allowed.
Yes: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed.
No: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is forbidden.
According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of 3G better cell
handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a 3G better
cell handover is triggered.
This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.
According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of 3G better cell
handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a 3G better
cell handover is triggered.
This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.
If both Inter-System Handover Enable and Better 3G Cell HO Allowed are
set to Yes, a 3G better cell handover is triggered when the Ec/No of an
adjacent 3G cell is greater than Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO
during a period of time.
The level values 0 to 49 map to -24 dB to 0 dB.
If both Inter-System Handover Enable and Better 3G Cell HO Allowed are
set to Yes, a 3G better cell handover is triggered when the RSCP of an
adjacent 3G cell is greater than RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO
during a period of time.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63
(corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).
If the Inter-RAT HO Preference parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell
By Threshold, and if the receive level of the first candidate cell among 2G
candidate cells is lower than or equal to the HO Preference Threshold for
2G Cell, the 3G cell handover is preferred. Otherwise, the 2G cell handover
is preferred.
The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
This parameter specifies whether an MS is preferentially handed over to a
2G cell or to a 3G cell.
This parameter specifies the receive level threshold of the handover from
the UL subcell to the OL subcell of the PS service in the PS concentric
algorithm.
This parameter specifies the receive level threshold of the handover from
the OL subcell to the UL subcell of the PS service in the PS concentric
algorithm.
This parameter specifies the receive quality threshold of the AMR HR voice
service. It is used in concentric cell handover decision. The value of this
parameter ranges from 0 to 70, corresponding to RQ (receive quality level 0-
7) x 10.
This parameter specifies the receive quality threshold of the AMR FR voice
service. It is used in concentric cell handover decision.
The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 70, corresponding to RQ
(receive quality level 0-7) x 10.
This parameter specifies the hierarchical level step of the load handover
from the OL subcell to the UL subcell.
If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is higher than the En Iuo Out
Cell General OverLoad Threshold, all the calls in the cell send handover
requests at the same time and the load on the BSC increases in a short time.
Thus, congestion may occur in the target cell and call drops may be caused.
Through the hierarchical load handover algorithm, the calls in the cell are
handed over to the target cell by level.
This parameter specifies the period of load handover for each level.
If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this
parameter, the load handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell
is decreased by the value of Modified step length of UL load HO period per
second on the basis of UL subcell load hierarchical HO period, thus
speeding up the load handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell.
If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this
parameter, some calls in the UL subcell are handed over to the OL subcell.
If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is smaller than the value of this
parameter, some calls in the OL subcell are handed over to the UL subcell.
When deciding whether a call can be handed over from the UL subcell to
the OL subcell, the BSC determines whether the number of handover
failures reaches the MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail. If the number reaches
the MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail, the UL subcell to OL subcell handover
is prohibited during the Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail. Otherwise, the
UL subcell to OL subcell handover is allowed.
After an OL subcell to UL subcell handover fails, the call cannot be handed
over from the OL subcell to the UL subcell during the Penalty Time after
OtoU HO Fail.
After a UL subcell to OL subcell handover fails, the call cannot be handed
over from the UL subcell to the OL subcell during the Penalty Time after
UtoO HO Fail.
If handover penalty is enabled, when a call is handed over from the OL
subcell to the UL subcell, it cannot be handed over back to the OL subcell
during Penalty Time of UtoO HO to avoid ping-pong handovers.
If this parameter is set to 0, handover penalty is not performed on the OL
subcell to the UL subcell handover.
During the handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell, the calls are
hierarchically handled from level 63 to 0. Therefore, the calls with higher
receive level can be handed over to the OL subcell first.
The handover strip is decreased by Underlay HO Step Level every
Underlay HO Step Period.
This parameter, together with Underlay HO Step Period, controls the level
strip of the handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell. In other words,
the time taken in subtracting Underlay HO Step Level from the handover
strip is Underlay HO Step Period.
When multiple requests for the UL-to-OL handover are sent simultaneously,
calls with lower level may be handed over first. This does not conform to
the principle that the call of the best quality should be handed over
preferentially.
Therefore, the hierarchy handover algorithm is adopted to hand over the
calls with higher RX level from the UL subcell to OL subcell. The value of
this parameter is the time taken in subtracting Underlay HO Step Level from
the signal level of the handover strip.
This parameter determines whether the traffic load in the UL subcell
determines the UL subcell to OL subcell handover or the OL subcell to UL
subcell handover in an enhanced concentric cell.
When this parameter is set to Yes,
If the call is in the OL subcell and if the OL to UL HO Allowed parameter
is set to Yes, the OL subcell to UL subcell handover is triggered when the
traffic load in the UL subcell is lower than En Iuo Out Cell Low Load
Threshold.
If the call is in the UL subcell and the UL subcell to OL subcell handover is
triggered, and if the UL to OL HO Allowed parameter is set to Yes, a timer
is started when the traffic load in the UL subcell is greater than En Iuo Out
Cell General OverLoad Threshold, thus handing over the MSs in the UL
subcell to the OL subcell. If the traffic load in the UL subcell is lower than
En Iuo Out Cell General OverLoad Threshold, the related timer is stopped,
and the MSs in the UL subcell are not handed over to the OL subcell.
When this parameter is set to No, the traffic load in the UL subcell is not
taken into account for triggering the UL subcell to OL subcell handover or
the OL subcell to UL subcell handover in an enhanced concentric cell.
This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the
OL subcell and UL subcell of an enhanced concentric cell.
If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes, the coverage
of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by UtoO HO Received
Level Threshold, OtoU HO Received Level Threshold, RX_QUAL
Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis.
The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the
OL subcell and UL subcell of an enhanced concentric cell.
If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes, the coverage
of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by OtoU HO Received
Level Threshold, UtoO HO Received Level Threshold, RX_QUAL
Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis.
The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
In a concentric cell, the channel assignment for an incoming-BSC handover
can be processed in one of the following modes:
Overlaid Subcell: A channel in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned.
Underlaid Subcell: A channel in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned.
No Preference: A channel is assigned according to general channel
assignment algorithms.
In a concentric cell, an intra-BSC incoming cell handover request can be
processed in one of the following modes:
System Optimization: The measurement level on the BCCH of the target
cell is added to the intra-BSC inter-cell handover request messages. Then,
the BSC compares the measurement value with RX_LEV Threshold, and
determines the preferred service layer. During the comparison and
determination, the BSC does not take the RX_LEV Hysteresis into
consideration.
Overlaid Subcell: A channel in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned.
Underlaid Subcell: A channel in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned.
No Preference: A channel is assigned according to general channel
assignment algorithms.
If TA Pref. of Imme-Assign Allowed is set to Yes and the access_delay in
the channel request message is lower than TA Threshold of Imme-Assign
Pref., a channel in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned during the
immediate assignment. Otherwise, a channel in the UL subcell is
preferentially assigned.
This parameter specifies whether a channel is assigned based on the
access_delay in the channel request message during an immediate
assignment.
If TA Pref. of Imme-Assign Allowed is set to No, a channel in the UL
subcell is preferentially assigned during the immediate assignment.
If TA Pref. of Imme-Assign Allowed is set to Yes and the access_delay in
the channel request message is lower than TA Threshold of Imme-Assign
Pref., a channel in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned during the
immediate assignment. Otherwise, a channel in the UL subcell is
preferentially assigned.
If the Assign Optimum Layer parameter is set to System Optimization, the
current receive level on the SDCCH can be estimated (by interpolating and
filtering) based on the uplink measurement value in the measurement reports
sent on the SDCCH. Then, the BSC determines whether a TCH in the UL
subcell or in the OL subcell should be assigned based on the result of
comparing the receive level on the SDCCH and Assign-optimum-level
Threshold, and the result of comparing the TA and TA Threshold of
Assignment Pref..
Only when the receive level on the SDCCH is greater than or equal to
Assign-optimum-level Threshold and the TA is lower than TA Threshold of
Assignment Pref., a TCH in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned to the
MS. Otherwise, a TCH in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned to ensure
successful assignment.
If the Assign Optimum Layer parameter is set to System Optimization, the
current receive level on the SDCCH can be estimated (by interpolating and
filtering) based on the uplink measurement value in the measurement reports
sent on the SDCCH. Then, the BSC determines whether a TCH in the UL
subcell or in the OL subcell should be assigned based on the result of
comparing the uplink receive level on the SDCCH and Assign-optimum-
level Threshold, and the result of comparing the TA and TA Threshold of
Assignment Pref..
Only when the uplink receive level on the SDCCH is greater than or equal
to Assign-optimum-level Threshold and the TA is lower than TA Threshold
of Assignment Pref., a TCH in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned to
the MS. Otherwise, a TCH in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned to
ensure successful assignment.
The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
In a concentric cell, the TCH can be assigned in the following modes:
System Optimization: Based on the measurement reports sent on the
SDCCH, the BSC determines which service layer should be preferentially
selected.
Underlaid Subcell: The TCH in the UL subcell are preferentially assigned
to an MS.
Overlaid Subcell: The TCH in the OL subcell are preferentially assigned to
an MS.
No preference: A channel is assigned according to general channel
assignment algorithms.
According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of concentric cell
handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a concentric
cell handover is triggered.
This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.
According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of concentric cell
handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a concentric
cell handover is triggered.
This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.
This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the
OL subcell and UL subcell.
If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No, the coverage of
the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by TA Hysteresis, RX_LEV
Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL Threshold, and TA Threshold.
If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes, the coverage
of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by TA Hysteresis, UtoO HO
Received Level Threshold, OtoU HO Received Level Threshold,
RX_QUAL Threshold, and TA Threshold.
#N/A
One of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and of
the UL subcell. RX_QUAL Threshold = RQ (ranging from level 0 to level
7) x 10.
If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No, the coverage of
the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV Threshold,
RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA
Hysteresis. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes, the
coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_QUAL
Threshold, UtoO HO Received Level Threshold, OtoU HO Received Level
Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis.
This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the
OL subcell and UL subcell.
When the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No, the
coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV
Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL Threshold, TA Threshold, and
TA Hysteresis. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes,
this parameter is invalid.
This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the
OL subcell and UL subcell.
When the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No, the
coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV
Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL Threshold, TA Threshold, and
TA Hysteresis. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes,
this parameter is invalid.
The RX_LEV Threshold parameter refers to the threshold of the downlink
receive level.
The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
UO Signal Intensity Difference = UO Amplifier Power Difference +
Combiner Insertion Loss Difference + Path Loss Difference of Different
Antennas + Pass Loss Difference of Different Frequencies.
Measure the receive level of the UL subcell and OL subcell at several
different places if the UL subcell and OL subcell use different antennas. The
recommended number of places is five.
The OL subcell and the UL subcell have different transmit power.
Therefore, the receive level of the MS in the UL subcell is different from
that in the OL subcell. This parameter specifies the power that should be
compensated for the OL subcell. The value of this parameter should be the
sum of these items: UO Amplifier Power Difference, Combiner Insertion
Loss Difference, Path Loss Difference of Different Antennas, and Pass Loss
Difference of Different Frequencies.
This value is measured at the site. Multiple-point measurements should be
performed when different antennas are used for the OL subcell and UL
subcell. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes, this
parameter is invalid. In other words, the power of the OL subcell is not
compensated.
This parameter specifies whether the TA is used as a decisive condition for
the concentric cell handover.
This parameter specifies whether the downlink receive quality is used as a
decisive condition for the concentric cell handover.
This parameter specifies whether the downlink receive level is used as a
decisive condition for the concentric cell handover.
This parameter specifies whether the handover from the OL subcell to the
UL subcell is enabled.
This parameter specifies whether the handover from the UL subcell to the
OL subcell is enabled.
This parameter specifies the load threshold of the TIGHT BCCH handover.
To trigger an intra-cell TIGHT BCCH handover, the load of the non-BCCH
frequencies should be higher than the Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH
HO.
This parameter specifies the signal quality threshold of the TIGHT BCCH
handover. To trigger an intra-cell TIGHT BCCH handover from a TCH to a
BCCH, the downlink receive quality should be lower than the RX_QUAL
Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO.
This parameter specifies the K offset used in K ranking.
To reduce the ping-pong effect in an handover, you are advised to subtract
K Bias from the actual downlink receive level of the candidate cells before
ranking their downlink receive level based on the K principle.
This parameter specifies the expected uplink receive level on a new channel
after an MS is handed over to a new cell. This parameter is used for the MS
Power Prediction after HO. This parameter should be consistent with the
UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold in Huawei II power control algorithm, thus
ensuring a relatively high uplink receive level on the new channel after
handover, increasing the transmit power of the MS, and avoiding call drops
caused by too low a uplink receive level.
The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110
dBm to -47 dBm).
This parameter specifies the period in which penalty is performed on the
adjacent cells of the cell where a fast-moving MS is located. The adjacent
cells must be located at the Macro, Micro, or Pico layer other than the
Umbrella layer.
If an MS is moving fast, the BSC performs penalty on the adjacent cells of
the cell where the MS is located. This parameter specifies the penalty value.
Only when the MS is located at the Umbrella layer and the adjacent cells are
located at the Macro, Micro, or Pico layer, penalty is performed.
This parameter is valid within only the Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO.
The two intra-cell handovers that occur during the period specified by this
parameter are regarded as consecutive handovers.
When the number of consecutive intra-cell handovers reaches the maximum
allowed, a timer is started to forbid the intra-cell handover.
Intra-cell handovers are allowed only when the timer expires.
This parameter determines the maximum number of consecutive intra-cell
handovers allowed.
If the interval of two continuous intra-cell handovers is shorter than a
specified threshold, the two handovers are regarded as consecutive
handovers. If multiple consecutive intra-cell handovers occur, the intra-cell
handover is forbidden for a period.
The time threshold is calculated based on the cell radius (r) and the velocity
(v). The threshold equals 2r/v. If the time taken by an MS to pass a cell is
smaller than this threshold, the MS is regarded as moving fast. Otherwise,
the MS is regarded as moving slow.
According to the P/N criterion, if the MS fast passes N cells among the P
micro cells, the BSC starts to trigger a fast-moving micro-to-macro cell
handover. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.
According to the P/N criterion, if the MS fast passes N cells among the P
micro cells, the BSC starts to trigger a fast-moving micro-to-macro cell
handover. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.
In hierarchical load handover, the handover strip increases by one Load HO
Step Level for every Load HO Step Period, starting from the Edge HO DL
RX_LEV Threshold. The handovers are performed as such until all the calls
whose receive levels are within the range of (Edge HO DL RX_LEV
Threshold, Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold + Load HO Bandwidth) are
handed off the current serving cell.
The value of Load HO Step Level must be smaller than that of the Load
HO Bandwidth.
When the load of the cell is equal to or greater than the Load HO Threshold,
all the calls served by the cell may send handover requests simultaneously,
and the load on the CPU will increase rapidly as a consequence. In some
cases, call drops may occur due to traffic congestion in the cell. Therefore,
the hierarchical handover algorithm for load handover is used for the BSC
to control the number of users to be handed over by levels.
This parameter specifies the period for each load handover level.
The setting of this parameter is dependent on the Edge HO DL RX_LEV
Threshold parameter.
Only when the receive level of the serving cell is within the range of (Edge
HO DL RX_LEV Threshold, Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold + Load HO
Bandwidth), a load handover is allowed.
If the cell load is smaller than the value of this parameter, the cell can
receive the MSs handed over from other cells. Otherwise, the cell rejects the
MSs handed over from other cells.
When Load HO Allowed is set to Yes, Load HO Threshold should be set to
85.
The traffic load of a cell refers to the TCH seizure rate in the cell.
The load handover is triggered when the traffic load in a cell is greater than
the value of this parameter. In other words, the load handover is triggered
when the ratio of TCHs occupied in a cell reaches the threshold defined for
load handover.
System flux thresholds correspond to the system flux obtained based on
message packets, CPU load, and FID queuing load. The system flux level is
the current flux control level of the system.
0-11: There are 12 flow control levels. Where, 0 indicates the lowest level
and 11 indicates the highest level.
A load handover is allowed only when the system flux is lower than the
value of this parameter. The handover performed over the maximum
threshold may have tremendous impacts on the system. Thus, this parameter
should not be set to a higher value.
1) The flow control level algorithm for the assigned system messages:
[(Average Message Usage - Inner Flow Control Discard Begin
Threshold)/(Inner Flow Control Discard All Threshold - Inner Flow Control
Discard Begin Threshold) x 100]/10+1 (round-down for division operation).
If the value is smaller than Inner Flow Control Discard Begin Threshold,
Level 0 is used. If the value is equal to or greater than Inner Flow Control
Discard Begin Threshold, the level is calculated. The value range is from 0
to 11.
2) Flow control threshold for the CPU to start to discard the channel access
messages and paging messages: 80%
. Flow control threshold for the CPU to discard all channel access messages
and paging messages: 100%
. CPU usage smaller than 80% corresponds to level 0. CPU usage equal to
or greater than CPU flow control threshold 80% corresponds to level 2. An
increase of 5% means an increase of 2 levels. Level 10 is the highest. The
level value can be 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, and 10.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7
by 10. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the uplink
receive quality of the MS is greater than the value of this parameter.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7
by 10. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink
receive quality of the MS is greater than the value of this parameter.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7
by 10. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the uplink
receive quality of the MS is greater than the value of this parameter.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7
by 10. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink
receive quality of the MS is greater than the value of this parameter.
This parameter specifies the quality level offset of the interface handover of
the AMR FR service relative to non-AMR services or the AMR HR service
(x 10). When determining whether an interference handover should be
triggered, the system compares the receive quality of the MS minus the
RXLEVOff with the handover threshold.
For the AMR calls, this parameter, together with RXQUALn, is used in
interference handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily
triggered if this parameter is set to a small value.
When n = 1, that is, when the receive level of the serving cell is smaller
than or equal to 30, this parameter is invalid.
If the receive level of the serving cell is greater than or equal to 63, and if
the uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is
greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or
downlink interference exists.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7
by 10.
If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 59 to 62, and if the
uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is
greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or
downlink interference exists.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7
by 10.
If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 56 to 58, and if the
uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is
greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or
downlink interference exists.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7
by 10.
If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 53 to 55, and if the
uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is
greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or
downlink interference exists.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7
by 10.
If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 49 to 52, and if the
uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is
greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or
downlink interference exists.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7
by 10.
If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 46 to 48, and if the
uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is
greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or
downlink interference exists.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7
by 10.
If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 42 to 45, and if the
uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is
greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or
downlink interference exists.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7
by 10.
If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 39 to 41, and if the
uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is
greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or
downlink interference exists.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7
by 10.
If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 36 to 38, and if the
uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is
greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or
downlink interference exists.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7
by 10.
If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 32 to 35, and if the
uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is
greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or
downlink interference exists.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7
by 10.
If the receive level of the serving cell is 31, and if the uplink or downlink
receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to
the value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference
exists.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7
by 10.
If the receive level of the serving cell is smaller than or equal to 30, and if
the uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is
greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or
downlink interference exists.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7
by 10.
If the number of consecutive measurement reports without the downlink
measurement report is smaller than or equal to the value of this parameter,
the handover decision related to no downlink measurement report is
allowed.
If the downlink MRs are not included in the MRs received, and if the uplink
receive quality is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, a no
downlink measurement report emergency handover is triggered.
When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover is
preferentially selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no
candidate cell is available and if intra-cell handovers are allowed.
This parameter is used to control the no downlink measurement report
handover algorithm.
If this parameter is set to 0, the no downlink measurement report handover
algorithm is disabled. Therefore, handover decision related to no downlink
measurement report is not allowed in this cell.
If this parameter is set to 1, the no downlink measurement report handover
algorithm is enabled. Therefore, handover decision related to no downlink
measurement report is allowed in this cell.
This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped
receive level. This parameter indicate specifies the drop trend of the receive
level within a period.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, a more rapid level drop is required
for triggering a rapid level drop handover. This parameter is used together
with the Filter Parameters A1 to A8.
For details, refer to Filter Parameters A1-A8.
This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped
receive level. Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter
parameters. The corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the
value of A1 to A8 can be obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured
value, and B is the negative value of the configured value):
C1(nt) = A1 x C(nt) + A2 x C(nt-t) + A3 x C(nt-2t) ++ A8 x C(nt-7t).
Where, C(nt) is the uplink RX_Level of the serving cell in the MR received
at the time of nt. If C1(nt) is smaller than B, and if C(nt) is below the Edge
HO RX_LEV Thrsh., then the signal level is considered to be rapid
dropping.
Filter parameters A1 to A8 may be smaller than or equal to 10. Parameters
A1 to A8 correspond to a1 to a8 in the program, and ai = Ai-10 (i = 1-8).
Therefore, among a1 to a8 in the program, there must be values smaller than
or equal to 0.
For example, if the receive level drops rapidly in a granularity period, you
need to set A3 to A8 to 10, A1 to 0, and A2 to 20. In this case, C1(nt) = a1
x C (nt) + a2 x C(nt-t) = 10C(nt-t)-10C(nt). To trigger a rapid level drop
handover, you should set C1(nt) to a value smaller than B. and then the fast
level drop appears in a MR period. The formula reflects the rapid drop of
the cell level in an MR.
You can configure the filter to define the number of MRs used and the
extent to which the level drops. However, the setting of this parameter is
complicated.
This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped
receive level. Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter
parameters. The corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the
value of A1 to A8 can be obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured
value, and B is the negative value of the configured value):
C1(nt) = A1 x C(nt) + A2 x C(nt-t) + A3 x C(nt-2t) ++ A8 x C(nt-7t).
Where, C(nt) is the uplink RX_Level of the serving cell in the MR received
at the time of nt. If C1(nt) is smaller than B, and if C(nt) is below the Edge
HO RX_LEV Thrsh., then the signal level is considered to be rapid
dropping.
Filter parameters A1 to A8 may be smaller than or equal to 10. Parameters
A1 to A8 correspond to a1 to a8 in the program, and ai = Ai-10 (i = 1-8).
Therefore, among a1 to a8 in the program, there must be values smaller than
or equal to 0.
For example, if the receive level drops rapidly in a granularity period, you
need to set A3 to A8 to 10, A1 to 0, and A2 to 20. In this case, C1(nt) = a1
x C (nt) + a2 x C(nt-t) = 10C(nt-t)-10C(nt). To trigger a rapid level drop
handover, you should set C1(nt) to a value smaller than B. and then the fast
level drop appears in a MR period. The formula reflects the rapid drop of
the cell level in an MR.
You can configure the filter to define the number of MRs used and the
extent to which the level drops. However, the setting of this parameter is
complicated.
This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped
receive level. Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter
parameters. The corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the
value of A1 to A8 can be obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured
value, and B is the negative value of the configured value):
C1(nt) = A1 x C(nt) + A2 x C(nt-t) + A3 x C(nt-2t) ++ A8 x C(nt-7t).
Where, C(nt) is the uplink RX_Level of the serving cell in the MR received
at the time of nt. If C1(nt) is smaller than B, and if C(nt) is below the Edge
HO RX_LEV Thrsh., then the signal level is considered to be rapid
dropping.
Filter parameters A1 to A8 may be smaller than or equal to 10. Parameters
A1 to A8 correspond to a1 to a8 in the program, and ai = Ai-10 (i = 1-8).
Therefore, among a1 to a8 in the program, there must be values smaller than
or equal to 0.
For example, if the receive level drops rapidly in a granularity period, you
need to set A3 to A8 to 10, A1 to 0, and A2 to 20. In this case, C1(nt) = a1
x C (nt) + a2 x C(nt-t) = 10C(nt-t)-10C(nt). To trigger a rapid level drop
handover, you should set C1(nt) to a value smaller than B. and then the fast
level drop appears in a MR period. The formula reflects the rapid drop of
the cell level in an MR.
You can configure the filter to define the number of MRs used and the
extent to which the level drops. However, the setting of this parameter is
complicated.
This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped
receive level. Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter
parameters. The corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the
value of A1 to A8 can be obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured
value, and B is the negative value of the configured value):
C1(nt) = A1 x C(nt) + A2 x C(nt-t) + A3 x C(nt-2t) ++ A8 x C(nt-7t).
Where, C(nt) is the uplink RX_Level of the serving cell in the MR received
at the time of nt. If C1(nt) is smaller than B, and if C(nt) is below the Edge
HO RX_LEV Thrsh., then the signal level is considered to be rapid
dropping.
Filter parameters A1 to A8 may be smaller than or equal to 10. Parameters
A1 to A8 correspond to a1 to a8 in the program, and ai = Ai-10 (i = 1-8).
Therefore, among a1 to a8 in the program, there must be values smaller than
or equal to 0.
For example, if the receive level drops rapidly in a granularity period, you
need to set A3 to A8 to 10, A1 to 0, and A2 to 20. In this case, C1(nt) = a1
x C (nt) + a2 x C(nt-t) = 10C(nt-t)-10C(nt). To trigger a rapid level drop
handover, you should set C1(nt) to a value smaller than B. and then the fast
level drop appears in a MR period. The formula reflects the rapid drop of
the cell level in an MR.
You can configure the filter to define the number of MRs used and the
extent to which the level drops. However, the setting of this parameter is
complicated.
This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped
receive level. Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter
parameters. The corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the
value of A1 to A8 can be obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured
value, and B is the negative value of the configured value):
C1(nt) = A1 x C(nt) + A2 x C(nt-t) + A3 x C(nt-2t) ++ A8 x C(nt-7t).
Where, C(nt) is the uplink RX_Level of the serving cell in the MR received
at the time of nt. If C1(nt) is smaller than B, and if C(nt) is below the Edge
HO RX_LEV Thrsh., then the signal level is considered to be rapid
dropping.
Filter parameters A1 to A8 may be smaller than or equal to 10. Parameters
A1 to A8 correspond to a1 to a8 in the program, and ai = Ai-10 (i = 1-8).
Therefore, among a1 to a8 in the program, there must be values smaller than
or equal to 0.
For example, if the receive level drops rapidly in a granularity period, you
need to set A3 to A8 to 10, A1 to 0, and A2 to 20. In this case, C1(nt) = a1
x C (nt) + a2 x C(nt-t) = 10C(nt-t)-10C(nt). To trigger a rapid level drop
handover, you should set C1(nt) to a value smaller than B. and then the fast
level drop appears in a MR period. The formula reflects the rapid drop of
the cell level in an MR.
You can configure the filter to define the number of MRs used and the
extent to which the level drops. However, the setting of this parameter is
complicated.
This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped
receive level. Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter
parameters. The corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the
value of A1 to A8 can be obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured
value, and B is the negative value of the configured value):
C1(nt) = A1 x C(nt) + A2 x C(nt-t) + A3 x C(nt-2t) ++ A8 x C(nt-7t).
Where, C(nt) is the uplink RX_Level of the serving cell in the MR received
at the time of nt. If C1(nt) is smaller than B, and if C(nt) is below the Edge
HO RX_LEV Thrsh., then the signal level is considered to be rapid
dropping.
Filter parameters A1 to A8 may be smaller than or equal to 10. Parameters
A1 to A8 correspond to a1 to a8 in the program, and ai = Ai-10 (i = 1-8).
Therefore, among a1 to a8 in the program, there must be values smaller than
or equal to 0.
For example, if the receive level drops rapidly in a granularity period, you
need to set A3 to A8 to 10, A1 to 0, and A2 to 20. In this case, C1(nt) = a1
x C (nt) + a2 x C(nt-t) = 10C(nt-t)-10C(nt). To trigger a rapid level drop
handover, you should set C1(nt) to a value smaller than B. and then the fast
level drop appears in a MR period. The formula reflects the rapid drop of
the cell level in an MR.
You can configure the filter to define the number of MRs used and the
extent to which the level drops. However, the setting of this parameter is
complicated.
This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped
receive level. Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter
parameters. The corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the
value of A1 to A8 can be obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured
value, and B is the negative value of the configured value):
C1(nt) = A1 x C(nt) + A2 x C(nt-t) + A3 x C(nt-2t) ++ A8 x C(nt-7t).
Where, C(nt) is the uplink RX_Level of the serving cell in the MR received
at the time of nt. If C1(nt) is smaller than B, and if C(nt) is below the Edge
HO RX_LEV Thrsh., then the signal level is considered to be rapid
dropping.
Filter parameters A1 to A8 may be smaller than or equal to 10. Parameters
A1 to A8 correspond to a1 to a8 in the program, and ai = Ai-10 (i = 1-8).
Therefore, among a1 to a8 in the program, there must be values smaller than
or equal to 0.
For example, if the receive level drops rapidly in a granularity period, you
need to set A3 to A8 to 10, A1 to 0, and A2 to 20. In this case, C1(nt) = a1
x C (nt) + a2 x C(nt-t) = 10C(nt-t)-10C(nt). To trigger a rapid level drop
handover, you should set C1(nt) to a value smaller than B. and then the fast
level drop appears in a MR period. The formula reflects the rapid drop of
the cell level in an MR.
You can configure the filter to define the number of MRs used and the
extent to which the level drops. However, the setting of this parameter is
complicated.
This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped
receive level. Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter
parameters. The corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the
value of A1 to A8 can be obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured
value, and B is the negative value of the configured value):
C1(nt) = A1 x C(nt) + A2 x C(nt-t) + A3 x C(nt-2t) ++ A8 x C(nt-7t).
Where, C(nt) is the uplink RX_Level of the serving cell in the MR received
at the time of nt. If C1(nt) is smaller than B, and if C(nt) is below the Edge
HO RX_LEV Thrsh., then the signal level is considered to be rapid
dropping.
Filter parameters A1 to A8 may be smaller than or equal to 10. Parameters
A1 to A8 correspond to a1 to a8 in the program, and ai = Ai-10 (i = 1-8).
Therefore, among a1 to a8 in the program, there must be values smaller than
or equal to 0.
For example, if the receive level drops rapidly in a granularity period, you
need to set A3 to A8 to 10, A1 to 0, and A2 to 20. In this case, C1(nt) = a1
x C (nt) + a2 x C(nt-t) = 10C(nt-t)-10C(nt). To trigger a rapid level drop
handover, you should set C1(nt) to a value smaller than B. and then the fast
level drop appears in a MR period. The formula reflects the rapid drop of
the cell level in an MR.
You can configure the filter to define the number of MRs used and the
extent to which the level drops. However, the setting of this parameter is
complicated.
This parameter specifies the uplink quality threshold of an emergency
handover. An emergency handover due to bad quality is triggered when the
uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to the UL Qual. Threshold.
When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover should be
preferentially selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no
candidate cell is available and if intra-cell handovers are allowed.
This parameter specifies the downlink receive quality threshold of an
emergency handover. An emergency handover is triggered when the
downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to the DL Qual. Threshold.
When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover should be
preferentially selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no
candidate cell is available and if intra-cell handovers are allowed.
An emergency handover is triggered when TA is greater than or equal to the
value of this parameter.
This parameter is used as a switch to control the value determination
method of measurement reports. When this parameter is set to Open, if
DTX is used, the SUB values in the MR should be selected. Otherwise, the
PULL values in the MR should be selected.
This parameter specifies the value of the timer used for adjacent cell penalty
after handover failure due to data configuration.
This parameter specifies the value of the timer used for adjacent cell penalty
after handover failure due to the Um interface error.
This parameter specifies the value of the timer used for adjacent cell penalty
after handover failure due to cell congestion.
When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the filter length for
the TCH NBR_RCVD_BLOCK.
By setting this parameter, you can use the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in
multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in a
single EMR is inaccurate.
When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the filter length for
the SDCCH NBR_RCVD_BLOCK.
By setting this parameter, you can use the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in
multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in a
single EMR is inaccurate.
This parameter specifies the penalty time for AMR full rate to half rate (FR-
to-HR) handovers. Before the timer expires, no AMR FR-to-HR handover is
allowed if the previous FR-to-HR handover fails due to channel
unavailability or channel mismatch.
The greater the value of this parameter is, the longer the penalty time after
AMR TCHF-H HO Fail is. In other words, triggering AMR handover
becomes more difficult.
When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the length of the
filter for the TCH REP_QUANT.
By setting this parameter, you can use the REP_QUANT in multiple EMRs,
thus avoiding the case that the REP_QUANT in a single EMR is inaccurate.
When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the length of the
filter for the SDCCH REP_QUANT.
By setting this parameter, you can use the REP_QUANT in multiple EMRs,
thus avoiding the case that the REP_QUANT in a single EMR is inaccurate.
This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used
for averaging the CV_BEP on the TCH.
By setting this parameter, you can use the CV_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus
avoiding the case that the CV_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate.
This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used
for averaging the CV_BEP on the SDCCH.
By setting this parameter, you can use the CV_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus
avoiding the case that the CV_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate.
This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure
duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS.
This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used
for averaging the MEAN_BEP on the TCH.
By setting this parameter, you can use the MEAN_BEP in multiple EMRs,
thus avoiding the case that the MEAN_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate.
This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used
for averaging the MEAN_BEP on the SDCCH.
By setting this parameter, you can use the MEAN_BEP in multiple EMRs,
thus avoiding the case that the MEAN_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate.
This parameter specifies the duration of the penalty imposed on the original
serving cell after an emergency handover due to timing advance is
performed.
After an emergency handover is performed due to TA, the receive level of
the original serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. Thus, other cells
are given higher priority and handover to the original serving cell is not
allowed.
This parameter specifies the penalty on the signal strength of the original
serving cell to avoid ping-pong handovers after an emergency handover due
to the timing advance. This parameter is valid only within the Penalty Time
after TA HO.
After an emergency handover is performed due to TA, the receive level of
the original serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. Thus, other cells
are given higher priority and handover to the original serving cell is not
allowed.
The penalty level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
This parameter specifies the duration of the penalty imposed on the original
cell where an emergency handover associated with bad signal quality is
initiated.
During the penalty time, the receive level of the original serving cell is
decreased by the penalty level. Thus, other cells are given higher priority
and handover to the original serving cell is not allowed.
This parameter specifies the degree of penalty imposed on the original
serving cell where an emergency handover associated with bad signal
quality is initiated. This parameter is defined to avoid ping-pong handover
and is valid only within the Penalty Time after BQ HO.
After an emergency handover is performed due to bad quality, the receive
level of the serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. Thus, other cells
are given higher priority and handover to the serving cell is not allowed.
The penalty level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
This parameter specifies the penalty level imposed on the target cell.
This parameter is valid only within the duration of the cell penalty time.
The penalty level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for
averaging the timing advance.
The TA value in a single MR may be inaccurate. You can set this parameter
to average the TA value in multiple MRs. The average TA value serves as
the basis for handover decision.
This parameter specifies the number of MRs used for averaging the signal
strength in neighbor cells. This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of
signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover
decisions.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for
averaging the channel quality on the SDCCH.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for
averaging the signal strength on the SDCCH.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for
averaging the speech/data TCH signal strength.
This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh
Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for
averaging the speech/data TCH signal strength.
This parameter specifies the allowed number of consecutive MRs that are
lost during interpolation.
If the number of consecutive MRs that are lost is equal to or smaller than
the value of this parameter, the linear interpolation processing of the lost
MRs is performed according to two consecutive MRs that are lost.
If the number of consecutive MRs that are lost is greater than the value of
this parameter, all lost MRs are discarded, and calculations are made again
when new MRs are received.
This parameter is used to select the candidate cells during directed retry. If
the receive level of an adjacent cell is greater than the value of this
parameter, the adjacent cell can be selected as a candidate cell for directed
retry. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
This parameter specifies the frequency at which the BTS sends the
preprocessed MR to the BSC. After preprocessing the MRs, the BTS sends
the preprocessed MRs to the BSC. For example, if this parameter is set to
Twice every second, the BTS sends preprocessed MRs to the BSC every 0.5
second.
This parameter specifies whether the BS/MS power class should be
transferred from the BTS to the BSC.
This parameter specifies whether the BTS should send the original
measurement report to the BSC. If this parameter is set to Yes, the BTS
should send the preprocessed MR and the original MR to the BSC.
This parameter specifies whether the BTS should preprocess MRs. This
parameter determines whether transmit power is controlled by the BTS or
by the BSC. This parameter is set to YES if power control is performed by
the BTS. This parameter is set to NO if power control is performed by the
BSC.
This parameter specifies whether an MS can use the optimum transmit
power instead of the maximum transmit power to access the new channel
after a handover. The purpose is to minimize system interference and
improve signal quality.
This parameter specifies whether to penalize the target cell where a
handover fails or the serving cell where the TA is too great or the signal
quality is too bad.
If the target cell is congested and an incoming cell handover fails, a penalty
is performed on the target cell to avoid the handover of the MS to the cell.
When the TA is great or the signal quality is bad, ping-pong handovers are
likely to occur. If a handover fails, a penalty should be performed on the
serving cell. These kinds of penalties can be performed on cells in one BSC
or on external cells.
This parameter specifies whether to allow the inter-BSC SDCCH handover.
After the handover prohibition time for the initial access of an MS, the MS
can be handed over to another SDCCH in another BSC before a TCH is
assigned.
This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive
emergency handovers. No emergency handover is allowed during the
minimum interval.
When the conditions for an emergency handover are met, an emergency
handover timer is started. Another emergency handover decision can be
made only when the timer expires.
This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive
handovers. No handover is allowed during the minimum interval.
A timer starts after a handover is complete, and a subsequent handover is
allowed only after the timer expires. The value of this parameter is the
length of the timer. The parameter is used to avoid frequent handovers.
After a new SDCCH is assigned to an MS, the MS can be handed over to
another channel only if the time during which the MS occupies the SDCCH
is longer than the period specified by this parameter.
After a new TCH is assigned to an MS, the MS can be handed over to
another channel only if the time during which the MS occupies the TCH is
longer than the period specified by this parameter.
This parameter specifies the switch of the ATCB handover algorithm. The
ATCB handover algorithm can determine the coverage areas of the OL
subcell and the UL subcell and balance the load between the OL subcell and
the UL subcell and between the UL subcell and the adjacent subcell
according to the actual networking. It can decrease the interference,
improve the conversation quality, and achieve the aggressive frequency
reuse of the OL subcell.
0: Close
1: Open
This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion for the TIGHT BCCH
handover.
This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion for the TIGHT BCCH
handover.
This parameter specifies whether the quick handover is enabled.
0: NO; 1: YES
This parameter specifies the threshold of the half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH
handover. When an AMR call occupies a half-rate TCH, an intra-cell half-
rate TCH to full-rate TCH handover is triggered if the radio quality
indication (RQI) remains lower than the configured H2F HO Threshold for
a predefined period. This parameter is used with the Intracell F-H HO Stat
Time and the Intracell F-H HO Last Time.
This parameter specifies the threshold of the full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH
handover. When an AMR call occupies a full-rate TCH, an intra-cell full-
rate TCH to half-rate TCH handover is triggered if the radio quality
indication (RQI) remains higher than the configured F2H HO Threshold for
a predefined period. This parameter is used with the Intracell F-H HO Stat
Time and the Intracell F-H HO Last Time.
The intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover must conform to the P/N
criterion. That is, the triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-
rate handover are met for N consecutive seconds with P measurement
seconds.
This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. The triggering
conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are the F2H HO
Threshold or the H2F HO Threshold. This parameter is used with the two
parameters.
This parameter determines the period during which the triggering conditions
of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are met.
The intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover must conform to the P/N
criterion. That is, the triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-
rate handover are met for N consecutive seconds with P measurement
seconds.
This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. The triggering
conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are the F2H HO
Threshold or the H2F HO Threshold. This parameter is used with the two
parameters.
This parameter specifies whether the AMR handover is enabled. This
parameter does not affect the dynamic non-AMR full-rate to half-rate
handover.
The M criterion supports the minimum value constraint of downlink receive
level of an adjacent cell.
Filtered downlink level of the adjacent cell >= (Minimum downlink power
of the candidate cell for handover + Minimum access level offset)
The M criterion is met if the Filtered uplink level of the adjacent cell >=
(Minimum uplink power of the candidate cell for handover + Minimum
access level offset); otherwise, the M criterion is not met.
The M criterion supports the minimum value constraint of uplink receive
level of the adjacent cell.
Expected uplink level of the adjacent cell >= (Min UP Power on HO
Candidate Cell + Min Access Level Offset)
The M criterion is met if the Filtered downlink level of the adjacent cell >=
(Min DL Power on HO Candidate Cell + Min Access Level Offset);
otherwise, the M criterion is not met.
The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110
dBm to -47 dBm).
This parameter specifies the hysteresis of an inter-layer or inter-priority
handover. This parameter is used to avoid inter-layer ping-pong handovers.
Actual Inter-layer HO Threshold of a serving cell = configured Inter-layer
HO Threshold - Inter-layer HO Hysteresis
Actual Inter-layer HO Threshold of an adjacent cell = configured Inter-
layer HO Threshold + Inter-layer HO Hysteresis of an adjacent cell - 64.
This parameter is one bit of the 16 bits that are used by the BSC to sort the
candidate cells for handovers.
The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
This parameter specifies whether the inter-system handover and cell
reselection are allowed The inter-system handover includes the handover
from a 2G cell to the adjacent 3G cell and from a 3G cell to the adjacent 2G
cell.
When this parameter is set to Yes, the ECSC parameter should also be set to
Yes.
According to the P/N criterion, if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the
triggering conditions of PBGT handover for N consecutive seconds within P
seconds, a PBGT handover is triggered and the MS is handed over to the
adjacent cell.
This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.
According to the P/N criterion, if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the
triggering conditions of PBGT handover for N consecutive seconds within P
seconds, a PBGT handover is triggered and the MS is handed over to the
adjacent cell.
This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.
According to the P/N criterion, if the signals in the candidate cell are better
than those in the serving cell for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a
layered hierarchical handover is triggered.
This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.
According to the P/N criterion, if the signals in the candidate cell are better
than those in the serving cell for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a
layered hierarchical handover is triggered.
This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.
According to the P/N criterion, if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the
triggering conditions of edge handover for N consecutive seconds within P
seconds, an edge handover to the adjacent cell is triggered.
This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.
According to the P/N criterion, if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the
triggering conditions of edge handover for N consecutive seconds within P
seconds, an edge handover to the adjacent cell is triggered.
This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.
According to the P/N criterion, if the UL or DL receive level is lower than
its corresponding edge handover threshold for N consecutive seconds within
P seconds, an edge handover is triggered.
This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.
According to the P/N criterion, if the UL or DL receive level is lower than
its corresponding edge handover threshold for N consecutive seconds within
P seconds, an edge handover is triggered.
This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.
If the DL receive level remains lower than the Edge HO DL RX_LEV
Threshold for a period, the edge handover is triggered. If the PBGT
handover is enabled, the relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased.
If the PBGT handover is not enabled and the edge handover threshold is not
properly set, cross coverage, co-channel interference, and adjacent channel
interference are likely to occur. The Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold
should be adjusted based on the handover performance statistics and the
actual network performance to achieve the UL/DL balance.

The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110
dBm to -47 dBm).
If the UL receive level remains lower than the Edge HO UL RX_LEV
Threshold for a period, the edge handover is triggered. If the PBGT
handover is enabled, the relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased.
If the PBGT handover is not enabled and the edge handover threshold is not
properly set, cross coverage, co-channel interference, and adjacent channel
interference are likely to occur. The Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold
should be adjusted based on the handover performance statistics and the
actual network performance to achieve the UL/DL balance.
The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110
dBm to -47 dBm).
This parameter specifies whether the interference handover is enabled.
When the receive level is higher the receive level threshold but the
transmission quality is lower than the interference handover quality
threshold, the interference handover is triggered. In other words, the MS is
interfered and needs to be handed over.
This parameter specifies whether the concentric cell handover is enabled.
The concentric cell is used to achieve the wide coverage of the UL subcell
and the aggressive frequency reuse of the OL subcell. The concentric cell
handover can improve system capacity and conversation quality. The
concentric cell handover can be classified into the UL subcell to OL subcell
handover and the OL subcell to UL subcell handover.
This parameter specifies whether the time advance (TA) handover is
enabled. The TA handover determines whether the timing advance (TA) is
higher than the predefined TA threshold. When the TA is higher than the
predefined TA threshold, a TA handover is triggered. The TA is calculated
based on the distance between the MS and the BTS. The longer the distance
is, the greater the TA value is.
This parameter specifies whether the bad quality (BQ) handover is enabled.
Whether a BQ handover should be enabled depends on the UL and DL
transmission quality (BER). When the UL signal quality or the DL signal
quality exceeds the BQ handover threshold. a BQ emergency handover is
performed. A rise in BER may result from too low a signal level or channel
interference.
This parameter specifies whether to enable the edge handover algorithm.
When an MS makes a call at the edge of a cell, the call may drop if the
receive level is too low. To avoid such a call drop, an edge handover can be
performed. When the UL receive level of the serving cell is lower than the
Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold or the DL receive level of the serving
cell is lower than the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold, the MS is handed
over to a neighbor cell.
This parameter specifies whether the layered hierarchical handover is
enabled. Cells are set to different layers and different priorities to
implement the layered hierarchical handover. Then, based on the layers and
priorities, calls are handed over to the cells with high priority (priority is
related to Layer of the Cell and Cell Priority).
This parameter specifies whether to enable the PBGT (POWER BUDGET)
handover algorithm. Based on the path loss, the BSC uses the PBGT
handover algorithm to search for a desired cell in real time and decides
whether a handover should be performed. The cell must have less path loss
and meet specific requirements. To avoid ping-pong handovers, the PBGT
handover can be performed only on TCHs between the cells of the same
layer and hierarchy. The PBGT handover cannot be performed on SDCCHs.
This parameter specifies whether to enable the rapid level drop handover.
When this function is enabled, an MS can be handed over to a new cell
before the occurrence call drop caused by the rapid drop of the receive level
of the MS.
This parameter specifies whether an MS that moves fast in a micro cell can
be handed over to a macro cell. If this parameter is set to Yes, the MS that
moves fast in a micro cell can be handed over to a macro cell, thus reducing
the number of handovers. It is recommended that this handover be applied
only in special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. The fast-
moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used only in special
conditions.
This parameter specifies whether a traffic load-sharing handover is enabled.
The load handover helps to reduce cell congestion, improve success rate of
channel assignment, and balance the traffic load among cells, thus
improving the network performance. The load handover functions between
the TCHs within one BSC or the TCHs in the cells of the same layer.
The load handover is used as an emergency measure instead of a primary
measure to adjust abnormal traffic burst in partial areas. If load handovers
occur frequently in a partial area, the cell and TRX configuration of BTSs
and the network layout should be adjusted.
This parameter specifies whether the intra-cell handover is enabled. Note: A
forced intra-cell handover is not subject to this parameter.
This parameter specifies whether a handover between signaling channels is
enabled.
This parameter specifies whether to adjust the sequence of candidate cells.
After the sequence is adjusted, the handover within the same BSC/MSC
takes priority.
The Cell Reselect Penalty Time (PT for short) is used to ensure the safety
and validity of cell reselection because it helps to avoid frequent cell
reselection. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08 and 04.08.
This parameter applies to only GSM Phase II MSs.
This parameter specifies the temporary correction of C2. This parameter is
valid only before the penalty time of cell reselection expires. For details, see
GSM Rec. 0508 and 0408.
This parameter applies only to GSM Phase II MSs.
This parameter Additional Reselect Param Indication (ACS) is used to
inform an MS where cell reselection parameters can be obtained.
If this parameter is set to 0, the MS should obtain PI and other parameters
for calculating C2 from other bytes of the system information type 4
message. If this parameter is set to 1, the MS should obtain PI and other
parameters for calculating C2 from other bytes of the system information
type 7 or 8 message.
This parameter specifies the manual correction of C2.
If this parameter is properly configured, the number of handovers can be
reduced and a better cell can be assigned to the MS. When PT is set to 31, it
becomes more difficult for an MS to access the cell when CRO increases.
Generally, the CRO should be less than 25 dB because excessively large
CRO may bring uncertainties to the network.In addition, the same CRO
applies to the cells with the same priority.For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08
and 04.08.
This parameter affects only GSM Phase II MSs or GSM PhaseII+ MSs.
This parameter Cell Bar Qualify (CBQ) is valid only for cell selection. It is
invalid for cell reselection.
1: barred
0: allowed
Together with CBA, this parameter determines the priority of cells. For
details, see GSM Rec. 04.08.
Cell_Bar_Qualify Cell_Bar_ Access Cell selection priority Cell reselect
priority
0 0 Normal Normal
0 1 Barred Barred
1 0 Low Normal
1 1 Low Normal
Cell Reselect Parameters Indication (PI for short), sent on the broadcast
channel, indicates whether CRO, TO, and PT are used.
Actually, the MS is informed whether C2-based cell reselection is
performed. For details, see GSM Rec. 0408 and 0508.In addition, a least
interval of 5s is required for C2-based cell reselection to avoid frequent cell
reselection.
When PI is set to 1, the MS obtains the value of C2 based on the broadcast
system information and determines whether a cell is reselected. When PI is
set to 0, that is, C2 equals C1, the MS determines whether a cell is
reselected based on the value of C1.
This parameter is used to determine whether cell reselection is performed
between different LACs. This parameter can prevent frequent location
update, thus lowering the possibility of losing paging messages. For details,
see the description of the cell reselection hysteresis.
This parameter specifies the length of the timer for periodic location update.
In the VLR, a regular location update timer is defined. When the location
update period decreases, the service performance is improved. When the
signaling traffic of the network increases, the usage of radio resources
drops.In addition, when the location update period decreases, the MS power
consumption increases, and the average standby time is greatly
shortened.When setting this parameter, take into consideration the
processing capability of the MSC and BSC, the load on the A interface,
Abis interface, Um interface, HLR, and VLR. Generally, a larger value is
adopted in continuous coverage in urban areas and a smaller value in
suburbs, rural areas, or blind spots.
This parameter specifies the number of multi-frames in a cycle on the
paging channel, that is, the number of paging sub-channels on a specific
paging channel.
In actual situation, an MS monitors only the associated paging sub-channel.
For details, see GSM Rec. 05.02 and 05.08.
If the value of this parameter increases, the number of paging sub-channels
in a cell increases, thus reducing the number of MSs served by each paging
sub-channel and prolonging the average service time of the MS battery. For
details about the calculation of the paging group, see GSM Rec. 05.02. But
the delay of paging messages increases, and the system performance
deteriorates as the value of this parameter increases.
This parameter should be set on the basis that the paging channel is not
overloaded. In addition, the value of the parameter should be as small as
possible. The load of the paging channels should be periodically measured
on the running network. The value of this parameter should be adjusted on
the basis of the load.
A paging message must be sent simultaneously in all the cells in an LAC.
Thus, the capacity of the paging channel in a cell, that is, the number of
paging sub-channels in a cell, must be the same as or similar to that in other
cells of an LAC.
This parameter specifies the number of CCCH blocks reserved for the
AGCH. After the CCCH is configured, this parameter actually indicates the
CCCH usage for AGCH and PCH.
This parameter affects the paging response time of an MS and the system
performance.
This parameter specifies the NCCs to be reported by the MSs in a cell. This
parameter is an information element (IE) in the system information type 2
and 6 messages.
If a bit in the value of this parameter is set to 1, the MS reports the
corresponding measurement report to the BTS. The value of this parameter
has a byte (eight bits). Each bit maps with an NCC (0-7) and the most
significant bit corresponds to NCC 7. If bit N is 0, the MS does not measure
the cell level of NCC N.
This parameter specifies the cell bar access (CBA).
Value 0 indicates that cell access is allowed.
Value 1 indicates that cell access is not allowed.
Together with CBQ, this parameter can be used to determine the priority of
cells. For details, see GSM Rec. 04.08.
Cell_Bar_Qualify Cell_Bar_ Access Cell selection priority Cell reselect
priority
0 0 Normal Normal
0 1 Barred Barred
1 0 Low Normal
1 1 Low Normal
This parameter specifies the number of timeslots between the consecutive
transmissions of channel request messages by an MS.
To reduce the collisions on the RACH and to improve the efficiency of the
RACH, an access algorithm is defined in GSM Rec. 04.08. The algorithm
specifies three parameters: Tx-integer (T for short), maximum number of
retransmissions (RET), and S related to channel combination.
This parameter works with the configuration of the CCCH to determine the
parameter S. The relations between this parameter and the configuration of
the CCCH are as follows:
When this parameter is set to 3, 8, 14, or 50, S is 55 if the CCCH and
SDCCH do not share a physical channel.
When this parameter is set to 3, 8, 14, or 50, S is 41 if the CCCH and
SDCCH share a physical channel.
When this parameter is set to 4, 9, or 6, S is 76 if the CCCH and SDCCH
do not share a physical channel.
When this parameter is set to 4, 9, or 6, S is 52 if the CCCH and SDCCH
share a physical channel.
When this parameter is set to 5, 10, or 20, S is 109 if the CCCH and
SDCCH do not share a physical channel.
When this parameter is set to 5, 10, or 20, S is 58 if the CCCH and SDCCH
share a physical channel.
When this parameter is set to 6, 11, or 25, S is 163 if the CCCH and
SDCCH do not share a physical channel.
When this parameter is set to 6, 11, or 25, S is 86 if the CCCH and SDCCH
share a physical channel.
When this parameter is set to 7, 12, or 32, S is 217 if the CCCH and
SDCCH do not share a physical channel.
When this parameter is set to 7, 12, or 32, S is 115 if the CCCH and
SDCCH share a physical channel.
The timeslot for sending messages is a random value from the collection of
{0, 1, MAX(T, 8)-1}.
The number of timeslots (excluding the timeslot used to send messages)
This parameter specifies whether to enable the Attach-detach allowed
(ATT) function. For different cells in the same LAC, their ATTs must be
the same.
If this parameter is set to Yes, network connection is not provided after the
MS is powered off, thus saving the network processing time and network
resources.
If the TC resources are changed before and after the handover, this needs to
keep the test duration for continuously transmitting the uplink data of the
old channel. If TDM transmission is used on the Abis interface, this
parameter is set to 10 ms; if IP transmission is used on the Abis interface,
this parameter is set to 20 ms.
When the BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and current call adopts the
AMRHR encoding mode, the timer T3109 (AMRHR) is initiated. If the
BSC receives the ReleaseIndication message before the T3109 (AMRHR)
timer expires, the timer T3109 (AMRHR) stops; if the timer T3109
(AMRHR) expires, the BSC deactivates the channel.
When the BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and current call adopts the
AMRFR encoding mode, the timer T3109 (AMRFR) is initiated. If the BSC
receives the ReleaseIndication message before the T3109 (AMRFR) timer
expires, the timer T3109 (AMRFR) stops; if the timer T3109 (AMRFR)
expires, the BSC deactivates the channel.
In an intra-cell handover, the timer T3103C is initiated after the BSC
receives the HANDOVER COMMAND from target channel. The timer
stops after the BSC receives the HANDOVER COMPLETE message. After
the timer expires, the BSC sends a handover failure message.
This parameter specifies the timer carried by the WaitIndcation information
element when the BSC sends an immediate assignment reject message to an
MS.
After the MS receives the immediate assignment reject message, the MS
makes another attempt to access the network after the timer expires.
For the call on the TCH in stable state, the timer is initiated when the
ERROR INDICATION, CONNECTION FAILURE INDICATION, and
RELEASE INDICATION messages are received, and the call
reestablishment allowed is set to Yes for the cell where the call is. Upon
receipt of a CLEAR COMMAND message from the MSC, the timer stops.
The BSC sends a CLEAR REQUEST message after the timer expires.
This parameter specifies the connection release delay timer that is used to
delay the channel deactivation after the main signaling link is disconnected,
and the purpose is to reserve a period of time for repeated link
disconnections.
The timer T311 is initiated when the BSC receives the REL_IND message
from the BTS. the RF CHAN REL message is sent to the BTS after the
timer expires.
The BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and enables the timer T3109. If
the BSC receives the ReleaseIndication message before the timer T3109
stops; the BSC deactivates the channel, if the timer T3109 expires.
This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover success message
after a handover command is sent in an outgoing BSC handover. If the timer
expires, the outgoing BSC handover fails.
This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover complete message
after a handover request acknowledgment message is sent by the BSC in
2G/3G handover or inter-BSC handover. If the timer expires, The MS
reports a Clear REQ message.
After the BSC sends a handover command, the timer T3107 is initiated.
Before the timer T3107 expires, the timer T3107 stops if the BSC receives a
handover complete message. After the timer T3107 expires, the BSC sends
a handover failure message.
In an outgoing BSC handover, after the BSC sends a handover request
message, the timer T7 is initiated. Before the timer T7 expires, the timer T7
stops if the BSC receives a handover acknowledgment message. After the
timer T7 expires, the BSC sends an outgoing BSC handover failure
message.
In an intra-BSC handover, the timer T3103 is initiated after the BSC sends a
handover command. Before the timer T3103 expires, the timer stops if the
BSC receives a Handover Complete message. After the timer expires, the
BSC sends a handover failure message.
The timer is initiated after the BSC sends the CR message; if the BSC
receives the CC message before the timer expires, the timer stops; if the
timer expires, the BSS releases the seized SDCCH channel.
This parameter specifies the timer used in the immediate assignment
procedure.
The T3101 is started when the BSC sends an IMM ASS message to the
BTS. If the BSC receives an EST IND message before T3101 expires,
T3101 is stopped; if T3101 expires before the BSC receives an EST IND
message, the BSS releases the seized SDCCH.
Send Classmark Enquiring Result To MSC Enable.
Enquire Classmark After In-BSC Handover Enable.
This parameter specifies whether a cell configured with baseband frequency
hopping supports the intelligent power consumption decrease.
Qtru Signal Merge Switch
The QTRU signal merge algorithm is to prevent the calls with great
difference between uplink signal strengths from assigning in the same
timeslot.
The BSC monitors the high-level signal and overwhelms the low-level
signal per 0.5 second. If the highest uplink signal strength of a timeslot
the lowest uplink signal strength of this timeslot > Threshold of the
difference between uplink received levels, the situation must be recorded.
During the observation of P seconds, if this situation lasts N seconds, a
forced handover is initiated on the calls with the highest uplink signal
strength in the timeslot, and the calls should be handed over to another
timeslot.
P specifies the Observed time of uplink received level difference, and N
specifies the Duration of uplink received level difference.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of paging messages that a
cell is allowed to send within a statistical period.
This parameter specifies the average number of paging messages that a cell
is allowed to send within a statistical period.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of messages in the buffer of
the cell paging group packet when the Paging Messages Optimize at Abis
Interface is turned on.
This parameter specifies the interval between two cell paging group packets,
which is an integral multiple of 50 ms.
The cell paging message packaging is determined by the system load. If the
paging message packaging timer is enabled, the paging messages are
packaged according to cells; otherwise, the paging messages are packaged
according to the CPU.
This parameter specifies which type of interference band statistics algorithm
to use, that is, whether interference band statistics algorithm I or
interference band statistics algorithm II, when the frequency scanning
function is enabled.
This parameter specifies whether the BSC reports a cell out-of-service alarm
after the cell is out of service.
When this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC reports a cell out-of-service
alarm if the cell is out of service.
When this parameter is set to No, the BSC does not report a cell out-of-
service alarm if the cell is out of service.
This parameter specifies whether the CS services preempt the sublink
resources of PS services of low-level BTS for cascaded BTSs if the current-
level sublink cannot be preempted.
This parameter specifies whether the CS services preempt the sublink
resources of PS services.
This parameter specifies whether the MS is forced to send a handover
access message.
This parameter specifies whether the MS can be handed over to another
channel through assignment procedure in intra-cell handover. If this
parameter is set to Yes, the assignment procedure can be used for all types
of intra-cell handovers.
Frequency scanning refers to the scanning of uplink receive levels of cell
frequencies. The scanning result reflects the strength of frequency signals
received by the cell.
This parameter specifies the scanning result type used from the start of a
frequency scanning task to the reporting of a scanning result.
Main/Diversity: current, minimum, maximum, and mean values of the main
and diversity levels during the scanning of main and diversity antennas
Maximum/Mean: maximum and mean values of the uplink receive level
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by intra-
cell handover timeout are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this
reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by intra-
BSC out-cell handover are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this
reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by
outgoing-BSC handover are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this
reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by
incoming-BSC handover are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this
reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by
resource check are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this
reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by no
MRs for a long time for the MS are not contained in the statistics of call
drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this
reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by forced
handover failure are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this
reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by
equipment fault are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this
reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by Abis
territorial link fault are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this
reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the connection failure message
is sent by the BTS because the release indication message is sent or the
waiting period of call reestablishment times out, the call drops caused by
this reason are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this
reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized,the call drops caused by the
reasons except for the radio link failure, handover access failure, OM
intervention, and radio resource unavailable are not contained in the
statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this
reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by radio
resource unavailable are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this
reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by OM
intervention are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this
reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
In optimization, the call drops caused by handover access failure are not
contained in the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this
reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by radio
link failure are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this
reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by
sequence error are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this
reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by
unsolicited DM response are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this
reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by T200
timeout are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this
reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.
This parameter specifies whether the repeater is configured in a cell. The
function of repeater is simpler than that of BTS, and the repeater is an
extended equipment that is used for the wide area or indoor application
solving the problem of blind area. Not only the repeater can improve the
base station coverage, but also increase the total traffic volume of network.
The setting of this parameter affects the handover. Because the distance
between repeaters is long, the handover between repeaters can only be
asynchronous. Otherwise, the handover may fail.
This parameter specifies the delay of TRX aiding detection performed after
the cell is initialized.
The cell is unstable after initialization; therefore, if the TRX aiding
detection starts immediately after cell initialization, a wrong decision might
be made. In such a case, this parameter is used to specify a delay.
This parameter specifies whether to allow flow control on the Abis
interface.
The flow control function applies to the call management. When the BSS is
congested, some service requests are rejected or delayed so that the system
load decreases. The flow control on the Abis interface is mainly used to
balance the system load caused by Abis flow.
By default, flow control on the Abis interface is performed.
This parameter specifies whether to support the half-rate service in this cell.
It is one of the cell reselection parameters in the system information type 3
message.
This parameter specifies the maximum transmit power level of MSs. It is
one of the cell re-selection parameters in the system information type 3
message.
This parameter is used to control the transmit power of MSs. For details, see
GSM Rec. 05.05.
In a GSM900 cell, the maximum power control level of the MS ranges
from 0 to 19, mapping to the following:
{43,41,39,37,35,33,31,29,27,25,23,21,19,17,15,13,11,9,7,5} respectively.
Generally, the maximum transmit power supported by an MS is level 5
(mapping to 33 dBm). The minimum transmit power supported by an MS is
level 19 (mapping to 5 dBm). Other transmit power levels are reserved for
high-power MSs.
In a GSM1800 or GSM1900 cell, the maximum power control level of the
MS ranges from 0 to 31, mapping to the following:
{30,28,26,24,22,20,18,16,14,12,10,8,6,4,2,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,36,34,
32} respectively. Generally, the maximum transmit power supported by an
MS is level 0 (mapping to 30 dBm). The minimum transmit power
supported by an MS is level 15 (mapping to 0 dBm). Other transmit power
levels are reserved for high-power MSs.
This parameter is contained in the Cell Options IE of the system information
type 3 and 6 messages.
If this parameter is set to Yes, the receive level of the MS equals the
measured receive level in FH minus the receive level obtained from the
timeslots on the BCCH TRX.
This parameter is imported with the requested bandwidth when the
assignment request is sent. The actual bandwidth assigned to a user is the
value of multiplying the requested bandwidth by the ActGene.
The parameter here is the value of the actual ActGene multiplied by 10 in
fact. When the resources are allocated in practice, the total bandwidth is
expanded by ten times. The effect of the ActGene is from 0.5 to 1.
This parameter specifies the priority of the PS low priority service.
This parameter specifies the priority of the PS high priority service.
This parameter specifies the priority of the CS data service.
This parameter specifies the priority of the CS voice service.
This parameter specifies the included angle formed by the major lobe
azimuth of the antennas in two cells under one BTS. The major lobe
azimuth is measured from the north to the direction of the cell antenna in a
clockwise direction.
This parameter is calculated according to the Included Angle and the actual
Antenna Azimuth Angle. The Included Angle refers to the coverage area of
the cell.
Antenna Azimuth Angle = actual Antenna Azimuth Angle - Included
Angle/2
This parameter specifies the number of RACH burst timeslots in a RACH
load measurement.
The value of this parameter indicates the interval during which the BSC
determines whether an RACH timeslot is busy. For details, see GSM Rec.
08.58.
This parameter specifies the interval for the BTS to send the overload
indication message to the BSC.
The overload causes include TRX processor overload, downlink CCCH
overload, and AGCH overload. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58.
This parameter is used by the BTS to inform the BSC of the load on a
CCCH timeslot, that is, the load of the access requests on the RACH and the
load of all the messages (such as paging messages and packet immediate
assignment messages) on the PCH. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58.
If the load on a CCCH timeslot exceeds the value of this parameter, the BTS
periodically sends the CCCH overload message to the BSC. The interval for
sending the CCCH overload message is CCCH Load Indication Period(s).
This parameter specifies the interval for sending the overload messages.
This parameter is used by a BTS to inform the BSC of the load on a CCCH
timeslot.For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58.If the load on a CCCH timeslot
exceeds the CCCH Load Threshold, the BTS periodically sends the CCCH
overload message to the BSC. The CCCH overload messages include the
uplink RACH overload messages and the downlink PCH overload
messages.
This parameter specifies the interval for the BTS to send radio resource
indication messages, informing the BSC of the interference levels on idle
channels of a TRX. In the radio resource indication message, the TRX
reports the interference level of each idle channel in the measurement
period.
For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58 and 08.08.
The value of this parameter has 16 bits. The most significant bit indicates
whether the parameter is valid. Bits 14-8 indicate the level threshold. Bits 7-
0 indicate the BER threshold.
The BTS adjusts the MS frequency according to the value of this parameter.
This parameter is used for the fast-moving handover decision. If this
parameter is set to Yes, the BTS calculates the speed at which the MS
moves towards or away from the BTS, and reports the speed to the BSC
through the uplink MR.
This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm.
This parameter together with VSWR TRX Error Threshold is used to detect
whether the antenna system connected to the TRX is faulty. If this
parameter is set to a small value, the error is small.
This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm.
This parameter together with VSWR TRX Error Threshold is used to detect
whether the antenna system connected to the TRX is faulty.
This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. When the
output power of a TRX of a transmitter is lower than a fixed level, an error
is generated.The Power output error threshold and Power output reduction
threshold indicate the two thresholds of the error.If the value of this
parameter is greater, the error is smaller.
This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm.
When the output power of a TRX of a transmitter is lower than a fixed level,
an error is generated.The Power output error threshold and Power output
reduction threshold indicate the two thresholds of the error.
For the BTS2X, this parameter is used to compensate the difference of RSSI
between the time the tower-mounted amplifier (TMA) is installed and the
time the TMA is not installed.
The value of this parameter when the tower-mounted amplifier is not
installed is 3 greater than that when the tower-mounted amplifier is
installed.
This parameter specifies the start frame number of the BTS. It is used to
synchronize the MS and the BTS after the BTS is re-initialized.
The frame offset technology arranges the frame numbers of different cells
under the same BTS to be different from one another by one frame offset.
Thus, the FCH and SCH signals of adjacent cells do not appear in the same
frame to facilitate the MS decoding.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of levels by which the BTS
RF power decreases. The decrease in the BTS RF power is implemented
through dynamic power control and static power control.
For the BTS2X, this parameter is shielded. For the BTS3X and double-
transceiver BTS, this parameter is invalid.
For the BTS3X and double-transceiver BTS, power control is performed on
the basis of the power level of a TRX.
This parameter specifies the period during which interference levels are
averaged.
Before the BTS sends the radio resource indication message to the BSC, the
interference levels on the idle channels in the period specified by this
parameter are averaged. The result is used to classify the interference levels
on the idle channels into five interference bands.
For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21.
This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement.
The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by
MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle
channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels.
According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals
are classified into six interference levels. The values of these levels are
called Interf. Band Thresholds. The BTS determines the interference level
based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, sends a radio resource indication
message to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels
reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication
message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band
measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference
analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21.
If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the
interference is too obvious. If the difference between the values of two
thresholds are too great, the interference is not reflected.
This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement.
The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by
MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle
channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels.
According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals
are classified into six interference levels. The values of these levels are
called Interf. Band Thresholds. The BTS determines the interference level
based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, sends a radio resource indication
message to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels
reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication
message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band
measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference
analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21.
If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the
interference is too obvious. If the difference between the values of two
thresholds are too great, the interference is not reflected.
This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement.
The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by
MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle
channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels.
According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals
are classified into six interference levels. The values of these levels are
called Interf. Band Thresholds. The BTS determines the interference level
based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, sends a radio resource indication
message to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels
reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication
message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band
measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference
analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21.
If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the
interference is too obvious. If the difference between the values of two
thresholds are too great, the interference is not reflected.
This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement.
The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by
MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle
channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels.
According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals
are classified into six interference levels. The values of these levels are
called Interf. Band Thresholds. The BTS determines the interference level
based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, sends a radio resource indication
message to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels
reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication
message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band
measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference
analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21.
If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the
interference is too obvious. If the difference between the values of two
thresholds are too great, the interference is not reflected.
This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement.
The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by
MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle
channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels.
According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals
are classified into six interference levels. The values of these levels are
called Interf. Band Thresholds. The BTS determines the interference level
based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, sends a radio resource indication
message to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels
reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication
message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band
measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference
analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21.
If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the
interference is too obvious. If the difference between the values of two
thresholds are too great, the interference is not reflected.
This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement.
The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by
MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle
channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels.
According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals
are classified into six interference levels. The values of these levels are
called Interf. Band Thresholds. The BTS determines the interference level
based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, reports a radio resource
indication message to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and idle
channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource
indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The
interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold
setting and interference analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58,
and 12.21.
If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the
interference is too obvious. If the difference between the values of two
thresholds are too great, the interference is not reflected.
If Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable is set to Yes, the directed try
procedure is started if the following two conditions are met: The cell
supports the directed try procedure. The load of the cell is greater than or
equal to the Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold.
This parameter specifies whether to support DRX. To reduce the power
consumption, the discontinuous reception mechanism (DRX) is introduced
to the GSM. The MS that supports the DRX consumes less power to receive
broadcast messages that the MSs are interested in. This prolongs the service
time of the MS battery.
The BSC that supports the DRX should send the dispatching message to
MSs so that the MSs can use the DRX function. The period occupied by
broadcast short messages that are contained in a dispatching message is
called a dispatching period. The description and position of the broadcast
short message are contained in the dispatching message in the sending
sequence.
This parameter specifies the data service supported.
This value of the parameter can be set as required.
0000000001: indicates that only the NT14.5K data service is supported.
0000000010: indicates that only the NT12K data service is supported.
0000000100: indicates that only the NT6K data service is supported.
0000001000: indicates that only the T14.4K data service is supported.
0000010000: indicates that only the T9.6K data service is supported.
0000100000: indicates that only the T4.8K data service is supported.
0001000000: indicates that only the T2.4K data service is supported.
0010000000: indicates that only the T1.2K data service is supported.
0100000000: indicates that only the T600BITS data service is supported.
1000000000: indicates that only the T1200/75 data service is supported.
If this parameter is set to StartUp, the BTS transmit power is adjusted to the
maximum before the BSC sends a handover command to the MS. In
addition, the BTS transmit power is not adjusted during the handover to
ensure the success of the handover.
When the receive level of an MS drops rapidly, a handover occurs. In this
case, the BSC cannot adjust the transmit power of the MS and BTS in time.
The MS may fail to receive the handover command, thus leading to the call
drop.
This parameter specifies whether the BTS reports the voice quality index
(VQI). If this parameter is set to Report, the BTS reports the VQI. The BSC
measures the traffic on a per VQI basis. There are 11 levels of speech
quality. If the level is low, the speech quality is good. The traffic related to
AMR and non-AMR is measured separately, and thus the speech quality is
monitored.
This parameter specifies whether to permit the low noise amplifier (LNA)
bypass.
This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of
frequencies participate in FH is 8. When frequencies are configured for
frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality gain will be obtained.
Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain.
This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of
frequencies participate in FH is 7. When frequencies are configured for
frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality gain will be obtained.
Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain.
This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of
frequencies participate in FH is 6. When frequencies are configured for
frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality gain will be obtained.
Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain.
This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of
frequencies participate in FH is 5. When frequencies are configured for
frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality gain will be obtained.
Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain.
This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of
frequencies participate in FH is 4. When frequencies are configured for
frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality gain will be obtained.
Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain.
This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of
frequencies participate in FH is 3. When frequencies are configured for
frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality gain will be obtained.
Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain.
This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of
frequencies participate in FH is 2. When frequencies are configured for
frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality gain will be obtained.
Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain.
This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of
frequencies participate in FH is 1.When frequencies are configured for
frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality gain will be obtained.
Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain.
This parameter specifies the maximum permissible adjustment step when
the BSC increases the uplink transmit power.
This parameter specifies the maximum permissible adjustment step when
the BSC decreases the uplink transmit power.
This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call, and when the
uplink receive quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control
is performed.
This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call, and when the
uplink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power
control is performed.
This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call, and when the
uplink receive quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control
is performed.
This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call, and when the
downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power
control is performed.
This parameter specifies current call is a half-rate call, and when the uplink
receive quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is
performed.
This parameter specifies current call is a half-rate call, and when the uplink
receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is
performed.
This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the uplink
receive quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is
performed.
This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the
downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power
control is performed.
When the receive level is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power
control is performed.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63
(corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).
When the receive level is higher than the threshold, Huawei III power
control is performed.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63
(corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).
This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive quality in
the uplink power control.
This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive level in the
uplink power control.
This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window
filtering of downlink receive quality.
This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window
filtering of uplink receive level.
This parameter specifies a constant value in the uplink receive quality
exponential filtering formula.
This parameter specifies a constant value in the uplink receive level
exponential filtering formula.
This parameter specifies the maximum permissible up adjustment step when
the BSC increases the downlink power.
This parameter specifies the maximum allowed adjustment step when the
BSC decreases the downlink transmit power.
This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call, and when the
downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power
control is performed.
This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call, and when the
downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power
control is performed.
This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call, and when the
downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power
control is performed.
This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call, and when the
downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power
control is performed.
This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the
downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power
control is performed.
This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the
downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power
control is performed.
This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the
downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power
control is performed.
This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the
downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power
control is performed.
When the receive level is higher than the threshold, the downlink power
control is performed.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63
(corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).
When the receive level is higher than the threshold, the downlink power
control is performed.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63
(corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).
This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive quality in
the downlink power control.
This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive level in the
downlink power control.
This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window
filtering of downlink receive quality.
This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window
filtering of downlink receive level.
This parameter specifies a constant value in the downlink receive quality
exponential filtering formula.
This parameter specifies a constant value in the downlink receive level
exponential filtering formula.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of discarded MRs allowed
on the TCH in a power control period.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of discarded MRs allowed
on the SDCCH in a power control period.
This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive
uplink power control commands.
This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive
uplink power control commands.
When the number of missing MRs in a power control period exceeds the
value of this parameter, the power control stops.
This parameter specifies the maximum range of dynamic power adjustment
for the BTS.
0-16 (0 dB to 30 dB in steps of 2 dB)
In downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality is greater than or
equal to DL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold, the value of DL RX_LEV Upper
Threshold contains the value of DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff.
In downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality is greater than or
equal to this threshold, then the actual DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold
should contain DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff. This parameter further improves
the expected level of the downlink power control.
Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2%
Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4%
Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8%
Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6%
Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2%
Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4%
Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8%
Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%
In uplink power control, if the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal
to UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold, then the actual UL RX_LEV Upper
Threshold should contain UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff.
In the uplink power control, if the uplink receive quality is greater than or
equal to this threshold, then UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain
UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff. This parameter further improves the expected
level of the uplink power control.
Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2%
Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4%
Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8%
Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6%
Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2%
Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4%
Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8%
Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%
This parameter specifies the maximum permissible down adjustment step
based on the receive quality.
This parameter specifies the maximum permissible up adjustment step based
on the receive level.
This parameter specifies the maximum permissible down adjustment step
based on the receive quality.
This parameter specifies the AMR maximum down adjustment step
permitted by the quality zone 2 (the RQ value is greater than or equal to 3)
based on the signal level.
In the Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into
three grades (0, 1-2, 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). Every quality
zone has different maximum permissible down adjustment step.
When the downward power adjustment is performed based on the level, the
maximum permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive
quality.
This parameter specifies the maximum step length in decreasing the signal
level in power control when the RQ is 2.
This parameter specifies the AMR maximum down adjustment step
permitted by the quality zone 1 (the RQ value is greater than 0 and less than
3) based on the signal level.
In the Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into
three grades (0, 1-2, 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). Every quality
zone has different maximum permissible down adjustment step.
When the downward power adjustment is performed based on the level, the
maximum permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive
quality.
This parameter specifies the maximum step length in decreasing the signal
level in power control when the RQ is 1.
This parameter specifies the maximum step length in decreasing the signal
level in power control when the RQ is 0.
In the Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into
three grades (0, 1-2, 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). Every quality
zone has different maximum permissible down adjustment step.
When the downward power adjustment is performed based on the level, the
maximum permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive
quality.
When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the
upper threshold and the lower threshold of the stable state quality zone are
set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the
lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the
lower threshold of the downlink quality for power control.
The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows:
Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2%
Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4%
Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8%
Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6%
Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2%
Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4%
Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8%
Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%
When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the
upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When
the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower
threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the upper
threshold of the downlink quality for power control.
The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows:
Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2%
Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4%
Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8%
Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6%
Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2%
Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4%
Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8%
Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%
The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal
level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not
performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower
threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds
the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.
The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal
level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not
performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower
threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds
the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.
The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the
upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When
the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower
threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the lower
threshold of the uplink quality for power control.
The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows:
Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2%
Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4%
Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8%
Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6%
Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2%
Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4%
Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8%
Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%
When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the
upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When
the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower
threshold, power control is performed.
This parameter determines the uplink quality upper threshold of the quality
zone.
Note: The power of the MS and the BTS is adjusted according to the
quality and the level. For details, refer to the Power Control 2nd Generation
Control table.
The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows:
Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2%
Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4%
Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8%
Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6%
Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2%
Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4%
Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8%
Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%
The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal
level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not
performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower
threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds
the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.
The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal
level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not
performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower
threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds
the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.
The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
This parameter specifies the number of downlink measurement reports used
for predicting the level in power control.
In Huawei II power control algorithm, the average filter value in the history
measurement report is not used for power control decision. Instead, the
prediction function is applied in the filter to compensate the delay of power
adjustment.
This parameter specifies the number of uplink measurement reports used for
predicting the level in power control.
In Huawei II power control algorithm, the average filter value in the history
measurement report is not used for power control decision. Instead, the
prediction function is applied in the filter to compensate the delay of power
adjustment.
This parameter specifies whether the compensation of AMR measurement
reports is allowed by Huawei II power control algorithm.
When this parameter is set to Yes, the Huawei II power control algorithm
puts the currently received measurement reports in the measurement report
compensation queue and then records the change of the transmit power
based on the MS power and the BTS power in the measurement report.
After values are added in the measurement report, compensate the receive
level value in the history measurement report based on the change of the
power.
When determining whether to perform power control, the BSC performs
weighted filtering on the values of the receive level and of the receive
quality in several history measurement reports. The measurement reports
may be obtained at different transmit power of the BTS/MS. To ensure the
accuracy of the values for filtering, the values in the history measurement
reports that are obtained at a different transmit power from the current
power must be compensated.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for
calculating the average value of the downlink signal quality before the BTS
power adjustment.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for
calculating the average value of the uplink signal quality before the MS
power adjustment.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for
calculating the average value of the downlink signal strength before the BTS
power adjustment.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for
calculating the average value of the uplink signal strength before the AMR
MS power adjustment.
This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous
AMR power control commands.
This parameter specifies the maximum range of dynamic power adjustment
for the BTS.Class 0 to class 15 corresponds to 0 dB to 30 dB, with a step of
2 dB. If this parameter is set 5, the power ranges from class 0 to class 4.
In downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality is higher than or
equal to the DL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold, the value of DL RX_LEV Upper
Threshold contains the value of the DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff.
In downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality is greater than or
equal to the value of this parameter, then the actual DL RX_LEV Upper
Threshold should contain DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff. This parameter
further improves the expected level of the downlink power control.
Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2%
Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4%
Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8%
Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6%
Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2%
Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4%
Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8%
Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%
In uplink power control, if the uplink receive quality is higher than or equal
to the UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold, then the actual UL RX_LEV Upper
Threshold should contain UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff.
In the uplink power control, if the uplink receive quality is greater than or
equal to the value of this parameter, then UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold
should contain UL Qual Bad UpLEVDiff. This parameter further improves
the expected level of the uplink power control.
Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2%
Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4%
Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8%
Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6%
Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2%
Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4%
Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8%
Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%
This parameter determines the maximum permissible up adjustment step
based on the signal quality.
This parameter determines the maximum permissible up adjustment step
based on the receive level.
This parameter determines the maximum permissible down adjustment step
based on the receive quality.
In Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three
grades (0, 1-2, 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). A maximum step
length of power control is set for each quality zone.
When downward power adjustment is performed based on the level, the
maximum permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive
quality.
This parameter determines the maximum permissible down adjustment step
when RQ is 2.
In Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three
grades (0, 1-2, 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). A maximum step
length of power control is set for each quality zone.
When downward power adjustment is performed based on the level, the
maximum permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive
quality.
This parameter determines the maximum permissible down adjustment step
when RQ is 1.
In Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three
grades (0, 1-2, 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). A maximum step
length of power control is set for each quality zone.
When downward power adjustment is performed based on the level, the
maximum permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive
quality.
This parameter determines the maximum permissible down adjustment step
when RQ is 0.
After the BSC delivers the power control command, it should wait for a
certain period before receiving an acknowledgement message. Therefore,
the MR that power control decision is based on cannot accurately reflect the
radio environment of the BTS during the power adjustment, but misses the
latest changes of the receive level and receive quality of the BTS. Thus, the
power adjustment is delayed.
To compensate the delay of power adjustment, the power control algorithm
implements the prediction and filtering function. In other words, the BSC
samples several downlink measurement reports, performs weighted filtering,
and predicts N measurement reports from the current time onwards in a
short period.
This parameter determines the number of downlink measurement reports
predicted by the BSC. The value of this parameter equals to the previous
number N.
In Huawei II power control algorithm, the average filter value in the history
measurement report is not used for power control decision. Instead, the
prediction function is applied in the filter to compensate the delay of power
adjustment.
After the BSC delivers the power control command, it should wait for a
certain period before receiving an acknowledgement message. Therefore,
the MR that power control decision is based on cannot accurately reflect the
radio environment of the BTS during the power adjustment, but misses the
latest changes of the receive level and receive quality of the MS. Thus, the
power adjustment is delayed.
To compensate the delay of power adjustment, the power control algorithm
implements the prediction and filtering function. In other words, the BSC
samples several uplink measurement reports, performs weighted filtering,
and predicts N measurement reports from the current time onwards in a
short period.
This parameter determines the number of uplink measurement reports
predicted by the BSC. In other words, the value of this parameter equals to
the previous number N.
In Huawei II power control algorithm, the average filter value in the history
measurement report is not used for power control decision. Instead, the
prediction function is applied in the filter to compensate the delay of power
adjustment.
This parameter specifies whether the compensation of measurement reports
is allowed by Huawei II power control algorithm.
When determining whether to perform power control, the BSC performs
weighted filtering on the values of the receive level and of the receive
quality in several history measurement reports. The measurement reports
may be obtained by the BTS/MS at different transmit power. To ensure the
accuracy of the values for filtering, the values in the history measurement
reports that are obtained at a different transmit power from the current
power must be compensated.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for
calculating the average value of the downlink signal quality before the BTS
power adjustment.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for
calculating the average value of the uplink signal quality before the MS
power adjustment.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for
calculating the average value of the downlink signal strength before the BTS
power adjustment.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for
calculating the average value of the uplink signal strength before the MS
power adjustment.
This parameter specifies whether enable Huawei II power control algorithm
or Huawei III power control algorithm.
When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the
upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When
the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower
threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the lower
threshold of the downlink quality for power control.
The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows:
Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2%
Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4%
Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8%
Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6%
Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2%
Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4%
Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8%
Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%
When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the
upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When
the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower
threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the upper
threshold of the downlink quality for power control.
The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows:
Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2%
Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4%
Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8%
Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6%
Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2%
Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4%
Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8%
Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%
The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal
level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not
performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower
threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds
the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.
The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal
level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not
performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower
threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds
the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.
The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the
upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When
the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower
threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the lower
threshold of the uplink quality for power control.
The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows:
Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2%
Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4%
Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8%
Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6%
Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2%
Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4%
Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8%
Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%
When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the
upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When
the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower
threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the upper
threshold of the uplink quality for power control.
The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows:
Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2%
Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4%
Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8%
Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6%
Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2%
Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4%
Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8%
Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%
The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal
level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not
performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower
threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds
the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.
The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal
level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not
performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower
threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds
the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.
The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous
power control commands.
This parameter specifies the constant of filtering the collision signal strength
for power control. The MS obtains valid measurement signals by sampling
for NAVGI times.
This parameter specifies the channel where the receive power level of the
MS is measured for the uplink power control.
This parameter specifies the reduced power of the BTS on the PBCCH.
This parameter specifies the signal strength filter period in the transfer
mode, which is used to set the signal strength filter period of the MS in the
packet transfer mode.
This parameter is used by the signal strength filter for power control to
periodically filter the signal level in the packet transfer mode. This
parameter is used when the MS measures the downlink signal strength in the
packet transfer mode and calculates Cn of the MS output power. The
parameter specifies the relation between Cn and Cn-1.
This parameter specifies the signal strength filter period in the packet idle
mode, which is used to set the signal strength filter period of the MS in the
packet idle mode.
This parameter is used by the signal strength filter for power control to
periodically filter the signal level in the idle mode. This parameter is used
when the MS measures the downlink signal strength in the packet idle mode
and calculates Cn of the MS output power. The parameter specifies the
relation between Cn and Cn-1.
This parameter specifies the initial power level.
This parameter determines the expected receive signal strength on the BTS
when the MS uses the GPRS dynamic power control.
This parameter is used for the open-loop power control.
The MS uses the Alpha parameter to calculate the output power of the
uplink PDCH, namely, PCH.
When the MS uses the GPRS dynamic power control, this parameter
determines the reduced level of the MS transmit power mapping to the path
loss.
This parameter specifies the maximum value of N3105.
After a downlink TBF is established, the network initiates the N3105.
Upon setting the RRBP field in the downlink RLC data block, the network
resets the N3105 when it receives the packet acknowledgment message from
the MS on the uplink RLC data block corresponding to the RRBP field;
otherwise, the network increases N3105 by one and resends the downlink
data block in which the RRBP field is set.
When N3105 overflows, the network initiates the T3195. When the timer
T3195 expires, the current TBF abnormally releases.
This parameter specifies the maximum value of the N3103.
Upon receiving the last RLC data block when the uplink transmission is
complete, the network sends the MS a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message
with FAI=1 and initiates the N3103.
If the network does not receive a packet control acknowledgment message
within scheduled time, the N3103 increases by one and the network resends
the Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message.
When this counter overflows, the network initiates the T3169. When this
timer expires, the current TBF abnormally releases.
This parameter specifies the maximum value of N3101.
In uplink dynamic assignment mode, the multiple MSs can share one uplink
channel if the downlink data blocks carry the USF value.
After the network starts to assign a USF value to the uplink TBF (uplink
TBF is established), the N3101 is initiated. The network reserves the RLC
uplink blocks mapping to each USF for the uplink data sent from the MS. If
the network receives valid uplink data blocks from the MS, the network
resets the N3101; otherwise, the N3101 increases by one.
When this counter overflows, the current uplink TBF abnormally releases.
This parameter specifies the release delay of the downlink TBF.
After sending the last downlink RLC data block and confirming that all
downlink data blocks are received, the network does not immediately notify
the MS of releasing this TBF but forcedly set the last data block not
received. Therefore, keep this TBF unreleased by continuously resending
the last downlink data block with the Relative Reserved Block Period
(RRBP) flag. During the release delay of a downlink TBF, as long as the
upper layer of the network has a requirement of downlink data transmission,
the extracted downlink RLC blocks can be sent on this downlink TBF. At
the same time, the status of the downlink TBF changes from release delay to
downlink transmission. In addition, during the release delay, the MS must
send the Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message on the uplink data block
corresponding to the RRBP to maintain the communication with the
network. Therefore, when the MS needs to send the uplink data, it can send
an uplink request through Channel Request Description carried in the
Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message.
The value 0 specifies that release delay function of the downlink TBF is
disabled.
This parameter specifies the inactive period of the extended uplink TBF.
Upon receiving the last uplink RLC data blocks (CountValue=0) from the
MS that supports the extended uplink TBF function, the network does not
release this uplink TBF immediately but set it to the inactive mode. To
transmit the uplink RLC data blocks during inactive period, the MS can use
this TBF that automatically becomes active instead of establishing a new
uplink TBF. When the inactive period expires, if no uplink RLC data block
needs to be transmitted, the network sends the MS a Packet Uplink Ac
message with FAI=1 to notify the MS of releasing the uplink TBF. In
addition, when an uplink TBF is inactive, a downlink TBF can still establish
on this uplink TBF.
The extended uplink TBF function can greatly improve the network KPIs,
especially for the discontinuous uplink transmission (such as interactive
transmission and Ping) services.
The value 0 specifies that the extended uplink TBF function is disabled
(Also deactivate this function on the BSC side).
This parameter specifies the release delay of the non-extended uplink TBF.
Upon receiving the last uplink RLC data block (CountValue=0), the
network sends the MS a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message with FAI=1 to
notify the MS of releasing this uplink TBF. To establish the downlink TBF
on the unreleased uplink TBF, the network will notify the MS of releasing
this uplink TBF for a period of delay after this parameter is set. After the
downlink TBF establishes successfully or after the delay time exceeds the
setting time of non-extended uplink TBF, this uplink TBF will automatically
release.
The value 0 specifies that the release delay of the non-extended uplink TBF
is disabled.
This parameter specifies that the MS performs the load-based cell
reselection can be controlled. The load-based cell reselection is available to
the MSs that the receive level is lower than this threshold.
This parameter is used to collect the statistics of GPRS transmission quality.
If the receive quality is equal to or greater than this threshold, you can infer
that the transmission quality is worsened.
This parameter is used to collect the statistics of EDGE 8PSK transmission
quality. If the MEAN_BEP is less than or equal to this threshold, you can
infer that the transmission quality is worsened.
This parameter is used to collect the statistics of EDGE GMSK transmission
quality. If the MEAN_BEP is less than or equal to this threshold, you can
infer that the transmission quality is worsened.
This parameter specifies the interval between two NC2 cell reselections in a
cell.
This parameter specifies the number of times that the receive level of the
serving cell is lower than the level threshold of cell reselection within the
Normal Cell Reselection Watch Period; If the number of times is lower than
this parameter, the cell reselection is allowed.
This parameter specifies the number of times that the receive levels of the
serving cell are continuously calculated before the P/N criterion is
determined.
This parameter specifies whether enabling the normal cell reselection
algorithm is allowed.
This parameter specifies whether enabling the cell load-based reselection
algorithm is allowed.
This parameter specifies whether enabling the critical cell reselection
algorithm is allowed.
This parameter specifies whether a 2G cell or 3G cell is selected in the inter-
RAT cell reselection procedure.
This parameter specifies the number of MRs used for averaging the signal
strength in neighbor cells.
This parameter specifies the allowed number of consecutive MRs that are
lost. If the number of consecutive MRs that are lost exceeds this parameter,
the previous MR is thought to be invalid.
This parameter specifies that if the cell load is lower than this threshold, the
cell can receive the MSs from other cells due to the load-based reselection.
That is, the cell will receive the MSs from other cells due to the load-based
reselection if the TBF multiplexing rate is lower than corresponding
percentage.
The load-based reselection is enabled when the cell load is higher than this
threshold.
This parameter specifies that the accumulatively calculated number of times
that the downlink transmission quality of MS is lower than the transmission
quality threshold of MS. The critical reselection needs to be performed
when the ratio of the accumulatively calculated number of times and the
number of times in the downlink transmission quality measurement report
reaches this threshold.
This parameter specifies that the Cell Urgent Reselection Allowed can be
determined when the transmission quality in the received downlink
transmission quality measurement report is lower than this threshold.
This parameter specifies the penalty duration for the cell reselection. The
cell penalty can be performed within the Cell Penalty Last Time only.
This parameter specifies the signal level for target cell penalty after the BSC
receives the cell reselection failure message or after the cell initiates the
load-based reselection. This parameter is valid only within the Cell Penalty
Last Time.
To avoid ping-pong handovers, when this parameter specifies the cell
reselection, the level of the target cell should higher than the total of the
Min Access Level Threshold and the Cell Reselection Hysterisis.
This parameter specifies the minimum receive level that is required for a
cell to serve as a candidate cell for handover.
This parameter specifies whether to support the QoS optimization.
The GPRS GSN provides different subscribers with flexible QoS
mechanism. The QoS level is determined in the subscription.
The QoS control parameters include the service priority class, reliability
class, delay class, and throughput class.
During the negotiation of a QoS profile, an MS can apply a value for each
QoS attribute. After receiving the request from the MS, the network
negotiates a class for each attribute of each QoS profile based on the current
effective GPRS resources. The network provides the negotiated QoS profile
with corresponding resources.
Not Support: QoS not supported;
Support: QoS supported.
This parameter specifies the policy of the handover between the underlaid
subcell and the overlaid subcell in a PS domain.
In version V9R8, the BSC supports the PDCH configured in the overlaid
subcell or in the underlaid subcell, and supports the handover between the
overlaid subcell and the underlaid subcell.
The overlaid-to-underlaid subcell handover, underlaid-to-overlaid subcell
handover, bi-directional handover between overlaid subcell and underlaid
subcell, and no handover between between overlaid subcell and underlaid
subcell are allowed for the handover between the underlaid subcell and the
overlaid subcell in a PS domain; by default, this parameter is set to no
handover between overlaid subcell and underlaid subcell.
This parameter specifies the maximum transmission delay of the POC
services.
The POC services have a strict requirement on the transmission delay. The
network should support the detection of the POC service type and take
measures to reduce the transmission delay to meet the requirement of the
POC services.
If the service type carried in the received message is POC, the Transfer
Delay in the ABQP must be lower than the value of this parameter.
POCpush to talk over cellular.
This parameter specifies the upper limit of the bandwidth for the POC
services.
The POC services have a strict requirement on the transmission delay. The
network should support the detection of the POC service type and take
measures to reduce the transmission delay to meet the requirement of the
POC services.
If the service type carried in the received message is POC, the
uplink/downlink bandwidth GbrValue required by the ABQP must be lower
than the upper limit of the bandwidth for the POC services.
POCpush to talk over cellular.
This parameter specifies the lower limit of the bandwidth for the POC
services.
The POC services have a strict requirement on the transmission delay. The
network should support the detection of the POC service type and take
measures to reduce the transmission delay to meet the requirement of the
POC services.
If the service type carried in the received message is POC, the
uplink/downlink bandwidth GbrValue required by the ABQP must be lower
than the upper limit of the bandwidth for the POC services.
POCpush to talk over cellular.
This parameter specifies whether to support the packet assignment, that is,
the assignment of the packet channel to the MS through the PACCH, this
only involves the takeover of the uplink immediate assignment. To improve
the speed of the MS to access the network, after the packet assignment is
taken over to the BTS, the BSC reserves uplink resources for the BTS. The
BTS obtains the channel request information of the MS by interpreting the
downlink acknowledgment message from the MS, and assigns the reserved
uplink resources to the MS. Then, the MS can send the data blocks.
This parameter specifies whether to support the takeover of the packet
immediate assignment by the BTS. It is relative to the uplink immediate
assignment.
To improve the speed of the MS to access the network, the BSS pre-
allocates the uplink TBF resources and sends these resources to the BTS.
When the MS initiates the channel request, the BTS uses the pre-allocated
resources to send the immediate assignment message to the MS. Upon
receiving the immediate assignment message sent by the BTS, the MS can
upload the data block. Meanwhile, the BTS needs to send the additional
channel request message to the BSC. Upon receiving this request message,
the BSC sends the additional immediate assignment message to the BTS to
complete the setup of the TBF process.
When both the MS and the network support PFC, the QoS parameters are
obtained from the ABQP in the PFC.
When the MS or the network does not support PFC, the QoS parameters are
obtained from the DL UNITDAT of the SGSN or from the uplink request of
the MS.
Gbr:guaranteed bit rate.
PFC: packet flow context.
ABQPAggregate BSS QoS Profile.
This parameter specifies the default MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled
downlink.
To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the downlink, you should set the
MCS type for transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. Then, you
should dynamically adjust the MCS types of other TBFs based on the signal
transmission quality.
To fixedly use an MCS type on the downlink, you should fixedly use an
MCS type for all TBFs.
This parameter specifies the fixed MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled
downlink.
To fixedly use an MCS type on the downlink, you should set this parameter
to a value among MCS1-MCS9.
To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the downlink, you should set this
parameter to UNFIXED.
This parameter specifies the default MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled
uplink.
To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the uplink, you should set the MCS
type for transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. Then, you
dynamically adjust the MCS types of other TBFs based on the signal
transmission quality.
To fixedly use an MCS type on the uplink, you should fixedly use an MCS
type for all TBFs.
This parameter specifies the fixed MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled
uplink.
To fixedly use an MCS type on the uplink, you should set this parameter to
a value among MCS1-MCS9.
To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the uplink, set this parameter to
UNFIXED.
This parameter specifies the average period of bit error detected.
This parameter can be used to obtain the forgetting factor, which is used for
the MS to calculate the measurement results.
This parameter specifies the mode of controlling the quality of links. During
the data transmission process, the modulation scheme and coding scheme
can be changed to dynamically adapt to the radio transmission environment,
thus improving the quality of links.
- Setting and effect
Link Adaption (LA): The network dynamically adjusts the coding scheme of
a channel based on the transmission quality of the channel link. The link
quality is determined by 8PSK MEAN BEP and 8PSK CV BEP carried in
the Packet EGPRS Downlink Ack/Nack message. The network selects a
proper coding scheme for transmission based on the measurement reports
from the MS. For cells with good Um interface quality, the LA mode is
usually used.
Incremental Redundancy (IR): The network should retransmit only different
data blocks with the puncturing coding scheme. The MS buffers the history
error information and the data blocks are retransmitted through combined
error correction. In the cell with bad Um interface quality, the IR mode can
achieve good transmission quality, but the MS must support this mode. For
cells with bad Um interface quality, the IR mode is usually used.
This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of
the downlink TBF to change from CS4 to CS3.
When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is larger than or equals
to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes
from CS4 to CS3.
This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of
the downlink TBF to change from CS3 to CS2.
When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is larger than or equals
to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes
from CS3 to CS2.
This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of
the downlink TBF to change from CS2 to CS1.
When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is larger than or equals
to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes
from CS2 to CS1.
This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of
the downlink TBF to change from CS3 to CS4.
When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is smaller than or equals
to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes
from CS3 to CS4.
This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of
the downlink TBF to change from CS2 to CS3.
When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is smaller than or equals
to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes
from CS2 to CS3.
This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of
the downlink TBF to change from CS1 to CS2.
When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is smaller than or equals
to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes
from CS1 to CS2.
This parameter specifies the default CS type used on the downlink.
To dynamically adjust the CS type on the downlink, set the CS type for
transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. Then, the CS types of
other TBFs are dynamically adjusted based on the signal transmission
quality.
If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the downlink, all TBFs use the
default CS types.
This parameter specifies the fixed CS type used on the downlink.
If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the downlink, this parameter can
be set to CS1, CS2, CS3, or CS4.
If the CS type is dynamically adjusted on the downlink, this parameter is set
to UNFIXED.
This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of
the uplink TBF to change from CS4 to CS3.
When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is larger than or equals to
the value of this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from
CS4 to CS3.
This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of
the uplink TBF to change from CS3 to CS2.
When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is larger than or equals to
the value of this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from
CS3 to CS2.
This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of
the uplink TBF to change from CS2 to CS1.
When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is larger than or equals to
the value of this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from
CS2 to CS1.
This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of
the uplink TBF to change from CS3 to CS4.
When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is smaller than or equals to
the value of this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from
CS3 to CS4.
This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of
the uplink TBF to change from CS2 to CS3.
When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is smaller than or equals to
the value of this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from
CS2 to CS3.
This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of
the uplink TBF to change from CS1 to CS2.
When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is smaller than or equals to
the value of this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from
CS1 to CS2.
This parameter specifies the default CS type used on the uplink.
To dynamically adjust the CS type on the uplink, set the CS type for
transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. Then, the CS types of
other TBFs are dynamically adjusted based on the signal transmission
quality.
If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the uplink, all TBFs use the
default CS types.
This parameter specifies the fixed coding scheme (CS) type used on the
uplink.
If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the uplink, this parameter can be
set to CS1, CS2, CS3, or CS4.
If the CS type is dynamically adjusted on the uplink, this parameter is set to
UNFIXED.
This parameter specifies the weight of QoS background services. The
background class service is a kind of traffic class services.
This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS THP3.
This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS THP2.
This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS Traffic Handle Priority
1 (THP1).
This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS ARP3.
This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS ARP2.
This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS Allocation/Retention
Priority 1 (ARP1).
This parameter specifies the timer set to release the Abis timeslots.
When a channel is idle, this timer is started.
When the timer expires, the Abis timeslots are released.
This parameter specifies the number of channels reserved for the CS
services.
This parameter specifies the levels of dynamic channels preempted by CS
services and PS services. Only full-rate TCHs are the dynamic channels that
can be preempted.
All dynamic channels can be preempted: It indicates that the CS services
can preempt all the dynamic channels.
Control channels cannot be preempted: It indicates that the CS services can
preempt all the dynamic channels except for the control channels.
Dynamic channels carrying services cannot be preempted: It indicates that
the CS services cannot preempt the dynamic channels that carry services.
This parameter specifies the timer set to release the idle dynamic channel
after all TBFs on the dynamic channel are released.
If all TBFs on a dynamic channel are released, the dynamic channel is not
released immediately. Instead, a timer is started when the channel is idle.
Before the timer expires, if there are new services, the dynamic channel
continues to be used and the timer is stopped.
When the timer expires, the dynamic channel is released.
This parameter specifies the policy for dynamic channel conversion in a
concentric cell.
This parameter specifies the PDCH downlink multiplex threshold.
The downlink PDCH can carry a maximum of (threshold/10) TBFs.
This parameter specifies the PDCH uplink multiplex threshold.
The uplink PDCH can carry a maximum of (threshold/10) TBFs.
This parameter specifies the downlink multiplex threshold of dynamic
channel conversion.
When the number of subscribers carried over the channel reaches the
threshold/10, dynamic channels are used.
This parameter specifies the uplink multiplex threshold of dynamic channel
conversion.
When the number of subscribers carried over the channel reaches the
threshold/10, dynamic channels are used.
This parameter specifies the maximum ratio of PDCHs in a cell. The total
number of TCHs and PDCHs available in a cell is fixed. The PDCH ratio is
equal to PDCHs / (TCH/Fs + static PDCHs). This parameter determines the
proportion of PDCHs to the total number of TCHs + PDCHs.
This parameter specifies the multi-frequency reporting value.
Value range: Reporting the frequencies of six strongest cells; Reporting the
frequency of one strongest cell; Reporting the frequencies of two strongest
cells; Reporting the frequencies of three strongest cells
This parameter specifies the threshold of HCS signal strength.
The MS uses the signal strength in the MR and this threshold to calculate
C31, which is used for cell reselection.
This parameter specifies the Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS) priority of a
GPRS cell.
Value 0 indicates the lowest priority and value 7 indicates the highest
priority.
This parameter specifies the maximum TX power level for an MS to access
the packet control channel.
This parameter specifies the minimum receive level for an MS in the cell to
access the system.
This parameter specifies whether the SoLSA exclusive access cell is used.
Only the MSs customizing the Localised Service Area (LSA) service can
access the exclusive cell.
This parameter specifies whether the cell can be accessed during cell
reselection.
Permit Cell Access: Access is permitted.
Prohibit Cell Access: Access is prohibited.
This parameter specifies the hysteresis of cell reselection in different routing
areas.
When an MS in the ready state performs cell reselection, if the originating
cell and the target cell belong to different routing areas, the MS starts cell
reselection only when the signal level of the neighbor cells in different
routing areas is higher than that of this cell, and when the signal level
difference is greater than the value of this parameter.
This parameter specifies the period when cell reselection is prohibited.
This parameter specifies whether the MS can access another cell.
Yes: The MS can access another cell.
No: The MS cannot access another cell.
This parameter specifies whether GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is used for
C32 calculation during cell reselection. Value range: 0, 1
0: GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is not used for C32 calculation during cell
reselection.
1: GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is used for C32 calculation during cell
reselection.
This parameter specifies whether GPRS Cell Reselect Hysteresis is applied
to the C31 standards.
c31standard: applied
c31notuse: not applied
This parameter specifies the hysteresis of cell reselection in the same
routing area.
When an MS in the ready state performs cell reselection, if the originating
cell and the target cell belong to the same routing area, the C2 value
measured in the overlapped area of two adjacent cells fluctuates greatly
because of the fading feature of radio channels. Therefore, the MS
frequently performs cell reselection. The frequent cell reselection not only
increases the signaling flow on the network and affects the utilization of
radio resources, but also greatly affects the data transmission rate of the MS
and decreases the QoS as a consequence.
When this parameter is used, the MS starts cell reselection only when the
signal level of the neighbor cells in the same routing area is higher than that
of this cell, and when the signal level difference is greater than the value of
this parameter.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is hard to start cell
reselection.
This parameter specifies whether the PSI status message is supported.
Yes: supported
No: not supported
This parameter specifies whether the MS is allowed to send a measurement
report to the network.
This parameter specifies the repetition period of the PS information PSI1.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the PSI1 cannot be received in
real time.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the PSI1 is sent frequently. This
occupies many resources.
This parameter specifies the persistence level 4 of radio priority access.
A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. If the priority is higher than
the persistence level, the MS can access the cell. Otherwise, the MS cannot
access the cell.
This parameter specifies the persistence level 3 of radio priority access.
A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. If the priority is higher than
the persistence level, the MS can access the cell. Otherwise, the MS cannot
access the cell.
This parameter specifies the persistence level 2 of radio priority access.
A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. If the priority is higher than
the persistence level, the MS can access the cell. Otherwise, the MS cannot
access the cell.
This parameter specifies the persistence level 1 of radio priority access.
A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. If the priority is higher than
the persistence level, the MS can access the cell. Otherwise, the MS cannot
access the cell.
This parameter specifies the number of timeslots for extension transmission
in random access. This parameter affects the interval for the MS to send a
new Channel Request after the channel request fails.
This parameter specifies the minimum number of timeslots between two
successive channel requests.
The MS sends an access request and waits for a response. If no response is
received after the minimum number of timeslots, the MS resends the access
request.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio
priority 4.The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet
Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. Level 1 is the highest
priority, and level 4 is the lowest priority.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio
priority 3.The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet
Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. Level 1 is the highest
priority, and level 4 is the lowest priority.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio
priority 2.The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet
Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. Level 1 is the highest
priority, and level 4 is the lowest priority.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio
priority 1.The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet
Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. Level 1 is the highest
priority, and level 4 is the lowest priority.
This parameter specifies the access control class.
This parameter specifies the number of PRACH blocks. The value of this
parameter ranges from 1 to 12.
Value 1 indicates one PRACH.
Value 2 indicates two PRACHs.
...
Value 12 indicates 12 PRACHs.
This parameter specifies the number of PAGCH blocks. The value of this
parameter ranges from 1 to 12.
Value 1 indicates one PAGCH.
Value 2 indicates two PAGCHs.
...
Value 12 indicates four PBCCHs.
This parameter specifies the number of PBCCH blocks. The value of this
parameter ranges from 1 to 4.
Value 1 indicates one PBCCH.
Value 2 indicates two PBCCHs.
Value 3 indicates three PBCCHs.
Value 4 indicates four PBCCHs.
This parameter specifies the period of cell reselection measurement report
in packet transfer mode.
This parameter specifies the period of cell reselection measurement report
in packet idle mode.
This parameter specifies the minimum duration when the MS stays in non-
DRX mode after the NC NC-measurement report is sent.
The MS should stay in non-DRX mode for a period of time after the
measurement report is sent.
This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32. A
higher value indicates a higher access priority.
This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32. The
timer is sent through the system message broadcast in each cell.
When the BCCH frequency of a cell is listed in the neighbor cells for the
MS, the negative offset of C2 is calculated before timer T expires.
This parameter is set to avoid the ping-pong cell reselection by the fast-
moving MS. Therefore, the MS does not select this cell when the duration
of signal strength on the BCCH is shorter than the penalty time.
Value infinity indicates an infinity offset.
This parameter specifies the interval between two extension measurement
reports.
This parameter specifies the type of the extension measurement report
Three types of the extension measurement report are type 1, type 2, and type
3.
Type 1: The MS sends the measurement report of the six strongest carriers
to the network regardless of whether the BSIC was decoded. The
measurement report should contain the received signal level and BSIC.
Type 2: The MS sends the measurement report of the six strongest carriers
to the network. For the six carriers, the BSIC must be decoded successfully
and the NCC specified by NCC_PERMITTED is carried. The measurement
report should contain the received signal level and BSIC.
Type 3: The MS does not need to decode the BSIC of the carriers that send
the measurement report. The measurement report should contain the
received signal level and interference measurement of a carrier.
This parameter specifies the frequency index of the interference
measurement in type 3 of the extension measurement report.
This parameter specifies the NCC bitmap of the measurement report sent by
the MS. The MS reports only the NCC bitmap of the BSIC and the carrier
measurement report that matches the bitmap.
The network can require the MS to send measurement reports. When the
MS is in idle mode, it sends the extension measurement reports. This
parameter can be set to em0 or em1.
This parameter specifies whether the CS paging on the A interface is
supported.
Yes: The MS can receive CS paging on the A interface when handling the
GPRS service.
No: The MS cannot receive CS paging on the A interface when handling the
GPRS service.
This parameter specifies whether the 11-bit EGPRS access is supported.
Yes: supported
No: not supported
This parameter specifies the routing area color code of a GPRS cell.
This parameter specifies the priority of packet access of MSs to a cell. The
2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel
Request message has four levels of priorities. Level 1 is the highest priority,
and level 4 is the lowest priority. When an MS accesses the network, the
BSC compares the Radio Priority in the Channel Request message with the
parameter setting in the cell. The BSC requests for establishing the TBF for
a channel only when the radio priority reaches the access priority of the cell.
The values of this parameter area as follows:
No packet access
Packet access of level 1
Packet access of levels 1-2
Packet access of levels 1-3
Packet access of levels 1-4
This parameter specifies whether the SPLIT_PG_CYCLE parameter is
transmitted on the CCCH of the cell.
SPLIT_PG_CYCLE is used to set the DRX period. For the BTS and MS
supporting the SPLIT_PG_CYCLE-based paging groups on the CCCH, this
parameter is optional.
Yes: The SPLIT_PG_CYCLE parameter is transmitted on the CCCH of the
cell.
No: The SPLIT_PG_CYCLE parameter is not transmitted on the CCCH of
the cell.
In the cell reselection required by the network, the network requests the MS
to send measurement reports to control its cell reselection. There are three
network control modes.
nc0: Normal MS control. The MS performs automatic cell reselection.
nc1: MS control with measurement reports. The MS sends measurement
reports to the network and performs automatic cell reselection.
nc2: Network control. The MS sends measurement reports to the network
but does not perform automatic cell reselection.
This parameter specifies the value of PAN_MAX. It is also the maximum
value of N3102.
Value 4 indicates that PAN_MAX is 4; value 32 indicates that PAN_MAX
is 32; value No use indicates that this parameter is not used.
This parameter is used to set the value of N3102. When the MS receives a
Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message from the network for increasing the
value of V(S) or V(A), the MS increases N3102 by PAN_INC.
Value 0 indicates that PAN_INC is 0; value 7 indicates that PAN_INC is 7;
value No use indicates that this parameter is not used.
This parameter is used to set the value of N3102. When T3182 expires, the
MS decreases N3102 by PAN_DEC.
Value 0 indicates that PAN_DEC is 0; value 7 indicates that PAN_DEC is
7; value No use indicates that this parameter is not used.
This parameter specifies the maximum countdown value of the MS.
This parameter determines BS_CV_MAX and is used for the MS to
calculate the CV. The parameter also determines the duration of the T3198
timer.
Every time the MS sends an uplink RLC data block, the receive state of the
data block is set to Pending and the T3198 is started. If the MS receives a
Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message before T3198 expires, it updates the
receive state of each uplink RLC data block based on the acknowledgment
bitmap contained in the message. If T3198 for the RLC data block in the
Pending state expires, the MS sets the receive state of this data block to
Nack and retransmits the data block.
This parameter specifies the acknowledgment message type used by the MS.
If four access pulses are used, the timing advance can be obtained without a
polling message.
If the RLC/MAC control block is used, the timing advance can be obtained
only by sending a polling message. Four access pulses are recommended.
This parameter specifies the access burst type used by the MS on the
PRACH and PTCCH/U. The access burst type is carried in the packet
control acknowledgment message.
8bit: access using the 8-bit burst
11bit: access using the 11-bit burst
SI13 indicates the access burst type.
This parameter specifies the maximum duration of the non-DRX mode.
DRX (discontinuous reception) is a parameter carried by the cell broadcast
message.
The MS stays in the DRX mode for a certain period when changing from
the packet transfer mode to the packet idle mode. After the TBF is released,
the MS monitors all the CCCH blocks during the non-DRX mode period
and the BSC6000 reserves the MS context. The reservation time depends on
the smaller value between DRX_Timer_Max and NON_DRX_TIMER.
NON_DRX_TIMER is negotiated with the SGSN during the GPRS
attachment of the MS and its value is usually high. Therefore, the
reservation time actually depends on DRX_TIMER_MAX.
Value 0 indicates that the MS enters the DRX mode immediately.
Value 1 indicates that the MS enters the DRX mode one second later. Value
n indicates that the MS enters the DRX mode n seconds later.
This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the TBF release
after receiving the last data block.
When the MS receives the last RLC data block carrying the last block flag
(FBI=1) and confirms that all the RLC data blocks on the TBF are received,
the MS sends the Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message carrying the final
acknowledgement flag (FAI=1) and starts T3192 at the same time.
If T3192 expires, the MS releases the TBF resources and monitors paging
channels. During the TBF release process, if the MS is in half-duplex mode
and receives the Packet Uplink Assignment message, the MS responds
immediately.
If the MS does not receive the Packet Uplink Assignment message during
the TBF release process, the MS enters the packet idle mode. If the MS is in
dual transfer mode, it enters the dedicated mode.
This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the Packet
Uplink Assignment message.
This parameter specifies the maximum interval set for the MS to wait for the
Packet Uplink Assignment message. After the MS sends the Packet
Resource Request or Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message carrying Channel
Request Description, T3168 is started to wait for the Packet Uplink
Assignment message from the network.
If the MS receives the Packet Uplink Assignment message before T3168
expires, T3168 is reset. Otherwise, the MS initiates the PS access procedure
again for four times. If the Packet Uplink Assignment message is still not
received, the MS regards that this uplink TBF establishment has failed.
Based on the paging channel used by the system, the network operation
modes are classified into Network Operation Mode I, Network Operation
Mode II, and Network Operation Mode III.
When the GS interface is configured, Network Operation Mode I is used.
When the Gs interface or the PCCCH is not configured, Network Operation
Mode II is used.
When the Gs interface is not configured but the PCCCH is configured,
Network Operation Mode III is used.
Configuration Policy NSN PARAMETER
Name Parameter Name
BAND frequency band in use
The network has four layers, numbered 1-4
respectively. If the number of the layer is small, the
priority of the layer is high.
This parameter and Cell Priority determine the
priority of a cell.
The priority affects the sequencing of neighbor cells
for
None
MCC mobile country code
None MNC mobile network code
This parameter should be set as required.
NCC BSIC NCC
1. A training sequence is known by both the transmit
end and the receive end. It is used to acknowledge
the exact position of the other bits in the same burst
and to determine whether the received co-channel
signals are useful signals. If a burst is incon
BCC bsIdentityCode
Each layer has 16 priorities, numbered 1-16
respectively. If the number of the priority is small,
the priority is high. This parameter along with Layer
of the Cell determines the priority of a cell. The
priority affects the sequencing of neighbor cells fo
None
None
None
GENA GPRSenabled
None
None
EGENA egprsEnabled
None
Yes: In network control mode NC0, NC1, or NC2,
when the MS is in the packet transmission mode, the
network informs the MS of the system information
about neighbor cells in advance.
No: In network control mode NC0, NC1, or NC2,
when the MS is in the packet
None
None
If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC reports the
information about all neighbor cells to the PCU when
there are more than 32 neighbor cells. If this
parameter is set to No, the BSC reports the
information about a maximum of 32 neighbor cells to
the PC
None
None
BAND frequency band in use
None
RAC routing area code
None
None
None
None
HOP HoppingMode
The discontinuous transmission (DTX) function
allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the
case of no voice transfer. This function has the
following benefits:
1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption
of the MS and reducing system int
The value of this parameter correlates with Cell
ExtType. If this parameter is set to a too small value,
the handover success rate may be affected.
DMAX
msMaxDistanceInCallSetu
p
None
DMAX
msMaxDistanceInCallSetu
p
None
AHOP
None
As specified in Huawei concentric cell technology, a
concentric cell is divided into an OL subcell and a
UL subcell. The TRXs of the OL subcell and of the
UL subcell can use different frequency reuse modes.
The concentric cell technology can be combined
None
When the BCCH is configured in the OL subcell, it is
not configured in the UL subcell.
The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power
transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This
function has the following benefits:
1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption
of the MS and reducing system interference
2. On the downlink
DTX dtxMode
The average call drop rate decreases if call
reestablishment is allowed.
If this parameter is set to No, the average call drop
rate decreases. In suburban areas and urban areas
with poor coverage, this parameter should be set to
No.
Call reestablishment
RE
callReestablishmentAllowe
d
If the value of this parameter is too small, the
required level of received signals is low. Therefore,
many MSs attempt to camp on the cell, thus
increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call
drops. In such a case, you must set the parameter
based
RXP rxLevAccessMin
None
None
DR drInUse
None
DYNAMIC_SDCCH
None
None
PENA powerCtrlEnabled
None
None
None
TRX_ID TRX ID
None
TRX_NUM
None
CI CellId
None
BTS_ID BTS ID
None
If you activate a not-activated BTS, all the cells,
TRXs, and boards in this BTS will be activated.
Conversely, if you deactivate an activated BTS, all
the cells, TRXs, and boards in this BTS will be
deactivated.
When the BTSs are cascaded, the lower-level BTS
should be set to Not Activated if the Active State of
the upper-level BTS is set to Not Activated.
STATE Administrative State
Generally, the timeslots are automatically calculated
and assigned. The timeslots, however, can be also
manually assigned to meet the requirement of
operators. The manually assigned OML timeslot
cannot be adjusted when the timeslot is arranged.
The manually assigned OML timeslots can only be
modified manually.
This parameter cannot be modified once it takes
effect.
This parameter cannot be modified once it takes
effect.
This parameter cannot be modified once it takes
effect.
None
This parameter cannot be set to the number of the
occupied subrack.
None
This parameter cannot be set to the number of the
occupied E1 port.
If all semi-permanent links are configured on one
interface board, the In-BSC Port No. and the Out-
BSC Port No. must be set to different E1 ports on the
interface board.
This parameter is to be viewed only.
None
None
None
The BTS2X supports frame FH and RF FH. The
BTS3X of all versions supports the cross-cabinet
baseband FH and RF FH, including the timeslot FH
and frame FH. The double-transceiver BTSs support
the baseband FH and RF FH, including the timeslot
FH and frame FH, but do not support the cross-
cabinet baseband FH.
Adjust the cell coverage area by configuring the
Power Level; however, when the antenna is over high
and covers too many cells, you should lower the
antenna and increase the tilt of the antenna first.
When the transmit power of a BTS reduces, the
indoor coverage becomes worse.
Generally, for cells of the same priority in a network,
the power level configuration should ensure that the
EIRPs of the cells are basically the same.
When configuring the power level, you should note
that different TRXs in a cell can have different losses
due to different combination modes.
None
None
The smaller this parameter is, the higher the TRX
priority is. In other similar conditions, channels are
allocated to the TRX with higher priority.
None
None
This parameter takes effect only for the EDGE-
enabled TRX.
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
RDIV diversityUsed
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a too great or too small
value, the cabinet top output power of the BTS is
different from the TRX output power, resulting in the
failure of channel allocation.
None
This parameter is to be viewed only.
This parameter is to be viewed only.
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
There are two types of slot number: logical slot
number and physical slot number. When configuring
RSL links, set this parameter to the logical slot
number of the GXPUM.
This parameter need not be set when the Work Mode
is set to Auto.
You must set this parameter when the Work Mode is
set to Manual.
When the Work Mode is set to Free-run, this
parameter is 0.
None
None
None
None
The value of this parameter correlates with Cell
ExtType. If this parameter is set to a too small value,
the handover success rate may be affected.
DMAX
msMaxDistanceInCallSetu
p
The discontinuous transmission (DTX) function
allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the
case of no voice transfer. This function has the
following benefits:
1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption
of the MS and reducing system interference
2. On the downlink: decreasing power consumption
of the BTS, reducing system interference, and
reducing intermodulation inside the BTS
3. From the network perspective, the inter-frequency
interference is reduced and the network quality is
improved.
The DL DTX function is also restricted by the
MSC.To enable this function, the DTX function must
be enabled on the MSC side.
If downlink DTX is disabled on the MSC side,
downlink DTX cannot be used irrespective of the
setting of this parameter.
If downlink DTX is enabled on the MSC side, the
setting of this parameter determines whether
downlink DTX is used in a cell.
DOWNLINK DTX
None
None
None
None
DR drInUse
None
If the value of this parameter is too small, the
required level of received signals is low. Therefore,
many MSs attempt to camp on the cell, thus
increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call
drops. In such a case, you must set the parameter
based on the balance conditions of the uplink and
downlink levels.
RXP rxLevAccessMin
The average call drop rate decreases if call
reestablishment is allowed.
If this parameter is set to No, the average call drop
rate decreases. In suburban areas and urban areas
with poor coverage, this parameter should be set to
No.
Call reestablishment lasts for a long time, and
therefore the subscriber cannot wait and hooks on. It
is recommended that this parameter be set to Yes.
RE
callReestablishmentAllowe
d
The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power
transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This
function has the following benefits:
1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption
of the MS and reducing system interference
2. On the downlink: decreasing power consumption
of the BTS, reducing system interference, and
reducing intermodulation inside the BTS
3. From the network perspective, the inter-frequency
interference is reduced and the network quality is
improved.
DTX dtxMode
None
None
None
None
None
None
When the total power of the carrier on the single
QTRU board exceeds the maximum permissible
output power, the power sharing algorithm needs to
be enabled. If the data configuration detects that the
power sharing must be used, but the corresponding
downlink power control of a cell is disabled. The
power must be adjusted or the downlink power
control must be enabled.
None
None
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the half-rate
channels are assigned to the MS only when the
channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is very high.
Insufficient half-rate channels can be assigned to the
MS. Thus, the capacity of the BSC is reduced.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the half-rate
channels are assigned to the MS only when the
channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is very low.
The calls use the half-rate channel even if there are
enough full-rate channels, which influences the
speech quality.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the half-rate
channels are assigned to the MS only when the
channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is very high.
Insufficient half-rate channels can be assigned to the
MS. Thus, the capacity of the BSC is reduced.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the half-rate
channels are assigned to the MS only when the
channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is very low.
The calls use the half-rate channel even if there are
enough full-rate channels, which influences the
speech quality.
None
HSN1 hoppingSequenceNumber1
None
FLEXIBLE MAIO
MANAGEMENT
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the burst
influence may be reduced but the judgment of
channel status may not be in time. If this parameter is
set to a lower value, the judgment is imprecise.
This parameter should be set to a small value because
the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH
seizure duration for the MS.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the influence
of accidental factors may be reduced but the
judgment of channel status may not be in time. If this
parameter is set to a lower value, the judgment is
imprecise.
This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal
levels caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure
correct handover decisions. When this parameter is
set to a higher value, the impact of sudden changes is
reduced, and the system response is delayed. Thus,
the network performance is degraded.
If this parameter is set to a great value, the
interference indication message will not be reported
even though the interference exists. If this parameter
is set to a small value, the interference indication
message will be reported even though no interference
exists.
If this parameter is set to a great value, the
interference indication message will not be reported
even though the interference exists. If this parameter
is set to a small value, the interference indication
message will be reported even though no interference
exists.
If this parameter is set to a great value, the
interference indication message will not be reported
even though the interference exists. If this parameter
is set to a small value, the interference indication
message will be reported even though no interference
exists.
If this parameter is set to a great value, the
interference indication message will not be reported
even though the interference exists. If this parameter
is set to a small value, the interference indication
message will be reported even though no interference
exists.
None
None
TRP trxPriorityInTCHAlloc
None
None
None
It is recommended not to use the TIGHT BCCH
algorithm in multiband network.
None
None
Huawei recommends that the parameter Enhanced
TCH Adjust Allowed be set to No, the forced
handover may fail in the concentric cell. In a normal
cell, Huawei recommends that this parameter be set
to Yes to ensure that the timeslot arrangement can be
performed in the cell.
If this parameter is set too small, it cannot correctly
indicate the idle state of the current SDCCHs and
consequently the rollback of SDCCHs immediately
triggers adjustment and affects the network
performance.
If this parameter is set too large, the channel
allocation algorithm becomes less sensitive and
consequently the SDCCHs stay in idle state and
cannot be rolled back for a long period of time.
If this parameter is set too small, the SDCCHs in the
cell may be insufficient and the dynamic adjustment
cannot be initiated, thus affecting the access of users.
It is meaningless to set the parameter too large.
If this parameter is set too large and consequently
there is a small number of requests for SDCCHs, the
SDCCHs of a cell are in idle state;
If this parameter is set too small and consequently
there is a large number of requests for SDCCHs, the
requests cannot meet the requirements.
The AMR ACS (F/H) contains at most four coding
rates. Therefore, the value of this parameter ranges
from 0 to 3. The values 0 to 3 match those of the
coding rates of AMR ACS (F/H).
None
HRH3
amrConfigurationHr:
hysteresis3
None
HRH2
amrConfigurationHr:
hysteresis2
None
HRH1
amrConfigurationHr:
hysteresis1
None
HRTD3
None
HRTD2
None
HRTD1
None
HRH3
None
HRH2
None
HRH1
None
HRTU3
None
HRTU2
None
HRTU1
Each bit indicates whether a coding rate is contained
in the ACS. The five bits represent the coding rates
from 7.40 kbit/s to 4.75 kbit/s (from left to right). Bit
1 means that the coding rate is contained in the ACS
and bit 0 means that the coding rate is not contained
in the ACS. One to four coding rates can be selected
simultaneously.
If only one coding rate is specified by this
parameter, then the parameter AMR Starting Mode
(H) must be set to 0, which means the lowest coding
rate. All AMR coding rate adjustment thresholds (H)
and AMR coding rate adjustment hystereses (H) are
meaningless.
If two coding rates are specified by this parameter,
then AMR Starting Mode (H) can be set to 0 or 1.
The parameters AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1 (H),
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (H), AMR DL
Coding Rate adj.th1(H), and AMR DL Coding Rate
adj.hyst1 (H) are meaningful. Other AMR coding
rate adjustment thresholds (H) and AMR coding rate
adjustment hystereses (H) are meaningless.
If three coding rates are specified by this parameter,
then AMR Starting Mode (H) can be set to 0, 1, or 2.
The parameters AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1 (H),
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (H), AMR DL
Coding Rate adj.th1(H), and AMR DL Coding Rate
adj.hyst1 (H) are meaningful. Other AMR coding
rate adjustment thresholds (H) and AMR coding rate
adjustment hystereses (H) are meaningless.
If four coding rates are specified by this parameter,
then AMR Starting Mode (H) can be set to 0, 1, 2, or
3. All the AMR coding rate adjustment thresholds
The AMR ACS (F/H) contains at most four coding
rates. Therefore, the value of this parameter ranges
from 0 to 3. The values 0 to 3 match those of the
coding rates of AMR ACS (F/H).
None
FRH3
None
FRH2
None
FRH1
None
FRTD3
None
FRTD2
None
FRTD1
None
FRH3
None
FRH2
None
FRH1
None
FRTU3
None
FRTU2
None
FRTU1
Each bit indicates whether a coding rate is contained
in the ACS. The eight bits represent the coding rates
from 12.2 kbit/s to 4.75 kbit/s (from left to right). Bit
1 means that the coding rate is contained in the ACS
and bit 0 means that the coding rate is not contained
in the ACS. One to four coding rates can be selected
simultaneously.
If only one coding full rate is specified by this
parameter, then AMR Starting Mode (F) must be set
to 0. All the AMR coding rate adjustment thresholds
and hysteresis are meaningless.
If two coding rates are specified by this parameter,
then AMR Starting Mode (F) can be set to 0 or 1.
The parameters AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1 (F),
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (F), AMR DL
Coding Rate adj.th1(F), and AMR DL Coding Rate
adj.hyst1 (F) are meaningful. Other AMR coding rate
adjustment thresholds and hysteresis are meaningless.
If three coding rates are specified by this parameter,
then AMR Starting Mode (F) can be set to 0, 1, or 2.
The parameters AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1 (F),
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (F), AMR DL
Coding Rate adj.th1(F), and AMR DL Coding Rate
adj.hyst1 (F) are meaningful. Other AMR coding rate
adjustment thresholds and hysteresis are meaningless.
If four coding rates are specified by this parameter,
then AMR Starting Mode (F) can be set to 0, 1, 2, or
3. All the AMR coding rate adjustment thresholds
and hysteresis are meaningful.
If this parameter is set to a great value, the call
completion rate of MSs is increased and the QoS of
the network is improved. This, however, increases
the load of the BSC.
To improve the success rate of reassignment, it is
recommended that the default value Different Band
be used. That is, the frequency band of the
preferentially reassigned channel is different from
what is used in the original assignment.
Pay special attention to the setting of this parameter
during an upgrade. If receiving short messages is
allowed, this parameter must be set to No.
If this parameter is set to Yes, MSs cannot receive
short messages.
In satellite transmission mode, this function can be
enabled to reduce the impact of the delay in satellite
transmission on the signaling processing rate. For
terrestrial transmission, the default value of this
parameter is No.
None
The eMLPP supports a maximum of seven priorities
(A, B, and 0-4). The two highest priorities are
reserved only for local use in the network. Priorities
0-4 are used for subscribers all over the world.
If the eMLPP function needs to be fully
implemented, the support of the MSC, HLR, MS
(including SIM) is required.
If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC initiates a re-
assignment when receiving an assignment failure
message from the Um interface. This helps to
improve the call completion rate and the QoS of the
network. If there are a large number of assignment
failure messages, the BSC initiates many re-
assignment procedures and thus the BSC load
increases.
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Ec/No means Signal Noise Ratio in WCDMA. It
maps with C/I in GSM.
RSCP, Received Signal Code Power
None
None
None
Serving Band Reporting is valid if Report Type is set
to EMR.
None
None
In a multiple band network, this parameter can be set
on the basis of the traffic volume on each frequency
band.
If this parameter is set to 0, the MS reports the
measurement results of six neighbor cells known and
permitted by the NCC at the bands with the best
signal regardless of the band at which the neighbor
cell is located.
If this parameter is set to 1, the MS reports the
measurement result of a neighbor cell known and
permitted by the NCC at each band with the best
signal (the band serving the current cell not
included). The MS reports the measurement result of
the neighbor cell at the band serving the current cell
in the redundant position. If the redundant position is
still available, the MS reports the measurement
results of other neighboring cells regardless of the
bands at which the neighboring cells are located.
If this parameter is set to 2, the MS reports the
measurement results of two neighbor cell known and
permitted by the NCC at each band with the best
signal (the band serving the current cell not
included). The MS reports the measurement result of
the neighbor cell at the band serving the current cell
in the redundant position. If the redundant position is
still available, the MS reports the measurement
results of other neighbor cells regardless of the bands
at which the neighbor cells are located.
If this parameter is set to 3, the MS reports the
measurement results of three neighbor cells known
and permitted by the NCC at each band with the best
signal (the band serving the current cell not
For a 900/1800 MHz CoBCCH cell, it is
recommended that this parameter be set to Yes.
For a 1800 MHz cell in the dual-band network, it is
recommended that this parameter be set to Yes.
If the A5/4-7 encryption algorithm is used, it is
recommended that this parameter be set to Yes.
If this parameter is set to a small value, radio links
are likely to be faulty and therefore call drops occur.
If this parameter is set to a great value, a long time
lasts before an MS disconnects a call, and therefore
resource usage is low. This parameter takes effect on
the downlink.
RLT radioLinkTimeout
None
This parameter can be used to control network load
based on the MS access classes, thus preventing
some MSs from accessing the network. It is
recommended that this parameter be not used.
This parameter can be used to control network load
based on the MS access classes, thus preventing
some MSs from accessing the network. It is
recommended that this parameter be not used.
This parameter should be set as required: In the areas
where the traffic volume is low, this parameter can be
set to 4 or 7 to improve the success rate of MS
access. In the cells where congestion occurs or in the
micro cells where the traffic volume is high, it is
recommended this parameter be set to 1.
RET maxNumberRetransmission
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the put-
through rate of MS can be increased but the BSC
load may increase. If this parameter is set to a too
small value, the function is not obvious.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the put-
through rate of MS can be increased but the BSC
load may increase.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the
function is not obvious.
If the parameter is set to Yes, the immediate
assignment retransmission parameter is sent. If the
parameter is set to No, the immediate assignment
retransmission parameter is not sent.
If this parameter is set to Yes, the put-through rate of
MS can be increased but the BSC load may increase.
None
None
None
T200S SDCCH LAPDm T200
None
None
None
Only the BTS3X in G3BTS32.30000.04.1130 or
later and the double-transceiver BTSs support the
LAPDm N200 parameter.
If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC sends the
LAPDm N200 parameter. If this parameter is set to
No, the BSC does not send the LAPDm N200
parameter.
If a BTS does not support this parameter, the
parameter should be set to No. Otherwise, the BTS
cannot be initialized.
If timer T200 is set to a too small value, the transmit
end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and
the data transmission fails before the transmit end
receives a response from the peer end. If timer N200
is set to a too small value, the number of data
retransmissions is reduced and the success rate of
transmission is reduced.If T200 and N200 are set to
too great values, the channels are seized all along
when the link is faulty. Thus, resources are wasted.
If timer T200 is set to a too small value, the transmit
end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and
the data transmission fails before the transmit end
receives a response from the peer end. If timer N200
is set to a too small value, the number of data
retransmissions is reduced and the success rate of
transmission is reduced.If T200 and N200 are set to
too great values, the channels are seized all along
when the link is faulty. Thus, resources are wasted.
If timer T200 is set to a too small value, the transmit
end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and
the data transmission fails before the transmit end
receives a response from the peer end. If timer N200
is set to a too small value, the number of data
retransmissions is reduced and the success rate of
transmission is reduced.If T200 and N200 are set to
too great values, the channels are seized all along
when the link is faulty. Thus, resources are wasted.
If timer T200 is set to a too small value, the transmit
end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and
the data transmission fails before the transmit end
receives a response from the peer end. If timer N200
is set to a too small value, the number of data
retransmissions is reduced and the success rate of
transmission is reduced.If T200 and N200 are set to
too great values, the channels are seized all along
when the link is faulty. Thus, resources are wasted.
If timer T200 is set to a too small value, the transmit
end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and
the data transmission fails before the transmit end
receives a response from the peer end. If timer N200
is set to a too small value, the number of data
retransmissions is reduced and the success rate of
transmission is reduced.If T200 and N200 are set to
too great values, the channels are seized all along
when the link is faulty. Thus, resources are wasted.
If timer T200 is set to a too small value, the transmit
end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and
the data transmission fails before the transmit end
receives a response from the peer end. If timer N200
is set to a too small value, the number of data
retransmissions is reduced and the success rate of
transmission is reduced.If T200 and N200 are set to
too great values, the channels are seized all along
when the link is faulty. Thus, resources are wasted.
If timer T200 is set to a too small value, the transmit
end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and
the data transmission fails before the transmit end
receives a response from the peer end. If timer N200
is set to a too small value, the number of data
retransmissions is reduced and the success rate of
transmission is decreased. If T200 and N200 are set
to too great values, the channels are seized all along
when the link is faulty. Thus, resources are wasted.
Generally, this parameter is set to 1. It is set
according to the actual BTS receiver sensitivity and
the minimum MS access level. RACH Busy
Threshold must be greater than RACH Min.Access
Level.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the
allowable error for the random access signal is high
and an MS can easily access the network. But the
error report rate is high. If this parameter is set to a
too great value, the error report rate of the MS is low
but the MS cannot easily access the network.
This parameter specifies whether to enable the TRX
aiding function.
BCCH aiding: The main BCCH is aided to another
normal TRX in this cell.
BCCH aiding switchback: BCCH aiding switchback
functions after the originally configured BCCH TRX
is recovered.
Baseband FH aiding: When the TRX involved in
baseband FH in the cell is faulty or BCCH aiding is
performed in the cell, baseband FH aiding occurs and
the cell is initialized as a non-hopping cell.
Baseband FH aiding switchback: When all the TRXs
involved in baseband hopping in the cell are
recovered and the originally configured BCCH TRX
is normal, baseband FH aiding switchback can be
performed and the cell is restored to the baseband FH
mode.
After TRX aiding (BCCH aiding or baseband FH
aiding) or switchback occurs, the cell is re-initialized.
All types of BTSs will not perform the aiding
function within 15 minutes after the default cell is
initialized (you can configure the BTSs in this
period).
None
The AMR coding has strong anti-interference
capabilities. Under the same frame erasure rate
(FER), the AMR coding supports a low C/I ratio
compared with non-AMR coding. If the AMR
function is enabled, the speech quality is improved.
The value of AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH
period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode can be a little
more than that in non-AMR coding mode.
AHRLT
AMR HR Radio Link
Timeout
The AMR coding has strong anti-interference
capabilities. Under the same frame erasure rate
(FER), the AMR coding supports a low C/I ratio
compared with non-AMR coding. If the AMR
function is enabled, the speech quality is improved.
The value of AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH
period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode can be a little
more than that in non-AMR coding mode.
ARLT
AMR Radio Link Timeout
The AMR coding has strong anti-interference
capabilities. Under the same frame erasure rate
(FER), the AMR coding supports a low C/I ratio
compared with non-AMR coding. If the AMR
function is enabled, the speech quality is improved.
The value of AHR SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH
period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode can be a little
more than that in non-AMR coding mode.
The AMR coding has strong anti-interference
capabilities. Under the same frame erasion rate
(FER), the AMR coding supports a low C/I ratio
compared with non-AMR coding. If the AMR
function is enabled, the speech quality is improved.
The value of AFR SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH
period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode can be a little
more than that in non-AMR coding mode.
If the value of the parameter is too high, the cells
with heavy loads are selected as candidate target cells
so that the handover does not make sense. If the
value of the parameter is too low, it is difficult to
select candidate target cells.
DRT drThreshold
None
Properly setting this parameter can increase the
paging success rate. If this parameter is set to a too
great value, congestion may occur.
For the BTS2X series (excluding the BTS24), this
parameter must be set according to the actual
receiver sensitivity of the BTS and the minimum
access level of the MS to ensure the balance between
the uplink and the downlink. This parameter also
affects handover access of RACH BURST during
asynchronous handover.
For the BTS3X series and double-transceiver BTSs,
this parameter does not affect MS access but affects
the reporting of CCCH_LOAD_IND. If the level
received by the BCCH on the network side is greater
than the RACH Busy Threshold, the
CCCH_LOAD_IND is counted once whether the
decoding is successful. The RACH whose level is
lower than the RACH Busy Threshold and whose
decoding is successful is also counted. The
measurement period is the Average RACH Load
Timeslot Number.
If the value of this parameter is too small, the BTS
easily considers that the RACH timeslot is busy and
reports overload messages to the BSC. If the value is
too great, the BTS cannot determine the status of the
RACH timeslot correctly.
For the BTS24, if this parameter is used to determine
busy timeslot, its setting is consistent with that in the
BTS30. If this parameter is the level threshold for
valid random access, its setting is consistent with that
in the BTS20.
The settings of the BTS312, BTS3001C,
BTS3001C+, BTS3002C, and double-transceiver
BTS must be consistent with the meaning and
requirement of the BTS30.
If the value of this parameter does not match with the
value supported by the BTS, an alarm is generated.
The physical information is sent over the FACCH.
Four TDMA frames are sent each time at the interval
of 18 ms. If the value of T3105 is smaller than or
equal to 18 ms, the BTS needs to retransmit the
physical information to the MS when the timer
T3105 expires for the first time.If the transmission of
the physical information over the FACCH is not
complete, the expiration is invalid because the time is
shorter than an FACCH period.Considering the
previous factors, 20 ms is the reasonable minimum
value for this parameter. At present, the default value
of this parameter is 70 ms.
T3105
The value of this parameter can be increased when
handover becomes slow or the handover success rate
decreases because of clock problems or poor
transmission.An MS can be handed over only when
Max Resend Times of Phy Info multiplied by Radio
Link Timeout is greater than the interval between
EST IND and HO DETECT (120-180 ms).
Otherwise, the handover fails.
NY1 maxNumberOfRepetitions
This parameter can be set to Yes when 2G/3G
network is applied.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the
more difficult the TDD 3G better cell handover can
be triggered.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the
more difficult the TDD 3G better cell handover can
be triggered.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the
more difficult the 3G better cell handover can be
triggered.
The greater the value of this parameter, the more
difficult for the BSC to hand over the MS to a 2G
cell and the easier for the BSC to hand over the MS
to a TDD 3G cell.
During a handover decision, if this parameter is set to
Preference for 2G Cell, the BSC first selects the
target handover cell from the 2G candidate cells; If
this parameter is set to Preference for 3G Cell, the
BSC first selects the target handover cell from the 3G
candidate cells; If this parameter is set to Preference
for 2G Cell By Threshold, and if the receive level of
the first candidate cell among 2G candidate cells is
lower than or equal to HO Preference Threshold for
2G Cell, the 3G cell handover is preferred.
Otherwise, the 2G cell handover is preferred.
None
If this parameter is set to a small value, the MS is
likely to be handed over to the original serving cell,
thus leading to ping-pong handovers.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the MS is
unlikely to be handed over to the original serving
cell.
If this parameter is set to a small value, the MS is
likely to be handed over to the original serving cell,
thus leading to ping-pong handovers.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the MS is
unlikely to be handed over to the original serving
cell.
This parameter can only be applied to the fast-
moving handover.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the
filtered value is more accurate, but the time delay is
longer. If this parameter is set to a too small value,
the filtered value is inaccurate.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the
filtered value is more accurate, but the time delay is
longer. If this parameter is set to a too small value,
the filtered value is inaccurate.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the
more difficult the fast-moving handover can be
triggered.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the
more difficult the fast-moving handover can be
triggered.
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic
load in the UL subcell is increased.
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the
system flow load is increased.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the
system flow load is increased.
None
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the
system flow load is increased.
None
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the
system flow load is increased.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the
more difficult the handover between the OL subcell
and the UL subcell can be triggered.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the
more difficult the handover between the OL subcell
and the UL subcell can be triggered.
If this parameter is set to a too great or too low value,
load balancing between the OL subcell and UL
subcell is adversely affected.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic
load in the UL subcell is increased.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic
load in the OL subcell is increased.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic
load in the OL subcell is increased.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic
load in the UL subcell is increased.
None
None
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic
load in the UL subcell is increased.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic
load in the OL subcell is increased.
This parameter must be set to Yes when 2G/3G
network is applied.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the
more difficult the 3G better cell handover can be
triggered.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the
more difficult the 3G better cell handover can be
triggered.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the
more difficult the 3G better cell handover can be
triggered.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the
more difficult the 3G better cell handover can be
triggered.
The greater the value of this parameter is, the more
difficult for the BSC to hand over the MS to a 2G
cell and the easier for the BSC to hand over the MS
to an FDD 3G cell.
During the handover decision:
If this parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell, the
BSC first selects the target handover cell from the 2G
candidate cells.
If this parameter is set to Preference for 3G Cell, the
BSC first selects the target handover cell from the 3G
candidate cells.
If this parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell By
Threshold, and if the receive level of the first
candidate cell among 2G candidate cells is lower
than or equal to HO Preference Threshold for 2G
Cell, the 3G cell handover is preferred. Otherwise,
the 2G cell handover is preferred.
None
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic
load in the UL subcell is heavy, and the OL subcell
cannot share the traffic.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic
load in the UL subcell is heavy, and the OL subcell
cannot share the traffic.
This parameter must be set to a value that is greater
than or equal to the En Iuo Out Cell General
OverLoad Threshold.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic
load in the OL subcell is increased.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic
load in the UL subcell is increased.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic
load in the UL subcell is increased.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic
load in the OL subcell is increased.
When the MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail is set to 0,
no penalty related to retry times after UtoO handover
failure is imposed. That is, the call can still be
handed over to the previous target cell after the
penalty time.
None
None
This parameter is valid only when the Enhanced
Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes.
This parameter is valid only when the Enhanced
Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes.
This parameter is valid only when the Enhanced
Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes.
None
This parameter is valid in an enhanced concentric
cell.
This parameter is valid in an enhanced concentric
cell.
For the network with a single frequency band, inter-
BSC handovers are triggered at the edge of two
adjacent cells. Therefore, the recommended value of
this parameter is Underlaid Subcell. For a dual-band
network (for example, 900/1800 MHz cells),
incoming BSC handovers occur frequently and are
generally not triggered at the edges of adjacent cells.
In this case, the recommended value of this
parameter is Overlaid Subcell. In the case that
success rate of handovers drops, UL Subcell is
preferred for incoming BSC handovers.
None
None
None
When TA Threshold of Assignment Pref. is set to 0,
the TCH in the OL subcell cannot be assigned
preferentially to the MS because no TA is lower than
this threshold. In this case, Assign Optimum Layer is
set to Underlaid Subcell.
None
None
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the
more difficult the concentric cell handover can be
triggered.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the
more difficult the concentric cell handover can be
triggered.
Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced
concentric cell. The coverage of the OL subcell and
of the UL subcell is determined by different factors.
#N/A
None
Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced
concentric cell. The coverage of the OL subcell and
of the UL subcell is determined by different factors.
Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced
concentric cell. The coverage of the OL subcell and
of the UL subcell is determined by different factors.
Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced
concentric cell. The coverage of the OL subcell and
of the UL subcell is determined by different factors.
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Subtract K Bias from the actual downlink receive
level of the candidate cells before ranking their
downlink receive level based on the K principle. This
parameter affects the ranking of candidate cells.
Generally, it is set to 0.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, call drop
may easily occur.
Penalty can be performed on only the cell that is not
located at the fourth layer.
None
This parameter, together with Forbidden time after
MAX Times, determines the frequency of intra-cell
handovers.
This parameter to used to disable the intra-cell
handover for a certain period.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the intra-
cell handover may not be timely; if this parameter is
set to a too great value, the system resources may be
wasted when intra-cell handovers occur frequently.
When the cell radius is fixed, the smaller the value of
this parameter is (the required velocity is higher), the
more the difficult fast-moving micro-to-macro cell
handover can be triggered.
The more the micro cells are configured, the more
difficult the fast-moving micro-to-macro cell
handover can be triggered.
The more the micro cells are configured, the more
difficult the fast-moving micro-to-macro cell
handover can be triggered.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the
system traffic volume cannot be reduced effectively;
if this parameter is set to a too small value, the
judgment on whether the MS fast passes a cell may
be incorrect.
The setting of this parameter affects the width of the
handover strip during load handover.
The setting of this parameter affects the load
handover time. If it is set to a too greater value, the
handover time of each level is long.
The setting of this parameter determines the
maximum width of the handover strip during load
handover.
The setting of this parameter affects the load
handover targeted to the cell. If it is set to a lower
value, the number of handover requests that are
rejected increases.
The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of
the load handover. If it is set to a lower value, the
number of load handovers increases.
The value of this parameter should not be set too
high. Load handover is allowed only when the system
flow is lower than the setting of this parameter.
Otherwise, the load on the system is increased.
The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of
BQ handover of AMR HR calls. If it is set to a too
small value, the uplink BQ handover is easily
triggered.
QURH
amrHoHrThrUlRxQual
The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of
BQ handover of AMR HR calls. If it is set to a too
small value, the downlink BQ handover is easily
triggered.
QDRH
amrHoHrThrDlRxQual
The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of
BQ handover of AMR FR calls. If it is set to a too
small value, the uplink BQ handover is easily
triggered.
QURF
amrHoFrThrUlRxQual
The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of
BQ handover of AMR FR calls. If it is set to a too
small value, the downlink BQ handover is easily
triggered.
QDRF
amrHoFrThrDlRxQual
For the AMR calls, this parameter, together with
RXQUALn, is used in interference handover
decision. An uplink interference handover is easily
triggered if this parameter is set to a small value.
This parameter is used in handover decision. An
uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this
parameter is set to a too small value.
This parameter is used in handover decision. An
uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this
parameter is set to a too small value.
This parameter is used in handover decision. An
uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this
parameter is set to a too small value.
This parameter is used in handover decision. An
uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this
parameter is set to a too small value.
This parameter is used in handover decision. An
uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this
parameter is set to a too small value.
This parameter is used in handover decision. An
uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this
parameter is set to a too small value.
This parameter is used in handover decision. An
uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this
parameter is set to a too small value.
This parameter is used in handover decision. An
uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this
parameter is set to a too small value.
This parameter is used in handover decision. An
uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this
parameter is set to a too small value.
This parameter is used in handover decision. An
uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this
parameter is set to a too small value.
This parameter is used in handover decision. An
uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this
parameter is set to a too small value.
This parameter is used in handover decision. An
uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this
parameter is set to a too small value.
If the number of consecutive measurement reports
without the downlink measurement report is greater
than the value of this parameter, the handover
decision related to no downlink measurement report
is not performed. Therefore, if this parameter is set to
a lower value, the no downlink measurement report
handover cannot be triggered.
The handover decision is allowed only when the
uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to the
value of this parameter. Therefore, if this parameter
is set to a higher value, the no downlink measurement
report handover cannot be triggered.
This parameter is set according to the traffic volume.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, a more rapid
level drop is required for triggering a rapid level drop
handover.
Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following
requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 +
A8 = 80. The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number
of MRs in which the receive level drops rapidly.
Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following
requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 +
A8 = 80. The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number
of MRs in which the receive level drops rapidly.
Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following
requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 +
A8 = 80. The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number
of MRs in which the receive level drops rapidly.
Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following
requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 +
A8 = 80. The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number
of MRs in which the receive level drops rapidly.
Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following
requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 +
A8 = 80. The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number
of MRs in which the receive level drops rapidly.
Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following
requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 +
A8 = 80. The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number
of MRs in which the receive level drops rapidly.
Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following
requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 +
A8 = 80. The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number
of MRs in which the receive level drops rapidly.
Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following
requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 +
A8 = 80. The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number
of MRs in which the receive level drops rapidly.
The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of
BQ handover of non-AMR calls. If it is set to a lower
value, the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered.
QUR hoThresholdsQualUL
The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of
BQ handover of non-AMR calls. If it is set to a lower
value, the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered.
QDR hoThresholdsQualDL
This parameter determines the cell coverage for the
TA emergency handover. In the areas with small
space between BTSs and densely distributed BTSs,
the coverage of the cell can be reduced if this
parameter is set to a lower value.
When this parameter is set to 0 and if the
measurement report indicates that DTX is not used,
the FULLSET values should be selected. When this
parameter is set to 0 and if the measurement report
indicates that DTX is used, the SUBSET values
should be selected. In latter cases, the SUBSET
values should be used irrespective of how DTX is
indicated in the subsequent measurement reports.
When this parameter is set to 1, whether the
FULLSET values or the SUBSET values should be
selected depends on the DTX indication bit in the
measurement report. That is, if the measurement
report indicates that DTX is used, the SUBSET
values should be selected; otherwise, the FULLSET
values should be selected.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the target
cell for the previous handover will not be selected for
the next handover, but the probability of call drop
increases. If this parameter is set to a too small value,
the probability of handover failure increases.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the target
cell for the previous handover will not be selected for
the next handover, but the probability of call drop
increases. If this parameter is set to a too small value,
the probability of handover failure increases.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the target
cell for the previous handover will not be selected for
the next handover, but the probability of call drop
increases. If this parameter is set to a too small value,
the probability of handover failure increases.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the
filtered value is more accurate, but the time delay is
longer. If this parameter is set to a too small value,
the filtered value is inaccurate. Once set, this
parameter should not be modified.
This parameter should be set to a small value because
the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH
seizure duration for the MS.
The greater the value of this parameter is, the longer
the penalty time after AMR TCHF-H HO Fail is. In
other words, triggering AMR handover becomes
more difficult.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the
filtered value is more accurate, but the time delay is
longer. If this parameter is set to a too small value,
the filtered value is inaccurate. Once set, this
parameter should not be modified.
This parameter should be set to a small value because
the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH
seizure duration for the MS.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the
filtered value is more accurate, but the time delay is
longer. If this parameter is set to a too small value,
the filtered value is inaccurate. Once set, this
parameter should not be modified.
This parameter should be set to a small value because
the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH
seizure duration for the MS.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the
filtered value is more accurate, but the time delay is
longer. If this parameter is set to a too small value,
the filtered value is inaccurate. Once set, this
parameter should not be modified.
This parameter should be set to a small value because
the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH
seizure duration for the MS.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the MS is
likely to be handed over to the original serving cell,
thus leading to ping-pong handovers. If this
parameter is set to a higher value, the MS is unlikely
to be handed over to the original serving cell.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the MS is
likely to be handed over to the original serving cell,
thus leading to ping-pong handovers. If this
parameter is set to a higher value, the MS is unlikely
to be handed over to the original serving cell.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the MS is
likely to be handed over to the original serving cell,
thus leading to ping-pong handovers. If this
parameter is set to a higher value, the MS is unlikely
to be handed over to the original serving cell.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the MS is
likely to be handed over to the original serving cell,
thus leading to ping-pong handovers. If this
parameter is set to a higher value, the MS is unlikely
to be handed over to the original serving cell.
This parameter specifies the penalty level imposed
on a target cell. A penalty level is imposed on a
target cell to avoid further attempts when a handover
fails due to any of the following reasons: cell
congestion, a message indicating internal handover
refusal is received, a message indicating Um
interface handover failure is received during out-
going BSC handover, or a message indicating Um
interface handover failure is received during internal
handover. This parameter is valid only within the
duration of the cell penalty time.
When this parameter is set to a higher value, the
impact of sudden changes is reduced, and the system
response is delayed. Thus, the network performance
is degraded.
When this parameter is set to an excessive value, the
impact of sudden changes is reduced, and the system
response is delayed. Thus, the network performance
is degraded.
This parameter should be set to a small value because
the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH
seizure duration for the MS.
This parameter should be set to a small value because
the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH
seizure duration for the MS.
When this parameter is set to a higher value, the
impact of sudden changes is reduced, and the system
response is delayed. Thus, the network performance
is degraded.
This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal
levels caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure
correct handover decisions. When this parameter is
set to a higher value, the impact of sudden changes is
reduced, and the system response is delayed. Thus,
the network performance is degraded.
Measurement reports fail to be decoded correctly
when the signal strength in the serving cell is poor.
When the number of consecutive MRs that are lost is
greater than the value of this parameter, all previous
measurement reports are discarded and the handover
may fail. Therefore, Huawei recommends that this
parameter be set to a great value for emergency
handovers.
If the receive level of an adjacent cell is greater than
or equal to the value of this parameter, this adjacent
cell can be selected as a candidate cell for directed
retry.
This parameter should be set on the basis of the data
rate and flow on the Abis interface. If the
preprocessed MR is sent at a high frequency, the
flow on the Abis interface is increased.
When MR preprocessing is enabled, the UL and DL
balance measurement is affected if Transfer BS/MS
Power Class is set to No. In addition, the handovers
(such as PBGT handovers, load handovers, and
concentric cell handovers) that require power
compensation may fail.
In 4:1 multiplexing mode, if there are more than two
timeslots configured in SDCCH/8 scheme, then this
parameter should be set to No.
When this parameter is set to NO, the BSC
preprocesses the measurement reports. In this case,
the Transfer Original MR, Transfer BS/MS Power
Class, and Sent Freq.of preprocessed MR parameters
are invalid.
When this parameter is set to YES, the signaling on
the Abis interface and the load of the BSC are
reduced. Thus, the response time is shortened and the
network performance is improved.
When setting this parameter, you should determine
whether the BTS supports the configured power
control algorithms.
If this parameter is set to Yes, the MS does not use
the maximum transmit power, and thus the handover
success rate is decreased, but the network
interference is reduced.
POPT msPwrOptLev
Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to
Yes. If you need to disable the penalty for a certain
handover, set the related penalty time and penalty
level to 0.
This parameter should be set to Yes if the inter-BSC
SDCCH handover is allowed.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, frequent
handovers cannot be avoided. If this parameter is set
to a too great value, handovers cannot be performed
timely.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, frequent
handovers cannot be avoided. If this parameter is set
to a too great value, handovers cannot be performed
timely.
This parameter is used to avoid unwanted handovers
due to inaccurate measurement reports generated in
the initial phase of call establishment.
If measurement reports are processed on the BTS
side, you can set Report Frequency of the
Preprocessed Measurement Reports smaller than the
report frequency of the measurement reports from the
MS. Therefore, it is recommended that Min Interval
for SDCCH HOs be set to a small value.
If measurement reports are processed on the BSC
side, the frequency of receiving measurement reports
on the BSC side is greater than that on the BTS side.
Therefore, it is recommended that Min Interval for
SDCCH HOs be set to a great value.
This parameter can be used to avoid unwanted
handovers due to inaccurate measurement reports in
the initial phase of call establishment.
If measurement reports are processed on the BTS
side, you can set Report Frequency of the
Preprocessed Measurement Reports smaller than the
report frequency of the measurement reports from the
MS. Therefore, it is recommended that Min Interval
for TCH HOs be set to a small value.
If measurement reports are processed on the BSC
side, the frequency of receiving measurement reports
on the BSC side is greater than that on the BTS side.
Therefore, it is recommended that Min Interval for
TCH HOs be set to a great value.
None
According to the P/N criterion, if the load of a non-
BCCH frequency is higher than the Load Threshold
for TIGHT BCCH HO, the MS with conversation
quality higher than the RX_QUAL Threshold for
TIGHT BCCH HO and far from the cell edge is
handed over to the TCH on the BCCH frequency.
Thus, the TCHs on non-BCCH frequencies are
reserved for other calls. This ensures the call
performance of other calls.
According to the P/N criterion, if the load of a non-
BCCH frequency is higher than the Load Threshold
for TIGHT BCCH HO, the MS with conversation
quality higher than the RX_QUAL Threshold for
TIGHT BCCH HO and far from the cell edge is
handed over to the TCH on the BCCH frequency.
Thus, the TCHs on non-BCCH frequencies are
reserved for other calls. This ensures the call
performance of other calls.
None
The lower the value of this parameter is set, the more
difficult the AMR half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH
handover can be triggered.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the
more difficult the AMR full-rate TCH to half-rate
TCH handover can be triggered.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the
more difficult the AMR handover can be triggered.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the
more difficult the AMR handover can be triggered.
The AMR handover can be triggered only when the
Intracell F-H HO Allowed parameter is set to Yes.
1. This parameter must be properly set because it
limits the number of candidate cells. If this parameter
is set to a too great value, some desired cells may be
excluded from the candidate cells. If this parameter is
set to a too small value, an unwanted cell may
become the candidate cell. This leads to handover
failures or call drops.
2. A cell can become a candidate cell only when the
receive level minus this parameter is greater than the
minimum access level offset.
1. This parameter must be properly set because it
limits the number of candidate cells. If this parameter
is set to a too great value, some desired cells may be
excluded from the candidate cells. If this parameter is
set to a too small value, an unwanted cell may
become the target cell. This leads to handover
failures or call drops.
2. A cell can become a candidate cell only when the
uplink receive level minus this parameter is greater
than the minimum access level offset.
None
Note that in hierarchical handover and load
handover, the priority of the target cell must be
higher than the Inter-layer HO Threshold.
If the DL receive level of a cell is lower than the
Inter-layer HO Threshold, the cell is listed in the
candidate cells based on receive level. The cell takes
a low priority for handovers.
None
ISHO
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the
more difficult the PBGT handover can be triggered.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the
more difficult the PBGT handover can be triggered.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the
more difficult the layered hierarchical handover can
be triggered.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the
more difficult the layered hierarchical handover can
be triggered.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the
more difficult the edge handover can be triggered.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the
more difficult the edge handover can be triggered.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the
more difficult the edge handover can be triggered.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the
more difficult the edge handover can be triggered.
This parameter should be adjusted as required. If the
Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold is set to a too
small value, call drop may easily occur. If the PBGT
handover is enabled, the relevant edge handover
threshold can be decreased.
This parameter should be adjusted as required. If the
Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold is set to a too
small value, call drop may easily occur. If the PBGT
handover is enabled, the relevant edge handover
threshold can be decreased.
None
None
None
None
Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to
Yes. In other words, the edge handover algorithm is
enabled.
The lower the layer is, the higher the priority is. The
lower the hierarchy is, the higher the priority is. The
layered hierarchical handover cannot be triggered if
the serving cell has the highest priority in the queue
or if the level of the target cell is lower than the Inter-
layer HO Threshold.
If this parameter is set to Yes, a call is handed over
to the target cell that has a higher priority than the
serving cell.
Huawei recommends that the PBGT handover
algorithm be enabled. Proper use of PBGT
handovers helps to reduce cross coverage and to
avoid co-channel interference and adjacent channel
interference.
EPB enablePwrBudgetHandover
In dual-band networking mode for densely populated
urban areas, the level drops rapidly due to multiple
barriers. The propagation loss of the 1800 MHz
frequency band is greater than the propagation loss of
the 900 MHz frequency band. Considering the
preceding factors, you can enable the
Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed for the DCS1800 cell.
Under normal conditions, this parameter is set to No.
To support the rapid level drop handover, the BSC
must have the original MR.
It is recommended that this handover be applied only
in special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU
load. The fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover
algorithm is used only in special conditions.
FMT fastMovingThreshold
If this parameter is set to YES, extra interference
may be introduced when aggressive frequency reuse
pattern is used.
TRHO trhoTargetLevel
Yes for hot-spot areas; densely populated urban
areas, common urban areas, suburbs, and rural areas;
No for high-speed circumstances
When the authentication and ciphering procedures
are enabled on the existing network, this parameter
can be set to Yes. ESD enableSDCCHHandover
If this parameter is set to Yes, the target cell to which
the MS is handed over may not be the cell with the
best signal quality.
None
PET penaltyTime
None
TEO temporaryOffset
None
The settings of RXLEV-ACCESS-MIN and CRO
should guarantee that cells with same priority have
the same cell reselect offset.
The value of CBQ affects the access of the MS to the
system.
QUA cellBarQualify
The MS obtains C1 and C2 of the serving cell at a
minimum interval of 5s. When necessary, the MS re-
calculates C1 and C2 value of all non-serving cells
(adjacent cells). The MS constantly checks whether a
cell reselection is required by referring to following
conditions:
Whether the path loss (C1) of the current serving cell
drops below 0 within 5s.If yes, the path loss is too
large.
C2 of an appropriate non-serving cell exceeds that of
the serving cell in 5s and the following conditions are
met:
(broadcast in the system information 3 and 4 of the
serving cell) exceeds C2 of the serving cell in 5s.
A cell reselection is performed in the last 15s, and
the C2 of the new cell minus 5 dB constantly exceeds
the C2 of the serving cell in 5s.
A better cell exists if the above conditions are met.If
a better cell exists, the MS reselects a cell,and does
not go to the previous cell within 5s.
PI cellReselectParamInd
An MS does not respond to pagings during location
update. Thus, the connection rate drops if cell
reselection is performed.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, ping-
pong location updates occur and the signaling load
on the SDCCH increases.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the cell
that the MS camps on for a long time may not be the
best after the LA changes.
HYS cellReselectHysteresis
It is recommended that you select a greater value,
such as 16, 20, or 25, in the area with heavy traffic,
but a smaller value, such as 2 or 3, in the area with
light traffic.
To properly specify the value of this parameter, it is
necessary to perform overall and long-term
measurement on the entities involved regarding their
processing capability and traffic, such as the
processing capability of the MSC and BSC, and the
load on the A interface, Abis interface, Um interface,
HLR, and VLR.
The location update period in the MSC must be
greater than that in the BSC.
In the GSM system, it is possible that a powered-on
MS is identified as implicit off-line if the MS sends
no location update request within a long period.
When the MS reselects another cell (in the same
LAC), the MS is restarted through T3212 timeout if
the T3212 of the new cell differs from that of the
original cell.
When this parameter differs in the cells of the same
LAC, it is possible that the MS is identified as
implicit off-line if the MS sends no location update
request for a long period. In this case, system plays
"The subscriber you dial is power off." even though
the called MS is on.
In an LAC, the value of this parameter should be the
same in all cells.
PER timerPeriodicUpdateMS
The larger this parameter is set, the larger the number
of paging sub-channels in a cell and the smaller the
number of MSs on each paging sub-channel. Setting
this parameter larger can prolong the average service
life of MS batteries but increase the delay of paging
messages and reduce the system performance.
MFR
noOfMultiframesBetweenP
aging
None
AG
noOfBlocksForAccessGran
t
The most significant three bits of BSIC for all cells
map with the NCC. NCC Permitted should be set
properly to avoid too many call drops.
PLMN plmnPermitted
The CBA function applies to special conditions. If
this parameter is set to 1 and Cell Bar Quality (CBQ)
is set to 0, only handovers are allowed in a cell, and
direct access of an MS is not allowed. This condition
applies to a dual-network coverage cell. For a
common cell, this parameter should be set to 0.
The value of CBA affects the network access of an
MS.
BAR cellBarred
If the number of RACH conflicts in a cell is small, T
should be set to a great value. If the number of
RACH conflicts in a cell is large, T should be set to a
small value. The increase in T and S prolongs the
access time of an MS, thus affecting the access
performance of the whole network. Therefore,
appropriate values should be selected for T and S.
When the network traffic is heavy, the success rate of
immediate assignment is low if the sum of S and T is
low. Thus, the value of T should be properly adjusted
to make the sum of S and T great.
When Abis interface use the satellite
transmission,this parameter must be 32.
None
ATT allowIMSIAttachDetach
None
If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste
the channel resources and cause the congestion.
If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste
the channel resources and cause the congestion.
If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste
the channel resources and cause the congestion.
If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence
the handover success rate.
If this timer is set to a lower value, this may increase
the channel load and influence the access success
rate.
T3122
If this timer is set to a higher value, this seizes the
radio resources too much, and influences the channel
resource utilization.
If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence
the call reestablishment success rate.
If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste
the channel resources and cause the congestion.
T3111
If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste
the channel resources and cause the congestion.
T3109
If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste
the channel resources and cause the congestion.
If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence
the handover success rate.
T8
If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste
the channel resources and cause the congestion.
If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence
the handover success rate.
T3121
If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste
the channel resources and cause the congestion.
If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence
the assignment success rate.
T3107
If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste
the channel resources and cause the congestion.
If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence
the handover success rate.
T7
If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste
the channel resources and cause the congestion.
If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence
the handover success rate.
If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste
the channel resources and cause the congestion.
If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste
the channel resources and cause the congestion.
If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence
the immediate assignment success rate.
T3101
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
The assignment procedure can reduce the duration of
intra-cell handover.
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to Yes, the asynchronous
handover is performed in intra-BSC handover;
otherwise, the synchronous handover is performed.
If the parameter is set too small, a wrong decision
might be made in TRX aiding detection; if the
parameter is set too large, a faulty main-BCCH might
lead to delayed triggering of TRX aiding function
after cell initialization.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the BSC
initiates cell flow control when receiving the RACH
overload message from the BTS. That is, the
minimum receive level of MSs is increased to reduce
RACH access requests.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the BTS
sends the overload message to the BSC when a large
number of MSs access the network. In this case,
system failure may occur.
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a higher value, a wider
bandwidth is occupied by services.
The higher the value of this parameter is, the larger
the proportion of discarded packets is. Thus, the
priority value of the major service should be smaller
than that of the minor service. It is recommended that
the default value be used.
The higher the value of this parameter is, the larger
the proportion of discarded packets is. Thus, the
priority value of the major service should be smaller
than that of the minor service. It is recommended that
the default value be used.
The higher the value of this parameter is, the larger
the proportion of discarded packets is. Thus, the
priority value of the major service should be smaller
than that of the minor service. It is recommended that
the default value be used.
The higher the value of this parameter is, the larger
the proportion of discarded packets is. Thus, the
priority value of the major service should be smaller
than that of the minor service. It is recommended that
the default value be used.
None
None
If the value of this parameter is too small, the BTS
frequently sends the overload messages to the BSC.
Thus, the system resource utilization decreases and
MSs cannot access the network.
If the value of this parameter is too great, the BTS
sends an overload message to the BSC with a long
interval. Thus, system faults may occur.
If the value of this parameter is too small, the BTS
frequently reports overload indication messages to
the BSC. As a result, the BSC frequently reports
overload indication messages to the MSC and thus
the MSC may initiate flow control. If the value of
this parameter is too great, the BTS sends overload
indication messages to the BSC only when a large
number of MSs access the network and when the
system resources are insufficient. Therefore, the
access requests on the RACH and all the messages on
the PCH are discarded.
If the value of this parameter is too small, the
signaling traffic on the Abis interface increases and
thus the load of the BSC increases. If the value of
this parameter is too great, the BSC cannot process
the exceptions in the BTS in time.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, RF
resource status is reported frequently and thus the
load of the BSC is increased. If this parameter is set
to a too great value, RF resource status is not updated
in time. Therefore, the BSC cannot handle the
interference in the BTS in time.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, radio
resource indication messages are reported frequently
and thus the load of the BSC is increased.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, radio
resource status is not immediately reported and thus
the BSC cannot handle the interference in the BTS in
time.
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a small value, the error is
small.
None
If this parameter is set to a great value, the error is
small.
None
For the BTS2X, BTS3001C, BTS3001C+, and
BTS3002C, this parameter is invalid. For other
BTSs, this parameter is valid.
If the value of this parameter is too great, the BTS
power reduces too much. If the value of this
parameter is too small, the BTS power reduces less
and the power reduction effect is not good.
If the value of this parameter is too great, the average
result cannot reflect the change correctly. If the value
of this parameter is too small, the averaging is
performed too frequently and resources are wasted.
None
BO5
interferenceAveragingProc
ess
None
BO4
interferenceAveragingProc
ess
None
BO3
interferenceAveragingProc
ess
None
BO2
interferenceAveragingProc
ess
None
BO1
interferenceAveragingProc
ess
None
BO0
interferenceAveragingProc
ess
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to StartUp, the probability that
the BTS transmits at full power increases. The
interference increases. The handover success rate,
however, is increased to some extent.
For V9R3 and later, the VQI can be measured and
reported.
For the BTS3002C, if each cell is configured with
two TRXs (O2 or S2), Diversity LNA Bypass
Permitted is set to Yes. The RF connection supports
the configuration of the main and diversity antennas.
This parameter is configured for only the BTS3002C.
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the dynamic
power adjustment capability of the BTS is lowered.
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the algorithm
cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is
set to a higher value, the effectiveness of power
control cannot be guaranteed.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the algorithm
cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is
set to a higher value, the effectiveness of power
control cannot be guaranteed.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the algorithm
cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is
set to a higher value, the effectiveness of power
control cannot be guaranteed.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the quality is
poor without power control. Thus, the conversation
quality is degraded; conversely, the quality is good
without power control. Thus, the battery life is
reduced.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the
quality is good without power control. Thus, the
battery life is reduced and the network interference is
increased. If this parameter is set to a too great value,
the quality is poor without power control, thus the
conversation quality is degraded.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink
level becomes high without power control. Thus, the
battery life is reduced and the network interference is
increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value,
the downlink level becomes low, and call drop may
easily occur.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink
level becomes high without power control. Thus, the
battery life is reduced and the network interference is
increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value,
the downlink level becomes low, and call drop may
easily occur.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the
quality is poor without power control. Thus, the
conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is
set to a too small value, the quality is good without
power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the
quality is good without power control. Thus, the
battery life is reduced and the network interference is
increased. If this parameter is set to a too great value,
the quality is poor without power control, thus the
conversation quality is degraded.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink
level becomes high without power control. Thus, the
battery life is reduced and the network interference is
increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value,
the uplink level becomes low, and call drop may
easily occur.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink
level becomes high without power control. Thus, the
battery life is reduced and the network interference is
increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value,
the uplink level becomes low, and call drop may
easily occur.
The value of this parameter is equal to that of the UL
Expected Level at HO Access.
None
None
If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC or BTS puts
the currently received measurement reports in the
measurement report compensation queue and then
records the change of the transmit power based on
the MS power and the BTS power in the
measurement report.
On receiving some consecutive measurement reports,
the network calculates the average value of the
downlink signal quality. This average value indicates
the radio environment of the BTS. When you
configure this parameter, you must consider the delay
and accuracy of the average value caused by the
number of measurement reports.
On receiving some consecutive measurement reports,
the network calculates the average value of the uplink
signal quality. This average value indicates the radio
environment of the MS. When you configure this
parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy
of the average value caused by the number of
measurement reports.
On receiving some consecutive measurement reports,
the network calculates the average value of the
downlink signal levels. This average value indicates
the radio environment of the BTS. When you
configure this parameter, you must consider the delay
and accuracy of the average value caused by the
number of measurement reports.
On receiving some consecutive measurement reports,
the network calculates the average value of the uplink
signal levels. This average value indicates the radio
environment of the MS. When you configure this
parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy
of the average value caused by the number of
measurement reports.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the power
control may be delayed. If this parameter is set to a
too small value, the power control may be performed
frequently, thus wasting the resources.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the
dynamic power adjustment capability of the BTS is
lowered.
None
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the
algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this
parameter is set to a too great value, the effectiveness
of power control cannot be guaranteed.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the
algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this
parameter is set to a too great value, the effectiveness
of power control cannot be guaranteed.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the
algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this
parameter is set to a too great value, the effectiveness
of power control cannot be guaranteed.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the
algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this
parameter is set to a too great value, the effectiveness
of power control cannot be guaranteed.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the
algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this
parameter is set to a too great value, the effectiveness
of power control cannot be guaranteed.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the
algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this
parameter is set to a too great value, the effectiveness
of power control cannot be guaranteed.
None
None
If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC or BTS puts
the currently received measurement reports in the
measurement report compensation queue and then
records the change of the transmit power based on
the MS power and the BTS power in the
measurement report.
On receiving some consecutive measurement reports,
the network calculates the average value of the
downlink signal quality. This average value indicates
the radio environment of the MS. When you
configure this parameter, you must consider the delay
and accuracy of the average value caused by the
number of measurement reports.
QDS
pcAveragingQualDL /
windows size
On receiving some consecutive measurement reports,
the network calculates the average value of the uplink
signal quality. This average value indicates the radio
environment of the MS. When you configure this
parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy
of the average value caused by the number of
measurement reports.
QUS
pcAveragingQualUL /
windows size
On receiving some consecutive measurement reports,
the network calculates the average value of the
downlink signal levels. This average value indicates
the radio environment of the BTS. When you
configure this parameter, you must consider the delay
and accuracy of the average value caused by the
number of measurement reports.
LDS
pcAveragingLevDL /
windows size
On receiving some consecutive measurement reports,
the network calculates the average value of the uplink
signal levels. This average value indicates the radio
environment of the MS. When you configure this
parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy
of the average value caused by the number of
measurement reports.
LUS
pcAveragingLevUL /
windows size
None
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the
quality is poor without power control. Thus, the
conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is
set to a too small value, the quality is good without
power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced.
LDR
PC Lower Thresholds Qual
DL Rx Qual
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the
quality is poor without power control. Thus, the
conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is
set to a too small value, the quality is good without
power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced.
UDR
PC Upper Thresholds Qual
DL Rx Qual
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink
level becomes high without power control. Thus, the
battery life is reduced and the network interference is
increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value,
the downlink level becomes low, and call drop may
easily occur.
LDR
PC Lower Thresholds Lev
DL Rx Level
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink
level becomes high without power control. Thus, the
battery life is reduced and the network interference is
increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value,
the downlink level becomes low, and call drop may
easily occur.
UDR
PC Upper Thresholds Lev
DL Rx Level
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the signal
quality of the MS is poor without power control.
Thus, the conversation quality is degraded. If this
parameter is set to a too small value, the signal
quality is good without power control. Thus, the
battery life is reduced.
LUR
PC Lower Thresholds Qual
UL Rx Qual
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the
quality is good without power control. Thus, the
battery life is reduced and the network interference is
increased. If this parameter is set to a too great value,
the quality is poor without power control, thus the
conversation quality is degraded.
UUR
PC Upper Thresholds Qual
UL Rx Qual
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink
level becomes high without power control. Thus, the
battery life is reduced and the network interference is
increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value,
the uplink level becomes low, and call drop may
easily occur.
LUR
PC Lower Thresholds Lev
UL Rx Level
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink
level becomes high without power control. Thus, the
battery life is reduced and the network interference is
increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value,
the uplink level becomes low, and call drop may
easily occur.
The value of this parameter is equal to that of UL
Expected Level at HO Access.
UUR
PC Upper Thresholds Lev
UL Rx Level
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the power
control may be delayed. If this parameter is set to a
too small value, the power control may be performed
frequently, thus wasting the resources.
INT powerControlInterval
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the
proportion of the history value in the interference
measurement results decreases; if this parameter is
set to a lower value, the proportion of the history
value in the interference measurement results
increases.
None
None
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the influence
of Cn-1 on Cn increases; if this parameter is set to a
lower value, the influence of Cn-1 on Cn decreases.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the influence
of Cn-1 on Cn increases; if this parameter is set to a
lower value, the influence of Cn-1 on Cn decreases.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the output
power of the MS decreases; if this parameter is set to
a lower value, the output power of the MS increases.
None
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the tolerance
of the network to downlink errors decreases and the
probability of the frequent TBF release increases.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the
abnormal TBF may occur (such as the MS does not
receive the message of current cell in the network
caused by the MS activities, and the network still
assigns the radio resources to the MS), the network
cannot release this TBF, thus wasting the network
resources.
Based on the actual condition of existing network
(for example, the N3105 overflow caused by the bad
Um interface quality, the unstable transmission link
quality, and the MS activities), you should properly
adjust this parameter to ensure the downlink TBF
does not abnormally release due to the frequent
overflow of the N3105.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the abnormal
uplink TBF release increases caused by the overflow
of the N3103.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the release
time of the uplink TBF delays due to no response of
the MS caused by the bad Um interface quality, thus
occupying the link resources of system.
Based on the actual condition of existing network
(for example, the N3101 overflow caused by the bad
Um interface quality, the unstable transmission link
quality, and the MS activities), you should properly
adjust this parameter to ensure the uplink TBF does
not abnormally release due to the frequent overflow
of the N3101.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the tolerance
of the network to uplink errors decreases and the
probability of the frequent TBF release increases.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the
abnormal TBF may occur (such as the MS has not
received the message of current cell in the network
caused by the MS activities, the network still assigns
the uplink resources to the MS), the network cannot
release this TBF, thus wasting the network resources.
Based on the actual condition of existing network
(for example, the N3101 overflow caused by the bad
Um interface quality, the unstable transmission link
quality, and the MS activities), you should properly
adjust this parameter to ensure the uplink TBF does
not abnormally release due to the frequent overflow
of the N3101.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, this wastes
the wireless resources and influences the the access
performance of other MSs in the network, thus
causing the useless signaling seizing the channel
bandwidth and wasting the downlink resources.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the uplink
TBF frequently releases and establishes, thus
increasing the delay for the delay tests of the Attach
and Ping services. The original downlink TBF is
released immediately and cannot be used to transmit
subsequent downlink data. Therefore, a new TBF
must be established. The original downlink TBF also
cannot be used for a new requirement of uplink data
transmission. Therefore, the duration and success rate
of the TBF establishment are greatly affected.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the release
delay of the uplink TBF increases, thus wasting the
uplink resources.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the uplink
TBF frequently releases and establishes, thus
increasing the delay for the delay tests of the Attach
and Ping services. The most optimized value should
be a little greater than the interval between two
discontinuous uplink transmissions.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, this can
increase the probability of establishing the downlink
TBF on the PACCH, thus greatly reducing the
downlink TBF establishment time; however, if the
MS needs to send new uplink data, because the
BSC6000 does not support the uplink establishment
function on the uplink at present, the reserved uplink
TBF must be released and a new TBF must be
established to transmit the new data. Therefore, the
overall transmission performance decreases.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, this can
decrease the probability of establishing the downlink
TBF on the PACCH. The downlink TBF must
establish on the CCCH, thus increasing the
establishment time.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the load-
based reselection is triggered difficultly; if this
parameter is set to a lower value, the load-based
reselection is triggered easily.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the number
of times that the transmission quality is worsened
decreases, and the critical reselection is triggered
difficultly; if this parameter is set to a lower value,
the number of times that the transmission quality is
worsened increases, and the critical reselection is
triggered easily.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the number
of times that the transmission quality is worsened
decreases, and the critical reselection is triggered
difficultly; if this parameter is set to a lower value,
the number of times that the transmission quality is
worsened increases, and the critical reselection is
triggered easily.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the number
of times that the transmission quality is worsened
decreases, and the critical reselection is triggered
difficultly; if this parameter is set to a lower value,
the number of times that the transmission quality is
worsened increases, and the critical reselection is
triggered easily.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the number
of cell reselections increases; if this parameter is set
to a lower value, the number of cell reselections
decreases.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the
probability of the cell reselection increases; if this
parameter is set to a lower value, the probability of
the cell reselection decreases.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the precision
of decision may be reduced; if this parameter is set to
a higher value, the decision may not be performed
immediately.
None
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the weight
of the previous signal level increases; if this
parameter is set to a lower value, the weight of
current signal level increases.
None
If this parameter is set to a higher value, it is easier
for the MS to reselect this cell; if this parameter is set
to a lower value, it is difficult for the MS to reselect
this cell.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, it is difficult
to trigger the load-based reselection; if this parameter
is set to a lower value, it is easier to trigger the load-
based reselection.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the critical
reselection is triggered difficultly; if this parameter is
set to a lower value, the critical reselection is
triggered easily.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the critical
reselection is triggered difficultly; if this parameter is
set to a lower value, the critical reselection is
triggered easily.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the MS
cannot be handed over to the target cell that the
previous reselection fails or the load-based
reselection occurs within the time longer than this
value; conversely, the time greatly reduces.
If the value of this parameter increases, the MS can
be handed over to the target cell only if the target cell
has a higher level; conversely, the MS can be handed
over to the target cell only if the target cell has a
lower level.
The setting of this parameter is to avoid the ping-
pong reselection between cells.
None
SL rxLevMinCell
None
This parameter is configured according to the
congestion of the underlaid (UL) and overlaid (OL)
voice services. If the underlaid voice services are
congested, the overlaid-to-underlaid subcell
handover is only allowed; if the overlaid voice
services are congested, the underlaid-to-overlaid
handover is only allowed.
None
None
None
When this parameter is set to Yes, the access delay of
the MS reduces.
When this parameter is set to Yes, the access delay of
the MS reduces.
None
For the cell with the good Um interface quality, set
the parameter to MCS6; for the cell with the poor
Um interface quality, set the parameter to MCS4.
None
None
None
The higher the value of this parameter is, the larger
the proportion of the BEP history information sent by
the MS is; otherwise, the smaller the proportion of
the BEP history information sent by the MS is.
None
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is
easy to decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set
to a modest value, it is hard to decrease the CS type.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is
easy to decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set
to a modest value, it is hard to decrease the CS type.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is
easy to decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set
to a modest value, it is hard to decrease the CS type.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is
easy to increase the CS type. If this parameter is set
to a modest value, it is hard to increase the CS type.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is
easy to increase the CS type. If this parameter is set
to a modest value, it is hard to increase the CS type.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is
easy to increase the CS type. If this parameter is set
to a modest value, it is hard to increase the CS type.
None
None
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is
easy to decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set
to a modest value, it is hard to decrease the CS type.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is
easy to decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set
to a modest value, it is hard to decrease the CS type.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is
easy to decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set
to a modest value, it is hard to decrease the CS type.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is
easy to increase the CS type. If this parameter is set
to a modest value, it is hard to increase the CS type.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is
easy to increase the CS type. If this parameter is set
to a modest value, it is hard to increase the CS type.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is
easy to increase the CS type. If this parameter is set
to a modest value, it is hard to increase the CS type.
None
None
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this
kind of services occupies high bandwidth. If this
parameter is set to a modest value, this kind of
services occupies low bandwidth.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this
kind of services occupies high bandwidth. If this
parameter is set to a modest value, this kind of
services occupies low bandwidth.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this
kind of services occupies high bandwidth. If this
parameter is set to a modest value, this kind of
services occupies low bandwidth.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this
kind of services occupies high bandwidth. If this
parameter is set to a modest value, this kind of
services occupies low bandwidth.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this
kind of services occupies high bandwidth. If this
parameter is set to a modest value, this kind of
services occupies low bandwidth.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this
kind of services occupies high bandwidth. If this
parameter is set to a modest value, this kind of
services occupies low bandwidth.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this
kind of services occupies high bandwidth. If this
parameter is set to a modest value, this kind of
services occupies low bandwidth.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the idle
Abis timeslots cannot be fully used.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the Abis
timeslots may be applied frequently.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the PS
services are affected.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the CS
services are affected when there are too many PS
services.
None
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the
dynamic channel resources may be wasted when
there are no services for a long time.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is
possible that a dynamic channel is requested
immediately after being released. Therefore, the
dynamic channel request is sent frequently.
This parameter is configured according to the
congestion counter of the underlaid (UL) and
overlaid (OL) voice services.
If the UL voice service is congested, the dynamic
channel is converted at the UL cell.
If the OL voice service is congested, the dynamic
channel is converted at the OL cell.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the TBFs
established on the PDCH and the subscribers are
fewer, and the downlink bandwidth for each
subscriber is higher.
If this threshold is set to a higher value, the TBFs
established on the PDCH and the subscribers are
more, and the downlink bandwidth for each
subscriber is lower.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the TBFs
established on the PDCH and the subscribers are
fewer, and the uplink bandwidth for each subscriber
is higher
If this threshold is set to a higher value, the TBFs
established on the PDCH and the subscribers are
more, and the uplink bandwidth for each subscriber
is lower.
If this threshold is high, it is difficult to seize
dynamic channels.
If this threshold is low, it is easy to seize dynamic
channels.
If this threshold is high, it is difficult to seize
dynamic channels.
If this threshold is low, it is easy to seize dynamic
channels.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, there
are excessive PDCHs and insufficient TCHs. This
affects CS services.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, there are
insufficient PDCHs and excessive TCHs. This affects
PS services.
None
If the threshold of HCS signal strength is high, it is
difficult for the cell to be selected.
If the threshold of HCS signal strength is low, it is
easy for the cell to be selected.
If the priority is high, it is easy for the MS to select
this cell during cell reselection.
If the priority is low, it is difficult for the MS to
select this cell during cell reselection.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the
power consumption and radiation of the MS are high.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the MS
may not be able to access the channel.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the
coverage area of the cell is large. The MS on the
edge of the cell may not be able to access the system.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the
coverage area of the cell is small. The usage of cell
resources decreases.
None
None
In different routing areas, if this parameter is set to
an excessive value, it is hard for cell reselection. If
this parameter is set to a modest value, the frequent
ping-pong reselection occurs.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the
period when cell reselection is prohibited increases.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the period
when cell reselection is prohibited decreases.
None
None
None
In the same routing area, if this parameter is set to an
excessive value, it is hard for cell reselection. If this
parameter is set to a modest value, the frequent ping-
pong reselection occurs.
None
None
None
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is
difficult for an MS to access the cell. Therefore,
radio resources may be wasted.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is easy
for an MS to access the cell. However, too many
MSs may access the cell. Therefore, the system may
be overloaded.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is
difficult for an MS to access the cell. Therefore,
radio resources may be wasted.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is easy
for an MS to access the cell. However, too many
MSs may access the cell. Therefore, the system may
be overloaded.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is
difficult for an MS to access the cell. Therefore,
radio resources may be wasted.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is easy
for an MS to access the cell. However, too many
MSs may access the cell. Therefore, the system may
be overloaded.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is
difficult for an MS to access the cell. Therefore,
radio resources may be wasted.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is easy
for an MS to access the cell. However, too many
MSs may access the cell. Therefore, the system may
be overloaded.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the MS
sends a new Channel Request within a long interval
after the channel request fails, thus reducing access
collisions but slowing down the MS access speed.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the MS
sends a new Channel Request within a short interval
after the channel request fails, thus accelerating the
MS access speed but adding access collisions.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the MS
needs to wait for a long time before sending the next
request. This may affect MS services.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is
possible that a response is sent, but the MS has not
received it because of transmission delay. In this
case, the MS also resends the access request.
None
None
None
None
None
None
PRB bsPRACHBlocks
None
None
PBB bsPBCCHBlocks
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, some
information may be missing.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the
reselection measurement report is sent frequently.
This occupies many bandwidth resources.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, some
information may be missing.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the
reselection measurement report is sent frequently.
This occupies many bandwidth resources.
The MS should stay in non-DRX mode for a period
of time after the measurement report is sent.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the MS
may stay in non-DRX mode for a long time and
services may be affected.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the MS
enters the DRX mode and may send the measurement
report frequently.
The principles of cell reselection offset are as
follows:
1. For the cell with low traffic and low equipment
usage, Huawei recommends that MSs work in the
cell. The value range 0-20 dB is recommended.
2 For the cell with medium traffic, value 0 is
recommended.
If you do not want a fast-moving MS to access a
micro cell, this parameter should be set to a high
value when the coverage area of the micro cell is
large.
GPET gprsPenaltyTime
None
GTEO gprsTemporaryOffset
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the
extension measurement report is sent frequently.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value,
measurement information is not obtained timely.
None
None
None
None
None
When this parameter is set to Yes, the access delay of
the EGPRS MS is shortened.
None
None
None
None
When the radio operating environment is good,
decreasing the parameter value improves the
transmission rate.
When the radio operating environment is poor,
increasing the parameter value reduces the times of
abnormally releasing TBFs.
PAN_INC should be greater than PAN_DEC.
Usually, PAN_INC = 2 x PAN_DEC.
However, N3102 cannot exceed PAN_MAX.
None
If the value of this parameter is set to a modest value,
the MS may retransmits the RLC data block before
the BSC sends an Uplink Acknowledgment message.
Thus, many radio resources are not used but
occupied.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the
speed of the sliding window decreases and the
probability of the uplink TBF transmission
countdown increases, thus decreasing the
performance of uplink transmission.
To make this value more accurate, you need to
estimate the delay in the transmission between the
MS and the BSC6 first. This value is set based on the
transmission delay.
None
Some MSs do not support the 11-bit access burst.
Therefore, 8bit is recommended.
It takes a shorter time to send the Immediate
Assignment message on all PCHs and AGCHs in non-
DRX mode than in DRX mode. During the period of
non-DRX mode, the TBF establishment time
decreases, but the power consumption of the MS
increases.
In DRX mode, the MS monitors paging messages
only on the home paging group, and then receives the
Immediate Assignment message on all the paging
blocks and AGCH reservation blocks. The TBF
establishment time increases, but the power
consumption of the MS decreases.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the TBF
establishment time increases but the power
consumption of the MS decreases. If this parameter
is set to an excessive value, the TBF establishment
time decreases but the power consumption of the MS
increases.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the TBF
resources (including TFI and timeslots) are reserved
for a long time. If no downlink data needs to be sent,
many resources are not used but occupied for a long
time.
If the timer is set to a smaller value, the MS releases
the TBF resources within a shorter period. However,
if the network sends new downlink PDU data
packets, the network must initiate a paging or
immediate assignment procedure. Therefore, the
downlink TBF establishment takes a longer period.
If the download data packets from the network are
not received and T3192 does not expire, the network
directly sends a Packet Downlink Assignment
message to establish a new downlink TBF, thus
shortening the TBF establishment time.
On one hand, the value of the T3192 timer depends
on the average transmission interval between two
successive downlink data.
On the other hand, you need to comprehensively
analyze the traffic models of the cell and take the
service load of the cell into consideration. When
network resources are sufficient, that is the GPRS
congestion rate is low, the T3192 should be set to a
large value, shortening the time to establish new
TBFs and improving data transmission rate.
T3192
If the timer is set to a lower value, the MS can detect
the TBF establishment failure within a shorter period.
If the TBF establishment fails, the average delay of
packet access is short, but the success rate of TBF
establishment in bad radio environment decreases. In
addition, the small timer value increases the
probability of the retransmission of the packet access
request, thus increasing the probability of
reassignment by the PCU and wasting system
resources.
If the timer is set to a higher value, the MS takes a
longer period to detect the TBF establishment failure.
If the TBF establishment fails, the average delay of
packet access is long, but the success rate of TBF
establishment in bad radio environment increases.
T3168
Currently, the GPRS network is not configured with
the Gs interface or the PCCCH. Therefore, Network
Operation Mode II is selected by default.
Unit Step Size Default Value Range
GSM 900 (0)
GSM 900 (0), GSM
1800 (1), GSM 1900
(2), GSM 800 (5)
3 characters
2...3 characters
1 0...7
Obligatory in creation
when LCSE not
connected to any
segment, otherwise
read from RNW db. 07
N NoYes
N Y/N
GSM 900 (0)
GSM 900 (0), GSM
1800 (1), GSM 1900
(2), GSM 800 (5)
255 0255
No No/BB/RF
TA 255 0...255
TA 255
2 0...2
N Yes/No
dBm -105 -110...-47
N Yes/No
Y Yes/No
1 1...16
F
- 165535
1...10 characters
Locked (3)
N Y/N
TA 255 0...255
N Yes/No
dBm -105 -110...-47
N Yes/No
2 0...2
0 0...63/N
0 0...2
0.5dB 0 015
0.5dB 2 015
0.5dB 2 015
SACCH 4 20 4...64
4 1, 2, 4 or 7
dBm -100 -110-47
5 5...35
4 0...7
4 0...7
dBm N -110... -47/ N
Yes Yes/No
SACCH 0 0...255
dBm N -109... -47/ N
N Yes/No
sec 20 20 20...640
dB 10 0 0...70
N Y/N
N Y/N
dB 4 0...14
hours 0.5 0 / 0.1...25.5
4 2...9
1 0...7
NCC 07
N Yes/No
Y Yes/No
dBm -47 -47FIXED
dBm -90 -110...-47
dBm -95 -110...-47
dBm -100 -110...-47
dBm -105 -110...-47
dBm -110 -110FIXED
SACCH 1 1...32
SACCH 1 1...32
SACCH 4 1...32
SACCH 4 1...32
sec 2 0...31
dBm -100 -110...-47
6 012
3 14
sec 10s 10 10320
dB 0 070
Parameter Name Old Value
Proposed
Value
Remarks Unit
UL DTX Shall Use Shall Use
Call Reestablishment Forbidden NA Yes None
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN 0 1
Not
matched
with other
vendor
TCH Immediate Assignment No No
Direct Retry Yes Yes
UL PC Allowed No Yes None
DL PC Allowed No Yes None
Encryption Algorithm NA
<1000000
0>
None
DL DTX NA No
Tunable
based on
performan
ce
None
MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km)) 63 Bit Period
Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX
Power Amplifier
NA NO
Allow Dynamic Voltage Adjustment NA NO
ATT Yes Yes
Tx-integer(RACH Timeslot(equals to a
TDMA frame,4.615ms))
NA
20 (32
Satelite
Cells)
Cell_Bar_Access NA 0
NCC Permitted NA 255
BS_AG_BLKS_RES NA 1
BS-PA-MFRAMS
4
Multiframe
Period
4
Multiframe
Period
Period of Periodic Location Update(6
minutes)
NA 40
Ericsson
60
CRH 6dB 6dB
PI Yes Yes
Cell_Bar_Qualify 0 0
CRO(2dB) 0 0
ACS No No
TO 0 0
PT(s) NA 0
SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH period
(480ms))
24 24
Need to
standerdiz
e
RACH Busy Threshold 5 16
To identify
MS request
at -94 dBm
or worst
coverage
Paging Times 1 1
Tunable
based on
performan
ce
Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable NA Disable
Directed Retry Load Access Threshold NA
Need to
discuss
with
Huawei
Speech Version NA 47
TRX Aiding Function Control NA
Allowed &
Recover
When
Check
Res.
None
Random Access Error Threshold NA 200
RACH Min.Access Level 0 1
T200 SDCCH(5ms) 60 60
T200 FACCH/F(5ms) 50 50
T200 FACCH/H(5ms) 50 50
T200 SACCH TCH SAPI0(10ms) 150 150
T200 SACCH TCH SAPI3(10ms) 200 200
T200 SACCH SDCCH(10ms) 60 60
T200 SDCCH SAPI3(5ms) 60 60
Use LAPDm N200 No No
N200 of Establish 5 5
N200 of Release 5 5
N200 of SACCH 5 5
N200 of SDCCH 23 23
N200 of FACCH/Half rate 29 29
N200 of FACCH/Full rate 34 34
Use Imm_Ass Retransmit Parameter No No
Max Delay of Imm_Ass Retransmit(ms) NA 4
Max Transmit Times of Imm_Ass NA 2
If use
Imm_Ass
Retrans,
Default
MS MAX Retrans
4 (7 for
Satelite
Site)
4 (7 for
Satelite
Site)
Common Access Control Class
Not
selected
Not
selected
Special Access Control Class
Not
selected
Not
selected
Emergent Call Disable NA No
Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period
(480ms))
20 24
All vendor
same
platform
ECSC Yes Yes
MBR
0(for
normal
cell);
2(near to
Dualband
cell)
0(for
normal
cell);
2(near to
Dualband
cell)
Power Deviation Indication Yes Yes
Power Deviation(2dB) 1 1
Serving Band Reporting NA NA
3G
Parameter
Qsearch I NA NA
3G
Parameter
Qsearch C Initial NA NA
3G
Parameter
FDD Q Offset NA NA
3G
Parameter
FDD REP QUANT NA NA
3G
Parameter
FDD MULTIRAT Reporting NA NA
3G
Parameter
FDD Qmin NA NA
3G
Parameter
Qsearch P NA NA
3G
Parameter
3G Search PRIO NA NA
3G
Parameter
Invalid BSIC Reporting NA NA
3G
Parameter
Scale Order NA NA
3G
Parameter
Qsearch C NA NA
3G
Parameter
900 Reporting Offset NA NA
3G
Parameter
900 Reporting Threshold NA NA
3G
Parameter
1800 Reporting Offset NA NA
3G
Parameter
1800 Reporting Threshold NA NA
3G
Parameter
FDD Reporting Offset NA NA
3G
Parameter
FDD Reporting Threshold NA NA
3G
Parameter
Allow Reassign No No
Tunable
based on
performan
ce
Allow EMLPP No No
Immediate Assignment Opt. NA NO
Short Message Uplink Disabled No No
Short Message Downlink Disabled No No
Frequency Band of Reassign No
Same
Band
Tunable
based on
performan
ce
Max Assignment Retry Times NA 2
AMR ACS(F) NA 165
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) NA 12
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(F) NA 18
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) NA 26
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F) NA 2
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F) NA 3
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) NA 3
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) NA 12
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(F) NA 18
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) NA 26
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F) NA 2
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F) NA 3
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) NA 3
AMR Starting Mode(F) NA 1
AMR ACS(H) NA 15
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(H) NA 12
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(H) NA 18
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(H) NA 26
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H) NA 2
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H) NA 3
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H) NA 3
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H) NA 12
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(H) NA 18
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(H) NA 26
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H) NA 2
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H) NA 3
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H) NA 3
AMR Starting Mode(H) NA 0
Co-BSC/MSC Adj No No
SDCCH HO Allowed No No
Intracell HO Allowed Yes Yes None
Load HO Allowed No Yes
Tunable
based on
performan
ce
None
MS Fast Moving HO Allowed No No None
Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed No No None
PBGT HO Allowed Yes Yes
Level HO Allowed NA NO
Fringe HO Allowed NA Yes
BQ HO Allowed NA Yes
TA HO Allowed NA Yes
Concentric Circles HO Allowed NA
Yes (for
MB cell),
No for
othres
Interference HO Allowed NA Yes
Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold 5 15 Grade
Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold 10 20 Grade
Edge HO Watch Time(s) 5 5 Second
Edge HO Valid Time(s) 4 4 Second
Layer HO Watch Time(s) 5 5 Second
Layer HO Valid Time(s) 4 4 Second
PBGT Watch Time(s) 5 5 Second
PBGT Valid Time(s) 4 4 Second
Inter-layer HO Threshold NA 25
Inter-layer HO Hysteresis 3 3
Tunable
based on
performan
ce
dB
Min DL Level on Candidate Cell 15 10
Tunable
based on
performan
ce
Grade
Intracell F-H HO Allowed NA Yes
Intracell F-H HO Stat Time(s) NA 5 Second
Intracell F-H HO Last Time(s) NA 4 Second
F2H HO th NA 30
H2F HO th NA 10
Min Interval for TCH HOs NA 4
Min Interval for SDCCH HOs NA 2
Min Interval for Consecutive HOs 6 6 Second
Min Interval for Emerg.HOs NA 2
Inter-BSC SDCCH HO ALLowed NA NO
Penalty Allowed Yes Yes None
MS Power Prediction after HO No No
MR.Preprocessing NA Yes
Transfer Original MR NA NO
Transfer BS/MS Power Class Yes Yes None
Sent Freq.of preprocessed MR NA
Once
Every
Second
Allowed M.R Number Lost NA 4
Number of
MR
Filter Length for TCH Level 6 6
Number of
MR
Filter Length for TCH Qual NA 6
Filter Length for SDCCH Level 2 2 None
Filter Length for SDCCH Qual NA 3
Filter Length for Ncell RX_LEV 6 6
Number of
MR
Filter Length for TA 6 6
Number of
MR
Penalty Level after HO Fail NA 30
Penalty Time after HO Fail(s) NA 10
Penalty Level after BQ HO NA 30 dB
Penalty Time after BQ HO(s) NA 10
Penalty Level after TA HO NA 63 dB
Penalty Time after TA HO(s) NA 10
Penalty Time after AMR TCHF-H HO
Fail(s)
NA 30
TA Threshold NA 255
DL Qual. Threshold NA 50
UL Qual. Threshold NA 50
UL Qual. Threshold for Interf.HO NA 40
DL Qual. Threshold for Interf.HO NA 40
UL RX_LEV Threshold for Interf.HO NA 30
DL RX_LEV Threshold for Interf.HO NA 35
Filter Parameter A1 10 10 None
Filter Parameter A2 10 10 None
Filter Parameter A3 10 10 None
Filter Parameter A4 10 10 None
Filter Parameter A5 10 10 None
Filter Parameter A6 10 10 None
Filter Parameter A7 10 10 None
Filter Parameter A8 10 10 None
Filter Parameter B 0 0 None
No Dl Mr.HO Allowed NA Yes
No Dl Mr.Ul Qual HO Limit NA 60
Cons.No Dl Mr.HO Allowed Limit NA 8
System Flux Threshold for Load HO NA 10
Load HO Threshold NA 5
Load Req.on Candidate Cell NA 2
Load HO Bandwidth NA 25 dB
Load HO Step Period 5 10 Second
Load HO Step Level 5 5 dB
MS Fast-moving Watch Cells NA NA None
MS Fast-moving Valid Cells NA NA None
MS Fast-moving Time Threshold NA 15
MAX Consecutive HO Times NA 3 Times
Forbidden time after MAX Times 20 20 Second
Interval for Consecutive HO Jud. 6 6 Second
Penalty on MS Fast Moving HO NA 30 dB
Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO(s) NA 40
UL Expected Level at HO Access 35 35 Grade
K Bias NA 0
Need to
discuss
with
Huawei
UL to OL HO Allowed Yes Yes None
OL to UL HO Allowed Yes Yes None
RX_LEV for UO HO Allowed NA Yes None
RX_QUAL for UO HO Allowed NA Yes None
TA for UO HO Allowed NA No None
UO Signal Intensity Difference NA 0 None
RX_LEV Threshold NA 40 None
RX_LEV Hysteresis NA NA dB
RX_QUAL Threshold NA 50 None
TA Threshold NA 63 Bit Period
TA Hysteresis 0 0 Bit Period
UO HO Watch Time(s) NA 5 Second
UO HO Valid Time(s) NA 4 Second
Assign Optimum Layer
System
optimizatio
n
System
optimizatio
n
None
Assign-optimum-level Threshold NA 35 dBm
TA Threshold of Assignment Pref. NA 63 Bit Period
TA Pref. of Imme-Assign Allowed NA No None
TA Threshold of Imme-Assign Pref. NA 0 Bit Period
Pref. Subcell in HO of Intra-BSC
System
optimizatio
n
System
optimizatio
n
None
Incoming-to-BSC HO Optimum Layer
Underlaid
subcell
Underlaid
subcell
None
OtoU HO Received Level Threshold NA 20 Grade
UtoO HO Received Level Threshold NA 35 Grade
UtoO Traffic HO Allowed NA Yes None
Traffic Threshold of Underlay NA
Need to
discuss
with
Huawei
Underlay HO Step Period(s) NA 5 Second
Underlay HO Step Level NA 5 None
Penalty Time of UtoO HO(s) NA 5 Second
Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail(s) NA 30 Second
Penalty Time after OtoU HO Fail(s) NA 5 Second
MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail NA 3 None
Outgoing-RAT HO Allowed NA NA
3G
Parameter
Better 3G Cell HO Allowed NA NA
3G
Parameter
Inter-RAT HO Preference NA NA
3G
Parameter
HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell NA NA
3G
Parameter
RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO NA NA
3G
Parameter
Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO NA NA
3G
Parameter
3G Better Cell HO Watch Time(s) NA NA
3G
Parameter
3G Better Cell HO Valid Time(s) NA NA
3G
Parameter
Filter Length for SDCCH MEAN_BEP NA NA
3G
Parameter
Filter Length for TCH MEAN_BEP NA NA
3G
Parameter
Filter Length for SDCCH CV_BEP NA NA
3G
Parameter
Filter Length for TCH CV_BEP NA NA
3G
Parameter
Filter Length for SDCCH REP_QUANT NA NA
3G
Parameter
Filter Length for TCH REP_QUANT NA NA
3G
Parameter
Max Resend Times of Phy.Info. NA 30 None
T3105(10ms) NA 7 10 ms
PC Interval NA NA
UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold NA 35 Grade
UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold NA 25 Grade
UL Qual. Upper Threshold NA 0 Grade
UL Qual. Lower Threshold NA 4 Grade
DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold NA 30 Grade
DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold NA 20 Grade
DL Qual. Upper Threshold NA 0 Grade
DL Qual. Lower Threshold NA 4 Grade
Filter Length for UL RX_LEV NA 4
SACCH
Period
Filter Length for DL RX_LEV NA NA
Filter Length for UL Qual. NA 4
SACCH
Period
Filter Length for DL Qual. NA NA
MR. Compensation Allowed NA Yes None
UL MR. Number Predicted NA 1
Number of
MR
DL MR. Number Predicted NA 1
Number of
MR
MAX Down Adj.Value Qual.Zone 0 NA 6 dB
MAX Down Adj.Value Qual.Zone 1 NA 4 dB
MAX Down Adj.Value Qual.Zone 2 NA 2 dB
MAX Down Adj. PC Value by Qual. NA 6 dB
MAX Up Adj. PC Value by RX_LEV NA 16 dB
MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual. NA 8 dB
UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold NA 5 None
UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff NA 10 dB
DL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold NA 5 None
DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff NA 10 dB
BTS PC Class NA 16 Grade
AMR PC Interval NA 3 None
AMR Filter Length for UL RX_LEV NA 4
SACCH
Period
AMR Filter Length for DL RX_LEV NA 4
SACCH
Period
AMR Filter Length for UL Qual NA 4
SACCH
Period
AMR Filter Length for DL Qual. NA 4
SACCH
Period
AMR MR. Compensation Allowed NA Yes None
AMR UL MR. Number Predicted NA 1
MR
Number
AMR DL MR. Number Predicted NA 1
MR
Number
AMR UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold NA 35 Grade
AMR UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold NA 25 Grade
AMR ULQual. Upper Threshold NA 0 Grade
AMR UL Qual. Lower Threshold NA 4 Grade
AMR DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold NA 30 Grade
AMR DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold NA 20 Grade
AMR DL Qual. Upper Threshold NA 0 Grade
AMR DL Qual. Lower Threshold NA 4 Grade
AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone
0
NA 6 dB
AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone
1
NA 4 dB
AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone
2
NA 2 dB
AMR MAX Down Adj. PC Value by
Qual.
NA 6 dB
AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value by
RX_LEV
NA 16 dB
AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual. NA 8 Grade
AMR UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold NA 5 dB
AMR UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff NA 10 None
AMR DL Qual Bad Trig Threshold NA 5 dB
AMR DL Qual Bad UpLEVDiff NA 10 None
AMR BTS PC Class NA 16 dB
Idle SDCCH Threshold N1 NA 2 None
Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum 80 80 None
TCH Minimum Recovery Time(s) 60 60 Second
Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed NA Yes None
Idle TCH Threshold N1 NA
Need to
discuss
with
Huawei
Apply-TCH Decision Period T(m) NA 1 Minute
TCH Traffic Busy Threshold(%) NA 50
Percentag
e
Interf. Priority Allowed Yes Yes None
Active CH Interf. Meas.Allowed Yes Yes None
Allocation TRX Priority Allowed Yes Yes None
History Record Priority Allowed Yes Yes None
Balance Traffic Allowed Yes Yes None
Interf.of UL Level Threshold NA 30 Grade
Interf.of UL Qual. Threshold NA 50 Grade
Interf.of DL Level Threshold NA 25 Grade
Interf.of DL Qual.Threshold NA 50 Grade
Filter Length for TCH Level 6 6
Number of
MR
Filter Length for TCH Qual. 6 6
Number of
MR
Filter Length for SDCCH Level 2 2 None
Filter Length for SDCCH Qual. 2 2 None
Updata Period of CH Record(min) NA 30 Minute
Updata Freq.of CH Record NA 2 None
AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed NA Yes
AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold NA 2
TCH req suspend interval(s) NA 60 Second
Allow Rate Selection Based on
Overlaid/Underlaid Subcell Load
NA Yes
Busy Threshold of TCH Traffic in
Overlaid Subcell
NA 30
Busy Threshold of TCH Traffic in
Underlaid Subcell
NA 30
Diversity LNA Bypass Permitted NA
Need to
discuss
with
Huawei
Data service Allowed NA
<0110111
000>
None
SMCBC DRX NA Yes None
Cell Load0 Threshold NA 20
Cell Load1 Threshold NA 40
Cell Load2 Threshold NA 55
Cell Load3 Threshold NA 70
Cell Load4 Threshold NA 80
Cell Load5 Threshold NA 90
Cell Load Change Delay NA 3
Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold NA
Need to
discuss
with
Huawei
Interf. Band Threshold 0 (-dBm) NA 110
Interf. Band Threshold 1 (-dBm) NA 105
Interf. Band Threshold 2 (-dBm) NA 98
Interf. Band Threshold 3 (-dBm) NA 92
Interf. Band Threshold 4 (-dBm) NA 87
Interf. Band Threshold 5 (-dBm) NA 85
Interf.Calculation Period(SACCH
period(480ms))
NA 20
Max RC Power Reduction(2dB) NA
Need to
discuss
with
Huawei
Frame Start Time NA 65535
DC Bias Voltage Threshold NA 3
Power Output Error Threshold NA 2
Power Output Reduction Threshold NA 2
VSWR TRX Unadjusted Threshold NA 2
VSWR TRX Error Threshold NA 2
Radio Resource Report Period(s) NA 10 Second
CCCH Load Indication Period(s) NA 15
CCCH Load Threshold NA 80
Overload Indication Period 15 15
Average RACH Load Timeslot Number NA 5000
Antenna Azimuth Angle(Degree) NA 360
Included Angle(Degree) NA 360
PWRC
Not
selected
Yes
Discard
BCCH TS
Power
while
calculating
Power
Control in
BBHoppin
g
MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH
5 (900), 0
(1800)
5 (900), 0
(1800)
Support Half Rate NA Yes
Abis Flow Control Permitted Yes Yes
Aiding Delay Protect Time(min) NA 15 Second
Directly Magnifier Site Flag NA No None
Drop Optimize Error Indication (T200
timeout)
NA 1 None
Drop Optimize Error Indication
(unsolicited DM response)
NA 1 None
Drop Optimize Error Indication
(sequence error)
NA 1 None
Drop Optimize Connection Failure
(radio link fail)
NA 1 None
Drop Optimize Connection Failure (HO
access fail)
NA 1 None
Drop Optimize Connection Failure (OM
intervention)
NA 1 None
Drop Optimize Connection Failure
(radio resource not available)
NA 1 None
Drop Optimize Connection Failure
(other)
NA 1 None
Drop Optimize Release Indication NA 1 None
Drop Optimize ABIS Territorial Link
Failure
NA 1 None
Drop Optimize Equipment Failure NA 1 None
Drop Optimize Forced Handover
Failure
NA 1 None
Drop Optimize No MR For Long Time NA 1 None
Drop Optimize Resource Check NA 1 None
Drop Optimize Into-Bsc Handover
Timeout
NA 1 None
Drop Optimize Out-Bsc Handover
Timeout
NA 1 None
Drop Optimize Intra-Bsc Out-Cell
Handover Timeout
NA 1 None
Drop Optimize Intra-Cell Handover
Timeout
NA 1 None
Cell Out-of-Service Alarm Switch NA Yes None
T3101(ms) NA 3000 ms
ImmAss A Interf Creation Timer(ms) NA 5000 ms
T3103A(ms) NA 10000 ms
T3103C(ms) NA 10000 ms
T7(ms) NA 10000 ms
T3107(ms) NA 10000 ms
T3121(ms) NA 10000 ms
T8(ms) NA 10000 ms
T3109(ms) NA 27000 ms
T3111(ms) NA 1000 ms
TREESTABLISH(ms) NA 15000 ms
T3122(s) NA 10 ms
Parameters Table Default
Single band
900MHz
Multiband
Frequency Band Cell_Common GSM900 GSM900&DCS1800
Administrative State Cell_Common Unlocked Unlocked
Layer of the Cell Cell_Common 3 3 3
MCC Cell_Common 470 470 None
MNC Cell_Common 02 02 None
NCC Cell_Common 0~7 0~7 0
BCC Cell_Common 0~7 0~7 0
Cell Priority Cell_Common Prior-1 Prior-1 Prior-1
Activity Status Cell_Common Activated Activated Activated
PCU Cell_Common 255 255 255
GPRS Support Cell_Common support GPRS support GPRS not support GPRS
Support Baseband FH
and EDGE
simultaneously
Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes
Recommended Value
EDGE Support Cell_Common No No No
8PSK power
attenuation grade
Cell_Common 0 0 0
Support NACC Cell_Common No No No
Support PACKET SI
STATUS
Cell_Common No No No
Support NC2 Cell_Common No No No
PCU Support 64
Neighbor Cells
Cell_Common No No No
Level report switch Cell_Common Support Support Support
Cellband Cell_Common 0 2 0
RAC Cell_Common As per plan As per plan As per plan
Support DTM Cell_Common Not Support Not Support Not Support
Support Enhanced
DTM
Cell_Common Not Support Not Support Not Support
Encryption Algorithm Cell_Common 00000001 00000001 1
FH MODE Cell_Common
As per frequency
plan
As per frequency
plan
As per frequency
plan
DL DTX Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes
MAX TA(bit period(1
bit=0.55km))
Cell_Common 62 62 62
Cell Extension Type Cell_Common Normal cell Normal cell Normal Cell
Cell Antenna Hopping Cell_Common None None None
Enhanced Concentric
Allowed
Cell_Common No Yes Yes
Cell Type Cell_Common Normal Cell Concentric Cell Normal cell
Attributes of UL And
OL Subcells
Cell_Common NONE NONE NONE
BCCH Concentric
Attribute
Cell_Common None Underlaid Subcell None
UL DTX Cell_Common Shall Use Shall Use Shall Use
Call Reestablishment
Forbidden
Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN Cell_Common 1 1 1
TCH Immediate
Assignment
Cell_Common No No No
Direct Retry Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes
SDCCH Dynamic
Allocation Allowed
Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes
UL PC Allowed Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes
DL PC Allowed Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes
Allow Dynamic
Shutdown of TRX
Power Amplifier
Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes
Allow Dynamic Voltage
Adjustment
Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes
TRX Index TRx
Depend on
invidual site
Depend on invidual
site
65535
TRX No. TRx
Depend on
invidual site
Depend on invidual
site
255
Cell Index TRx
Depend on
invidual site
Depend on invidual
site
None
Site Index TRx
Depend on
invidual site
Depend on invidual
site
65535
Board Type TRx
Depend on
invidual site
Depend on invidual
site
None
Active State TRx Activated Activated Activated
Abis Mode TRx Auto Auto Auto
Cabinet No. TRx
Depend on
invidual site
Depend on invidual
site
0
Subrack No. TRx
Depend on
invidual site
Depend on invidual
site
0
Slot No. TRx
Depend on
invidual site
Depend on invidual
site
None
TEI TRx
Depend on
invidual site
Depend on invidual
site
0
Out-BSC Subrack No. TRx
Depend on
invidual site
Depend on invidual
site
0
Out-BSC Slot No. TRx
Depend on
invidual site
Depend on invidual
site
None
Out-BSC Port No. TRx
Depend on
invidual site
Depend on invidual
site
None
Out-BSC Timeslot
No.(8K)
TRx
Depend on
invidual site
Depend on invidual
site
255
RSL In Site Port No. TRx
Depend on
invidual site
Depend on invidual
site
255
RSL In Site Timeslot
No.(8K)
TRx
Depend on
invidual site
Depend on invidual
site
255
RSL Logic No. TRx
Depend on
invidual site
Depend on invidual
site
2048
Hop Type TRx
As per frequency
plan
As per frequency
plan
None
Power Level TRx 0 0 0
Power Type TRx
Depends on
BTS/site
configuration
Depends on
BTS/site
configuration
Default
HW_Concentric
Attribute
TRx
Depends on
BTS/site
configuration
Depends on
BTS/site
configuration
None
TRX Priority TRx Level0 Level0 Level0
Shut Down Enable TRx Enable Enable Enable
TCH Rate Adjust Allow TRx Yes Yes No
TRX 8PSK Level TRx 0 0 0
Wireless Link Alarm
Flag
TRx No No No
Abnormal Release
Statistic Base
TRx 100 100 100
Abnormal Warn
Threshold
TRx 100 100 100
Abnormal Release
Threshold
TRx 50 50 50
Statical Period of No-
traffic(5min)
TRx 48 48 48
Wireless Link Alarm
Critical Permit
TRx Yes Yes Yes
WLA Prompting
Recover Period(5min)
TRx 12 12 12
Begin Time of WLA
Detection(hour)
TRx 8 8 8
End Time of WLA
Detection(hour)
TRx 22 22 22
Up Down Balance Basic
Difference
TRx 8 8 8
Up Down Balance
Floating Range
TRx 30 30 30
Up Down Balance
Alarm Threshold
TRx 80 80 80
Receive Mode TRx
Depends on
BTS/site
configuration
Depends on
BTS/site
configuration
None
Send Mode TRx
Depends on
BTS/site
configuration
Depends on
BTS/site
configuration
None
Allow Shutdown of TRX
Power Amplifier
TRx Yes Yes No
Antenna Hopping
Index
TRx No No No
Power Finetune TRx Default Default Default
TRX Antenna Hopping TRx None None None
Reverse Out-BSC Slot
No.
TRx 255 255 255
Reverse Out-BSC Port
No.
TRx 255 255 255
Reverse Out-BSC
Timeslot No.(8K)
TRx 255 255 255
Reverse RSL In Site
Port No.
TRx 255 255 255
Reverse RSL In Site
Timeslot No.(8K)
TRx 255 255 255
Transmission Type of
Abis Interface
TRx TDM TDM TDM
Maximum PDCH
numbers of carrier
TRx 8 8 8
MaxAbisTSOccupied TRx 32 32 32
Co-TRX for Dynamic
Transmission
Diversity(PBT)
TRx 255 255 255
InHDLCIndex TRx 65535 65535 65535
HubHDLCIndex TRx 65535 65535 65535
TRXNoInHub TRx 255 255 255
XPUSlotNo TRx 0 0 0
TRX Ability TRx 1 1
PhysicalPassNo TRx 1 1
Priority TRx NONE
QTRU Priority TRx 255 255
RevInHDLCIndex TRx 65535 65535 65535
Time Slot Power
Rerserve
TRx 0 0 0
Allow Dynamic Voltage
Adjustment
Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes
Allow Dynamic
Shutdown of TRX
Power Amplifier
Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes
MAX TA(bit period(1
bit=0.55km))
Basic_Parameter 63 63 62
DL DTX Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes
Encryption Algorithm Basic_Parameter 1 1 1
DL PC Allowed Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes
UL PC Allowed Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes
Direct Retry Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes
TCH Immediate
Assignment
Basic_Parameter No No No
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN Basic_Parameter 1 1 8
Call Reestablishment
Forbidden
Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes
UL DTX Basic_Parameter Shall Use Shall Use Shall Use
GSM900 Band Traffic
Load Share Threshold
CH_MGT 25 25 25
Channel Assignment
Allowed for Insufficient
Power
CH_MGT No No Yes
Qtru Down Link Path
Loss Compensation
CH_MGT 4 4 4
Qtru Estimate Bts
Power
CH_MGT 35 35 35
Qtru Down Power
Inadequate Last Time
CH_MGT 3 3 3
Qtru Down Power
Inadequate Stat Time
CH_MGT 5 5 5
Qtru Power Sharing CH_MGT None None None
Observed time of
uplink received level
difference
CH_MGT 5 5 5
Duration of uplink
received level
difference
CH_MGT 4 4 4
Smooth factor of
uplink received level
CH_MGT 6 6 6
Threshold of the
difference between
uplink received levels
CH_MGT 100 100 100
Allow Rate Selection
Based on
Overlaid/Underlaid
Subcell Load
CH_MGT Yes Yes Yes
Tch Traffic Busy
Underlay Threshold
CH_MGT 50 50 50
Busy Threshold of TCH
Traffic in Overlaid
Subcell
CH_MGT 50 50 50
Flex HSN Switch CH_MGT Close Close Close
Flex MAIO Switch CH_MGT Close Close Close
Fix Abis Prior Choose
Abis Load Threshold(%)
CH_MGT 80 80 80
Flex Abis Prior Choose
Abis Load Threshold(%)
CH_MGT 80 80 80
TCH req suspend
interval(s)
CH_MGT 60 60 60
AMR TCH/H Prior Cell
Load Threshold
CH_MGT 40 40 40
AMR TCH/H Prior
Allowed
CH_MGT As per plan As per plan As per plan
Update Freq.of CH
Record
CH_MGT 2 2 2
Update Period of CH
Record(min)
CH_MGT 30 30 30
Filter Length for SDCCH
Qual.
CH_MGT 2 2 2
Filter Length for SDCCH
Level
CH_MGT
As per frequency
plan
As per frequency
plan
As per frequency
plan
Filter Length for TCH
Qual.
CH_MGT Yes Yes 6
Filter Length for TCH
Level
CH_MGT 6 6 4
Interf.of DL
Qual.Threshold
CH_MGT 40 40 40
Interf.of DL Level
Threshold
CH_MGT 25 25 25
Interf.of UL Qual.
Threshold
CH_MGT 40 40 40
Interf.of UL Level
Threshold
CH_MGT 10 10 10
History Record Priority
Allowed
CH_MGT Yes Yes Yes
Allocation TRX Priority
Allowed
CH_MGT Yes Yes Yes
Active CH Interf.
Meas.Allowed
CH_MGT Yes Yes Yes
Interf. Priority Allowed CH_MGT Yes Yes Yes
TCH Traffic Busy
Threshold(%)
CH_MGT 1 50 50
TIGHT BCCH Switch CH_MGT No No No
Dynamic Transmission
Diversity(PBT)
Supported
CH_MGT Not Support DPBT Not Support
Channel Allocate
Strategy
CH_MGT
Capability
preferred
Capability preferred
Capability
preferred
Enhanced TCH Adjust
Allowed
CH_MGT Yes Yes Yes
TCH Minimum
Recovery Time(s)
CH_MGT 60 60 60
Cell SDCCH Channel
Maximum
CH_MGT 80 80 80
Idle SDCCH Threshold
N1
CH_MGT 2 2 2
AMR Starting Mode(H) Call_Control 2 2 2
AMR DL Coding Rate
adj.hyst3(H)
Call_Control 10 10 15
AMR DL Coding Rate
adj.hyst2(H)
Call_Control 4 4 4
AMR DL Coding Rate
adj.hyst1(H)
Call_Control 2 2 4
AMR DL Coding Rate
adj.th3(H)
Call_Control 30 30 63
AMR DL Coding Rate
adj.th2(H)
Call_Control 18 18 26
AMR DL Coding Rate
adj.th1(H)
Call_Control 12 12 16
AMR UL Coding Rate
adj.hyst3(H)
Call_Control 10 10 15
AMR UL Coding Rate
adj.hyst2(H)
Call_Control 4 4 4
AMR UL Coding Rate
adj.hyst1(H)
Call_Control 2 2 4
AMR UL Coding Rate
adj.th3(H)
Call_Control 30 30 63
AMR UL Coding Rate
adj.th2(H)
Call_Control 18 18 24
AMR UL Coding Rate
adj.th1(H)
Call_Control 12 12 14
AMR ACS(H) Call_Control 1101 1101 1101
AMR Starting Mode(F) Call_Control 2 2 2
AMR DL Coding Rate
adj.hyst3(F)
Call_Control 6 6 3
AMR DL Coding Rate
adj.hyst2(F)
Call_Control 4 4 3
AMR DL Coding Rate
adj.hyst1(F)
Call_Control 2 2 2
AMR DL Coding Rate
adj.th3(F)
Call_Control 38 38 30
AMR DL Coding Rate
adj.th2(F)
Call_Control 28 28 22
AMR DL Coding Rate
adj.th1(F)
Call_Control As per plan As per plan As per plan
AMR UL Coding Rate
adj.hyst3(F)
Call_Control 5 5 1
AMR UL Coding Rate
adj.hyst2(F)
Call_Control 2 2 2
AMR UL Coding Rate
adj.hyst1(F)
Call_Control 4 4 2
AMR UL Coding Rate
adj.th3(F)
Call_Control
As per frequency
plan
As per frequency
plan
As per frequency
plan
AMR UL Coding Rate
adj.th2(F)
Call_Control Yes Yes 18
AMR UL Coding Rate
adj.th1(F)
Call_Control 20 20 12
AMR ACS(F) Call_Control 11100100 11100100 11100100
Max Assignment Retry
Times
Call_Control 2 2 1
Frequency Band of
Reassign
Call_Control Same Band Different Band Different Band
Short Message
Downlink Disabled
Call_Control No No No
Immediate Assignment
Opt.
Call_Control No No No
Abis Resource
Adjustment TCHH
Function Switch
Call_Control No No No
Allow EMLPP Call_Control No No No
Allow Reassign Call_Control Yes Yes Yes
TDD Cell Threshold Call_Control 1 0 0
TDD Cell offset Call_Control 0 0 0
Best TDD Cell Number Call_Control 1 1 1
TDD Cell Reselect
Diversity(dB)
Call_Control 8 8 8
FDD Reporting
Threshold
Call_Control 0 0 0
FDD Reporting Offset Call_Control 0 0 0
1800 Reporting
Threshold
Call_Control 0 0 0
1800 Reporting Offset Call_Control 0 0 0
900 Reporting
Threshold
Call_Control 0 0 0
900 Reporting Offset Call_Control 0 0 0
Qsearch C Call_Control 15 15 15
Scale Order Call_Control +0dB +0dB +0dB
Invalid BSIC Reporting Call_Control No No No
3G Search PRIO Call_Control Yes Yes Yes
Qsearch P Call_Control 15 15 15
FDD Qmin Call_Control 0 0 0
FDD MULTIRAT
Reporting
Call_Control 2 2 2
FDD REP QUANT Call_Control RSCP RSCP RSCP
FDD Q Offset Call_Control 8 8 8
Qsearch C Initial Call_Control Use Qsearch_I Use Qsearch_I Use Qsearch_I
Qsearch I Call_Control 15 15 15
Serving Band Reporting Call_Control 3 3 3
Power Deviation(2dB) Call_Control 1 1 1
Power Deviation
Indication
Call_Control Yes Yes Yes
MBR Call_Control 0 0 0
ECSC Call_Control No Yes NO
Radio Link
Timeout(SACCH period
(480ms))
Call_Control 24 24 52
Emergent Call Disable Call_Control No No No
Special Access Control
Class
Call_Control 00000 00000 00000
Common Access
Control Class
Call_Control 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000
MS MAX Retrans Call_Control 4 Times 4 Times 4 Times
Max Transmit Times of
Imm_Ass
Call_Control 2 2 2
Max Delay of Imm_Ass
Retransmit(ms)
Call_Control 4 4 4
Use Imm_Ass
Retransmit Parameter
Call_Control No No No
N200 of FACCH/Full
rate
Call_Control 34 34 34
N200 of FACCH/Half
rate
Call_Control 29 29 29
N200 of SDCCH Call_Control 23 23 23
N200 of SACCH Call_Control 5 5 5
N200 of Release Call_Control 5 5 5
N200 of Establish Call_Control 5 5 5
Use LAPDm N200 Call_Control No No No
T200 SDCCH
SAPI3(5ms)
Call_Control 60 60 60
T200 SACCH
SDCCH(10ms)
Call_Control 60 60 60
T200 SACCH TCH
SAPI3(10ms)
Call_Control 200 200 200
T200 SACCH TCH
SAPI0(10ms)
Call_Control 150 150 150
T200 FACCH/H(5ms) Call_Control 50 50 50
T200 FACCH/F(5ms) Call_Control 50 50 50
T200 SDCCH(5ms) Call_Control 60 60 60
RACH Min.Access
Level(dbm)
Call_Control -115 -115 -115
Random Access Error
Threshold
Call_Control 200 200 180
TRX Aiding Function
Control
Call_Control
Allowed &
Recover When
Check Res
Allowed & Recover
When Check Res
TRX Aiding Not
Allowed
Speech Version Call_Control 11 11 11
AHR Radio Link
Timeout(SACCH period
(480ms))
Call_Control 24 24 52
AFR Radio Link
Timeout(SACCH period
(480ms))
Call_Control 24 24 64
AHR SACCH Multi-
Frames(SACCH period
(480ms))
Call_Control 24 24 32
AFR SACCH Multi-
Frames(SACCH period
(480ms))
Call_Control 24 24 48
Directed Retry Load
Access Threshold
Call_Control 75 75 85
Assignment Cell Load
Judge Enable
Call_Control Disable Disable Disable
Paging Times Call_Control 2 2 4
RACH Busy Threshold Call_Control 16 16 16
SACCH Multi-
Frames(SACCH period
(480ms))
Call_Control 24 24 31
T3105(10ms) HO 7 7 7
Max Resend Times of
Phy.Info.
HO 30 30 30
TDD Better 3G Cell HO
Allowed
HO No No 0
TDD 3G Better Cell HO
Valid Time(s)
HO 4 4 4
TDD 3G Better Cell HO
Watch Time(s)
HO 5 5 5
TDD RSCP Threshold
for Better 3G Cell HO
HO 50 50 50
TDD HO Preference
Threshold for 2G Cell
HO 25 25 25
TDD Inter-RAT HO
Preference
HO
Preference for 2G
Cell By Threshold
Preference for 2G
Cell By Threshold
Preference for 2G
Cell By Threshold
Quick Handover
Offset(dB)
HO 68 68 68
Quick Handover Punish
Value(dB)
HO 63 63 63
Quick Handover Punish
Time(s)
HO 10 10 10
Ignore Measurement
Report Number
HO 1 1 1
Neighbor Cell Filter
Length MR Number
HO 4 4 4
Serving Cell Filter
Length MR Number
HO 4 4 4
Quick Handover Last
Time (0.5s)
HO 3 3 3
Quick Handover Static
Time(0.5s)
HO 4 4 4
Quick Move Speed
Threshold(m/s)
HO 80 80 80
Quick Handover Down
Trigger Level(dB)
HO 63 63 63
Quick Handover Up
Trigger Level(dB)
HO 63 63 63
Inner Cell Serious
OverLoad Threshold(%)
HO 90 90 90
Number of Satisfactory
Measurements(s)
HO As per plan As per plan As per plan
Total Number of
Measurements(s)
HO 5 5 5
Inter UL And OL
Subcells HO Penalty
Time(s)
HO 5 5 5
Outgoing OL Subcell
HO level Threshold(dB)
HO 25 25 25
Incoming OL Subcell
HO level Threshold(dB)
HO
As per frequency
plan
As per frequency
plan
As per frequency
plan
Step Length of OL
Subcell Load HO(dB)
HO Yes Yes 5
OL Subcell Load
Diversity HO Period(s)
HO 10 10 10
Load HO of OL Subcell
to UL Subcell Enabled
HO No No No
Modified Step Length
of UL Load HO
Period(s)
HO 1 1 1
Step Length of UL
Subcell Load HO(dB)
HO 5 5 5
UL Subcell Load
Hierarchical HO
Period(s)
HO 5 5 5
Distance Hysteresis
Between Boundaries of
UL And OL Subcells(dB)
HO 2 2 2
Distance Between
Boundaries of UL And
OL Subcells(dB)
HO 10 10 10
Allowed Flow Control
Level of UL And OL
Subcell HO
HO 10 10 10
UL Subcell Serious
Overload Threshold(%)
HO 90 90 90
UL Subcell General
Overload Threshold(%)
HO 1 80 80
Assignment
Optimization of OL
Subcell Allowed Or Not
HO No No No
Assignment
Optimization of UL
Subcell Allowed Or Not
HO Yes Yes Yes
UL Subcell Lower Load
Threshold(%)
HO 50 50 50
Better 3G Cell HO
Allowed
HO No No No
3G Better Cell HO Valid
Time(s)
HO 4 4 4
3G Better Cell HO
Watch Time(s)
HO 5 5 5
Ec/No Threshold for
Better 3G Cell HO
HO 35 35 35
RSCP Threshold for
Better 3G Cell HO
HO 50 50 50
HO Preference
Threshold for 2G Cell
HO 25 25 25
Inter-RAT HO
Preference
HO
Preference for 2G
Cell By Threshold
Preference for 2G
Cell By Threshold
Preference for 2G
Cell By Threshold
Ps UtoO HO Received
Level Threshold
HO 35 35 35
Ps OtoU HO Received
Level Threshold
HO 25 25 25
ReceiveQualThrshAMR
HR
HO 60 60 60
ReceiveQualThrshAMR
FR
HO 65 65 65
En Iuo In Cell Load
Classification HO Step
HO 5 5 5
En Iuo In Cell Load
Classification HO
Period
HO 5 5 5
En Iuo Out Cell Serious
OverLoad Threshold
HO 90 90 90
En Iuo Out Cell General
OverLoad Threshold
HO 85 85 85
En Iuo Out Cell Low
Load Threshold
HO 30 30 20
MaxRetry Time after
UtoO Fail
HO 3 3 3
Penalty Time after
OtoU HO Fail(s)
HO 10 10 10
Penalty Time after
UtoO HO Fail(s)
HO 40 40 40
Penalty Time of UtoO
HO(s)
HO 10 10 10
Underlay HO Step
Level
HO 5 5 5
Underlay HO Step
Period(s)
HO 5 5 5
UtoO Traffic HO
Allowed
HO Yes Yes Yes
UtoO HO Received
Level Threshold
HO 32 32 35
OtoU HO Received
Level Threshold
HO 18 18 25
Incoming-to-BSC HO
Optimum Layer
HO Underlaid Subcell Underlaid Subcell Underlaid Subcell
Pref. Subcell in HO of
Intra-BSC
HO
System
Optimization
System
Optimization
System
Optimization
TA Threshold of Imme-
Assign Pref.
HO 0 0 0
TA Pref. of Imme-
Assign Allowed
HO No No No
TA Threshold of
Assignment Pref.
HO 63 63 63
Assign-optimum-level
Threshold
HO 35 35 35
Assign Optimum Layer HO
System
Optimization
System
Optimization
System
Optimization
UO HO Valid Time(s) HO 4 4 4
UO HO Watch Time(s) HO 5 5 5
TA Hysteresis HO 0 0 0
TA Threshold HO 63 63 63
RX_QUAL Threshold HO 50 50 60
RX_LEV Hysteresis HO 5 5 5
RX_LEV Threshold HO 35 35 35
UO Signal Intensity
Difference
HO 0 0 0
TA for UO HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes
RX_QUAL for UO HO
Allowed
HO No No No
RX_LEV for UO HO
Allowed
HO Yes Yes Yes
OL to UL HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes
UL to OL HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes
Load Threshold for
TIGHT BCCH HO
HO 80 80 80
RX_QUAL Threshold
for TIGHT BCCH HO
HO 4 4 3
K Bias HO 0 0 0
UL Expected Level at
HO Access
HO 30 30 30
Penalty Time on Fast
Moving HO(s)
HO 40 40 40
Penalty on MS Fast
Moving HO
HO 30 30 30
Interval for
Consecutive HO Jud.
HO 6 6 6
Forbidden time after
MAX Times
HO 20 20 20
MAX Consecutive HO
Times
HO 3 3 3
MS Fast-moving Time
Threshold
HO 15 15 15
MS Fast-moving Valid
Cells
HO 2 2 2
MS Fast-moving Watch
Cells
HO 3 3 3
Load HO Step Level HO 5 5 5
Load HO Step Period HO 10 10 10
Load HO Bandwidth HO 25 25 25
Load Req.on Candidate
Cell
HO 75 75 75
Load HO Threshold HO 85 85 85
System Flux Threshold
for Load HO
HO 10 10 10
ULQuaLimitAMRHR HO 60 60 60
DLQuaLimitAMRHR HO 60 60 60
ULQuaLimitAMRFR HO 60 60 65
DLQuaLimitAMRFR HO 60 60 65
RXLEVOff HO 5 5 5
RXQUAL12 HO 50 50 50
RXQUAL11 HO 51 51 51
RXQUAL10 HO 52 52 52
RXQUAL9 HO 53 53 53
RXQUAL8 HO 54 54 54
RXQUAL7 HO 55 55 55
RXQUAL6 HO 56 56 56
RXQUAL5 HO 57 57 57
RXQUAL4 HO 58 58 58
RXQUAL3 HO 59 59 59
RXQUAL2 HO 60 60 60
RXQUAL1 HO 70 70 70
Cons.No Dl Mr.HO
Allowed Limit
HO 8 8 8
No Dl Mr.Ul Qual HO
Limit
HO 60 60 60
No Dl Mr.HO Allowed HO No No No
Filter Parameter B HO 0 0 0
Filter Parameter A8 HO 10 10 10
Filter Parameter A7 HO 10 10 10
Filter Parameter A6 HO 10 10 10
Filter Parameter A5 HO 10 10 10
Filter Parameter A4 HO 10 10 10
Filter Parameter A3 HO 10 10 10
Filter Parameter A2 HO 10 10 10
Filter Parameter A1 HO 10 10 10
UL Qual. Threshold HO 60 60 60
DL Qual. Threshold HO 60 60 60
Emergency HO TA
Threshold
HO 255 255 255
DtxMeasUsed HO Open Open Open
CfgPenaltyTimer HO 255 255 255
UmPenaltyTimer HO 10 10 10
RscPenaltyTimer HO 5 5 5
Filter Length for TCH
NBR_RCVD_BLOCK
HO 6 6 6
Filter Length for SDCCH
NBR_RCVD_BLOCK
HO 2 2 2
Penalty Time after
AMR TCHF-H HO Fail(s)
HO 30 30 30
Filter Length for TCH
REP_QUANT
HO 6 6 6
Filter Length for SDCCH
REP_QUANT
HO 2 2 2
Filter Length for TCH
CV_BEP
HO 6 6 6
Filter Length for SDCCH
CV_BEP
HO 2 2 2
Filter Length for TCH
MEAN_BEP
HO 6 6 6
Filter Length for SDCCH
MEAN_BEP
HO 2 2 2
Penalty Time after TA
HO(s)
HO 30 30 30
Penalty Level after TA
HO
HO 63 63 63
Penalty Time after BQ
HO(s)
HO 15 15 15
Penalty Level after BQ
HO
HO 63 63 63
Penalty Level after HO
Fail
HO 30 30 30
Filter Length for TA HO 6 6 4
Filter Length for Ncell
RX_LEV
HO 6 6 4
Filter Length for SDCCH
Qual
HO 3 3 2
Filter Length for SDCCH
Level
HO 3 3 2
Filter Length for TCH
Qual
HO 6 6 4
Filter Length for TCH
Level
HO 6 6 4
Allowed M.R Number
Lost
HO 4 4 4
Min Power Level For
Direct Try
HO 25 25 16
Sent Freq.of
preprocessed MR
HO
Twice every
second
Twice every second
Twice every
second
Transfer BS/MS Power
Class
HO Yes Yes Yes
Transfer Original MR HO Yes Yes No
MR.Preprocessing HO No No No
MS Power Prediction
after HO
HO No No No
Penalty Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes
Inter-BSC SDCCH HO
ALLowed
HO No No No
Min Interval for
Emerg.HOs
HO 6 6 4
Min Interval for
Consecutive HOs
HO 6 6 4
Min Interval for SDCCH
HOs
HO 2 2 2
Min Interval for TCH
HOs
HO 4 4 2
ATCBHoSwitch HO Open Open Open
TIGHT BCCH HO Valid
Time(s)
HO 2 2 2
TIGHT BCCH HO Watch
Time(s)
HO 3 3 3
Quick Handover Enable HO NO NO NO
H2F HO Threshold HO 10 10 10
F2H HO Threshold HO 30 30 25
Intracell F-H HO Last
Time(s)
HO 4 4 4
Intracell F-H HO Stat
Time(s)
HO 5 5 5
Intracell F-H HO
Allowed
HO Yes Yes YES
Min DL Power on HO
Candidate Cell
HO 15 15 15
Min UP Power on HO
Candidate Cell
HO 10 10 10
Inter-layer HO
Hysteresis
HO 3 3 3
Inter-layer HO
Threshold
HO 25 25 25
Inter-System Handover
Enable
HO No No No
PBGT Valid Time(s) HO 2 2 2
PBGT Watch Time(s) HO 3 3 3
Layer HO Valid Time(s) HO 2 2 2
Layer HO Watch
Time(s)
HO 3 3 3
Edge HO AdjCell Valid
Time(s)
HO 2 2 2
Edge HO AdjCell Watch
Time(s)
HO 3 3 3
Edge HO Valid Time(s) HO 2 2 2
Edge HO Watch
Time(s)
HO 3 3 3
Edge HO DL RX_LEV
Threshold
HO 20 20 20
Edge HO UL RX_LEV
Threshold
HO 10 10 10
Interference HO
Allowed
HO Yes Yes Yes
Concentric Circles HO
Allowed
HO Yes Yes Yes
TA HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes
BQ HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes
Fringe HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes
Level HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes
PBGT HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes
Rx_Level_Drop HO
Allowed
HO No No No
MS Fast Moving HO
Allowed
HO No No No
Load HO Allowed HO No No No
Intracell HO Allowed HO No No No
SDCCH HO Allowed HO No No No
Co-BSC/MSC Adj HO Yes Yes Yes
PT(s) Idle_Mode 0 0 0
TO Idle_Mode 0 0 0
ACS Idle_Mode No No No
CRO(2dB) Idle_Mode 0 0 0
Cell_Bar_Qualify Idle_Mode No No No
PI Idle_Mode Yes Yes Yes
CRH Idle_Mode 6dB 6dB 6dB
Period of Periodic
Location Update(6
minutes)
Idle_Mode 60 60 20
BS-PA-MFRAMS Idle_Mode
4 Multiframe
Period
4 Multiframe Period
2 Multiframe
Period
BS_AG_BLKS_RES Idle_Mode 2 2 2
NCC Permitted Idle_Mode 11111111 11111111 11111111
Cell_Bar_Access Idle_Mode No No No
Tx-integer Idle_Mode 32 32 32
ATT Idle_Mode Yes Yes Yes
Timer for UL Data
Forward(ms)
Other_Properties 10 10 10
WaitforRelIndAMRHR Other_Properties 26000 26000 26000
WaitforRelIndAMRFR Other_Properties 34000 34000 34000
T3103C(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 10000
T3122(s) Other_Properties 10 10 10
TREESTABLISH(ms) Other_Properties 15000 15000 15000
T3111(ms) Other_Properties 1000 1000 1000
T3109(ms) Other_Properties 27000 27000 27000
T8(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 10000
T3121(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 10000
T3107(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 10000
T7(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 10000
T3103A(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 10000
ImmAss A Interf
Creation Timer(ms)
Other_Properties 5000 5000 5000
T3101(ms) Other_Properties 3000 3000 3000
Send Classmark
Enquiring Result To
MSC Enable
Other_Properties No No No
Enquire Classmark
After In-BSC Handover
Enable
Other_Properties No No No
Base Hop Support
Close TRX Allowed
Other_Properties No No No
Qtru Signal Merge
Switch
Other_Properties No No No
MAX Paging Message
Number 0f Cell In
Period
Other_Properties 220 220 220
Average Paging
Message Number 0f
Cell In Period
Other_Properties 180 180 180
Paging Numbers of one
Optimizing Msgs
Other_Properties 5 5 5
Interval For Sending
Paging Optimizing
Msgs
Other_Properties 2 2 2
Paging Messages
Optimize at Abis
Interface
Other_Properties Forced turn-on Forced turn-on Forced turn-on
Interfere Band Stat
Algorithm Type
Other_Properties
Interference
Band
Measurement
Algorithm II
Interference Band
Measurement
Algorithm II
Interference Band
Measurement
Algorithm II
Cell Out-of-Service
Alarm Switch
Other_Properties Yes Yes Yes
Lower-level sublink
resources preemption
switch
Other_Properties No No No
Sublink resources
preemption switch
Other_Properties No No No
Force MS to Send Ho
Access SWITCH
Other_Properties Yes Yes Yes
IntraCellHo to Ass
SWITCH
Other_Properties No No No
Frequency Scan Result
Type
Other_Properties
Maximum/Mean
Value
Maximum/Mean
Value
Maximum/Mean
Value
Drop Optimize Intra-
Cell Handover Timeout
Other_Properties 1 1 1
Drop Optimize Intra-
Bsc Out-Cell Handover
Timeout
Other_Properties 1 1 1
Drop Optimize Out-Bsc
Handover Timeout
Other_Properties 1 1 1
Drop Optimize Into-Bsc
Handover Timeout
Other_Properties 1 1 1
Drop Optimize
Resource Check
Other_Properties 1 1 1
Drop Optimize No MR
For Long Time
Other_Properties 1 1 1
Drop Optimize Forced
Handover Failure
Other_Properties 1 1 1
Drop Optimize
Equipment Failure
Other_Properties 1 1 1
Drop Optimize ABIS
Territorial Link Failure
Other_Properties 1 1 1
Drop Optimize Release
Indication
Other_Properties 1 1 1
Drop Optimize
Connection Failure
(other)
Other_Properties 1 1 1
Drop Optimize
Connection Failure
(radio resource not
available)
Other_Properties 1 1 1
Drop Optimize
Connection Failure
(OM intervention)
Other_Properties 1 1 1
Drop Optimize
Connection Failure (HO
access fail)
Other_Properties 1 1 1
Drop Optimize
Connection Failure
(radio link fail)
Other_Properties 1 1 1
Drop Optimize Error
Indication (sequence
error)
Other_Properties 1 1 1
Drop Optimize Error
Indication (unsolicited
DM response)
Other_Properties 1 1 1
Drop Optimize Error
Indication (T200
timeout)
Other_Properties 1 1 1
Directly Magnifier Site
Flag
Other_Properties No No No
Aiding Delay Protect
Time(min)
Other_Properties 15 15 15
Abis Flow Control
Permitted
Other_Properties Yes Yes Yes
Support Half Rate Other_Properties Yes Yes No
MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH Other_Properties 5 5 5
PWRC Other_Properties Yes Yes Yes
ActGene Other_Properties 5 5 5
PS LowPri ServicePRI Other_Properties 6 6 6
PS HighPRI ServicePRI Other_Properties 4 4 4
CS Data ServicePRI Other_Properties 5 5 5
CS Voice ServicePRI Other_Properties 3 3 3
Included
Angle(Degree)
Other_Properties 360 360 360
Antenna Azimuth
Angle(Degree)
Other_Properties 360 360 360
Average RACH Load
Timeslot Number
Other_Properties 5000 5000 5000
Overload Indication
Period
Other_Properties 15 15 15
CCCH Load Threshold Other_Properties 80 80 80
CCCH Load Indication
Period(s)
Other_Properties 15 15 15
Radio Resource Report
Period(s)
Other_Properties 10 10 10
Frequency Adjust
Value
Other_Properties 36671 36671 36671
Frequency Adjust
Switch
Other_Properties NO NO NO
VSWR TRX Error
Threshold
Other_Properties 2 2 2
VSWR TRX Unadjusted
Threshold
Other_Properties 2 2 2
Power Output
Reduction Threshold
Other_Properties 2 2 2
Power Output Error
Threshold
Other_Properties 2 2 2
DC Bias Voltage
Threshold
Other_Properties 3 3 3
Frame Start Time Other_Properties 65535 65535 65535
Max RC Power
Reduction(2dB)
Other_Properties 5 5 5
Interf.Calculation
Period(SACCH
period(480ms))
Other_Properties 20 20 20
Interf. Band Threshold
5 (-dBm)
Other_Properties 85 85 85
Interf. Band Threshold
4 (-dBm)
Other_Properties 87 87 87
Interf. Band Threshold
3 (-dBm)
Other_Properties 92 92 92
Interf. Band Threshold
2 (-dBm)
Other_Properties 98 98 98
Interf. Band Threshold
1 (-dBm)
Other_Properties 105 105 105
Interf. Band Threshold
0 (-dBm)
Other_Properties 110 110 110
Cell Direct Try
Forbidden Threshold
Other_Properties 3 3 50
SMCBC DRX Other_Properties Yes Yes Yes
Data service Allowed Other_Properties 118 118 118
Power boost before
HO enabled or not
Other_Properties StartUp StartUp not StartUp
Voice quality report
switch
Other_Properties report report not report
Diversity LNA Bypass
Permitted
Other_Properties 255 255 Yes
HwIII MA FreqHop
Gain 8(dB)
Power_Control 53 53 53
HwIII MA FreqHop
Gain 7(dB)
Power_Control 50 50 50
HwIII MA FreqHop
Gain 6(dB)
Power_Control 47 47 47
HwIII MA FreqHop
Gain 5(dB)
Power_Control 43 43 43
HwIII MA FreqHop
Gain 4(dB)
Power_Control 40 40 40
HwIII MA FreqHop
Gain 3(dB)
Power_Control 30 30 30
HwIII MA FreqHop
Gain 2(dB)
Power_Control 20 20 20
HwIII MA FreqHop
Gain 1(dB)
Power_Control 0 0 0
HwIII UL MAX
UpStep(dB)
Power_Control 8 8 8
HwIII UL MAX
DownStep(dB)
Power_Control 8 8 8
HwIII UL AHS Rex
Qual.Lower
Threshold(dB)
Power_Control 12 12 12
HwIII UL AHS Rex
Qual.Upper
Threshold(dB)
Power_Control 16 16 16
HwIII UL AFS Rex
Qual.Lower
Threshold(dB)
Power_Control 12 12 12
HwIII UL AFS Rex
Qual.Upper
Threshold(dB)
Power_Control 16 16 16
HwIII UL HS Rex
Qual.Lower
Threshold(dB)
Power_Control 16 16 16
HwIII UL HS Rex
Qual.Upper
Threshold(dB)
Power_Control 22 22 22
HwIII UL FS Rex Qual.
Lower Threshold(dB)
Power_Control 16 16 16
HwIII UL FS Rex Qual.
Upper Threshold(dB)
Power_Control 22 22 22
HwIII UL RexLev Lower
Threshold
Power_Control 20 20 20
HwIII UL RexLev Upper
Threshold
Power_Control 30 30 30
HwIII UL Rex
Qual.Adjust Factor
Power_Control 6 6 6
HwIII UL RexLev Adjust
Factor
Power_Control 4 4 4
HwIII UL Rex Qual.
Slide Window
Power_Control 1 1 1
HwIII UL RexLev Slide
Window
Power_Control 1 1 1
HwIII UL Rex
Qual.Exponent Filter
Length
Power_Control 3 3 3
HwIII UL RexLev
Exponent Filter Length
Power_Control 3 3 3
HwIII DL MAX UpStep
(dB)
Power_Control 8 8 8
HwIII DL MAX
DownStep(dB)
Power_Control 8 8 8
HwIII DL AHS Rex Qual.
Lower Threshold(dB)
Power_Control 12 12 12
HwIII DL AHS Rex
Qual.Upper
Threshold(dB)
Power_Control 16 16 16
HwIII DL AFS Rex
Qual.Lower
Threshold(dB)
Power_Control 12 12 12
HwIII DL AFS Rex
Qual.Upper
Threshold(dB)
Power_Control 16 16 16
HwIII DL HS Rex Qual.
Lower Threshold(dB)
Power_Control 16 16 16
HwIII DL HS Rex Qual.
Upper Threshold(dB)
Power_Control 22 22 22
HwIII DL FS Rex Qual.
Lower Threshold(dB)
Power_Control 16 16 16
HwIII DL FS Rex Qual.
Upper Threshold(dB)
Power_Control 22 22 22
HwIII DL RexLev Lower
Threshold
Power_Control 25 25 25
HwIII DL RexLev Upper
Threshold
Power_Control 35 35 35
HwIII DL Rex Qual.
Adjust Factor
Power_Control 6 6 6
HwIII DL RexLev Adjust
Factor
Power_Control 6 6 6
HwIII DL Rex Qual.
Slide Window
Power_Control 1 1 1
HwIII DL RexLev Slide
Window
Power_Control 1 1 1
HwIII DL Rex Qual.
Exponent Filter Length
Power_Control 3 3 3
HwIII DL RexLev
Exponent Filter Length
Power_Control 3 3 3
HwIII Traffic Channel
Discard MR Number
Power_Control 3 3 3
HwIII Signal Channel
Discard MR Number
Power_Control 1 1 1
HwIII Down Link Power
Control Adjust Period
Power_Control 3 3 3
HwIII Up Link Power
Control Adjust Period
Power_Control 3 3 3
HwIII Number of lost
MRs allowed
Power_Control 5 5 5
AMR BTS PC Class Power_Control 16 16 16
AMR DL Qual Bad
UpLEVDiff
Power_Control 0 0 0
AMR DL Qual Bad Trig
Threshold
Power_Control 5 5 5
AMR UL Qual. Bad
UpLEVDiff
Power_Control 0 0 0
AMR UL Qual. Bad Trig
Threshold
Power_Control 5 5 5
AMR MAX Up Adj. PC
Value by Qual.
Power_Control 8 8 8
AMR MAX Up Adj. PC
Value by RX_LEV
Power_Control 16 16 16
AMR MAX Down Adj.
PC Value by Qual.
Power_Control 4 4 4
AMR MAX Down Adj.
Value Qual. Zone 2
Power_Control 4 4 4
AMR MAX Down Adj.
Value Qual. Zone 1
Power_Control 4 4 4
AMR MAX Down Adj.
Value Qual. Zone 0
Power_Control 4 4 4
AMR DL Qual. Lower
Threshold
Power_Control 2 2 3
AMR DL Qual. Upper
Threshold
Power_Control 0 0 1
AMR DL RX_LEV Lower
Threshold
Power_Control 30 30 25
AMR DL RX_LEV Upper
Threshold
Power_Control 40 40 35
AMR UL Qual. Lower
Threshold
Power_Control 2 2 3
AMR ULQual. Upper
Threshold
Power_Control 0 0 1
AMR UL RX_LEV Lower
Threshold
Power_Control 25 25 20
AMR UL RX_LEV Upper
Threshold
Power_Control 35 35 30
AMR DL MR. Number
Predicted
Power_Control 2 2 0
AMR UL MR. Number
Predicted
Power_Control 2 2 0
AMR MR.
Compensation Allowed
Power_Control Yes Yes Yes
AMR Filter Length for
DL Qual.
Power_Control 6 6 6
AMR Filter Length for
UL Qual
Power_Control 6 6 6
AMR Filter Length for
DL RX_LEV
Power_Control 6 6 6
AMR Filter Length for
UL RX_LEV
Power_Control 6 6 6
AMR PC Interval Power_Control 3 3 3
BTS PC Class Power_Control 16 16 16
DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff Power_Control 0 0 0
DL Qual. Bad Trig
Threshold
Power_Control 5 5 5
UL Qual. Bad
UpLEVDiff
Power_Control 0 0 0
UL Qual. Bad Trig
Threshold
Power_Control 5 5 5
MAX Up Adj. PC Value
by Qual.
Power_Control 8 8 8
MAX Up Adj. PC Value
by RX_LEV
Power_Control 16 16 16
MAX Down Adj. PC
Value by Qual.
Power_Control 4 4 4
MAX Down Adj.Value
Qual.Zone 2
Power_Control 4 4 4
MAX Down Adj.Value
Qual.Zone 1
Power_Control 4 4 4
MAX Down Adj.Value
Qual.Zone 0
Power_Control 4 4 4
DL MR. Number
Predicted
Power_Control 2 2 0
UL MR. Number
Predicted
Power_Control 2 2 0
MR. Compensation
Allowed
Power_Control Yes Yes Yes
Filter Length for DL
Qual.
Power_Control 5 5 5
Filter Length for UL
Qual.
Power_Control 5 5 5
Filter Length for DL
RX_LEV
Power_Control 5 5 5
Filter Length for UL
RX_LEV
Power_Control 5 5 5
Power Control
Algorithm Switch
Power_Control
HWII Power
Control
HWII Power Control
HW-II Power
Control
DL Qual. Lower
Threshold
Power_Control 2 2 3
DL Qual. Upper
Threshold
Power_Control 0 0 1
DL RX_LEV Lower
Threshold
Power_Control 30 30 25
DL RX_LEV Upper
Threshold
Power_Control 40 40 35
UL Qual. Lower
Threshold
Power_Control 2 2 3
UL Qual. Upper
Threshold
Power_Control 0 0 1
UL RX_LEV Lower
Threshold
Power_Control 25 25 20
UL RX_LEV Upper
Threshold
Power_Control 35 35 30
PC Interval Power_Control 3 3 3
Constant of Filtering
the Collision Signal
Strength for Power
Control
Data_In_PCU 2 2 2
Measured Receive
Power Level Channel
Data_In_PCU pdch pdch pdch
BTS Power Attenuation
on PBCCH
Data_In_PCU -2dB -2dB -2dB
Signal Strength Filter
Period in Transfer
Mode
Data_In_PCU 10 10 10
Signal Strength Filter
Period in Idle Mode
Data_In_PCU 10 10 10
Initial Power Level Data_In_PCU 14 14 14
Alpha Parameter Data_In_PCU 1 1 1
Maximum Value of
N3105
Data_In_PCU 10 10 10
Maximum Value of
N3103
Data_In_PCU 3 3 3
Maximum Value of
N3101
Data_In_PCU 20 20 20
Release Delay of
Downlink TBF(ms)
Data_In_PCU 2400 2400 2400
Inactive Period of
Extended Uplink
TBF(ms)
Data_In_PCU 2000 2000 2000
Release Delay of Non-
extended Uplink
TBF(ms)
Data_In_PCU 120 120 120
Load Reselect Level
Threshold
Data_In_PCU 40 40 40
GPRS Quality
Threshold
Data_In_PCU 5 5 5
EDGE 8PSK Quality
Threshold
Data_In_PCU 16 16 16
EDGE GMSK Quality
Threshold
Data_In_PCU 7 7 7
Cell Reselect Interval(s) Data_In_PCU 2 2 2
Normal Cell
Reselection Worsen
Level Threshold
Data_In_PCU 1 1 1
Normal Cell
Reselection Watch
Period
Data_In_PCU 10 10 10
Cell Normal
Reselection Allowed
Data_In_PCU Permit Permit Permit
Cell Load Reselection
Allowed
Data_In_PCU Permit Permit Permit
Cell Urgent Reselection
Allowed
Data_In_PCU Permit Permit Permit
2G/3G Cell Reselection
Strategy
Data_In_PCU
Preference for 2G
Cell
Preference for 2G
Cell
Preference for 2G
Cell
Filter Window Size Data_In_PCU 6 6 6
Allowed Measure
Report Missed Number
Data_In_PCU 4 4 4
Load Reselection
Receive Threshold(%)
Data_In_PCU 60 60 60
Load Reselection Start
Threshold(%)
Data_In_PCU 85 85 85
MS Rx Quality Worsen
Ratio Threshold(%)
Data_In_PCU 30 30 30
MS Rx Quality Statistic
Threshold
Data_In_PCU 200 200 200
Cell Penalty Last
Time(s)
Data_In_PCU 10 10 10
Cell Penalty Level Data_In_PCU 30 30 30
Cell Reselection
Hysterisis
Data_In_PCU 6 6 6
Min Access Level
Threshold
Data_In_PCU 15 15 15
Support QoS Optimize Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support Not Support
PS Concentric Cell HO
Strategy
Data_In_PCU
No handover
between
underlaid subcell
and overlaid
subcell
No handover
between underlaid
subcell and overlaid
subcell
No handover
between
underlaid subcell
and overlaid
subcell
Transmission Delay of
POC Service
Data_In_PCU 650 650 650
Max. GBR for POC
Service
Data_In_PCU 16 16 16
Min. GBR for POC
Service
Data_In_PCU 6 6 6
Move Packet
Assignment Down to
BTS
Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support Not Support
Move Immediate
Assignment Down to
BTS
Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support Not Support
Support Gbr QoS Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support Not Support
Downlink Default MCS
Type
Data_In_PCU MCS6 MCS6 MCS6
Downlink Fixed MCS
Type
Data_In_PCU UNFIXED UNFIXED UNFIXED
Uplink Default MCS
Type
Data_In_PCU MCS2 MCS2 MCS2
Uplink Fixed MCS Type Data_In_PCU UNFIXED UNFIXED UNFIXED
BEP Period Data_In_PCU 5 5 5
Link Quality Control
Mode
Data_In_PCU LA LA LA
Down TBF threshold
From CS4 to CS3
Data_In_PCU 5 5 5
Down TBF threshold
From CS3 to CS2
Data_In_PCU 5 5 5
Down TBF threshold
From CS2 to CS1
Data_In_PCU 10 10 10
Down TBF threshold
From CS3 to CS4
Data_In_PCU 2 2 2
Down TBF threshold
From CS2 to CS3
Data_In_PCU 2 2 2
Down TBF threshold
From CS1 to CS2
Data_In_PCU 5 5 5
Downlink Default CS
Type
Data_In_PCU CS2 CS2 CS2
Downlink Fixed CS
Type
Data_In_PCU UNFIXED UNFIXED UNFIXED
Up TBF threshold From
CS4 to CS3
Data_In_PCU 5 5 5
Up TBF threshold From
CS3 to CS2
Data_In_PCU 5 5 5
Up TBF threshold From
CS2 to CS1
Data_In_PCU 10 10 10
Up TBF threshold From
CS3 to CS4
Data_In_PCU 2 2 2
Up TBF threshold From
CS2 to CS3
Data_In_PCU 2 2 2
Up TBF threshold From
CS1 to CS2
Data_In_PCU 5 5 5
Uplink Default CS Type Data_In_PCU CS1 CS1 CS1
Uplink Fixed CS Type Data_In_PCU UNFIXED UNFIXED UNFIXED
Background Service
Priority Weight
Data_In_PCU 5 5 5
THP3 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 1 1 1
THP2 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 3 3 3
THP1 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 5 5 5
ARP3 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 1 1 1
ARP2 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 3 3 3
ARP1 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 6 6 6
Timer of Releasing Abis
Timeslot
Data_In_PCU 15 15 15
Reservation Threshold
of Dynamic Channel
Conversion
Data_In_PCU 2 2 2
Level of Preempting
Dynamic Channel
Data_In_PCU
All dynamic
channels can be
pre-empted
All dynamic
channels can be pre-
empted
All dynamic
channels can be
preempted.
Timer of Releasing Idle
Dynamic Channel
Data_In_PCU 20 20 20
Dynamic Channel
Conversion Parameter
of Concentric Cell
Data_In_PCU
Only convert at
UL
Only convert at UL
only convert
dynamic channel
at UL
PDCH Downlink
Multiplex Threshold
Data_In_PCU 80 80 80
PDCH Uplink Multiplex
Threshold
Data_In_PCU 70 70 70
Downlink Multiplex
Threshold of Dynamic
Channel Conversion
Data_In_PCU 20 20 20
Uplink Multiplex
Threshold of Dynamic
Channel Conversion
Data_In_PCU 20 20 20
Maximum Ratio
Threshold of PDCHs in
a Cell
Data_In_PCU 30 30 30
MultiBand reporting Data_In_PCU
Report the
frequencies of six
strongest cells
Report the
frequencies of six
strongest cells
Report the
frequencies of six
strongest cells
Threshold of HCS
Signal Strength
Data_In_PCU -110dB -110dB -110dB
Cell HCS Prior Class Data_In_PCU 2 2 2
Maximum TX Power
for Access PCH
Data_In_PCU 2 2 2
Minimum Receiving
level for Access
Data_In_PCU 2 2 2
Exclusive Access Data_In_PCU Not Exclusive Not Exclusive Not Exclusive
Cell Access Bar Switch Data_In_PCU
Permit Cell
Access
Permit Cell Access Permit Cell Access
Accessorial Hysteresis
of Cell Selection In
New Routing Area
Data_In_PCU 2dB 2dB 2dB
Cell Reselection
Forbidden Time
Data_In_PCU 10sec 10sec 10sec
Allow MS to Access to
another Cell
Data_In_PCU Yes Yes Yes
Exceptional Rule for
GPRS Reselect Offset
Data_In_PCU 0 0 0
GPRS Cell Reselect
Hysteresis Applied to
C31 Criterion or not
Data_In_PCU c31standard c31standard c31standard
GPRS Cell Reselect
Hysteresis
Data_In_PCU 2dB 2dB 2dB
Support PSI Status
Message
Data_In_PCU No No No
Allow MR Command or
not
Data_In_PCU No No No
PSI1 Repetition Period Data_In_PCU 6 6 6
Persistence Level 4 Data_In_PCU 16 16 16
Persistence Level 3 Data_In_PCU 14 14 14
Persistence Level 2 Data_In_PCU 13 13 13
Persistence Level 1 Data_In_PCU 12 12 12
Extension Transmission
Timeslots of Random
Access
Data_In_PCU 20 20 20
Minimum Timeslots
between Two
Successive Channel
Requests
Data_In_PCU 20 20 20
Maximum
Retransmissions for
Radio Priority 4
Data_In_PCU 7 7 7
Maximum
Retransmissions for
Radio Priority 3
Data_In_PCU 7 7 7
Maximum
Retransmissions for
Radio Priority 2
Data_In_PCU 7 7 7
Maximum
Retransmissions for
Radio Priority 1
Data_In_PCU 7 7 7
Access Control Class Data_In_PCU 0 0 0
PRACH Blocks Data_In_PCU 1 1 1
PAGCH Blocks Data_In_PCU 4 4 4
PBCCH Blocks Data_In_PCU 1 1 1
Cell Reselection MR
Period in Packet
Transfer Mode
Data_In_PCU 0.96sec 0.96sec 0.96sec
Cell Reselection MR
Period in Packet Idle
Mode
Data_In_PCU 15.36sec 15.36sec 15.36sec
Non-DRX Period Data_In_PCU 0.24sec 0.24sec 0.24sec
GPRS Reselection
Offset
Data_In_PCU -2db -2db -2dB
GPRS Penalty Time Data_In_PCU 10sec 10sec 10sec
GPRS Temporary
Offset
Data_In_PCU 10dB 10dB 10dB
Extension MR Period Data_In_PCU 60sec 60sec 60sec
Extension MR Type Data_In_PCU type1 type1 type1
Interference Frequency Data_In_PCU 1 1 1
NCC_PERMITTED Data_In_PCU 1 1 1
Extension
Measurement
Command
Data_In_PCU em0 em0 em0
BSS Paging
Coordination
Data_In_PCU Yes Yes Yes
Support 11BIT EGPRS
Access
Data_In_PCU Yes Yes Yes
Routing Area Color
Code
Data_In_PCU 1 1 1
Packet Access Priority Data_In_PCU
Packet access of
level 4
Packet access of
level 4
Packet access of
level 4
Support
SPLIT_PG_CYCLE on
CCCH
Data_In_PCU No No No
Network Control Mode Data_In_PCU nc0 nc0 nc0
Pan Max. Data_In_PCU 12 12 12
Pan Increment Data_In_PCU 4 4 4
Pan Decrement Data_In_PCU 2 2 2
BS_CV_MAX Data_In_PCU 10 10 10
Control Acknowledge
Type
Data_In_PCU
Four access
pulses by default
Four access pulses
by default
Four access pulses
by default
Access Burst Type Data_In_PCU 8bit 8bit 8bit
Max. Duration of
DRX(s)
Data_In_PCU 4 4 4s
T3192 Data_In_PCU 500ms 500ms 500ms
T3168 Data_In_PCU 500ms 500ms 500ms
Network Operation
Mode
Data_In_PCU
Network
Operation Mode
II
Network Operation
Mode II
Network
Operation Mode II
Description Configuration Policy
This parameter specifies the layer where a cell is located. The network designed by
Huawei has four layers: Pico, Micro, Macro, and Umbrella, numbered 1-4 respectively.
The Pico layer is a microcell layer on the 900 MHz and 1800 MHz frequency bands. It m
The network has four layers, numbered 1-4 respectively. If
the number of the layer is small, the priority of the layer is
high.
This parameter and Cell Priority determine the priority of a
cell.
This parameter specifies the mobile country code (MCC), for example, the MCC of China
is 460.
None
This parameter specifies the mobile network code (MNC). None
This parameter specifies the network color code, which is provided by the telecom
operator. The NCC is used to identify networks from area to area. The NCC is unique
nationwide.
The NCC and the BCC form the base station identification code (BSIC).
This parameter should be set as required.
This parameter specifies the base station color code. The BCC identifies the cells with
the same BCCH frequency in the neighborhood. The BCC and the NCC form the BSIC.
1. A training sequence is known by both the transmit end
and the receive end. It is used to acknowledge the exact
position of the other bits in the same burst and to
determine whether the received co-channel signals are
useful signals. If a burst is incon
This parameter specifies the handover between the cells at the same layer.
If this parameter is set to a small value, the priority is high. Generally, the cells at the
same layer have the same priority.
For details, refer to Layer of the Cell.
Each layer has 16 priorities, numbered 1-16 respectively. If
the number of the priority is small, the priority is high. This
parameter along with Layer of the Cell determines the
priority of a cell. The priority affects the sequencing of
neighbor cells fo
This parameter specifies the activation status of a cell. The activation status can be Not
Activated or Activated. None
This parameter specifies the number of the PCU that is connected to the E1 link on the
Pb interface.
None
This parameter specifies whether to enable the general packet radio service (GPRS) in a
cell. The GPRS requires the support of the BTS. In addition, a packet control unit (PCU)
must be configured on the BSS side, and a serving GPRS support node (SGSN) mus
None
The parameter specifies whether the PCU supports baseband FH and EDGE
simultaneously.
None
This parameter specifies whether to enable the EDGE function in a cell. Compared with
GSM, EDGE supports high-rate data transmission. The enhanced data rates for GSM
evolution (EDGE) consists of EGPRS and ECSD. The EGPRS is the enhanced GPRS, which
improv
None
This parameter specifies the power attenuation level of a timeslot when 8PSK is used by
an EDGE-enabled TRX. The attenuation value has 50 levels. Each level attenuates by 0.2
dB.
The EDGE-enabled TRX transmits 8PSK signals with less power than transmits
None
This parameter specifies whether the cell support the Network Assisted Cell Change
(NACC) function.
In network control mode NC0, NC1, or NC2, when the MS is in the packet transmission
mode, the network informs the MS of the system information about neighb
Yes: In network control mode NC0, NC1, or NC2, when the
MS is in the packet transmission mode, the network informs
the MS of the system information about neighbor cells in
advance.
No: In network control mode NC0, NC1, or NC2, when the
This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the PACKET SI STATUS procedure.
When the cell is configured with the PBCCH, the MS sends the Packet PSI/SI Status
message to the BSC, indicating that the MS has stored the system message. The BSC
sends th
None
This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the Network Control 2 (NC2)
function.
In NC2, the MS reports the measurement report of the reference cell and neighbor cells
to the BSC. The BSC controls cell reselection (including normal reselections a
None
This parameter specifies whether the PCU supports 64 neighbor cells.
In the NACC and NC2 functions, this parameter affects the ability of the BSC to report
the number of neighbor cells.
If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC reports the
information about all neighbor cells to the PCU when there
are more than 32 neighbor cells. If this parameter is set to
No, the BSC reports the information about a maximum of
32 neighbor cells to the PC
For the BTS3002C, BTS3001C, BTS3001C+,BTS22C and BTS20, the default value is Invalid
and cannot be manually modified. That is, the main and diversity level cannot be
reported. For other types of BTSs, the default value is Support and can be manually
modif
None
This parameter specifies the frequency band of new cells. Each new cell can be allocated
frequencies of only one frequency band. Once the frequency band is selected, it cannot
be changed.
GSM900: The cell supports GSM900 frequency band.
DCS1800: The cell
None
This parameter specifies that the network service (NS) in the GPRS packet service state
performs location management based on the routing area.
Each routing area has an ID. The routing area ID is broadcast in the system message.
For example, value 0 indic
None
This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the Dual Transfer Mode (DTM)
function. The DTM function enables an MS to provide both the CS service and the PS
service at the same time. The function requires the support of the BSC.
None
This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the enhanced DTM function.
Compared with the DTM function, the enhanced DTM function enhances the CS setup
and release. When the CS service is set up, the PS service is not disrupted.
None
This parameter specifies the encryption algorithm supported on the BSS side.
The value of this parameter has eight bits. The eights bits (from the least significant bit
to the most significant bit) specify whether to support the A5/0, A5/1, A5/2, A5/3, A
None
This parameter specifies whether the TRX adopts FH and specifies the FH mode used.
If this parameter is set to Not FH, even if the TRX is configured with FH data, the cell
where the TRX serves does not perform FH. FH can be used to average the interferen
None
This parameter specifies whether to enable the DTX function in a cell.
The discontinuous transmission (DTX) function allows a
transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no
voice transfer. This function has the following benefits:
1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the
MS and reducing system int
This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell.
After receiving the channel request message or handover access message, the BTS
determines whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by
comparing the TA and the value
The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. If
this parameter is set to a too small value, the handover
success rate may be affected.
This parameter specifies whether a cell is an extension cell and specifies how to
implement the extended cell.
A double-timeslot extension cell regards the additional TDMA frame as access delay.
Theoretically, TA equals 219, that is, a delay of about 120
None
This parameter specifies whether a cell supports the antenna hopping function.
In a GSM cell, the frequency, frame number, system information, and paging group are
transmitted on the BCCH of the main BCCH TRX. If the MS is in an unfavorable position
or t
None
This parameter specifies whether the enhanced concentric cell handover is allowed in a
concentric cell.
If the cell supports the enhanced concentric cell function, compare the receive level of
the MS with OtoU HO Received Level Threshold and with UtoO HO
None
This parameter specifies whether a cell is a normal cell or a concentric cell.
TRXs in a concentric cell differ in coverage; thus, two subcells with different radiuses
form a concentric cell.
Due to the difference in coverage, the OL subcell and the UL
As specified in Huawei concentric cell technology, a
concentric cell is divided into an OL subcell and a UL subcell.
The TRXs of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell can use
different frequency reuse modes.
The concentric cell technology can be combined
This parameter specifies whether a cell is the OL subcell or the UL subcell. This
parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell.
None
This parameter specifies whether the main BCCH is configured in the OL subcell or the
UL subcell.
In the scenario of the wide coverage of the UL subcell and the aggressive frequency
reuse of the OL subcell, this parameter is set to Underlaid Subcell.
In
When the BCCH is configured in the OL subcell, it is not
configured in the UL subcell.
This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous
Transmission (DTX) function. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.
The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power
transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function
has the following benefits:
1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the
MS and reducing system interference
This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. Blind spots caused by
tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. Thus a call may
drop. In this case, the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resu
The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment
is allowed.
If this parameter is set to No, the average call drop rate
decreases. In suburban areas and urban areas with poor
coverage, this parameter should be set to No.
This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. For
details. see GSM Rec. 05.08.
The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47
dBm).
If the value of this parameter is too small, the required level
of received signals is low. Therefore, many MSs attempt to
camp on the cell, thus increasing the load of the cell and the
risk of call drops. In such a case, you must set the
parameter based
If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC can assign a TCH and an SDCCH when receiving
an initial access request. If this parameter is set to No, the BSC can assign only an SDCCH
when receiving an initial access request.
None
This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry. In directed retry, a handover
procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell.
Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the local wireless
network. It is n
None
This parameter specifies whether the SDCCH dynamic allocation is allowed.
When the number of GSM subscribers in a cell increases rapidly, many subscribers may
fail to access the network due to insufficient SDCCH resources. In this case, the TCHs
(includi
None
This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the MS power is allowed. None
This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the BTS power is allowed.. None
This parameter specifies whether the BSC determines to enable or disable the power
amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume.
None
This parameter specifies whether to select different working voltages for the TRX power
amplifier in a cell based on different TRX modulation modes.
None
This parameter specifies the unique index number of each TRX in a BSC. None
This parameter specifies the TRX number, which must be unique in one BTS.
The following two points should be paid attention to:
1. If the logical TRX is not separated from the physical board, This parameter specifies
the TRX number in a cabinet. For such BTSs as the BTS3012II and BTS3002E, the TRX
numbers may be discontinuous.
None
Cell Index must be unique in one BSC. It is used to uniquely identify a cell. The value of
this parameter ranges from 0 to 8047.
Internal 2G cells: 0-2047
External 2G cells: 2048-5047
External 3G cells: 5048-8047
None
This parameter specifies the index number of a BTS. Each BTS is numbered uniquely in a
BSC.
None
This parameter is used to differentiate boards with unique identifiers in the BTS. None
This parameter specifies the operating status of the BTS, not-activated and activated.
If you activate a not-activated BTS, all the cells, TRXs, and
boards in this BTS will be activated.
Conversely, if you deactivate an activated BTS, all the cells,
TRXs, and boards in this BTS will be deactivated.
When the BTSs are cascaded, the lower-level BTS should be
This parameter specifies the Abis mode of OML.
The default value is calculated automatically, that is, the BSC assigns the Abis time slot
of OML automatically.
Generally, the timeslots are automatically calculated and
assigned. The timeslots, however, can be also manually
assigned to meet the requirement of operators. The
manually assigned OML timeslot cannot be adjusted when
the timeslot is arranged.
This parameter specifies the number of a cabinet. This parameter cannot be modified once it takes effect.
This parameter specifies the number of a subrack. This parameter cannot be modified once it takes effect.
This parameter specifies the number of the slot where a board is located. This parameter cannot be modified once it takes effect.
This parameter specifies the terminal equipment identifier on the link layer.
This parameter is used to identify multiple signaling links on the same physical link when
the LAPDs are multiplexed on the highway timeslot.
None
This parameter specifies the number of the TC subrack where the GEIUT/GOIUT is
located.
This parameter cannot be set to the number of the
occupied subrack.
This parameter specifies the number of the slot where the GEIUT or GOIUT is located in
the TC subrack, which is connected to the local subrack.
None
This parameter specifies the out-BSC port number on the interface board used by the
semi-permanent link.
When the semi-permanent link is configured on the electrical interface board, each
electrical interface board is configured with 32 E1 ports, which are numbered from 0 to
31.
This parameter cannot be set to the number of the
occupied E1 port.
If all semi-permanent links are configured on one interface
board, the In-BSC Port No. and the Out-BSC Port No. must
be set to different E1 ports on the interface board.
This parameter specifies the number of the out-BSC timeslot occupied by the E1 port
over the Abis interface.
The bandwidth of each E1 is divided into 32 timeslots. Generally, timeslot 0 is used for
synchronization and cannot be otherwise used.
The E1 timeslot is numbered by 8 kbit/s, and the range is 0-255.For example, 0-3
This parameter is to be viewed only.
If the forward ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the port
occupied by the LAPD link (corresponding to the RSL link) on the Abis interface.
None
If the forward ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the
timeslot occupied by the LAPD link (corresponding to the RSL link) on the Abis interface.
None
This parameter specifies the logical link number of the LAPD link (corresponding to the
RSL link) in the BSC. When the BTS works in ring topology, the forward and reverse links
share one number.
Each LAPD link is uniquely numbered in one BSC.
None
This parameter specifies whether the TRX adopts FH and specifies the FH mode used.
If this parameter is set to Not FH, even if the TRX is configured with FH data, the cell
where the TRX serves does not perform FH. The FH can realize average interference and
frequency diversity.
The BTS2X supports frame FH and RF FH. The BTS3X of all
versions supports the cross-cabinet baseband FH and RF FH,
including the timeslot FH and frame FH. The double-
transceiver BTSs support the baseband FH and RF FH,
including the timeslot FH and frame FH, but do not support
This parameter specifies the transmit power level of the TRX. The greater this parameter
is, the smaller the transmit power is.
When this parameter is set to 0, the transmit power level of the TRX is the greatest.
Each time this parameter increases by one level, the transmit power reduces by 2 dB.
For different types of BTSs, the value range of this parameter is different.
Adjust the cell coverage area by configuring the Power
Level; however, when the antenna is over high and covers
too many cells, you should lower the antenna and increase
the tilt of the antenna first. When the transmit power of a
BTS reduces, the indoor coverage becomes worse.
This parameter specifies the power levels supported by a TRX. The macro BTS and the
mini BTS support different power levels.
None
This parameter specifies the concentric attribute of a cell. For a concentric cell, this
parameter is set to UL subcell or OL subcell according to actual conditions; if the cell is
not a concentric one, this parameter is set to None by default.
None
This parameter specifies the TRX priority. It is used for Huawei II channel assignment
algorithm.
The smaller this parameter is, the higher the TRX priority is.
In other similar conditions, channels are allocated to the
TRX with higher priority.
This parameter specifies whether to turn off the power amplifier of the TRX
automatically for saving power when the BTS is powered by batteries after the external
power supply is cut off.
None
This parameter specifies whether a cell can convert full rate channels to half rate
channels, or convert the half rate channels to full rate channels.
If this parameter is set to Yes, the conversion is allowed; if the parameter is set to No,
the conversion is not allowed. the TCHF that has been converted to the TCHH will be
forcedly restored; the TCHH that has been converted to the TCHF will be forcedly
None
This parameter specifies the power attenuation levels of the EDGE TRX. There are 50
levels, and the attenuation between levels is 0.2 dB.
The EDGE-enabled TRX transmits 8PSK signals with less power than transmits GMSK
signals. Thus, this parameter needs to be set to meet the frequency requirements.
This parameter takes effect only for the EDGE-enabled TRX.
This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the wireless link alarm parameter to the
BTS. If the parameter is set to Yes, the wireless link alarm parameter is sent; otherwise,
the wireless link alarm parameter is not sent.
None
This parameter specifies the statistics base of a sub-channel (the statistical times that a
sub-channel that is activated). B (the statistics base of a sub-channel on a timeslot) x N
(the number of sub-channels on a timeslot) = S (the total times that channels on a
timeslot that are activated).
For the latest S times of channel activation, if the percentage of abnormally released
None
If the percentage of abnormally released channels exceeds the total successful channel
activation threshold of a timeslot, an abnormally release alarm is generated.
None
If the percentage of abnormally released channel in the total successful channel
activation is less than or equal to this threshold, an abnormal release clear alarm is sent.
None
If the duration of continuous (not accumulated) no-traffic reaches this threshold, the no-
traffic alarm is generated.
None
This parameter specifies whether a critical wireless link alarm is sent.
If this parameter is set to Yes, the BTS sends a critical wireless link alarm if the wireless
link prompt alarm is not cleared during the period specified by WLA Prompting Recover
Period.
None
If the radio link prompt alarm is cleared in the WLA Prompting Recover Period, the
corresponding recovery alarm is sent by the BTS. If the radio link prompt alarm is not
cleared in the WLA Prompting Recover Period, the critical wireless link alarm is sent or
not sent according to the settings of the parameter Wireless Link Alarm Critical Permit.
None
The BTS detects the start time of wireless link alarm, such as 08:00:00 and 14:00:00 in
each day. Starting from the period specified by this parameter, the BTS detects the
wireless link alarm, and sends an alarm related.
None
The BTS detects the start time of wireless link alarm, such as 08:00:00 and 14:00:00 in
each day. Until the end of the period specified by this parameter, the BTS stops
detecting the wireless link alarm and sending the alarm related. The detection starts
again until the next Begin Time of WLA Detection(hour).
None
This parameter specifies the basic difference value caused by the specified level
difference between the uplink channel and the downlink channel. Together with Up
Down Balance Floating Range, this parameter is used to calculate the number of uplink
and downlink unbalance.
Assume that Up Down Balance Basic Difference is set to 8 and Up Down Balance Alarm
None
This parameter specifies the permissible uplink and downlink balance floating range
relative to Up Down Balance Basic Difference. The uplink and downlink is not balanced
only when the uplink and downlink level exceeds the Up Down Balance Floating Range.
Assume that Up Down Balance Basic Difference is set to 8 and Up Down Balance Alarm
Threshold is set to 30. If the downlink level minus the uplink level after the power
None
When the percentage of the uplink-and-downlink balance measurement reports in the
total valid measurement reports is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter,
the uplink and downlink unbalance alarm is generated.
None
This parameter specifies the RF receive mode of the DTRU.
The RF receive mode can be Not Support, Independent Receiver, Dividing Receiver, Four
Diversity Receiver, or Main Diversity.
The BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3012II, BTS3006C, and BTS3002E do not support Main
Diversity.
None
This parameter specifies the RF transmit mode of the TRX.
The RF transmit mode can be Not Support, No Combining, Power Booster Technology,
Wide Band Combining, Diversity Transmitter, DDIVERSITY, DPBT, or Transmitter
Independent or Combining.
The BTS3006C and BTS3002E support No Combining, Diversity Transmitter, DDIVERSITY
None
This parameter specifies whether the BSC determines to enable or disable the power
amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume.
None
This parameter specifies the following: When the antenna hopping function is used, the
signals of one TRX can switch between different antennas instead of one TRX
corresponding to one antenna. Therefore, the signals on certain frequencies are less
affected by Rayleigh fading compared with those without antenna hopping. The
Antenna Hopping Index corresponds to a TRX number.
None
This parameter specifies the following: Currently, when the BSC performs the static
power control on the TRX, the step of increasing or reducing the power of the TRX is 2
dB. In some scenarios, the TRX has different losses if it is combined on different
tributaries, and the output power difference before and after the combination is not an
integral multiple of 2 dB. Thus, the cabinet top output power of the BTS cannot be
If this parameter is set to a too great or too small value, the
cabinet top output power of the BTS is different from the
TRX output power, resulting in the failure of channel
allocation.
This parameter specifies whether the TRX supports antenna hopping.
In a GSM cell, the frequency, frame number, system information, and paging group are
transmitted on the BCCH of the main BCCH TRX. If the MS is in an unfavorable position
or the antenna for the main BCCH TRX is faulty, then the MS cannot receive the
broadcast control messages from the main BCCH TRX properly.
None
This parameter specifies the number of the out-BSC slot where the BSC interface board
is located when the BTS works in reverse link mode. That is, the number of the slot that
holds the interface board, which connects the BTS to the BSC.
This parameter can be modified according to the actual requirements. However, it must
be set to the number of the slot that is configured with the interface board.
This parameter is to be viewed only.
This parameter specifies the number of the out-BSC port where the BSC interface board
is located when the BTS works in reverse link mode. That is, the number of the port on
the interface board that connects the BTS to the BSC.
When the monitoring timeslot is configured on the electrical interface board, each
electrical interface board is configured with 32 E1 ports, which are numbered from 0 to
This parameter is to be viewed only.
If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the RSL
timeslot on the GEIUB/GOIUB/GEHUB port.
None
If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the port
occupied by the LAPD link corresponding to the RSL link on the Abis interface.
None
If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the
timeslot occupied by the LAPD link corresponding to the RSL link on the Abis interface.
None
This parameter specifies the transmission bearer mode of a TRX: 0-TDM, 1-HDLC, 2-
HDLC_HUB, or 3-IP.
None
This parameter specifies the maximum number of PDCHs allocated to a TRX. None
This parameter specifies the maximum number of Abis timeslots occupied by the PDCHs
on a TRX.
None
This parameter specifies the number of the TRX that supports the PBT together with the
current TRX. When this parameter is set to the default value 255, you can infer that no
TRX supports the PBT together with the current TRX.
None
This parameter specifies the index of the in-BTS HDLC channel. The in-BTS HDLC channel
connects to the BTS TMU.
None
This parameter specifies the index of an HDLC channel between the PEU and the PTU. None
This parameter specifies the unique number of a TRX in the HUB domain in HUB HDLC
transmission mode.
None
This parameter specifies the number of the slot where the GXPUM (processing the RSL
signaling) is located.
There are two types of slot number: logical slot number and
physical slot number. When configuring RSL links, set this
parameter to the logical slot number of the GXPUM.
This parameter specifies the priority of the clock reference source.
This parameter need not be set when the Work Mode is set
to Auto.
You must set this parameter when the Work Mode is set to
Manual.
When the Work Mode is set to Free-run, this parameter is
This parameter specifies the HDLC channel index of reverse link in an HDLC ring
network.
None
This parameter specifies the allowed power difference between the maximum output
power of the QTRU and the maximum nominal output power.
None
This parameter specifies whether to select different working voltages for the TRX power
amplifier in a cell based on different TRX modulation modes.
None
This parameter specifies whether the BSC determines to enable or disable the power
amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume.
None
This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell.
After receiving the channel request message or handover access message, the BTS
determines whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by
comparing the TA and the value of this parameter.
The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. If
this parameter is set to a too small value, the handover
success rate may be affected.
This parameter specifies whether to enable the DTX function in a cell.
The discontinuous transmission (DTX) function allows a
transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no
voice transfer. This function has the following benefits:
1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the
MS and reducing system interference
This parameter specifies the encryption algorithm supported on the BSS side.
The value of this parameter has eight bits. The eights bits (from the least significant bit
to the most significant bit) specify whether to support the A5/0, A5/1, A5/2, A5/3, A5/4,
A5/5, A5/6, and A5/7 encryption algorithms respectively. If a bit is set to 1, you can infer
that the BSS supports the corresponding encryption algorithm. If a bit is 0, you can infer
None
This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the BTS power is allowed.. None
This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the MS power is allowed. None
This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry. In directed retry, a handover
procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell.
Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the local wireless
network. It is not a primary method of clearing traffic congestion. If directed retry is
preformed frequently in a local network, you must adjust the TRX configuration of the
None
If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC can assign a TCH and an SDCCH when receiving
an initial access request. If this parameter is set to No, the BSC can assign only an SDCCH
when receiving an initial access request.
None
This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. For
details. see GSM Rec. 05.08.
The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47
dBm).
If the value of this parameter is too small, the required level
of received signals is low. Therefore, many MSs attempt to
camp on the cell, thus increasing the load of the cell and the
risk of call drops. In such a case, you must set the
parameter based on the balance conditions of the uplink
This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. Blind spots caused by
tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. Thus a call may
drop. In this case, the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resume the
call. The number of call drops is not incremented if the call reestablishment is successful
or if the subscriber hooks on.
The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment
is allowed.
If this parameter is set to No, the average call drop rate
decreases. In suburban areas and urban areas with poor
coverage, this parameter should be set to No.
This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous
Transmission (DTX) function. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.
The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power
transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function
has the following benefits:
1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the
MS and reducing system interference
This parameter specifies: for the channel assignment, suppose the MS supports multiple
sub frequency bands of the 900 MHz frequency band. The BSC ignores the priority of P-
GSM/E-GSM/R-GSM sub frequency bands if the cell load is smaller than and equal to
this threshold. The BSC assigns channels on the TRXs with priority of R-GSM, E-GSM, P-
GSM frequency bands if the cell load is greater than this threshold. That is, the BSC
None
This parameter determines when the channel is assigned on the QTRU:
When the channel is assigned on the QTRU board by using the dynamic power sharing
algorithm, and when the remaining power of QTRU board is less than the call required
power of cell,
If this switch is set to Yes, this is allowed to assign the channel; otherwise, this is not
None
The value of this parameter should be added in estimated power when the downlink
path loss is estimated by the uplink path loss.
None
This parameter specifies the downlink signal strength estimated by the QTRU power
sharing algorithm together with downlink power control target threshold.The value of
this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).
None
The P/N criterion determines whether the statistics time of QTRU downlink power is
insufficient. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.
None
The P/N criterion determines whether the observation time of QTRU downlink power is
insufficient. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.
None
This parameter specifies the following definitions:
1. The QTRU power sharing algorithm is disabled.
2. Static power sharing algorithm.
3. Dynamic power sharing algorithm.
The difference between static power sharing algorithm and dynamic power sharing
When the total power of the carrier on the single QTRU
board exceeds the maximum permissible output power, the
power sharing algorithm needs to be enabled. If the data
configuration detects that the power sharing must be used,
but the corresponding downlink power control of a cell is
If the uplink received level difference of calls in the same timeslot exceeds the Threshold
of the difference between uplink received levels, the situation must be recorded. During
the observation of P seconds, if this situation lasts N seconds, the call with the lowest
uplink signal strength in the timeslot should be handed over to another timeslot.
None
If the uplink received level difference of calls in the same timeslot exceeds the Threshold
of the difference between uplink received levels, the situation must be recorded. During
the observation of P seconds, if this situation lasts N seconds, the call with the lowest
uplink signal strength in the timeslot should be handed over to another timeslot.
None
The value is 0-1 in fact; however, the data in the host and BSC should be simultaneously
multiplied by 10 times to prevent the floating-point values.
None
This parameter specifies the QTRU signal merge algorithm, that is, the BSC monitors the
high-level signal and overwhelms the low-level signal per 0.5 second.
If the highest uplink signal strength of a timeslot the lowest uplink signal strength of
this timeslot > Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels, the situation
must be recorded.
None
This parameter specifies whether the BSC is allowed to assign the half-rate channels and
full-rate channels to the MS according to the channel seizure ratio of the underlaid
subcell and overlaid subcell.
None
The BSC assigns channels in the overlaid subcell to the MS in a concentric cell. If the
channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is greater than the value of this parameter, half-
rate channels are assigned. Otherwise, full-rate channels are assigned.
Channel seizure ratio = (Num. of busy TCHF + Num. of busy TCHH/2)/ (Num. of available
TCHF + Num. of available TCHH /2) x 100%. This parameter is valid for the concentric
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the half-rate
channels are assigned to the MS only when the channel
seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is very high. Insufficient half-
rate channels can be assigned to the MS. Thus, the capacity
of the BSC is reduced.
The BSC assigns channels in the overlaid subcell to the MS in a concentric cell. If the
channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is greater than the value of this parameter, half-
rate channels are assigned. Otherwise, full-rate channels are assigned.
Channel seizure ratio = (Num. of busy TCHF + Num. of busy TCHH/2)/ (Num. of available
TCHF + Num. of available TCHH /2) x 100%.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the half-rate
channels are assigned to the MS only when the channel
seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is very high. Insufficient half-
rate channels can be assigned to the MS. Thus, the capacity
of the BSC is reduced. This parameter specifies whether the dynamic HSN is permitted to be used.
When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell,
this parameter is set to YES. Thus, the inter-frequency interference among channels can
be reduced.
Only when the FlexMAIO is set to YES, this parameter can be configured.
None
This parameter specifies whether to enable Flex MAIO.
In tight frequency resuse, the adjacent-channel interference and co-channel
interference among channels occur.
When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell,
the inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced partially.
None
This parameter specifies the static Abis resource load threshold. When the static Abis
resource load is lower than Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%), the full-rate
channel is preferentially assigned. Otherwise, the full-rate or half-rate channel is
preferred according to the dynamic Abis resource load.
None
When the static Abis resource load is higher than Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load
Thred(%) and the dynamic Abis resource load is higher than Flex Abis Prior Choose Abis
Load Thred(%), the half-rate channel is preferred. Otherwise, the full-rate channel is
preferred.
None
This parameter specifies when the BSC fails to convert the dynamic PDCH back to the
TCH, this operation is not performed during the period specified by this parameter. The
parameter is valid for both built-in PCH and external PCU.
None
The channel type to be assigned is decided according to the channel types that are
allowed by the MSC and the percentage of seized TCHs in the cell.
During the channel assignment, the TCHF or TCCH, TCHH Prior channels are required in
the following conditions: Half rate and full rate channels are allowed to be assigned by
the MSC, the AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed is set to Yes, and the percentage of seized TCHs
None
This parameter specifies whether the TCH/H is preferentially assigned on the basis of
the channel type and current service channel seizure ratio that are allowed by the MSC.
During the channel assignment, the TCHF or TCCH, TCHH Prior channels are required in
the following conditions: Half rate and full rate channels are allowed to be assigned by
the MSC, the AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed is set to Yes, and the percentage of seized TCHs
None
The updating of the history record starts when the Update Period of CH Record times
out. Update Freq of CH Record is subtracted from the history priority of each channel to
improve the priority of the channel.
Principles of taking values are as follows:
Generally, set this parameter to 2.
None
When the Update Period of CH Record expires, the process of updating the history
record of channel occupancy is started. That is, the history priority of each channel is
reduced by Update Freq.of CH Record at the interval of the setting value of this
parameter to increase the channel priority.
Principles of taking values are as follows:
None
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports that are used to
determine the signal quality on signaling channels.
The signal quality on signaling channels should not be determined based on only one
measurement result. To eliminate the influence of accidental factors, you need to obtain
the average value of signal quality in several successive measurement reports of
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the burst influence
may be reduced but the judgment of channel status may
not be in time. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the
judgment is imprecise.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the
signal strength on the SDCCH.
This parameter should be set to a small value because the
SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure
duration for the MS.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports that are used to clculate
the signal quality on speech/data TCHs.
The signal quality on TCHs should not be determined based on only one measurement
result. To eliminate the influence of accidental factors, you need to obtain the average
value of signal quality in several successive measurement reports of TCHs, and then
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the influence of
accidental factors may be reduced but the judgment of
channel status may not be in time. If this parameter is set to
a lower value, the judgment is imprecise.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the
speech/data TCH signal strength.
This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels
caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover
decisions. When this parameter is set to a higher value, the
impact of sudden changes is reduced, and the system
response is delayed. Thus, the network performance is
This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the downlink
interference is existed.
The higher the level, the greater the signal strength is. The greater the value, the lower
the signal quality is.
If the downlink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of DL level
If this parameter is set to a great value, the interference
indication message will not be reported even though the
interference exists. If this parameter is set to a small value,
the interference indication message will be reported even
though no interference exists.
This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the downlink
interference is existed.
The higher the level, the greater the signal strength is. The greater the value, the lower
the signal quality is.
If the downlink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of DL level
If this parameter is set to a great value, the interference
indication message will not be reported even though the
interference exists. If this parameter is set to a small value,
the interference indication message will be reported even
though no interference exists.
This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the uplink
interference is existed.
The higher the level, the greater the signal is. The greater the value, the lower the
quality is.
If the uplink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of UL level
If this parameter is set to a great value, the interference
indication message will not be reported even though the
interference exists. If this parameter is set to a small value,
the interference indication message will be reported even
though no interference exists.
This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the uplink
interference is existed.
The higher the level, the greater the signal is. The greater the value, the lower the
quality is.
If the uplink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of UL level
If this parameter is set to a great value, the interference
indication message will not be reported even though the
interference exists. If this parameter is set to a small value,
the interference indication message will be reported even
though no interference exists.
This parameter specifies whether the history record priority is considered in channel
assignment.
If this parameter is set to YES, the history record priority is effective. If this parameter is
set to NO, the history record priority is ineffective.
Usually this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high history record
None
This parameter specifies whether the TRX priority is considered during channel
assignment.
If this parameter is set to YES, the TRX priority factor is effective. If this parameter is set
to NO, the TRX priority factor is ineffective.
Usually, this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high TRX priority
None
This parameter specifies whether the channel interference is considered in channel
assignment.
If this parameter is set to NO, the channel interference measurement is not performed
and the interference indication is not sent. If this parameter is set to YES, the channel
interference measurement is performed.
None
This parameter specifies whether the interference priority is considered during channel
assignment.
By default, this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with little interference.
None
In Huawei II channel assignment algorithm, if the current channel seizure ratio reaches
or exceeds this value, the half-rate TCH is assigned preferentially; otherwise, the full-
rate TCH is assigned preferentially.
None
This parameter specifies whether to turn on the switch for the tight BCCH algorithm,
and thus controls whether to enable the BCCH aggressive frequency reuse algorithm.
Yes: Open
No: Close
It is recommended not to use the TIGHT BCCH algorithm in
multiband network.
This parameter specifies whether the current cell supports the dynamic transmission
diversity or dynamic PBT:
0: not supported
1: dynamic transmission diversity supported
2: dynamic PBT supported
None
This parameter sets the priority of different types in channel allocation. These types
include:
Capacity with a higher priority
Quality with a higher priority
PS coordination with a relatively higher priority
None
This parameter specifies whether the combination of two half-rate TCHs into one full-
rate TCH is allowed in a cell.
If this parameter is set to No, the forced handover and call delay caused by timeslot
arrangement can be avoided, but there may cause some TCHF-only calls to fail because
the timeslot arrangement is unavailable.
Huawei recommends that the parameter Enhanced TCH
Adjust Allowed be set to No, the forced handover may fail
in the concentric cell. In a normal cell, Huawei recommends
that this parameter be set to Yes to ensure that the timeslot
arrangement can be performed in the cell.
This parameter specifies the minimum time for the recovery of a TCH from an SDCCH.
The processing for the SDCCH recovered to the TCH is as follows: each cell is configured
with a counter. Each time the TCH is converted to the SDCCH, the counter is set to
ResTime. The value of the counter is adjusted every three seconds. If the number of idle
SDCCHs > 8 + N1, the counter descreases by 3; if the number of idle SDCCHs < 8 + Idle
If this parameter is set too small, it cannot correctly indicate
the idle state of the current SDCCHs and consequently the
rollback of SDCCHs immediately triggers adjustment and
affects the network performance.
If this parameter is set too large, the channel allocation
When the BSC determines whether to initiate the conversion from the TCH to the
SDCCH, it needs to determine whether the number of SDCCHs after the conversion
exceeds the Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum. If the number of SDCCHs exceeds the value
of this parameter, the BSC does not initiate the conversion.
If this parameter is set too small, the SDCCHs in the cell may
be insufficient and the dynamic adjustment cannot be
initiated, thus affecting the access of users. It is meaningless
to set the parameter too large.
If the number of idle SDCCHs in the cell is smaller than or equal to the value of this
parameter, the BSC tries to find a TCHF that can be converted to the SDCCH.
This parameter specifies one of the conditions for converting the TCHF to the SDCCH.
Besides this parameter, the other three conditions for initiating the conversion from
TCHFs to SDCCHs are as follows:
If this parameter is set too large and consequently there is a
small number of requests for SDCCHs, the SDCCHs of a cell
are in idle state;
If this parameter is set too small and consequently there is a
large number of requests for SDCCHs, the requests cannot
This parameter specifies the coding rate adopted on a half-rate channel when a call is
initially established. Since there are at most four coding rates in the ACS, this field have
four values 0, 1, 2, and 3, representing the lowest, low, high, and highest coding rates in
the ACS respectively.
The AMR ACS (F/H) contains at most four coding rates.
Therefore, the value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 3.
The values 0 to 3 match those of the coding rates of AMR
ACS (F/H).
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust
the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate
adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-
interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the
CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an
None
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust
the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate
adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-
interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the
CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an
None
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust
the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate
adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-
interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the
CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an
None
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust
the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate
adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-
interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the
CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an
None
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust
the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate
adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-
interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the
CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an
None
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust
the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate
adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-
interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the
CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an
None
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust
the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate
adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-
interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the
CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an
None
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust
the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate
adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-
interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the
CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an
None
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust
the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate
adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-
interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the
CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an
None
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust
the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate
adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-
interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the
CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an
None
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust
the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate
adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-
interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the
CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an
None
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust
the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate
adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-
interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the
CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an
None
This parameter specifies the set of active coding rates. The active coding set (ACS) is a
set of coding rates currently available for calls. Use a BIT map to present the speech
coding rates contained in the ACS, wherein a BIT corresponds to a coding rate. If a bit is
1, the coding rate is included in the ACS. Otherwise, the ACS does not include the coding
rate. The value of this parameter has five bits.
Each bit indicates whether a coding rate is contained in the
ACS. The five bits represent the coding rates from 7.40
kbit/s to 4.75 kbit/s (from left to right). Bit 1 means that the
coding rate is contained in the ACS and bit 0 means that the
coding rate is not contained in the ACS. One to four coding
This parameter specifies the coding rate adopted on a full-rate channel when a call is
initially established. Since there are at most four coding rates in the ACS, this field have
four values 0, 1, 2, and 3, representing the lowest, low, high, and highest coding rates in
the ACS respectively.
The AMR ACS (F/H) contains at most four coding rates.
Therefore, the value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 3.
The values 0 to 3 match those of the coding rates of AMR
ACS (F/H).
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust
the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate
adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-
interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the
CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an
None
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust
the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate
adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-
interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the
CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an
None
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust
the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate
adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-
interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the
CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an
None
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust
the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate
adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-
interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the
CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an
None
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust
the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate
adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-
interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the
CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an
None
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust
the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate
adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-
interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the
CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an
None
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust
the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate
adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-
interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the
CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an
None
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust
the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate
adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-
interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the
CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an
None
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust
the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate
adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-
interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the
CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an
None
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust
the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate
adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-
interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the
CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an
None
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust
the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate
adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-
interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the
CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an
None
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust
the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate
adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-
interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the
CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an
None
This parameter specifies the set of active coding rates. The active coding set (ACS) is a
set of coding rates currently available for calls. Use a BIT map to present the speech
coding rates contained in the ACS, wherein a BIT corresponds to a coding rate. If a bit is
1, the coding rate is included in the ACS. Otherwise, the ACS does not include the coding
rate. The value of this parameter has eight bits.
Each bit indicates whether a coding rate is contained in the
ACS. The eight bits represent the coding rates from 12.2
kbit/s to 4.75 kbit/s (from left to right). Bit 1 means that the
coding rate is contained in the ACS and bit 0 means that the
coding rate is not contained in the ACS. One to four coding
This parameter specifies the maximum number of reassignments after the assignment
on the Um interface fails.
If this parameter is set to a great value, the call completion
rate of MSs is increased and the QoS of the network is
improved. This, however, increases the load of the BSC.
In normal assignment procedure, after receiving the assignment failure message from
the MS on the SDCCH, the BSC does not report the message to the MSC immediately.
Instead, the BSC re-assigns radio channels and re-originates the assignment on the Um
interface. Thus the success rate of assignment can be increased.
Reassigning radio channels can be performed in the carriers with the same frequency
To improve the success rate of reassignment, it is
recommended that the default value Different Band be
used. That is, the frequency band of the preferentially
reassigned channel is different from what is used in the
original assignment.
This parameter specifies whether to disable the sending of point-to-point short
messages. In specific cells, sending point-to-point short messages on the downlink is
disabled to ensure sufficient radio channels for calls.
Pay special attention to the setting of this parameter during
an upgrade. If receiving short messages is allowed, this
parameter must be set to No.
If this parameter is set to Yes, MSs cannot receive short
messages.
The channel activation and immediate assignment commands are sent at the same time
to accelerate the signaling processing rate, thus improving the response speed of the
network.
In satellite transmission mode, this function can be enabled
to reduce the impact of the delay in satellite transmission
on the signaling processing rate. For terrestrial
transmission, the default value of this parameter is No.
This parameter specifies whether to enable the Abis resource adjustment TCHH
function.
This parameter determines whether the BSC preferentially assigns a half-rate TCH to an
MS when the Abis resources are insufficient.
When this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC preferentially assigns a half-rate TCH to the
None
This parameter specifies whether to allow the enhanced multi-level precedence and
preemption (eMLPP) function. In eMLPP, the network can use different policies such as
queuing, preemption, and directed retry based on the priorities of different calls when
network resources are occupied.
If the Allow EMLPP is set to Yes, when preemption occurs, the MS with the lowest
The eMLPP supports a maximum of seven priorities (A, B,
and 0-4). The two highest priorities are reserved only for
local use in the network. Priorities 0-4 are used for
subscribers all over the world.
If the eMLPP function needs to be fully implemented, the
This parameter specifies whether to allow the reassignment function.
If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC initiates a re-
assignment when receiving an assignment failure message
from the Um interface. This helps to improve the call
completion rate and the QoS of the network. If there are a
large number of assignment failure messages, the BSC
This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about a TDD cell
is valid.
The measurement report is valid if the receive level of the TDD cell in the measurement
report is greater than the value of this parameter.
After the valid measurement report is filtered, the TDD cell joins in the cell prioritization.
None
This parameter specifies the signal level offset of a TDD cell.
Add the value of this parameter to the receive level of the TDD cell in the measurement
report, and then sequence the TDD cells.
0: 0 dB
1: 6 dB
None
This parameter specifies the number of UTRAN TDD cells that should be contained in the
best cell list or in the measurement report.
None
A TDD cell can become a candidate cell only when the average receive level of the TDD
cell is greater than the TDD Cell Reselect Diversity of the serving cell.
0: - (always select a cell if acceptable)
1: -28 dB
2: -24 dB
None
This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about an FDD
cell is valid.
If the receive level of the 3G cell in the measurement report is greater than the value of
this parameter, the measurement report is valid.
After the valid measurement report is filtered, the 3G cell joins in the cell priority
None
This parameter specifies the signal level offset of an FDD cell.
When the priority of a 3G cell is sequenced, it is recommended that the value of this
parameter be added to the receive level of the 3G cell in the measurement report.
0: 0 dB
1: 6 dB
None
This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about a
DCS1800 cell is valid.
If the receive level of the 1800 MHz cell in the measurement report is greater than the
value of this parameter, the measurement report is valid. After the measurement report
is filtered, the cell joins in the cell priority sequence.
None
This parameter specifies the signal level offset of a DCS1800 cell.
When sequencing the priority of a DCS1800 cell based on its frequency band, the value
of this parameter should be added to the receive level in the measurement report.
0: 0 dB
1: 6 dB
None
This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about a
GSM900 cell is valid.
When the receive level of the GSM900 cell in the measurement report is greater than
the value of this parameter, the measurement report is valid. After the measurement
report is filtered, the cell joins in the cell priority rank.
None
This parameter specifies the signal level offset of a GSM900 cell.
When the priority of a GSM900 cell is sequenced on the basis of its frequency band, the
value of this parameter should be added to the receive level in the measurement report.
0: 0 dB
1: 6 dB
None
This parameter specifies the level threshold for cell reselection in connection mode.
In connection mode, if the signal level in the serving cell is below [0, 7] or above [8, 15],
the MS starts to search for 3G cells.
For example:
If this parameter is set to 5 and if the signal level of the serving cell is lower than 5, the
None
This parameter indicates that when the MS reports the EMR, it adds the value of this
parameter to the received signal level, and then converts the result into the RXLEV
value. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.
If the SCALE_Order reported by the MS is 10 dBm, level values 0-63 map with -100 dBm
to -37 dBm.
None
This parameter specifies whether the EMR can contain the information about a cell with
an invalid BSIC.
None
This parameter specifies whether the MS is allowed to search for a 3G cell when the
BSIC must be decoded.
None
This parameter specifies one threshold of the signal level for cell reselection in packet
transfer mode.
In packet transfer mode, if the signal level in the serving cell is below [0, 7] or above [8,
15], the MS starts to search for 3G cells.
For example:
None
This parameter specifies one threshold of the signal level for 3G cell reselection.
Only when the receive level of a 3G cell is greater than FDD Qmin, the 3G cell can be one
candidate cell for cell reselection.
0: -20 dB
1: -6 dB
None
This parameter specifies the number of UTRAN FDD cells that should be contained in the
best cell list or in the measurement report.
None
This parameter specifies the measurement report counter of an FDD cell.
Ec/No means Signal Noise Ratio in WCDMA. It maps with
C/I in GSM.
RSCP, Received Signal Code Power
Only when the average receive level of a 3G cell is FDD Q Offset greater than that of the
serving cell, the 3G cell becomes a candidate cell.
0: - (always select a cell if acceptable)
1: -28 dB
2: -24 dB
None
This parameter specifies the threshold of the signal level for cell reselection in
connection mode before Qsearch C is obtained.
None
This parameter specifies the level threshold for cell reselection in idle mode.
In idle mode, if the signal level in the serving cell is below [0, 7] or above [8, 15], the MS
starts to search for 3G cells.
For example:
If this parameter is set to 5 and if the signal level of the serving cell is lower than 5, the
None
If the system information indicates "MBR", the MS reports the number of neighbor cells
on different frequency bands.
When the MS reports the number of neighbor cells on the same frequency band with
the serving cell, a maximum of the value of Serving Band Reporting can be reported.
These neighbor cells must meet the following requirements:
Serving Band Reporting is valid if Report Type is set to EMR.
When Power Deviation Indication is set to Yes, the transmit power of an MS is the MS
maximum transmit power level plus the power calculated from the power deviation if
the class 3 MS on the DCS1800 band does not receive the original power command after
random access. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.
None
The MS does not receive the original power command after random access. This
parameter indicates whether the power deviation is added to the class 3 MS on the
DCS1800 band on the basis of the maximum MS transmit power.
None
This parameter is used for the MS to report neighbor cell explanation of multiple bands.
It is sent in the system information 2ter and 5ter.
In a multiple band network, this parameter can be set on
the basis of the traffic volume on each frequency band.
If this parameter is set to 0, the MS reports the
measurement results of six neighbor cells known and
permitted by the NCC at the bands with the best signal
The early classmark sending control (ECSC) specifies whether the MSs in a cell use early
classmark sending. For details, see GSM Rec. 04.08.After a successful immediate
assignment, the MS sends additional classmark information to the network as early as
possible. The CM3 (classmark 3) information contains the power information of each
band of multi-band MSs. In the inter-band handover, power class must be correctly
For a 900/1800 MHz CoBCCH cell, it is recommended that
this parameter be set to Yes.
For a 1800 MHz cell in the dual-band network, it is
recommended that this parameter be set to Yes.
If the A5/4-7 encryption algorithm is used, it is
This parameter specifies when an MS disconnects a call if the MS unsuccessfully decodes
the SACCH message. For details of this parameter, see GSM Rec. 0408 and 05.08.
Once a dedicated channel is assigned to the MS, the counter S is enabled and the initial
value is set to this parameter value.
Each time an SACCH message is not decoded, the counter S decreases by 1. Each time
If this parameter is set to a small value, radio links are likely
to be faulty and therefore call drops occur.
If this parameter is set to a great value, a long time lasts
before an MS disconnects a call, and therefore resource
usage is low. This parameter takes effect on the downlink.
This parameter specifies whether to allow emergency calls. For MSs whose access class
is from 0 to 9, if this parameter is set to No, emergency calls are allowed.
For MSs whose access class is from 11 to 15, emergency calls are not allowed only when
the access control bit is set to 0 and Emergent Call Disable is set to Yes.
None
This parameter specifies whether to allow the MSs of special access classes to access the
network. This parameter is used for load control. Value 1 indicates that access is not
allowed. Value 0 indicates that access is allowed.
For example, 000001 indicates that users of all classes except class 10 are allowed to
access the network. In the cell where the traffic volume is heavy, congestion may occur
This parameter can be used to control network load based
on the MS access classes, thus preventing some MSs from
accessing the network. It is recommended that this
parameter be not used.
This parameter specifies whether to allow the MSs of common access classes to access
the network. This parameter is used for load control.
Value 1 indicates that access is not allowed. Value 0 indicates that access is allowed.For
example, 0000000001 indicates that the MSs of all classes except class 0 are allowed to
access the network.
This parameter can be used to control network load based
on the MS access classes, thus preventing some MSs from
accessing the network. It is recommended that this
parameter be not used.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of Channel Request messages that can
be sent by an MS in an immediate assignment procedure.
After the MS initiates the immediate assignment procedure, it always listens to the
messages on the BCCH and all the common control channels (CCCHs) in the CCCH group
to which the MS belongs.If the MS does not receive Immediate Assignment messages or
This parameter should be set as required: In the areas
where the traffic volume is low, this parameter can be set
to 4 or 7 to improve the success rate of MS access. In the
cells where congestion occurs or in the micro cells where
the traffic volume is high, it is recommended this parameter
This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions of the immediate
assignment message. When this number is reached, the immediate assignment
message is not retransmitted even if the Max Delay of Imm_Ass Retransmit (ms) is not
exceeded.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the put-through
rate of MS can be increased but the BSC load may increase.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the function is
not obvious.
Within the period specified by this parameter, the immediate assignment message is
dispatched and retransmitted. Otherwise, the message is not dispatched or
retransmitted.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the put-through
rate of MS can be increased but the BSC load may increase.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the function is
not obvious.
This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the immediate assignment
retransmission parameter to the BTS.
If the parameter is set to Yes, the immediate assignment
retransmission parameter is sent. If the parameter is set to
No, the immediate assignment retransmission parameter is
not sent.
If this parameter is set to Yes, the put-through rate of MS
Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS
and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This
parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the FACCH (a full-
rate channel).
For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the
None
Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS
and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This
parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the FACCH (a half-
rate channel).
For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the
None
Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS
and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This
parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the SDCCH.
For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the
T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.
None
Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS
and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This
parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the SACCH.
For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the
T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.
None
Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS
and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This
parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I during the multi-
frame release.
For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the
None
Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS
and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This
parameter indicates the maximum number of retransmissions of the I frame.
For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the
T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.
None
This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the LAPDm N200 parameter to the BTS.
Only the BTS3X in G3BTS32.30000.04.1130 or later and the
double-transceiver BTSs support the LAPDm N200
parameter.
If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC sends the LAPDm
N200 parameter. If this parameter is set to No, the BSC
This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 when the SDCCH supports SAPI3
services.
For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of
the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.
If timer T200 is set to a too small value, the transmit end
may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data
transmission fails before the transmit end receives a
response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too
small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced
This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH on the
SDCCH.
For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of
the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.
If timer T200 is set to a too small value, the transmit end
may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data
transmission fails before the transmit end receives a
response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too
small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced
This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH over the Um
interface when the TCH supports SAPI3 services. For details of the function of timer
T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms)
parameter. SAPI0 maps with speech services, and SAPI3 maps with short message
services.
If timer T200 is set to a too small value, the transmit end
may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data
transmission fails before the transmit end receives a
response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too
small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced
This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH over the Um
interface when the TCH supports SAPI0 services. For details of the function of timer
T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms)
parameter. SAPI0 maps with speech services, and SAPI3 maps with short message
services.
If timer T200 is set to a too small value, the transmit end
may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data
transmission fails before the transmit end receives a
response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too
small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced
This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the FACCH/TCHH over
the Um interface. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see
the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.
If timer T200 is set to a too small value, the transmit end
may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data
transmission fails before the transmit end receives a
response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too
small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced
This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the FACCH/TCHF over
the Um interface. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see
the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.
If timer T200 is set to a too small value, the transmit end
may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data
transmission fails before the transmit end receives a
response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too
small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced
This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SDCCH over the Um
interface.
T200 prevents the data link layer from deadlock during data transmission. The data link
layer transforms the physical link that is vulnerable to errors into a sequential non-error
data link. The entities at the two ends of this data link use the acknowledgement
If timer T200 is set to a too small value, the transmit end
may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data
transmission fails before the transmit end receives a
response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too
small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced
For the BTS3X in 03.0529 or later and the double-transceiver BTSs, this parameter
specifies the level threshold for the random access of the MS. If the receive level of the
RACH burst is smaller than the value of RACH Min.Access Level, the BTS regards this
access as an invalid one and no decoding is performed. If the receive level of the RACH
burst is greater than the value of RACH Min. Access Level, the BTS considers that an
Generally, this parameter is set to 1. It is set according to
the actual BTS receiver sensitivity and the minimum MS
access level. RACH Busy Threshold must be greater than
RACH Min.Access Level.
This parameter specifies the correlation between training sequences.
According the GSM protocols, the system determines whether the received signal is the
random access signal of an MS through the correlation between training sequences (41
bits) and calculates the TA value.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the allowable
error for the random access signal is high and an MS can
easily access the network. But the error report rate is high.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the error report
rate of the MS is low but the MS cannot easily access the
This parameter specifies the following rules for TRX aiding function control:
TRX Aiding Not Allowed: The TRX aiding function is disabled.
Allowed & Recover Forbidden: The TRX aiding is allowed but the switchback is forbidden
after the faulty TRX is restored.
Allowed & Recover Immediately: The TRX aiding is enabled but the switchback is
This parameter specifies whether to enable the TRX aiding
function.
BCCH aiding: The main BCCH is aided to another normal
TRX in this cell.
BCCH aiding switchback: BCCH aiding switchback functions
This parameter specifies the speech version supported by the BSC. The value of this
parameter has six bits.
The six bits (from the most significant bit to the least significant bit) indicate the
following speech versions respectively:
half-rate version 3, half-rate version 2, half-rate version 1, full-rate version 3, full-rate
None
This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under half-rate AMR calls. For
details, see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)).
The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities.
Under the same frame erasure rate (FER), the AMR coding
supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If
the AMR function is enabled, the speech quality is
improved. The value of AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH
This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under full-rate AMR calls. For
details, see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)).
The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities.
Under the same frame erasure rate (FER), the AMR coding
supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If
the AMR function is enabled, the speech quality is
improved. The value of AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH
This parameter specifies the number of SACCH multi-frames under half-rate AMR calls.
For details, see the description of SACCH multi-frames.
The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities.
Under the same frame erasure rate (FER), the AMR coding
supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If
the AMR function is enabled, the speech quality is
improved. The value of AHR SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH
This parameter specifies the number of SACCH multi-frames under full-rate AMR calls.
For details, see the description of SACCH multi-frames.
The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities.
Under the same frame erasion rate (FER), the AMR coding
supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If
the AMR function is enabled, the speech quality is
improved. The value of AFR SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH
This parameter is used to adjust candidate target cells for directed retry.
When target cells are selected during direct retry, only the cells whose loads are smaller
than or equal to the Directed Retry Load Access Threshold are selected as candidate
target cells.
If the value of the parameter is too high, the cells with
heavy loads are selected as candidate target cells so that
the handover does not make sense. If the value of the
parameter is too low, it is difficult to select candidate target
cells.
When Assignment Cell Load Judge Enabled is set to Yes, the directed try procedure is
started if the following two conditions are met: The cell supports directed try. The load
of the cell is greater than or equal to Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold.
None
This parameter specifies the total number of paging times. The parameter and the
paging times configured on the MSC side together determine the number of
retransmissions of the paging message. The total paging times is approximately equal to
this parameter multiplied by the paging times configured on the MSC side. At present,
the Paging Times is set to 4 in the MSC. The BSC does not support the mechanism for
Properly setting this parameter can increase the paging
success rate. If this parameter is set to a too great value,
congestion may occur.
For the BTS3X series and double-transceiver BTSs, this parameter specifies the level
threshold for the MS random access when the BTS determines the RACH busy state.
When the receive level of the random access burst timeslot is greater than this
threshold, the BTS considers that the timeslot is busy. For the BTS3X series and the
double-transceiver BTSs, this parameter only indicates whether the timeslot is busy. The
For the BTS2X series (excluding the BTS24), this parameter
must be set according to the actual receiver sensitivity of
the BTS and the minimum access level of the MS to ensure
the balance between the uplink and the downlink. This
parameter also affects handover access of RACH BURST
This parameter is used by the BTS to inform the BSC of radio link connection failure.
When the BTS receives the SACCH measurement report from the MS, the counter for
determining whether a radio link is faulty is set to the value of this parameter. Each time
the BTS fails to decode the SACCH measurement report sent by the MS, the counter
decreases by 1. If the BTS successfully decodes the SACCH measurement report, the
If the value of this parameter does not match with the value
supported by the BTS, an alarm is generated.
This parameter specifies the length of timer T3150. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58 and
04.08.
When the BTS sends physical information to the MS, the BTS starts the timer T3105.If
the timer T3105 expires before BTS receives the SAMB frame from MS, BTS resends
physical information to MS and restarts the timer T3105. The maximum times for
The physical information is sent over the FACCH. Four
TDMA frames are sent each time at the interval of 18 ms. If
the value of T3105 is smaller than or equal to 18 ms, the
BTS needs to retransmit the physical information to the MS
when the timer T3105 expires for the first time.If the
This parameter specifies the maximum number of Physical information retransmissions.
Assume that the maximum number is Ny1. If the number of retransmissions exceeds
Ny1 before the BTS receives any correct SAMB frame from the MS, the BTS sends the
BSC a connection failure message, which can also be a handover failure message. After
receiving the message, the BSC releases the newly assigned dedicated channel and stops
The value of this parameter can be increased when
handover becomes slow or the handover success rate
decreases because of clock problems or poor
transmission.An MS can be handed over only when Max
Resend Times of Phy Info multiplied by Radio Link Timeout
This parameter specifies whether the 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed.
Yes: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed.
No: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is forbidden.
This parameter can be set to Yes when 2G/3G network is
applied.
According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of TDD 3G better cell
handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a TDD 3G better cell
handover is triggered.
This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more
difficult the TDD 3G better cell handover can be triggered.
According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of TDD 3G better cell
handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a TDD 3G better cell
handover is triggered.
This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more
difficult the TDD 3G better cell handover can be triggered.
If both the Inter-System Handover Enable and the Better 3G Cell HO Allowed
parameters are set to Yes, a 3G better cell handover is triggered when the RSCP of an
adjacent 3G cell is greater than the TDD RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO during a
period of time. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110
dBm to -47 dBm).
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more
difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered.
If the Inter-RAT HO Preference parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold,
and if the receive level of the first candidate cell among 2G candidate cells is lower than
or equal to the HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell, the 3G cell handover is preferred.
Otherwise, the 2G cell handover is preferred.
The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
The greater the value of this parameter, the more difficult
for the BSC to hand over the MS to a 2G cell and the easier
for the BSC to hand over the MS to a TDD 3G cell.
This parameter specifies whether an MS is preferentially handed over to a 2G cell or to a
3G cell.
During a handover decision, if this parameter is set to
Preference for 2G Cell, the BSC first selects the target
handover cell from the 2G candidate cells; If this parameter
is set to Preference for 3G Cell, the BSC first selects the
target handover cell from the 3G candidate cells; If this
During a measurement period, a fast handover occurs only if the difference of path loss
between a chain neighbor cell and the serving cell is greater than or equal to the value
of this parameter.
The level values 0 to 127 map with -64 dB to 63 dB.
None
This parameter specifies the penalty that is performed on the downlink level of the
original serving cell after a successful fast handover.
If this parameter is set to a small value, the MS is likely to
be handed over to the original serving cell, thus leading to
ping-pong handovers.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the MS is
unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell.
This parameter specifies the duration of penalty that is performed on the original
serving cell after a successful fast handover.
If this parameter is set to a small value, the MS is likely to
be handed over to the original serving cell, thus leading to
ping-pong handovers.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the MS is
unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell.
This parameter specifies the allowed number of invalid measurement reports when the
BSC uses the measurement reports for filtering. If the number of received measurement
reports is smaller than or equal to the value of this parameter, no filtering is performed
and no fast handover decision is made.
This parameter can only be applied to the fast-moving
handover.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for filtering after the
BSC receives the measurement reports of the adjacent cell from the BTS. This helps to
avoid improper handover decision based on a single inaccurate measurement report.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered
value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this
parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is
inaccurate.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for filtering after the
BSC receives the measurement reports of the serving cell from the BTS. This helps to
avoid improper handover decision based on a single inaccurate measurement report.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered
value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this
parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is
inaccurate.
The fast handover must comply with the P/N criterion. That is, the triggering conditions
of fast handover must be met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds.
This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion, that is, the period during which
the triggering conditions of fast handover are met. Such a period is within the value
defined by this parameter.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more
difficult the fast-moving handover can be triggered.
The fast handover must comply with the P/N criterion. That is, the triggering conditions
of fast handover must be met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds.
This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. That is, if the triggering conditions
of fast handover is met for a period longer than or equal to the value of this parameter,
a fast handover is triggered.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more
difficult the fast-moving handover can be triggered.
During a measurement period, if the MS moves at a speed greater than the value of this
parameter, a fast handover is triggered.
None
During a measurement period, if the compensated downlink level of the serving cell is
smaller than the value of this parameter, a fast handover is triggered.
The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
None
During a measurement period, if the filtered uplink level of the serving cell is smaller
than the value of this parameter, a fast handover is triggered.
The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
None
During the UL subcell to the OL subcell handover in the enhanced dualband network, if
the traffic load in the OL subcell is higher than the Inner Cell Serious Overload Threshold,
a load handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell cannot be triggered.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load
in the UL subcell is increased.
According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of enhanced dualband
handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, the corresponding
handover decision is triggered.
This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.
None
According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of enhanced dualband
handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, the corresponding
handover decision is triggered.
This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.
None
After a handover between the UL subcell and the OL subcell is successful, no handover
can be triggered within the period defined by this parameter.
None
This parameter specifies the level step of the load handover from the OL subcell to the
UL subcell.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the system flow
load is increased.
This parameter specifies the hierarchical handover period of the load handover from the
OL subcell to the UL subcell.
In Enhanced dualband If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is lower than the UL
Subcell Lower Load Threshold, all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the
same time and the load on the BSC increases in a short time. Thus, congestion may
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the system flow
load is increased.
This parameter specifies whether the load handover from the OL subcell to the UL
subcell is enabled.
None
If the traffic load of the UL subcell is higher than the UL subcell serious overload
threshold, the handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the
value of this parameter per second on the basis of UL subcell load hierarchical HO
period.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the system flow
load is increased.
This parameter specifies the hierarchical level step of the load handover from the UL
subcell to the OL subcell.
None
This parameter specifies the hierarchical handover period of the load handover from the
UL subcell to the OL subcell.
If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the UL subcell general
overload threshold, all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the same time and
the load on the BSC increases in a short time. Thus, congestion may occur in the target
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the system flow
load is increased.
To prevent ping-pong handovers, this parameter should be decided before the
handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell. Suppose the signal strength of serving
cell is SS(s) and the signal strength of the adjacent cell is SS(n). The decision condition
for a handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell is as follows: SS(s) - SS(n) < Distance
between Boundaries of UL And OL Subcells - Distance Hysterisis Between Boudaries of
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more
difficult the handover between the OL subcell and the UL
subcell can be triggered.
This parameter is a relative value, which specifies the size of blank zone between the UL
subcell and the OL subcell. The greater the value of this parameter is, the larger the
blank zone is.
For the enhanced dualband handover algorithm, the boundaries of the OL and UL
subcells are determined according to the relative value between the signal strength of
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more
difficult the handover between the OL subcell and the UL
subcell can be triggered.
If the flow control level in the current system is greater than the value of this parameter,
the handover between the UL subcell and the OL subcell due to low or high UL subcell
load is not allowed.
If this parameter is set to a too great or too low value, load
balancing between the OL subcell and UL subcell is
adversely affected.
If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter,
the load handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the value
of Step length of UL subcell load HO(dB) per second on the basis of UL subcell load
hierarchical HO period, thus speeding up the load handover.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic load
in the UL subcell is increased.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load
in the OL subcell is increased.
If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter,
some calls of the UL subcell is handed over to the OL subcell. Moreover, the MS that
sends the channel request message in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned to the OL
subcell.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic load
in the OL subcell is increased.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load
in the UL subcell is increased.
This parameter specifies whether the channel request in the OL subcell is preferentially
processed over the channel request the UL subcell according to the UL Subcell Lower
Load Threshold. If the traffic load in the UL subcell is lower than the UL Subcell Lower
Load Threshold, the MS access to the OL subcell is preferentially assigned to the UL
subcell. This parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell.
None
This parameter specifies whether the access request in the UL subcell is preferentially
processed over the access request in OL subcell according to the UL subcell general
overload threshold. If the traffic load in the UL subcell is higher than the UL subcell
general overload threshold, the MS access to the UL subcell is preferentially assigned to
the OL subcell. This parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell.
None
In an enhanced dualband cell, if TCH seizure ratio of the UL subcell is smaller than the
value of this parameter, some calls of the OL subcell is handed over to the UL subcell.
Moreover, the MS that sends the channel request message in the OL subcell is
preferentially assigned to the UL subcell.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic load
in the UL subcell is increased.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load
in the OL subcell is increased.
This parameter specifies whether the 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed.
Yes: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed.
No: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is forbidden.
This parameter must be set to Yes when 2G/3G network is
applied.
According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of 3G better cell handover are
met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a 3G better cell handover is triggered.
This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more
difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered.
According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of 3G better cell handover are
met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a 3G better cell handover is triggered.
This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more
difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered.
If both Inter-System Handover Enable and Better 3G Cell HO Allowed are set to Yes, a
3G better cell handover is triggered when the Ec/No of an adjacent 3G cell is greater
than Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO during a period of time.
The level values 0 to 49 map to -24 dB to 0 dB.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more
difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered.
If both Inter-System Handover Enable and Better 3G Cell HO Allowed are set to Yes, a
3G better cell handover is triggered when the RSCP of an adjacent 3G cell is greater than
RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO during a period of time.The value of this
parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more
difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered.
If the Inter-RAT HO Preference parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold,
and if the receive level of the first candidate cell among 2G candidate cells is lower than
or equal to the HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell, the 3G cell handover is preferred.
Otherwise, the 2G cell handover is preferred.
The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
The greater the value of this parameter is, the more difficult
for the BSC to hand over the MS to a 2G cell and the easier
for the BSC to hand over the MS to an FDD 3G cell.
This parameter specifies whether an MS is preferentially handed over to a 2G cell or to a
3G cell.
During the handover decision:
If this parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell, the BSC
first selects the target handover cell from the 2G candidate
cells.
If this parameter is set to Preference for 3G Cell, the BSC
This parameter specifies the receive level threshold of the handover from the UL subcell
to the OL subcell of the PS service in the PS concentric algorithm.
None
This parameter specifies the receive level threshold of the handover from the OL subcell
to the UL subcell of the PS service in the PS concentric algorithm.
None
This parameter specifies the receive quality threshold of the AMR HR voice service. It is
used in concentric cell handover decision. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to
70, corresponding to RQ (receive quality level 0-7) x 10.
None
This parameter specifies the receive quality threshold of the AMR FR voice service. It is
used in concentric cell handover decision.
The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 70, corresponding to RQ (receive quality
level 0-7) x 10.
None
This parameter specifies the hierarchical level step of the load handover from the OL
subcell to the UL subcell.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic load
in the UL subcell is heavy, and the OL subcell cannot share
the traffic.
If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is higher than the En Iuo Out Cell General
OverLoad Threshold, all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the same time
and the load on the BSC increases in a short time. Thus, congestion may occur in the
target cell and call drops may be caused. Through the hierarchical load handover
algorithm, the calls in the cell are handed over to the target cell by level.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load
in the UL subcell is heavy, and the OL subcell cannot share
the traffic.
If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter,
the load handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the value
of Modified step length of UL load HO period per second on the basis of UL subcell load
hierarchical HO period, thus speeding up the load handover from the UL subcell to the
OL subcell.
This parameter must be set to a value that is greater than or
equal to the En Iuo Out Cell General OverLoad Threshold.
If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter,
some calls in the UL subcell are handed over to the OL subcell.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic load
in the OL subcell is increased.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load
in the UL subcell is increased.
If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is smaller than the value of this parameter,
some calls in the OL subcell are handed over to the UL subcell.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic load
in the UL subcell is increased.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load
in the OL subcell is increased.
When deciding whether a call can be handed over from the UL subcell to the OL subcell,
the BSC determines whether the number of handover failures reaches the MaxRetry
Time after UtoO Fail. If the number reaches the MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail, the UL
subcell to OL subcell handover is prohibited during the Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail.
Otherwise, the UL subcell to OL subcell handover is allowed.
When the MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail is set to 0, no
penalty related to retry times after UtoO handover failure is
imposed. That is, the call can still be handed over to the
previous target cell after the penalty time.
After an OL subcell to UL subcell handover fails, the call cannot be handed over from the
OL subcell to the UL subcell during the Penalty Time after OtoU HO Fail.
None
After a UL subcell to OL subcell handover fails, the call cannot be handed over from the
UL subcell to the OL subcell during the Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail.
None
If handover penalty is enabled, when a call is handed over from the OL subcell to the UL
subcell, it cannot be handed over back to the OL subcell during Penalty Time of UtoO HO
to avoid ping-pong handovers.
If this parameter is set to 0, handover penalty is not performed on the OL subcell to the
UL subcell handover.
This parameter is valid only when the Enhanced Concentric
Allowed parameter is set to Yes.
During the handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell, the calls are hierarchically
handled from level 63 to 0. Therefore, the calls with higher receive level can be handed
over to the OL subcell first.
The handover strip is decreased by Underlay HO Step Level every Underlay HO Step
Period.
This parameter is valid only when the Enhanced Concentric
Allowed parameter is set to Yes.
When multiple requests for the UL-to-OL handover are sent simultaneously, calls with
lower level may be handed over first. This does not conform to the principle that the call
of the best quality should be handed over preferentially.
Therefore, the hierarchy handover algorithm is adopted to hand over the calls with
higher RX level from the UL subcell to OL subcell. The value of this parameter is the time
This parameter is valid only when the Enhanced Concentric
Allowed parameter is set to Yes.
This parameter determines whether the traffic load in the UL subcell determines the UL
subcell to OL subcell handover or the OL subcell to UL subcell handover in an enhanced
concentric cell.
When this parameter is set to Yes,
If the call is in the OL subcell and if the OL to UL HO Allowed parameter is set to Yes, the
None
This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell
and UL subcell of an enhanced concentric cell.
If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes, the coverage of the OL
subcell and UL subcell is determined by UtoO HO Received Level Threshold, OtoU HO
Received Level Threshold, RX_QUAL Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis.
This parameter is valid in an enhanced concentric cell.
This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell
and UL subcell of an enhanced concentric cell.
If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes, the coverage of the OL
subcell and UL subcell is determined by OtoU HO Received Level Threshold, UtoO HO
Received Level Threshold, RX_QUAL Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis.
This parameter is valid in an enhanced concentric cell.
In a concentric cell, the channel assignment for an incoming-BSC handover can be
processed in one of the following modes:
Overlaid Subcell: A channel in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned.
Underlaid Subcell: A channel in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned.
No Preference: A channel is assigned according to general channel assignment
For the network with a single frequency band, inter-BSC
handovers are triggered at the edge of two adjacent cells.
Therefore, the recommended value of this parameter is
Underlaid Subcell. For a dual-band network (for example,
900/1800 MHz cells), incoming BSC handovers occur
In a concentric cell, an intra-BSC incoming cell handover request can be processed in
one of the following modes:
System Optimization: The measurement level on the BCCH of the target cell is added to
the intra-BSC inter-cell handover request messages. Then, the BSC compares the
measurement value with RX_LEV Threshold, and determines the preferred service layer.
None
If TA Pref. of Imme-Assign Allowed is set to Yes and the access_delay in the channel
request message is lower than TA Threshold of Imme-Assign Pref., a channel in the OL
subcell is preferentially assigned during the immediate assignment. Otherwise, a
channel in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned.
None
This parameter specifies whether a channel is assigned based on the access_delay in the
channel request message during an immediate assignment.
If TA Pref. of Imme-Assign Allowed is set to No, a channel in the UL subcell is
preferentially assigned during the immediate assignment.
If TA Pref. of Imme-Assign Allowed is set to Yes and the access_delay in the channel
None
If the Assign Optimum Layer parameter is set to System Optimization, the current
receive level on the SDCCH can be estimated (by interpolating and filtering) based on
the uplink measurement value in the measurement reports sent on the SDCCH. Then,
the BSC determines whether a TCH in the UL subcell or in the OL subcell should be
assigned based on the result of comparing the receive level on the SDCCH and Assign-
When TA Threshold of Assignment Pref. is set to 0, the TCH
in the OL subcell cannot be assigned preferentially to the
MS because no TA is lower than this threshold. In this case,
Assign Optimum Layer is set to Underlaid Subcell.
If the Assign Optimum Layer parameter is set to System Optimization, the current
receive level on the SDCCH can be estimated (by interpolating and filtering) based on
the uplink measurement value in the measurement reports sent on the SDCCH. Then,
the BSC determines whether a TCH in the UL subcell or in the OL subcell should be
assigned based on the result of comparing the uplink receive level on the SDCCH and
None
In a concentric cell, the TCH can be assigned in the following modes:
System Optimization: Based on the measurement reports sent on the SDCCH, the BSC
determines which service layer should be preferentially selected.
Underlaid Subcell: The TCH in the UL subcell are preferentially assigned to an MS.
Overlaid Subcell: The TCH in the OL subcell are preferentially assigned to an MS.
None
According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of concentric cell handover
are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a concentric cell handover is
triggered.
This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more
difficult the concentric cell handover can be triggered.
According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of concentric cell handover
are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a concentric cell handover is
triggered.
This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more
difficult the concentric cell handover can be triggered.
This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell
and UL subcell.
If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No, the coverage of the OL
subcell and UL subcell is determined by TA Hysteresis, RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV
Hysteresis, RX_QUAL Threshold, and TA Threshold.
Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced
concentric cell. The coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL
subcell is determined by different factors.
#N/A #N/A
One of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL
subcell. RX_QUAL Threshold = RQ (ranging from level 0 to level 7) x 10.
If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No, the coverage of the OL
subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL
Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed
None
This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell
and UL subcell.
When the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No, the coverage of the OL
subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL
Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed
Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced
concentric cell. The coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL
subcell is determined by different factors.
This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell
and UL subcell.
When the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No, the coverage of the OL
subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL
Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed
Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced
concentric cell. The coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL
subcell is determined by different factors.
UO Signal Intensity Difference = UO Amplifier Power Difference + Combiner Insertion
Loss Difference + Path Loss Difference of Different Antennas + Pass Loss Difference of
Different Frequencies.
Measure the receive level of the UL subcell and OL subcell at several different places if
the UL subcell and OL subcell use different antennas. The recommended number of
Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced
concentric cell. The coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL
subcell is determined by different factors.
This parameter specifies whether the TA is used as a decisive condition for the
concentric cell handover.
None
This parameter specifies whether the downlink receive quality is used as a decisive
condition for the concentric cell handover.
None
This parameter specifies whether the downlink receive level is used as a decisive
condition for the concentric cell handover.
None
This parameter specifies whether the handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell is
enabled.
None
This parameter specifies whether the handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is
enabled.
None
This parameter specifies the load threshold of the TIGHT BCCH handover. To trigger an
intra-cell TIGHT BCCH handover, the load of the non-BCCH frequencies should be higher
than the Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO.
None
This parameter specifies the signal quality threshold of the TIGHT BCCH handover. To
trigger an intra-cell TIGHT BCCH handover from a TCH to a BCCH, the downlink receive
quality should be lower than the RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO.
None
This parameter specifies the K offset used in K ranking.
To reduce the ping-pong effect in an handover, you are advised to subtract K Bias from
the actual downlink receive level of the candidate cells before ranking their downlink
receive level based on the K principle.
Subtract K Bias from the actual downlink receive level of the
candidate cells before ranking their downlink receive level
based on the K principle. This parameter affects the ranking
of candidate cells. Generally, it is set to 0.
This parameter specifies the expected uplink receive level on a new channel after an MS
is handed over to a new cell. This parameter is used for the MS Power Prediction after
HO. This parameter should be consistent with the UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold in
Huawei II power control algorithm, thus ensuring a relatively high uplink receive level on
the new channel after handover, increasing the transmit power of the MS, and avoiding
If this parameter is set to a too small value, call drop may
easily occur.
This parameter specifies the period in which penalty is performed on the adjacent cells
of the cell where a fast-moving MS is located. The adjacent cells must be located at the
Macro, Micro, or Pico layer other than the Umbrella layer.
Penalty can be performed on only the cell that is not
located at the fourth layer.
If an MS is moving fast, the BSC performs penalty on the adjacent cells of the cell where
the MS is located. This parameter specifies the penalty value. Only when the MS is
located at the Umbrella layer and the adjacent cells are located at the Macro, Micro, or
Pico layer, penalty is performed.
This parameter is valid within only the Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO.
None
The two intra-cell handovers that occur during the period specified by this parameter
are regarded as consecutive handovers.
This parameter, together with Forbidden time after MAX
Times, determines the frequency of intra-cell handovers.
When the number of consecutive intra-cell handovers reaches the maximum allowed, a
timer is started to forbid the intra-cell handover.
Intra-cell handovers are allowed only when the timer expires.
This parameter to used to disable the intra-cell handover
for a certain period.
This parameter determines the maximum number of consecutive intra-cell handovers
allowed.
If the interval of two continuous intra-cell handovers is shorter than a specified
threshold, the two handovers are regarded as consecutive handovers. If multiple
consecutive intra-cell handovers occur, the intra-cell handover is forbidden for a period.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the intra-cell
handover may not be timely; if this parameter is set to a too
great value, the system resources may be wasted when
intra-cell handovers occur frequently.
The time threshold is calculated based on the cell radius (r) and the velocity (v). The
threshold equals 2r/v. If the time taken by an MS to pass a cell is smaller than this
threshold, the MS is regarded as moving fast. Otherwise, the MS is regarded as moving
slow.
When the cell radius is fixed, the smaller the value of this
parameter is (the required velocity is higher), the more the
difficult fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be
triggered.
According to the P/N criterion, if the MS fast passes N cells among the P micro cells, the
BSC starts to trigger a fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover. This parameter
corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.
The more the micro cells are configured, the more difficult
the fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be
triggered.
According to the P/N criterion, if the MS fast passes N cells among the P micro cells, the
BSC starts to trigger a fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover. This parameter
corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.
The more the micro cells are configured, the more difficult
the fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be
triggered.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the system
traffic volume cannot be reduced effectively; if this
In hierarchical load handover, the handover strip increases by one Load HO Step Level
for every Load HO Step Period, starting from the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold. The
handovers are performed as such until all the calls whose receive levels are within the
range of (Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold, Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold + Load HO
Bandwidth) are handed off the current serving cell.
The setting of this parameter affects the width of the
handover strip during load handover.
When the load of the cell is equal to or greater than the Load HO Threshold, all the calls
served by the cell may send handover requests simultaneously, and the load on the CPU
will increase rapidly as a consequence. In some cases, call drops may occur due to traffic
congestion in the cell. Therefore, the hierarchical handover algorithm for load handover
is used for the BSC to control the number of users to be handed over by levels.
The setting of this parameter affects the load handover
time. If it is set to a too greater value, the handover time of
each level is long.
The setting of this parameter is dependent on the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold
parameter.
Only when the receive level of the serving cell is within the range of (Edge HO DL RX_LEV
Threshold, Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold + Load HO Bandwidth), a load handover is
allowed.
The setting of this parameter determines the maximum
width of the handover strip during load handover.
If the cell load is smaller than the value of this parameter, the cell can receive the MSs
handed over from other cells. Otherwise, the cell rejects the MSs handed over from
other cells.
The setting of this parameter affects the load handover
targeted to the cell. If it is set to a lower value, the number
of handover requests that are rejected increases.
When Load HO Allowed is set to Yes, Load HO Threshold should be set to 85.
The traffic load of a cell refers to the TCH seizure rate in the cell.
The load handover is triggered when the traffic load in a cell is greater than the value of
this parameter. In other words, the load handover is triggered when the ratio of TCHs
occupied in a cell reaches the threshold defined for load handover.
The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of the
load handover. If it is set to a lower value, the number of
load handovers increases.
System flux thresholds correspond to the system flux obtained based on message
packets, CPU load, and FID queuing load. The system flux level is the current flux control
level of the system.
0-11: There are 12 flow control levels. Where, 0 indicates the lowest level and 11
indicates the highest level.
The value of this parameter should not be set too high.
Load handover is allowed only when the system flow is
lower than the setting of this parameter. Otherwise, the
load on the system is increased.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An
emergency handover can be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is
greater than the value of this parameter.
The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ
handover of AMR HR calls. If it is set to a too small value,
the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An
emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS
is greater than the value of this parameter.
The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ
handover of AMR HR calls. If it is set to a too small value,
the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An
emergency handover can be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is
greater than the value of this parameter.
The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ
handover of AMR FR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the
uplink BQ handover is easily triggered.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An
emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS
is greater than the value of this parameter.
The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ
handover of AMR FR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the
downlink BQ handover is easily triggered.
This parameter specifies the quality level offset of the interface handover of the AMR FR
service relative to non-AMR services or the AMR HR service (x 10). When determining
whether an interference handover should be triggered, the system compares the
receive quality of the MS minus the RXLEVOff with the handover threshold.
For the AMR calls, this parameter, together with RXQUALn, is used in interference
For the AMR calls, this parameter, together with RXQUALn,
is used in interference handover decision. An uplink
interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is
set to a small value.
If the receive level of the serving cell is greater than or equal to 63, and if the uplink or
downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the
value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10.
This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink
interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is
set to a too small value.
If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 59 to 62, and if the uplink or
downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the
value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10.
This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink
interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is
set to a too small value.
If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 56 to 58, and if the uplink or
downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the
value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10.
This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink
interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is
set to a too small value.
If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 53 to 55, and if the uplink or
downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the
value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10.
This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink
interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is
set to a too small value.
If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 49 to 52, and if the uplink or
downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the
value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10.
This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink
interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is
set to a too small value.
If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 46 to 48, and if the uplink or
downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the
value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10.
This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink
interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is
set to a too small value.
If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 42 to 45, and if the uplink or
downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the
value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10.
This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink
interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is
set to a too small value.
If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 39 to 41, and if the uplink or
downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the
value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10.
This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink
interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is
set to a too small value.
If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 36 to 38, and if the uplink or
downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the
value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10.
This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink
interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is
set to a too small value.
If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 32 to 35, and if the uplink or
downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the
value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10.
This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink
interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is
set to a too small value.
If the receive level of the serving cell is 31, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality
of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter,
uplink interference or downlink interference exists.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10.
This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink
interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is
set to a too small value.
If the receive level of the serving cell is smaller than or equal to 30, and if the uplink or
downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the
value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10.
This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink
interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is
set to a too small value.
If the number of consecutive measurement reports without the downlink measurement
report is smaller than or equal to the value of this parameter, the handover decision
related to no downlink measurement report is allowed.
If the number of consecutive measurement reports without
the downlink measurement report is greater than the value
of this parameter, the handover decision related to no
downlink measurement report is not performed. Therefore,
if this parameter is set to a lower value, the no downlink
If the downlink MRs are not included in the MRs received, and if the uplink receive
quality is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, a no downlink
measurement report emergency handover is triggered.
When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover is preferentially
selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell is available
The handover decision is allowed only when the uplink
receive quality is greater than or equal to the value of this
parameter. Therefore, if this parameter is set to a higher
value, the no downlink measurement report handover
cannot be triggered.
This parameter is used to control the no downlink measurement report handover
algorithm.
If this parameter is set to 0, the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm is
disabled. Therefore, handover decision related to no downlink measurement report is
not allowed in this cell.
This parameter is set according to the traffic volume.
This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level.
This parameter indicate specifies the drop trend of the receive level within a period.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, a more rapid level drop is required for
triggering a rapid level drop handover. This parameter is used together with the Filter
Parameters A1 to A8.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, a more rapid level
drop is required for triggering a rapid level drop handover.
This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level.
Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The
corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be
obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the
configured value):
Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following
requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80.
The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which
the receive level drops rapidly.
This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level.
Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The
corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be
obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the
configured value):
Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following
requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80.
The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which
the receive level drops rapidly.
This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level.
Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The
corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be
obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the
configured value):
Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following
requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80.
The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which
the receive level drops rapidly.
This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level.
Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The
corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be
obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the
configured value):
Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following
requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80.
The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which
the receive level drops rapidly.
This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level.
Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The
corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be
obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the
configured value):
Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following
requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80.
The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which
the receive level drops rapidly.
This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level.
Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The
corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be
obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the
configured value):
Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following
requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80.
The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which
the receive level drops rapidly.
This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level.
Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The
corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be
obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the
configured value):
Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following
requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80.
The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which
the receive level drops rapidly.
This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level.
Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The
corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be
obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the
configured value):
Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following
requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80.
The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which
the receive level drops rapidly.
This parameter specifies the uplink quality threshold of an emergency handover. An
emergency handover due to bad quality is triggered when the uplink receive quality is
greater than or equal to the UL Qual. Threshold.
When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover should be
preferentially selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell
The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ
handover of non-AMR calls. If it is set to a lower value, the
uplink BQ handover is easily triggered.
This parameter specifies the downlink receive quality threshold of an emergency
handover. An emergency handover is triggered when the downlink receive quality is
greater than or equal to the DL Qual. Threshold.
When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover should be
preferentially selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell
The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ
handover of non-AMR calls. If it is set to a lower value, the
downlink BQ handover is easily triggered.
An emergency handover is triggered when TA is greater than or equal to the value of
this parameter.
This parameter determines the cell coverage for the TA
emergency handover. In the areas with small space
between BTSs and densely distributed BTSs, the coverage of
the cell can be reduced if this parameter is set to a lower
value.
This parameter is used as a switch to control the value determination method of
measurement reports. When this parameter is set to Open, if DTX is used, the SUB
values in the MR should be selected. Otherwise, the PULL values in the MR should be
selected.
When this parameter is set to 0 and if the measurement
report indicates that DTX is not used, the FULLSET values
should be selected. When this parameter is set to 0 and if
the measurement report indicates that DTX is used, the
SUBSET values should be selected. In latter cases, the
This parameter specifies the value of the timer used for adjacent cell penalty after
handover failure due to data configuration.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the target cell
for the previous handover will not be selected for the next
handover, but the probability of call drop increases. If this
parameter is set to a too small value, the probability of
handover failure increases.
This parameter specifies the value of the timer used for adjacent cell penalty after
handover failure due to the Um interface error.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the target cell
for the previous handover will not be selected for the next
handover, but the probability of call drop increases. If this
parameter is set to a too small value, the probability of
handover failure increases.
This parameter specifies the value of the timer used for adjacent cell penalty after
handover failure due to cell congestion.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the target cell
for the previous handover will not be selected for the next
handover, but the probability of call drop increases. If this
parameter is set to a too small value, the probability of
handover failure increases.
When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the filter length for the TCH
NBR_RCVD_BLOCK.
By setting this parameter, you can use the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in multiple EMRs, thus
avoiding the case that the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in a single EMR is inaccurate.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered
value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this
parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is
inaccurate. Once set, this parameter should not be
modified.
When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the filter length for the SDCCH
NBR_RCVD_BLOCK.
By setting this parameter, you can use the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in multiple EMRs, thus
avoiding the case that the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in a single EMR is inaccurate.
This parameter should be set to a small value because the
SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure
duration for the MS.
This parameter specifies the penalty time for AMR full rate to half rate (FR-to-HR)
handovers. Before the timer expires, no AMR FR-to-HR handover is allowed if the
previous FR-to-HR handover fails due to channel unavailability or channel mismatch.
The greater the value of this parameter is, the longer the penalty time after AMR TCHF-
H HO Fail is. In other words, triggering AMR handover becomes more difficult.
The greater the value of this parameter is, the longer the
penalty time after AMR TCHF-H HO Fail is. In other words,
triggering AMR handover becomes more difficult.
When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the length of the filter for the
TCH REP_QUANT.
By setting this parameter, you can use the REP_QUANT in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding
the case that the REP_QUANT in a single EMR is inaccurate.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered
value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this
parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is
inaccurate. Once set, this parameter should not be
modified.
When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the length of the filter for the
SDCCH REP_QUANT.
By setting this parameter, you can use the REP_QUANT in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding
the case that the REP_QUANT in a single EMR is inaccurate.
This parameter should be set to a small value because the
SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure
duration for the MS.
This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for
averaging the CV_BEP on the TCH.
By setting this parameter, you can use the CV_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the
case that the CV_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered
value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this
parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is
inaccurate. Once set, this parameter should not be
modified.
This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for
averaging the CV_BEP on the SDCCH.
By setting this parameter, you can use the CV_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the
case that the CV_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate.
This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is
This parameter should be set to a small value because the
SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure
duration for the MS.
This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for
averaging the MEAN_BEP on the TCH.
By setting this parameter, you can use the MEAN_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding
the case that the MEAN_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered
value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this
parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is
inaccurate. Once set, this parameter should not be
modified.
This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for
averaging the MEAN_BEP on the SDCCH.
By setting this parameter, you can use the MEAN_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding
the case that the MEAN_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate.
This parameter should be set to a small value because the
SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure
duration for the MS.
This parameter specifies the duration of the penalty imposed on the original serving cell
after an emergency handover due to timing advance is performed.
After an emergency handover is performed due to TA, the receive level of the original
serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. Thus, other cells are given higher priority
and handover to the original serving cell is not allowed.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the MS is likely to
be handed over to the original serving cell, thus leading to
ping-pong handovers. If this parameter is set to a higher
value, the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original
serving cell.
This parameter specifies the penalty on the signal strength of the original serving cell to
avoid ping-pong handovers after an emergency handover due to the timing advance.
This parameter is valid only within the Penalty Time after TA HO.
After an emergency handover is performed due to TA, the receive level of the original
serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. Thus, other cells are given higher priority
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the MS is likely to
be handed over to the original serving cell, thus leading to
ping-pong handovers. If this parameter is set to a higher
value, the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original
serving cell.
This parameter specifies the duration of the penalty imposed on the original cell where
an emergency handover associated with bad signal quality is initiated.
During the penalty time, the receive level of the original serving cell is decreased by the
penalty level. Thus, other cells are given higher priority and handover to the original
serving cell is not allowed.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the MS is likely to
be handed over to the original serving cell, thus leading to
ping-pong handovers. If this parameter is set to a higher
value, the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original
serving cell.
This parameter specifies the degree of penalty imposed on the original serving cell
where an emergency handover associated with bad signal quality is initiated. This
parameter is defined to avoid ping-pong handover and is valid only within the Penalty
Time after BQ HO.
After an emergency handover is performed due to bad quality, the receive level of the
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the MS is likely to
be handed over to the original serving cell, thus leading to
ping-pong handovers. If this parameter is set to a higher
value, the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original
serving cell.
This parameter specifies the penalty level imposed on the target cell.
This parameter is valid only within the duration of the cell penalty time.
The penalty level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
This parameter specifies the penalty level imposed on a
target cell. A penalty level is imposed on a target cell to
avoid further attempts when a handover fails due to any of
the following reasons: cell congestion, a message indicating
internal handover refusal is received, a message indicating
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the
timing advance.
The TA value in a single MR may be inaccurate. You can set this parameter to average
the TA value in multiple MRs. The average TA value serves as the basis for handover
decision.
When this parameter is set to a higher value, the impact of
sudden changes is reduced, and the system response is
delayed. Thus, the network performance is degraded.
This parameter specifies the number of MRs used for averaging the signal strength in
neighbor cells. This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by
Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions.
When this parameter is set to an excessive value, the
impact of sudden changes is reduced, and the system
response is delayed. Thus, the network performance is
degraded.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the
channel quality on the SDCCH.
This parameter should be set to a small value because the
SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure
duration for the MS.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the
signal strength on the SDCCH.
This parameter should be set to a small value because the
SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure
duration for the MS.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the
speech/data TCH signal strength.
This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and
to ensure correct handover decisions.
When this parameter is set to a higher value, the impact of
sudden changes is reduced, and the system response is
delayed. Thus, the network performance is degraded.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the
speech/data TCH signal strength.
This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels
caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover
decisions. When this parameter is set to a higher value, the
impact of sudden changes is reduced, and the system
response is delayed. Thus, the network performance is
This parameter specifies the allowed number of consecutive MRs that are lost during
interpolation.
If the number of consecutive MRs that are lost is equal to or smaller than the value of
this parameter, the linear interpolation processing of the lost MRs is performed
according to two consecutive MRs that are lost.
Measurement reports fail to be decoded correctly when the
signal strength in the serving cell is poor. When the number
of consecutive MRs that are lost is greater than the value of
this parameter, all previous measurement reports are
discarded and the handover may fail. Therefore, Huawei
This parameter is used to select the candidate cells during directed retry. If the receive
level of an adjacent cell is greater than the value of this parameter, the adjacent cell can
be selected as a candidate cell for directed retry. The level values 0 through 63 map to -
110 dBm to -47 dBm.
If the receive level of an adjacent cell is greater than or
equal to the value of this parameter, this adjacent cell can
be selected as a candidate cell for directed retry.
This parameter specifies the frequency at which the BTS sends the preprocessed MR to
the BSC. After preprocessing the MRs, the BTS sends the preprocessed MRs to the BSC.
For example, if this parameter is set to Twice every second, the BTS sends preprocessed
MRs to the BSC every 0.5 second.
This parameter should be set on the basis of the data rate
and flow on the Abis interface. If the preprocessed MR is
sent at a high frequency, the flow on the Abis interface is
increased.
This parameter specifies whether the BS/MS power class should be transferred from the
BTS to the BSC.
When MR preprocessing is enabled, the UL and DL balance
measurement is affected if Transfer BS/MS Power Class is
set to No. In addition, the handovers (such as PBGT
handovers, load handovers, and concentric cell handovers)
that require power compensation may fail.
This parameter specifies whether the BTS should send the original measurement report
to the BSC. If this parameter is set to Yes, the BTS should send the preprocessed MR and
the original MR to the BSC.
In 4:1 multiplexing mode, if there are more than two
timeslots configured in SDCCH/8 scheme, then this
parameter should be set to No.
This parameter specifies whether the BTS should preprocess MRs. This parameter
determines whether transmit power is controlled by the BTS or by the BSC. This
parameter is set to YES if power control is performed by the BTS. This parameter is set
to NO if power control is performed by the BSC.
When this parameter is set to NO, the BSC preprocesses the
measurement reports. In this case, the Transfer Original
MR, Transfer BS/MS Power Class, and Sent Freq.of
preprocessed MR parameters are invalid.
When this parameter is set to YES, the signaling on the Abis
This parameter specifies whether an MS can use the optimum transmit power instead
of the maximum transmit power to access the new channel after a handover. The
purpose is to minimize system interference and improve signal quality.
If this parameter is set to Yes, the MS does not use the
maximum transmit power, and thus the handover success
rate is decreased, but the network interference is reduced.
This parameter specifies whether to penalize the target cell where a handover fails or
the serving cell where the TA is too great or the signal quality is too bad.
If the target cell is congested and an incoming cell handover fails, a penalty is performed
on the target cell to avoid the handover of the MS to the cell.
When the TA is great or the signal quality is bad, ping-pong handovers are likely to
Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to Yes. If
you need to disable the penalty for a certain handover, set
the related penalty time and penalty level to 0.
This parameter specifies whether to allow the inter-BSC SDCCH handover.
After the handover prohibition time for the initial access of an MS, the MS can be
handed over to another SDCCH in another BSC before a TCH is assigned.
This parameter should be set to Yes if the inter-BSC SDCCH
handover is allowed.
This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive emergency
handovers. No emergency handover is allowed during the minimum interval.
When the conditions for an emergency handover are met, an emergency handover
timer is started. Another emergency handover decision can be made only when the
timer expires.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, frequent
handovers cannot be avoided. If this parameter is set to a
too great value, handovers cannot be performed timely.
This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive handovers. No
handover is allowed during the minimum interval.
A timer starts after a handover is complete, and a subsequent handover is allowed only
after the timer expires. The value of this parameter is the length of the timer. The
parameter is used to avoid frequent handovers.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, frequent
handovers cannot be avoided. If this parameter is set to a
too great value, handovers cannot be performed timely.
After a new SDCCH is assigned to an MS, the MS can be handed over to another channel
only if the time during which the MS occupies the SDCCH is longer than the period
specified by this parameter.
This parameter is used to avoid unwanted handovers due to
inaccurate measurement reports generated in the initial
phase of call establishment.
If measurement reports are processed on the BTS side, you
can set Report Frequency of the Preprocessed
After a new TCH is assigned to an MS, the MS can be handed over to another channel
only if the time during which the MS occupies the TCH is longer than the period
specified by this parameter.
This parameter can be used to avoid unwanted handovers
due to inaccurate measurement reports in the initial phase
of call establishment.
If measurement reports are processed on the BTS side, you
can set Report Frequency of the Preprocessed
This parameter specifies the switch of the ATCB handover algorithm. The ATCB
handover algorithm can determine the coverage areas of the OL subcell and the UL
subcell and balance the load between the OL subcell and the UL subcell and between
the UL subcell and the adjacent subcell according to the actual networking. It can
decrease the interference, improve the conversation quality, and achieve the aggressive
None
This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion for the TIGHT BCCH handover.
According to the P/N criterion, if the load of a non-BCCH
frequency is higher than the Load Threshold for TIGHT
BCCH HO, the MS with conversation quality higher than the
RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO and far from the
cell edge is handed over to the TCH on the BCCH frequency.
This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion for the TIGHT BCCH handover.
According to the P/N criterion, if the load of a non-BCCH
frequency is higher than the Load Threshold for TIGHT
BCCH HO, the MS with conversation quality higher than the
RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO and far from the
cell edge is handed over to the TCH on the BCCH frequency.
This parameter specifies whether the quick handover is enabled.
0: NO; 1: YES
None
This parameter specifies the threshold of the half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH handover.
When an AMR call occupies a half-rate TCH, an intra-cell half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH
handover is triggered if the radio quality indication (RQI) remains lower than the
configured H2F HO Threshold for a predefined period. This parameter is used with the
Intracell F-H HO Stat Time and the Intracell F-H HO Last Time.
The lower the value of this parameter is set, the more
difficult the AMR half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH handover
can be triggered.
This parameter specifies the threshold of the full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH handover.
When an AMR call occupies a full-rate TCH, an intra-cell full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH
handover is triggered if the radio quality indication (RQI) remains higher than the
configured F2H HO Threshold for a predefined period. This parameter is used with the
Intracell F-H HO Stat Time and the Intracell F-H HO Last Time.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more
difficult the AMR full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH handover
can be triggered.
The intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover must conform to the P/N criterion. That is,
the triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are met for N
consecutive seconds with P measurement seconds.
This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. The triggering conditions of the
intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are the F2H HO Threshold or the H2F HO
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more
difficult the AMR handover can be triggered.
This parameter determines the period during which the triggering conditions of the intra-
cell full-rate to half-rate handover are met.
The intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover must conform to the P/N criterion. That is,
the triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are met for N
consecutive seconds with P measurement seconds.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more
difficult the AMR handover can be triggered.
This parameter specifies whether the AMR handover is enabled. This parameter does
not affect the dynamic non-AMR full-rate to half-rate handover.
The AMR handover can be triggered only when the Intracell
F-H HO Allowed parameter is set to Yes.
The M criterion supports the minimum value constraint of downlink receive level of an
adjacent cell.
Filtered downlink level of the adjacent cell >= (Minimum downlink power of the
candidate cell for handover + Minimum access level offset)
The M criterion is met if the Filtered uplink level of the adjacent cell >= (Minimum
1. This parameter must be properly set because it limits the
number of candidate cells. If this parameter is set to a too
great value, some desired cells may be excluded from the
candidate cells. If this parameter is set to a too small value,
an unwanted cell may become the candidate cell. This leads
The M criterion supports the minimum value constraint of uplink receive level of the
adjacent cell.
Expected uplink level of the adjacent cell >= (Min UP Power on HO Candidate Cell + Min
Access Level Offset)
The M criterion is met if the Filtered downlink level of the adjacent cell >= (Min DL
1. This parameter must be properly set because it limits the
number of candidate cells. If this parameter is set to a too
great value, some desired cells may be excluded from the
candidate cells. If this parameter is set to a too small value,
an unwanted cell may become the target cell. This leads to
This parameter specifies the hysteresis of an inter-layer or inter-priority handover. This
parameter is used to avoid inter-layer ping-pong handovers.
Actual Inter-layer HO Threshold of a serving cell = configured Inter-layer HO Threshold -
Inter-layer HO Hysteresis
Actual Inter-layer HO Threshold of an adjacent cell = configured Inter-layer HO
None
This parameter is one bit of the 16 bits that are used by the BSC to sort the candidate
cells for handovers.
The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
Note that in hierarchical handover and load handover, the
priority of the target cell must be higher than the Inter-layer
HO Threshold.
If the DL receive level of a cell is lower than the Inter-layer
HO Threshold, the cell is listed in the candidate cells based
This parameter specifies whether the inter-system handover and cell reselection are
allowed The inter-system handover includes the handover from a 2G cell to the adjacent
3G cell and from a 3G cell to the adjacent 2G cell.
When this parameter is set to Yes, the ECSC parameter should also be set to Yes.
None
According to the P/N criterion, if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering
conditions of PBGT handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a PBGT
handover is triggered and the MS is handed over to the adjacent cell.
This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more
difficult the PBGT handover can be triggered.
According to the P/N criterion, if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering
conditions of PBGT handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a PBGT
handover is triggered and the MS is handed over to the adjacent cell.
This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more
difficult the PBGT handover can be triggered.
According to the P/N criterion, if the signals in the candidate cell are better than those in
the serving cell for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a layered hierarchical
handover is triggered.
This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more
difficult the layered hierarchical handover can be triggered.
According to the P/N criterion, if the signals in the candidate cell are better than those in
the serving cell for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a layered hierarchical
handover is triggered.
This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more
difficult the layered hierarchical handover can be triggered.
According to the P/N criterion, if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering
conditions of edge handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an edge
handover to the adjacent cell is triggered.
This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more
difficult the edge handover can be triggered.
According to the P/N criterion, if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering
conditions of edge handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an edge
handover to the adjacent cell is triggered.
This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more
difficult the edge handover can be triggered.
According to the P/N criterion, if the UL or DL receive level is lower than its
corresponding edge handover threshold for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an
edge handover is triggered.
This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more
difficult the edge handover can be triggered.
According to the P/N criterion, if the UL or DL receive level is lower than its
corresponding edge handover threshold for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an
edge handover is triggered.
This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.
The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more
difficult the edge handover can be triggered.
If the DL receive level remains lower than the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold for a
period, the edge handover is triggered. If the PBGT handover is enabled, the relevant
edge handover threshold can be decreased. If the PBGT handover is not enabled and the
edge handover threshold is not properly set, cross coverage, co-channel interference,
and adjacent channel interference are likely to occur. The Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold
This parameter should be adjusted as required. If the Edge
HO DL RX_LEV Threshold is set to a too small value, call
drop may easily occur. If the PBGT handover is enabled, the
relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased.
If the UL receive level remains lower than the Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold for a
period, the edge handover is triggered. If the PBGT handover is enabled, the relevant
edge handover threshold can be decreased. If the PBGT handover is not enabled and the
edge handover threshold is not properly set, cross coverage, co-channel interference,
and adjacent channel interference are likely to occur. The Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold
This parameter should be adjusted as required. If the Edge
HO UL RX_LEV Threshold is set to a too small value, call
drop may easily occur. If the PBGT handover is enabled, the
relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased.
This parameter specifies whether the interference handover is enabled.
When the receive level is higher the receive level threshold but the transmission quality
is lower than the interference handover quality threshold, the interference handover is
triggered. In other words, the MS is interfered and needs to be handed over.
None
This parameter specifies whether the concentric cell handover is enabled. The
concentric cell is used to achieve the wide coverage of the UL subcell and the aggressive
frequency reuse of the OL subcell. The concentric cell handover can improve system
capacity and conversation quality. The concentric cell handover can be classified into the
UL subcell to OL subcell handover and the OL subcell to UL subcell handover.
None
This parameter specifies whether the time advance (TA) handover is enabled. The TA
handover determines whether the timing advance (TA) is higher than the predefined TA
threshold. When the TA is higher than the predefined TA threshold, a TA handover is
triggered. The TA is calculated based on the distance between the MS and the BTS. The
longer the distance is, the greater the TA value is.
None
This parameter specifies whether the bad quality (BQ) handover is enabled. Whether a
BQ handover should be enabled depends on the UL and DL transmission quality (BER).
When the UL signal quality or the DL signal quality exceeds the BQ handover threshold.
a BQ emergency handover is performed. A rise in BER may result from too low a signal
level or channel interference.
None
This parameter specifies whether to enable the edge handover algorithm. When an MS
makes a call at the edge of a cell, the call may drop if the receive level is too low. To
avoid such a call drop, an edge handover can be performed. When the UL receive level
of the serving cell is lower than the Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold or the DL receive
level of the serving cell is lower than the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold, the MS is
Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to Yes. In
other words, the edge handover algorithm is enabled.
This parameter specifies whether the layered hierarchical handover is enabled. Cells are
set to different layers and different priorities to implement the layered hierarchical
handover. Then, based on the layers and priorities, calls are handed over to the cells
with high priority (priority is related to Layer of the Cell and Cell Priority).
The lower the layer is, the higher the priority is. The lower
the hierarchy is, the higher the priority is. The layered
hierarchical handover cannot be triggered if the serving cell
has the highest priority in the queue or if the level of the
target cell is lower than the Inter-layer HO Threshold.
This parameter specifies whether to enable the PBGT (POWER BUDGET) handover
algorithm. Based on the path loss, the BSC uses the PBGT handover algorithm to search
for a desired cell in real time and decides whether a handover should be performed. The
cell must have less path loss and meet specific requirements. To avoid ping-pong
handovers, the PBGT handover can be performed only on TCHs between the cells of the
Huawei recommends that the PBGT handover algorithm be
enabled. Proper use of PBGT handovers helps to reduce
cross coverage and to avoid co-channel interference and
adjacent channel interference.
This parameter specifies whether to enable the rapid level drop handover. When this
function is enabled, an MS can be handed over to a new cell before the occurrence call
drop caused by the rapid drop of the receive level of the MS.
In dual-band networking mode for densely populated urban
areas, the level drops rapidly due to multiple barriers. The
propagation loss of the 1800 MHz frequency band is greater
than the propagation loss of the 900 MHz frequency band.
Considering the preceding factors, you can enable the
This parameter specifies whether an MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed
over to a macro cell. If this parameter is set to Yes, the MS that moves fast in a micro
cell can be handed over to a macro cell, thus reducing the number of handovers. It is
recommended that this handover be applied only in special areas such as highways to
reduce the CPU load. The fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used
It is recommended that this handover be applied only in
special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. The
fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used
only in special conditions.
This parameter specifies whether a traffic load-sharing handover is enabled.
The load handover helps to reduce cell congestion, improve success rate of channel
assignment, and balance the traffic load among cells, thus improving the network
performance. The load handover functions between the TCHs within one BSC or the
TCHs in the cells of the same layer.
If this parameter is set to YES, extra interference may be
introduced when aggressive frequency reuse pattern is
used.
This parameter specifies whether the intra-cell handover is enabled. Note: A forced intra-
cell handover is not subject to this parameter.
Yes for hot-spot areas; densely populated urban areas,
common urban areas, suburbs, and rural areas; No for high-
speed circumstances
This parameter specifies whether a handover between signaling channels is enabled.
When the authentication and ciphering procedures are
enabled on the existing network, this parameter can be set
to Yes.
This parameter specifies whether to adjust the sequence of candidate cells. After the
sequence is adjusted, the handover within the same BSC/MSC takes priority.
If this parameter is set to Yes, the target cell to which the
MS is handed over may not be the cell with the best signal
quality.
The Cell Reselect Penalty Time (PT for short) is used to ensure the safety and validity of
cell reselection because it helps to avoid frequent cell reselection. For details, see GSM
Rec. 05.08 and 04.08.
This parameter applies to only GSM Phase II MSs.
None
This parameter specifies the temporary correction of C2. This parameter is valid only
before the penalty time of cell reselection expires. For details, see GSM Rec. 0508 and
0408.
This parameter applies only to GSM Phase II MSs.
None
This parameter Additional Reselect Param Indication (ACS) is used to inform an MS
where cell reselection parameters can be obtained.
If this parameter is set to 0, the MS should obtain PI and other parameters for
calculating C2 from other bytes of the system information type 4 message. If this
parameter is set to 1, the MS should obtain PI and other parameters for calculating C2
None
This parameter specifies the manual correction of C2.
If this parameter is properly configured, the number of handovers can be reduced and a
better cell can be assigned to the MS. When PT is set to 31, it becomes more difficult for
an MS to access the cell when CRO increases.
Generally, the CRO should be less than 25 dB because excessively large CRO may bring
The settings of RXLEV-ACCESS-MIN and CRO should
guarantee that cells with same priority have the same cell
reselect offset.
This parameter Cell Bar Qualify (CBQ) is valid only for cell selection. It is invalid for cell
reselection.
1: barred
0: allowed
Together with CBA, this parameter determines the priority of cells. For details, see GSM
The value of CBQ affects the access of the MS to the
system.
Cell Reselect Parameters Indication (PI for short), sent on the broadcast channel,
indicates whether CRO, TO, and PT are used.
Actually, the MS is informed whether C2-based cell reselection is performed. For details,
see GSM Rec. 0408 and 0508.In addition, a least interval of 5s is required for C2-based
cell reselection to avoid frequent cell reselection.
The MS obtains C1 and C2 of the serving cell at a minimum
interval of 5s. When necessary, the MS re-calculates C1 and
C2 value of all non-serving cells (adjacent cells). The MS
constantly checks whether a cell reselection is required by
referring to following conditions:
This parameter is used to determine whether cell reselection is performed between
different LACs. This parameter can prevent frequent location update, thus lowering the
possibility of losing paging messages. For details, see the description of the cell
reselection hysteresis.
An MS does not respond to pagings during location update.
Thus, the connection rate drops if cell reselection is
performed.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, ping-pong
location updates occur and the signaling load on the SDCCH
This parameter specifies the length of the timer for periodic location update.
In the VLR, a regular location update timer is defined. When the location update period
decreases, the service performance is improved. When the signaling traffic of the
network increases, the usage of radio resources drops.In addition, when the location
update period decreases, the MS power consumption increases, and the average
It is recommended that you select a greater value, such as
16, 20, or 25, in the area with heavy traffic, but a smaller
value, such as 2 or 3, in the area with light traffic.
To properly specify the value of this parameter, it is
This parameter specifies the number of multi-frames in a cycle on the paging channel,
that is, the number of paging sub-channels on a specific paging channel.
In actual situation, an MS monitors only the associated paging sub-channel. For details,
see GSM Rec. 05.02 and 05.08.
If the value of this parameter increases, the number of paging sub-channels in a cell
The larger this parameter is set, the larger the number of
paging sub-channels in a cell and the smaller the number of
MSs on each paging sub-channel. Setting this parameter
larger can prolong the average service life of MS batteries
but increase the delay of paging messages and reduce the
This parameter specifies the number of CCCH blocks reserved for the AGCH. After the
CCCH is configured, this parameter actually indicates the CCCH usage for AGCH and
PCH.
This parameter affects the paging response time of an MS and the system performance.
None
This parameter specifies the NCCs to be reported by the MSs in a cell. This parameter is
an information element (IE) in the system information type 2 and 6 messages.
If a bit in the value of this parameter is set to 1, the MS reports the corresponding
measurement report to the BTS. The value of this parameter has a byte (eight bits). Each
bit maps with an NCC (0-7) and the most significant bit corresponds to NCC 7. If bit N is
The most significant three bits of BSIC for all cells map with
the NCC. NCC Permitted should be set properly to avoid too
many call drops.
This parameter specifies the cell bar access (CBA).
Value 0 indicates that cell access is allowed.
Value 1 indicates that cell access is not allowed.
Together with CBQ, this parameter can be used to determine the priority of cells. For
details, see GSM Rec. 04.08.
The CBA function applies to special conditions. If this
parameter is set to 1 and Cell Bar Quality (CBQ) is set to 0,
only handovers are allowed in a cell, and direct access of an
MS is not allowed. This condition applies to a dual-network
coverage cell. For a common cell, this parameter should be
This parameter specifies the number of timeslots between the consecutive
transmissions of channel request messages by an MS.
To reduce the collisions on the RACH and to improve the efficiency of the RACH, an
access algorithm is defined in GSM Rec. 04.08. The algorithm specifies three
parameters: Tx-integer (T for short), maximum number of retransmissions (RET), and S
If the number of RACH conflicts in a cell is small, T should be
set to a great value. If the number of RACH conflicts in a cell
is large, T should be set to a small value. The increase in T
and S prolongs the access time of an MS, thus affecting the
access performance of the whole network. Therefore,
This parameter specifies whether to enable the Attach-detach allowed (ATT) function.
For different cells in the same LAC, their ATTs must be the same.
If this parameter is set to Yes, network connection is not provided after the MS is
powered off, thus saving the network processing time and network resources.
None
If the TC resources are changed before and after the handover, this needs to keep the
test duration for continuously transmitting the uplink data of the old channel. If TDM
transmission is used on the Abis interface, this parameter is set to 10 ms; if IP
transmission is used on the Abis interface, this parameter is set to 20 ms.
None
When the BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and current call adopts the AMRHR
encoding mode, the timer T3109 (AMRHR) is initiated. If the BSC receives the
ReleaseIndication message before the T3109 (AMRHR) timer expires, the timer T3109
(AMRHR) stops; if the timer T3109 (AMRHR) expires, the BSC deactivates the channel.
If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the
channel resources and cause the congestion.
When the BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and current call adopts the AMRFR
encoding mode, the timer T3109 (AMRFR) is initiated. If the BSC receives the
ReleaseIndication message before the T3109 (AMRFR) timer expires, the timer T3109
(AMRFR) stops; if the timer T3109 (AMRFR) expires, the BSC deactivates the channel.
If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the
channel resources and cause the congestion.
In an intra-cell handover, the timer T3103C is initiated after the BSC receives the
HANDOVER COMMAND from target channel. The timer stops after the BSC receives the
HANDOVER COMPLETE message. After the timer expires, the BSC sends a handover
failure message.
If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the
channel resources and cause the congestion.
If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the
handover success rate.
This parameter specifies the timer carried by the WaitIndcation information element
when the BSC sends an immediate assignment reject message to an MS.
After the MS receives the immediate assignment reject message, the MS makes another
attempt to access the network after the timer expires.
If this timer is set to a lower value, this may increase the
channel load and influence the access success rate.
For the call on the TCH in stable state, the timer is initiated when the ERROR
INDICATION, CONNECTION FAILURE INDICATION, and RELEASE INDICATION messages
are received, and the call reestablishment allowed is set to Yes for the cell where the call
is. Upon receipt of a CLEAR COMMAND message from the MSC, the timer stops. The
BSC sends a CLEAR REQUEST message after the timer expires.
If this timer is set to a higher value, this seizes the radio
resources too much, and influences the channel resource
utilization.
If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the
call reestablishment success rate.
This parameter specifies the connection release delay timer that is used to delay the
channel deactivation after the main signaling link is disconnected, and the purpose is to
reserve a period of time for repeated link disconnections.
The timer T311 is initiated when the BSC receives the REL_IND message from the BTS.
the RF CHAN REL message is sent to the BTS after the timer expires.
If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the
channel resources and cause the congestion.
The BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and enables the timer T3109. If the BSC
receives the ReleaseIndication message before the timer T3109 stops; the BSC
deactivates the channel, if the timer T3109 expires.
If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the
channel resources and cause the congestion.
This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover success message after a
handover command is sent in an outgoing BSC handover. If the timer expires, the
outgoing BSC handover fails.
If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the
channel resources and cause the congestion.
If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the
handover success rate.
This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover complete message after a
handover request acknowledgment message is sent by the BSC in 2G/3G handover or
inter-BSC handover. If the timer expires, The MS reports a Clear REQ message.
If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the
channel resources and cause the congestion.
If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the
handover success rate.
After the BSC sends a handover command, the timer T3107 is initiated. Before the timer
T3107 expires, the timer T3107 stops if the BSC receives a handover complete message.
After the timer T3107 expires, the BSC sends a handover failure message.
If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the
channel resources and cause the congestion.
If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the
assignment success rate.
In an outgoing BSC handover, after the BSC sends a handover request message, the
timer T7 is initiated. Before the timer T7 expires, the timer T7 stops if the BSC receives a
handover acknowledgment message. After the timer T7 expires, the BSC sends an
outgoing BSC handover failure message.
If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the
channel resources and cause the congestion.
If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the
handover success rate.
In an intra-BSC handover, the timer T3103 is initiated after the BSC sends a handover
command. Before the timer T3103 expires, the timer stops if the BSC receives a
Handover Complete message. After the timer expires, the BSC sends a handover failure
message.
If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the
channel resources and cause the congestion.
If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the
handover success rate.
The timer is initiated after the BSC sends the CR message; if the BSC receives the CC
message before the timer expires, the timer stops; if the timer expires, the BSS releases
the seized SDCCH channel.
If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the
channel resources and cause the congestion.
This parameter specifies the timer used in the immediate assignment procedure.
The T3101 is started when the BSC sends an IMM ASS message to the BTS. If the BSC
receives an EST IND message before T3101 expires, T3101 is stopped; if T3101 expires
before the BSC receives an EST IND message, the BSS releases the seized SDCCH.
If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the
channel resources and cause the congestion.
If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the
immediate assignment success rate.
Send Classmark Enquiring Result To MSC Enable. None
Enquire Classmark After In-BSC Handover Enable. None
This parameter specifies whether a cell configured with baseband frequency hopping
supports the intelligent power consumption decrease.
None
Qtru Signal Merge Switch
The QTRU signal merge algorithm is to prevent the calls with great difference between
uplink signal strengths from assigning in the same timeslot.
The BSC monitors the high-level signal and overwhelms the low-level signal per 0.5
second. If the highest uplink signal strength of a timeslot the lowest uplink signal
None
This parameter specifies the maximum number of paging messages that a cell is allowed
to send within a statistical period.
None
This parameter specifies the average number of paging messages that a cell is allowed
to send within a statistical period.
None
This parameter specifies the maximum number of messages in the buffer of the cell
paging group packet when the Paging Messages Optimize at Abis Interface is turned on.
None
This parameter specifies the interval between two cell paging group packets, which is an
integral multiple of 50 ms.
None
The cell paging message packaging is determined by the system load. If the paging
message packaging timer is enabled, the paging messages are packaged according to
cells; otherwise, the paging messages are packaged according to the CPU.
None
This parameter specifies which type of interference band statistics algorithm to use, that
is, whether interference band statistics algorithm I or interference band statistics
algorithm II, when the frequency scanning function is enabled.
None
This parameter specifies whether the BSC reports a cell out-of-service alarm after the
cell is out of service.
When this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC reports a cell out-of-service alarm if the cell
is out of service.
When this parameter is set to No, the BSC does not report a cell out-of-service alarm if
None
This parameter specifies whether the CS services preempt the sublink resources of PS
services of low-level BTS for cascaded BTSs if the current-level sublink cannot be
preempted.
None
This parameter specifies whether the CS services preempt the sublink resources of PS
services.
None
This parameter specifies whether the MS is forced to send a handover access message. None
This parameter specifies whether the MS can be handed over to another channel
through assignment procedure in intra-cell handover. If this parameter is set to Yes, the
assignment procedure can be used for all types of intra-cell handovers.
The assignment procedure can reduce the duration of intra-
cell handover.
Frequency scanning refers to the scanning of uplink receive levels of cell frequencies.
The scanning result reflects the strength of frequency signals received by the cell.
This parameter specifies the scanning result type used from the start of a frequency
scanning task to the reporting of a scanning result.
Main/Diversity: current, minimum, maximum, and mean values of the main and
None
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by intra-cell handover
timeout are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are
None
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by intra-BSC out-cell
handover are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are
None
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by outgoing-BSC
handover are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are
None
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by incoming-BSC
handover are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are
None
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by resource check are
not contained in the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are
None
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by no MRs for a long
time for the MS are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are
None
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by forced handover
failure are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are
None
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by equipment fault
are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are
None
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by Abis territorial link
fault are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are
None
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the connection failure message is sent by
the BTS because the release indication message is sent or the waiting period of call
reestablishment times out, the call drops caused by this reason are not contained in the
None
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized,the call drops caused by the reasons except
for the radio link failure, handover access failure, OM intervention, and radio resource
unavailable are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
None
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by radio resource
unavailable are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are
None
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by OM intervention
are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are
None
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
In optimization, the call drops caused by handover access failure are not contained in
the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are
None
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by radio link failure
are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are
None
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by sequence error are
not contained in the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are
None
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by unsolicited DM
response are not contained in the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are
None
0 specifies optimization.
1 specifies no optimization.
When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by T200 timeout are
not contained in the statistics of call drops.
When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are
None
This parameter specifies whether the repeater is configured in a cell. The function of
repeater is simpler than that of BTS, and the repeater is an extended equipment that is
used for the wide area or indoor application solving the problem of blind area. Not only
the repeater can improve the base station coverage, but also increase the total traffic
volume of network.
If this parameter is set to Yes, the asynchronous handover is
performed in intra-BSC handover; otherwise, the
synchronous handover is performed.
This parameter specifies the delay of TRX aiding detection performed after the cell is
initialized.
The cell is unstable after initialization; therefore, if the TRX aiding detection starts
immediately after cell initialization, a wrong decision might be made. In such a case, this
parameter is used to specify a delay.
If the parameter is set too small, a wrong decision might be
made in TRX aiding detection; if the parameter is set too
large, a faulty main-BCCH might lead to delayed triggering
of TRX aiding function after cell initialization.
This parameter specifies whether to allow flow control on the Abis interface.
The flow control function applies to the call management. When the BSS is congested,
some service requests are rejected or delayed so that the system load decreases. The
flow control on the Abis interface is mainly used to balance the system load caused by
Abis flow.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the BSC initiates
cell flow control when receiving the RACH overload
message from the BTS. That is, the minimum receive level
of MSs is increased to reduce RACH access requests.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the BTS sends
This parameter specifies whether to support the half-rate service in this cell. It is one of
the cell reselection parameters in the system information type 3 message.
None
This parameter specifies the maximum transmit power level of MSs. It is one of the cell
re-selection parameters in the system information type 3 message.
This parameter is used to control the transmit power of MSs. For details, see GSM Rec.
05.05.
In a GSM900 cell, the maximum power control level of the MS ranges from 0 to 19,
None
This parameter is contained in the Cell Options IE of the system information type 3 and
6 messages.
If this parameter is set to Yes, the receive level of the MS equals the measured receive
level in FH minus the receive level obtained from the timeslots on the BCCH TRX.
None
This parameter is imported with the requested bandwidth when the assignment request
is sent. The actual bandwidth assigned to a user is the value of multiplying the
requested bandwidth by the ActGene.
The parameter here is the value of the actual ActGene multiplied by 10 in fact. When
the resources are allocated in practice, the total bandwidth is expanded by ten times.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, a wider bandwidth
is occupied by services.
This parameter specifies the priority of the PS low priority service.
The higher the value of this parameter is, the larger the
proportion of discarded packets is. Thus, the priority value
of the major service should be smaller than that of the
minor service. It is recommended that the default value be
used.
This parameter specifies the priority of the PS high priority service.
The higher the value of this parameter is, the larger the
proportion of discarded packets is. Thus, the priority value
of the major service should be smaller than that of the
minor service. It is recommended that the default value be
used.
This parameter specifies the priority of the CS data service.
The higher the value of this parameter is, the larger the
proportion of discarded packets is. Thus, the priority value
of the major service should be smaller than that of the
minor service. It is recommended that the default value be
used.
This parameter specifies the priority of the CS voice service.
The higher the value of this parameter is, the larger the
proportion of discarded packets is. Thus, the priority value
of the major service should be smaller than that of the
minor service. It is recommended that the default value be
used.
This parameter specifies the included angle formed by the major lobe azimuth of the
antennas in two cells under one BTS. The major lobe azimuth is measured from the
north to the direction of the cell antenna in a clockwise direction.
None
This parameter is calculated according to the Included Angle and the actual Antenna
Azimuth Angle. The Included Angle refers to the coverage area of the cell.
Antenna Azimuth Angle = actual Antenna Azimuth Angle - Included Angle/2
None
This parameter specifies the number of RACH burst timeslots in a RACH load
measurement.
The value of this parameter indicates the interval during which the BSC determines
whether an RACH timeslot is busy. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58.
If the value of this parameter is too small, the BTS
frequently sends the overload messages to the BSC. Thus,
the system resource utilization decreases and MSs cannot
access the network.
If the value of this parameter is too great, the BTS sends an
This parameter specifies the interval for the BTS to send the overload indication
message to the BSC.
The overload causes include TRX processor overload, downlink CCCH overload, and
AGCH overload. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58.
If the value of this parameter is too small, the BTS
frequently reports overload indication messages to the BSC.
As a result, the BSC frequently reports overload indication
messages to the MSC and thus the MSC may initiate flow
control. If the value of this parameter is too great, the BTS
This parameter is used by the BTS to inform the BSC of the load on a CCCH timeslot,
that is, the load of the access requests on the RACH and the load of all the messages
(such as paging messages and packet immediate assignment messages) on the PCH. For
details, see GSM Rec. 08.58.
If the load on a CCCH timeslot exceeds the value of this parameter, the BTS periodically
If the value of this parameter is too small, the signaling
traffic on the Abis interface increases and thus the load of
the BSC increases. If the value of this parameter is too
great, the BSC cannot process the exceptions in the BTS in
time.
This parameter specifies the interval for sending the overload messages.
This parameter is used by a BTS to inform the BSC of the load on a CCCH timeslot.For
details, see GSM Rec. 08.58.If the load on a CCCH timeslot exceeds the CCCH Load
Threshold, the BTS periodically sends the CCCH overload message to the BSC. The CCCH
overload messages include the uplink RACH overload messages and the downlink PCH
If this parameter is set to a too small value, RF resource
status is reported frequently and thus the load of the BSC is
increased. If this parameter is set to a too great value, RF
resource status is not updated in time. Therefore, the BSC
cannot handle the interference in the BTS in time.
This parameter specifies the interval for the BTS to send radio resource indication
messages, informing the BSC of the interference levels on idle channels of a TRX. In the
radio resource indication message, the TRX reports the interference level of each idle
channel in the measurement period.
For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58 and 08.08.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, radio resource
indication messages are reported frequently and thus the
load of the BSC is increased.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, radio resource
status is not immediately reported and thus the BSC cannot
The value of this parameter has 16 bits. The most significant bit indicates whether the
parameter is valid. Bits 14-8 indicate the level threshold. Bits 7-0 indicate the BER
threshold.
The BTS adjusts the MS frequency according to the value of this parameter.
None
This parameter is used for the fast-moving handover decision. If this parameter is set to
Yes, the BTS calculates the speed at which the MS moves towards or away from the BTS,
and reports the speed to the BSC through the uplink MR.
None
This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm.
This parameter together with VSWR TRX Error Threshold is used to detect whether the
antenna system connected to the TRX is faulty. If this parameter is set to a small value,
the error is small.
None
This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm.
This parameter together with VSWR TRX Error Threshold is used to detect whether the
antenna system connected to the TRX is faulty.
If this parameter is set to a small value, the error is small.
This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. When the output
power of a TRX of a transmitter is lower than a fixed level, an error is generated.The
Power output error threshold and Power output reduction threshold indicate the two
thresholds of the error.If the value of this parameter is greater, the error is smaller.
None
This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm.
When the output power of a TRX of a transmitter is lower than a fixed level, an error is
generated.The Power output error threshold and Power output reduction threshold
indicate the two thresholds of the error.
If this parameter is set to a great value, the error is small.
For the BTS2X, this parameter is used to compensate the difference of RSSI between the
time the tower-mounted amplifier (TMA) is installed and the time the TMA is not
installed.
The value of this parameter when the tower-mounted amplifier is not installed is 3
greater than that when the tower-mounted amplifier is installed.
None
This parameter specifies the start frame number of the BTS. It is used to synchronize the
MS and the BTS after the BTS is re-initialized.
The frame offset technology arranges the frame numbers of different cells under the
same BTS to be different from one another by one frame offset. Thus, the FCH and SCH
signals of adjacent cells do not appear in the same frame to facilitate the MS decoding.
For the BTS2X, BTS3001C, BTS3001C+, and BTS3002C, this
parameter is invalid. For other BTSs, this parameter is valid.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of levels by which the BTS RF power
decreases. The decrease in the BTS RF power is implemented through dynamic power
control and static power control.
For the BTS2X, this parameter is shielded. For the BTS3X and double-transceiver BTS,
this parameter is invalid.
If the value of this parameter is too great, the BTS power
reduces too much. If the value of this parameter is too
small, the BTS power reduces less and the power reduction
effect is not good.
This parameter specifies the period during which interference levels are averaged.
Before the BTS sends the radio resource indication message to the BSC, the interference
levels on the idle channels in the period specified by this parameter are averaged. The
result is used to classify the interference levels on the idle channels into five interference
bands.
If the value of this parameter is too great, the average result
cannot reflect the change correctly. If the value of this
parameter is too small, the averaging is performed too
frequently and resources are wasted.
This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement.
The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates
and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to
assign channels.
According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified
None
This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement.
The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates
and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to
assign channels.
According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified
None
This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement.
The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates
and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to
assign channels.
According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified
None
This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement.
The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates
and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to
assign channels.
According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified
None
This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement.
The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates
and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to
assign channels.
According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified
None
This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement.
The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates
and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to
assign channels.
According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified
None
If Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable is set to Yes, the directed try procedure is started if
the following two conditions are met: The cell supports the directed try procedure. The
load of the cell is greater than or equal to the Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold.
None
This parameter specifies whether to support DRX. To reduce the power consumption,
the discontinuous reception mechanism (DRX) is introduced to the GSM. The MS that
supports the DRX consumes less power to receive broadcast messages that the MSs are
interested in. This prolongs the service time of the MS battery.
The BSC that supports the DRX should send the dispatching message to MSs so that the
None
This parameter specifies the data service supported.
This value of the parameter can be set as required.
0000000001: indicates that only the NT14.5K data service is supported.
0000000010: indicates that only the NT12K data service is supported.
0000000100: indicates that only the NT6K data service is supported.
None
If this parameter is set to StartUp, the BTS transmit power is adjusted to the maximum
before the BSC sends a handover command to the MS. In addition, the BTS transmit
power is not adjusted during the handover to ensure the success of the handover.
When the receive level of an MS drops rapidly, a handover occurs. In this case, the BSC
cannot adjust the transmit power of the MS and BTS in time. The MS may fail to receive
If this parameter is set to StartUp, the probability that the
BTS transmits at full power increases. The interference
increases. The handover success rate, however, is increased
to some extent.
This parameter specifies whether the BTS reports the voice quality index (VQI). If this
parameter is set to Report, the BTS reports the VQI. The BSC measures the traffic on a
per VQI basis. There are 11 levels of speech quality. If the level is low, the speech quality
is good. The traffic related to AMR and non-AMR is measured separately, and thus the
speech quality is monitored.
For V9R3 and later, the VQI can be measured and reported.
This parameter specifies whether to permit the low noise amplifier (LNA) bypass.
For the BTS3002C, if each cell is configured with two TRXs
(O2 or S2), Diversity LNA Bypass Permitted is set to Yes. The
RF connection supports the configuration of the main and
diversity antennas. This parameter is configured for only the
BTS3002C.
This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies
participate in FH is 8. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell,
the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC
needs to consider this gain.
None
This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies
participate in FH is 7. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell,
the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC
needs to consider this gain.
None
This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies
participate in FH is 6. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell,
the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC
needs to consider this gain.
None
This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies
participate in FH is 5. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell,
the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC
needs to consider this gain.
None
This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies
participate in FH is 4. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell,
the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC
needs to consider this gain.
None
This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies
participate in FH is 3. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell,
the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC
needs to consider this gain.
None
This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies
participate in FH is 2. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell,
the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC
needs to consider this gain.
None
This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies
participate in FH is 1.When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell,
the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC
needs to consider this gain.
None
This parameter specifies the maximum permissible adjustment step when the BSC
increases the uplink transmit power.
None
This parameter specifies the maximum permissible adjustment step when the BSC
decreases the uplink transmit power.
None
This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call, and when the uplink
receive quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
None
This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call, and when the uplink
receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
None
This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call, and when the uplink receive
quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
None
This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call, and when the downlink
receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
None
This parameter specifies current call is a half-rate call, and when the uplink receive
quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
None
This parameter specifies current call is a half-rate call, and when the uplink receive
quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
None
This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the uplink receive
quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
None
This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the downlink receive
quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
None
When the receive level is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is
performed.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm
to -47 dBm).
None
When the receive level is higher than the threshold, Huawei III power control is
performed.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm
to -47 dBm).
None
This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive quality in the uplink
power control.
None
This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive level in the uplink
power control.
None
This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of
downlink receive quality.
None
This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of uplink
receive level.
None
This parameter specifies a constant value in the uplink receive quality exponential
filtering formula.
None
This parameter specifies a constant value in the uplink receive level exponential filtering
formula.
None
This parameter specifies the maximum permissible up adjustment step when the BSC
increases the downlink power.
None
This parameter specifies the maximum allowed adjustment step when the BSC
decreases the downlink transmit power.
None
This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call, and when the downlink
receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
None
This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call, and when the downlink
receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
None
This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call, and when the downlink
receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
None
This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call, and when the downlink
receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
None
This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the downlink receive
quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
None
This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the downlink receive
quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
None
This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the downlink receive
quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
None
This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the downlink receive
quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
None
When the receive level is higher than the threshold, the downlink power control is
performed.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm
to -47 dBm).
None
When the receive level is higher than the threshold, the downlink power control is
performed.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm
to -47 dBm).
None
This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive quality in the downlink
power control.
None
This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive level in the downlink
power control.
None
This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of
downlink receive quality.
None
This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of
downlink receive level.
None
This parameter specifies a constant value in the downlink receive quality exponential
filtering formula.
None
This parameter specifies a constant value in the downlink receive level exponential
filtering formula.
None
This parameter specifies the maximum number of discarded MRs allowed on the TCH in
a power control period.
None
This parameter specifies the maximum number of discarded MRs allowed on the SDCCH
in a power control period.
None
This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive uplink power
control commands.
None
This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive uplink power
control commands. None
When the number of missing MRs in a power control period exceeds the value of this
parameter, the power control stops.
None
This parameter specifies the maximum range of dynamic power adjustment for the BTS.
0-16 (0 dB to 30 dB in steps of 2 dB)
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the dynamic power
adjustment capability of the BTS is lowered.
In downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to DL
Qual. Bad Trig Threshold, the value of DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold contains the value of
DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff.
None
In downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to this
threshold, then the actual DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain DL Qual. Bad
UpLEVDiff. This parameter further improves the expected level of the downlink power
control.
Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2%
None
In uplink power control, if the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to UL Qual.
Bad Trig Threshold, then the actual UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL Qual.
Bad UpLEVDiff.
None
In the uplink power control, if the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to this
threshold, then UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff.
This parameter further improves the expected level of the uplink power control.
Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2%
Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4%
None
This parameter specifies the maximum permissible down adjustment step based on the
receive quality.
None
This parameter specifies the maximum permissible up adjustment step based on the
receive level.
None
This parameter specifies the maximum permissible down adjustment step based on the
receive quality.
None
This parameter specifies the AMR maximum down adjustment step permitted by the
quality zone 2 (the RQ value is greater than or equal to 3) based on the signal level.
In the Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three grades
(0, 1-2, 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). Every quality zone has different maximum
permissible down adjustment step.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the algorithm
cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to
a higher value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be
guaranteed.
This parameter specifies the AMR maximum down adjustment step permitted by the
quality zone 1 (the RQ value is greater than 0 and less than 3) based on the signal level.
In the Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three grades
(0, 1-2, 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). Every quality zone has different maximum
permissible down adjustment step.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the algorithm
cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to
a higher value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be
guaranteed.
This parameter specifies the maximum step length in decreasing the signal level in
power control when the RQ is 0.
In the Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three grades
(0, 1-2, 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). Every quality zone has different maximum
permissible down adjustment step.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the algorithm
cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to
a higher value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be
guaranteed.
When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper
threshold and the lower threshold of the stable state quality zone are set. When the
signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power
control is performed. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the downlink
quality for power control.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the quality is poor
without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is
degraded; conversely, the quality is good without power
control. Thus, the battery life is reduced.
When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper
threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality
exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is
performed. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the downlink quality for
power control.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is
good without power control. Thus, the battery life is
reduced and the network interference is increased. If this
parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor
without power control, thus the conversation quality is
The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an
upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level
is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed
only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.
The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level
becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life
is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this
parameter is set to a too small value, the downlink level
becomes low, and call drop may easily occur.
The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an
upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level
is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed
only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.
The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level
becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life
is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this
parameter is set to a too small value, the downlink level
becomes low, and call drop may easily occur.
When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper
threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality
exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is
performed. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the uplink quality for power
control.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is
poor without power control. Thus, the conversation quality
is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the
quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life
is reduced.
When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper
threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality
exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is
performed.
This parameter determines the uplink quality upper threshold of the quality zone.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is
good without power control. Thus, the battery life is
reduced and the network interference is increased. If this
parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor
without power control, thus the conversation quality is
The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an
upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level
is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed
only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.
The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level
becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life
is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this
parameter is set to a too small value, the uplink level
becomes low, and call drop may easily occur.
The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an
upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level
is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed
only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.
The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level
becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life
is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this
parameter is set to a too small value, the uplink level
becomes low, and call drop may easily occur.
This parameter specifies the number of downlink measurement reports used for
predicting the level in power control.
In Huawei II power control algorithm, the average filter value in the history
measurement report is not used for power control decision. Instead, the prediction
function is applied in the filter to compensate the delay of power adjustment.
None
This parameter specifies the number of uplink measurement reports used for predicting
the level in power control.
In Huawei II power control algorithm, the average filter value in the history
measurement report is not used for power control decision. Instead, the prediction
function is applied in the filter to compensate the delay of power adjustment.
None
This parameter specifies whether the compensation of AMR measurement reports is
allowed by Huawei II power control algorithm.
When this parameter is set to Yes, the Huawei II power control algorithm puts the
currently received measurement reports in the measurement report compensation
queue and then records the change of the transmit power based on the MS power and
If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC or BTS puts the
currently received measurement reports in the
measurement report compensation queue and then records
the change of the transmit power based on the MS power
and the BTS power in the measurement report.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating
the average value of the downlink signal quality before the BTS power adjustment.
On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the
network calculates the average value of the downlink signal
quality. This average value indicates the radio environment
of the BTS. When you configure this parameter, you must
consider the delay and accuracy of the average value
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating
the average value of the uplink signal quality before the MS power adjustment.
On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the
network calculates the average value of the uplink signal
quality. This average value indicates the radio environment
of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must
consider the delay and accuracy of the average value
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating
the average value of the downlink signal strength before the BTS power adjustment.
On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the
network calculates the average value of the downlink signal
levels. This average value indicates the radio environment
of the BTS. When you configure this parameter, you must
consider the delay and accuracy of the average value
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating
the average value of the uplink signal strength before the AMR MS power adjustment.
On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the
network calculates the average value of the uplink signal
levels. This average value indicates the radio environment
of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must
consider the delay and accuracy of the average value
This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous AMR
power control commands.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the power
control may be delayed. If this parameter is set to a too
small value, the power control may be performed
frequently, thus wasting the resources.
This parameter specifies the maximum range of dynamic power adjustment for the
BTS.Class 0 to class 15 corresponds to 0 dB to 30 dB, with a step of 2 dB. If this
parameter is set 5, the power ranges from class 0 to class 4.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the dynamic
power adjustment capability of the BTS is lowered.
In downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality is higher than or equal to the
DL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold, the value of DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold contains the value
of the DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff.
None
In downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to the
value of this parameter, then the actual DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain DL
Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff. This parameter further improves the expected level of the
downlink power control.
Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2%
None
In uplink power control, if the uplink receive quality is higher than or equal to the UL
Qual. Bad Trig Threshold, then the actual UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL
Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff.
None
In the uplink power control, if the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to the
value of this parameter, then UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL Qual Bad
UpLEVDiff. This parameter further improves the expected level of the uplink power
control.
Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2%
None
This parameter determines the maximum permissible up adjustment step based on the
signal quality.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the algorithm
cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to
a too great value, the effectiveness of power control cannot
be guaranteed.
This parameter determines the maximum permissible up adjustment step based on the
receive level.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the algorithm
cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to
a too great value, the effectiveness of power control cannot
be guaranteed.
This parameter determines the maximum permissible down adjustment step based on
the receive quality.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the algorithm
cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to
a too great value, the effectiveness of power control cannot
be guaranteed.
In Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three grades (0, 1-
2, 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). A maximum step length of power control is set
for each quality zone.
When downward power adjustment is performed based on the level, the maximum
permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive quality.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the algorithm
cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to
a too great value, the effectiveness of power control cannot
be guaranteed.
In Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three grades (0, 1-
2, 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). A maximum step length of power control is set
for each quality zone.
When downward power adjustment is performed based on the level, the maximum
permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive quality.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the algorithm
cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to
a too great value, the effectiveness of power control cannot
be guaranteed.
In Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three grades (0, 1-
2, 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). A maximum step length of power control is set
for each quality zone.
When downward power adjustment is performed based on the level, the maximum
permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive quality.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the algorithm
cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to
a too great value, the effectiveness of power control cannot
be guaranteed.
After the BSC delivers the power control command, it should wait for a certain period
before receiving an acknowledgement message. Therefore, the MR that power control
decision is based on cannot accurately reflect the radio environment of the BTS during
the power adjustment, but misses the latest changes of the receive level and receive
quality of the BTS. Thus, the power adjustment is delayed.
None
After the BSC delivers the power control command, it should wait for a certain period
before receiving an acknowledgement message. Therefore, the MR that power control
decision is based on cannot accurately reflect the radio environment of the BTS during
the power adjustment, but misses the latest changes of the receive level and receive
quality of the MS. Thus, the power adjustment is delayed.
None
This parameter specifies whether the compensation of measurement reports is allowed
by Huawei II power control algorithm.
When determining whether to perform power control, the BSC performs weighted
filtering on the values of the receive level and of the receive quality in several history
measurement reports. The measurement reports may be obtained by the BTS/MS at
If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC or BTS puts the
currently received measurement reports in the
measurement report compensation queue and then records
the change of the transmit power based on the MS power
and the BTS power in the measurement report.
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating
the average value of the downlink signal quality before the BTS power adjustment.
On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the
network calculates the average value of the downlink signal
quality. This average value indicates the radio environment
of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must
consider the delay and accuracy of the average value
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating
the average value of the uplink signal quality before the MS power adjustment.
On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the
network calculates the average value of the uplink signal
quality. This average value indicates the radio environment
of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must
consider the delay and accuracy of the average value
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating
the average value of the downlink signal strength before the BTS power adjustment.
On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the
network calculates the average value of the downlink signal
levels. This average value indicates the radio environment
of the BTS. When you configure this parameter, you must
consider the delay and accuracy of the average value
This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating
the average value of the uplink signal strength before the MS power adjustment.
On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the
network calculates the average value of the uplink signal
levels. This average value indicates the radio environment
of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must
consider the delay and accuracy of the average value
This parameter specifies whether enable Huawei II power control algorithm or Huawei
III power control algorithm.
None
When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper
threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality
exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is
performed. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the downlink quality for
power control.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is
poor without power control. Thus, the conversation quality
is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the
quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life
is reduced.
When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper
threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality
exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is
performed. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the downlink quality for
power control.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is
poor without power control. Thus, the conversation quality
is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the
quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life
is reduced.
The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an
upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level
is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed
only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.
The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level
becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life
is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this
parameter is set to a too small value, the downlink level
becomes low, and call drop may easily occur.
The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an
upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level
is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed
only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.
The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level
becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life
is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this
parameter is set to a too small value, the downlink level
becomes low, and call drop may easily occur.
When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper
threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality
exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is
performed. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the uplink quality for power
control.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the signal
quality of the MS is poor without power control. Thus, the
conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to
a too small value, the signal quality is good without power
control. Thus, the battery life is reduced.
When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper
threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality
exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is
performed. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the uplink quality for power
control.
If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is
good without power control. Thus, the battery life is
reduced and the network interference is increased. If this
parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor
without power control, thus the conversation quality is
The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an
upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level
is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed
only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.
The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level
becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life
is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this
parameter is set to a too small value, the uplink level
becomes low, and call drop may easily occur.
The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an
upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level
is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed
only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.
The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level
becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life
is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this
parameter is set to a too small value, the uplink level
becomes low, and call drop may easily occur.
This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous power
control commands.
If this parameter is set to a too great value, the power
control may be delayed. If this parameter is set to a too
small value, the power control may be performed
frequently, thus wasting the resources.
This parameter specifies the constant of filtering the collision signal strength for power
control. The MS obtains valid measurement signals by sampling for NAVGI times.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the proportion of
the history value in the interference measurement results
decreases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the
proportion of the history value in the interference
measurement results increases.
This parameter specifies the channel where the receive power level of the MS is
measured for the uplink power control.
None
This parameter specifies the reduced power of the BTS on the PBCCH. None
This parameter specifies the signal strength filter period in the transfer mode, which is
used to set the signal strength filter period of the MS in the packet transfer mode.
This parameter is used by the signal strength filter for power control to periodically filter
the signal level in the packet transfer mode. This parameter is used when the MS
measures the downlink signal strength in the packet transfer mode and calculates Cn of
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the influence of Cn-
1 on Cn increases; if this parameter is set to a lower value,
the influence of Cn-1 on Cn decreases.
This parameter specifies the signal strength filter period in the packet idle mode, which
is used to set the signal strength filter period of the MS in the packet idle mode.
This parameter is used by the signal strength filter for power control to periodically filter
the signal level in the idle mode. This parameter is used when the MS measures the
downlink signal strength in the packet idle mode and calculates Cn of the MS output
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the influence of Cn-
1 on Cn increases; if this parameter is set to a lower value,
the influence of Cn-1 on Cn decreases.
This parameter specifies the initial power level.
This parameter determines the expected receive signal strength on the BTS when the
MS uses the GPRS dynamic power control.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the output power
of the MS decreases; if this parameter is set to a lower
value, the output power of the MS increases.
This parameter is used for the open-loop power control.
The MS uses the Alpha parameter to calculate the output power of the uplink PDCH,
namely, PCH.
When the MS uses the GPRS dynamic power control, this parameter determines the
reduced level of the MS transmit power mapping to the path loss.
None
This parameter specifies the maximum value of N3105.
After a downlink TBF is established, the network initiates the N3105.
Upon setting the RRBP field in the downlink RLC data block, the network resets the
N3105 when it receives the packet acknowledgment message from the MS on the uplink
RLC data block corresponding to the RRBP field; otherwise, the network increases N3105
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the tolerance of the
network to downlink errors decreases and the probability of
the frequent TBF release increases.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the abnormal TBF
may occur (such as the MS does not receive the message of
This parameter specifies the maximum value of the N3103.
Upon receiving the last RLC data block when the uplink transmission is complete, the
network sends the MS a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message with FAI=1 and initiates the
N3103.
If the network does not receive a packet control acknowledgment message within
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the abnormal
uplink TBF release increases caused by the overflow of the
N3103.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the release time of
the uplink TBF delays due to no response of the MS caused
This parameter specifies the maximum value of N3101.
In uplink dynamic assignment mode, the multiple MSs can share one uplink channel if
the downlink data blocks carry the USF value.
After the network starts to assign a USF value to the uplink TBF (uplink TBF is
established), the N3101 is initiated. The network reserves the RLC uplink blocks mapping
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the tolerance of the
network to uplink errors decreases and the probability of
the frequent TBF release increases.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the abnormal TBF
may occur (such as the MS has not received the message of
This parameter specifies the release delay of the downlink TBF.
After sending the last downlink RLC data block and confirming that all downlink data
blocks are received, the network does not immediately notify the MS of releasing this
TBF but forcedly set the last data block not received. Therefore, keep this TBF
unreleased by continuously resending the last downlink data block with the Relative
If this parameter is set to a higher value, this wastes the
wireless resources and influences the the access
performance of other MSs in the network, thus causing the
useless signaling seizing the channel bandwidth and wasting
the downlink resources.
This parameter specifies the inactive period of the extended uplink TBF.
Upon receiving the last uplink RLC data blocks (CountValue=0) from the MS that
supports the extended uplink TBF function, the network does not release this uplink TBF
immediately but set it to the inactive mode. To transmit the uplink RLC data blocks
during inactive period, the MS can use this TBF that automatically becomes active
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the release delay
of the uplink TBF increases, thus wasting the uplink
resources.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the uplink TBF
frequently releases and establishes, thus increasing the
This parameter specifies the release delay of the non-extended uplink TBF.
Upon receiving the last uplink RLC data block (CountValue=0), the network sends the MS
a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message with FAI=1 to notify the MS of releasing this uplink
TBF. To establish the downlink TBF on the unreleased uplink TBF, the network will notify
the MS of releasing this uplink TBF for a period of delay after this parameter is set. After
If this parameter is set to a higher value, this can increase
the probability of establishing the downlink TBF on the
PACCH, thus greatly reducing the downlink TBF
establishment time; however, if the MS needs to send new
uplink data, because the BSC6000 does not support the
This parameter specifies that the MS performs the load-based cell reselection can be
controlled. The load-based cell reselection is available to the MSs that the receive level
is lower than this threshold.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the load-based
reselection is triggered difficultly; if this parameter is set to
a lower value, the load-based reselection is triggered easily.
This parameter is used to collect the statistics of GPRS transmission quality. If the
receive quality is equal to or greater than this threshold, you can infer that the
transmission quality is worsened.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the number of
times that the transmission quality is worsened decreases,
and the critical reselection is triggered difficultly; if this
parameter is set to a lower value, the number of times that
the transmission quality is worsened increases, and the
This parameter is used to collect the statistics of EDGE 8PSK transmission quality. If the
MEAN_BEP is less than or equal to this threshold, you can infer that the transmission
quality is worsened.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the number of
times that the transmission quality is worsened decreases,
and the critical reselection is triggered difficultly; if this
parameter is set to a lower value, the number of times that
the transmission quality is worsened increases, and the
This parameter is used to collect the statistics of EDGE GMSK transmission quality. If the
MEAN_BEP is less than or equal to this threshold, you can infer that the transmission
quality is worsened.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the number of
times that the transmission quality is worsened decreases,
and the critical reselection is triggered difficultly; if this
parameter is set to a lower value, the number of times that
the transmission quality is worsened increases, and the
This parameter specifies the interval between two NC2 cell reselections in a cell.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the number of cell
reselections increases; if this parameter is set to a lower
value, the number of cell reselections decreases.
This parameter specifies the number of times that the receive level of the serving cell is
lower than the level threshold of cell reselection within the Normal Cell Reselection
Watch Period; If the number of times is lower than this parameter, the cell reselection is
allowed.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the probability of
the cell reselection increases; if this parameter is set to a
lower value, the probability of the cell reselection
decreases.
This parameter specifies the number of times that the receive levels of the serving cell
are continuously calculated before the P/N criterion is determined.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the precision of
decision may be reduced; if this parameter is set to a higher
value, the decision may not be performed immediately.
This parameter specifies whether enabling the normal cell reselection algorithm is
allowed.
None
This parameter specifies whether enabling the cell load-based reselection algorithm is
allowed.
None
This parameter specifies whether enabling the critical cell reselection algorithm is
allowed.
None
This parameter specifies whether a 2G cell or 3G cell is selected in the inter-RAT cell
reselection procedure.
None
This parameter specifies the number of MRs used for averaging the signal strength in
neighbor cells.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the weight of the
previous signal level increases; if this parameter is set to a
lower value, the weight of current signal level increases.
This parameter specifies the allowed number of consecutive MRs that are lost. If the
number of consecutive MRs that are lost exceeds this parameter, the previous MR is
thought to be invalid.
None
This parameter specifies that if the cell load is lower than this threshold, the cell can
receive the MSs from other cells due to the load-based reselection. That is, the cell will
receive the MSs from other cells due to the load-based reselection if the TBF
multiplexing rate is lower than corresponding percentage.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, it is easier for the
MS to reselect this cell; if this parameter is set to a lower
value, it is difficult for the MS to reselect this cell.
The load-based reselection is enabled when the cell load is higher than this threshold.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, it is difficult to
trigger the load-based reselection; if this parameter is set to
a lower value, it is easier to trigger the load-based
reselection.
This parameter specifies that the accumulatively calculated number of times that the
downlink transmission quality of MS is lower than the transmission quality threshold of
MS. The critical reselection needs to be performed when the ratio of the accumulatively
calculated number of times and the number of times in the downlink transmission
quality measurement report reaches this threshold.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the critical
reselection is triggered difficultly; if this parameter is set to
a lower value, the critical reselection is triggered easily.
This parameter specifies that the Cell Urgent Reselection Allowed can be determined
when the transmission quality in the received downlink transmission quality
measurement report is lower than this threshold.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the critical
reselection is triggered difficultly; if this parameter is set to
a lower value, the critical reselection is triggered easily.
This parameter specifies the penalty duration for the cell reselection. The cell penalty
can be performed within the Cell Penalty Last Time only.
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the MS cannot be
handed over to the target cell that the previous reselection
fails or the load-based reselection occurs within the time
longer than this value; conversely, the time greatly reduces.
This parameter specifies the signal level for target cell penalty after the BSC receives the
cell reselection failure message or after the cell initiates the load-based reselection. This
parameter is valid only within the Cell Penalty Last Time.
If the value of this parameter increases, the MS can be
handed over to the target cell only if the target cell has a
higher level; conversely, the MS can be handed over to the
target cell only if the target cell has a lower level.
To avoid ping-pong handovers, when this parameter specifies the cell reselection, the
level of the target cell should higher than the total of the Min Access Level Threshold
and the Cell Reselection Hysterisis.
The setting of this parameter is to avoid the ping-pong
reselection between cells.
This parameter specifies the minimum receive level that is required for a cell to serve as
a candidate cell for handover.
None
This parameter specifies whether to support the QoS optimization.
The GPRS GSN provides different subscribers with flexible QoS mechanism. The QoS
level is determined in the subscription.
The QoS control parameters include the service priority class, reliability class, delay
class, and throughput class.
None
This parameter specifies the policy of the handover between the underlaid subcell and
the overlaid subcell in a PS domain.
In version V9R8, the BSC supports the PDCH configured in the overlaid subcell or in the
underlaid subcell, and supports the handover between the overlaid subcell and the
underlaid subcell.
This parameter is configured according to the congestion of
the underlaid (UL) and overlaid (OL) voice services. If the
underlaid voice services are congested, the overlaid-to-
underlaid subcell handover is only allowed; if the overlaid
voice services are congested, the underlaid-to-overlaid
This parameter specifies the maximum transmission delay of the POC services.
The POC services have a strict requirement on the transmission delay. The network
should support the detection of the POC service type and take measures to reduce the
transmission delay to meet the requirement of the POC services.
If the service type carried in the received message is POC, the Transfer Delay in the
None
This parameter specifies the upper limit of the bandwidth for the POC services.
The POC services have a strict requirement on the transmission delay. The network
should support the detection of the POC service type and take measures to reduce the
transmission delay to meet the requirement of the POC services.
If the service type carried in the received message is POC, the uplink/downlink
None
This parameter specifies the lower limit of the bandwidth for the POC services.
The POC services have a strict requirement on the transmission delay. The network
should support the detection of the POC service type and take measures to reduce the
transmission delay to meet the requirement of the POC services.
If the service type carried in the received message is POC, the uplink/downlink
None
This parameter specifies whether to support the packet assignment, that is, the
assignment of the packet channel to the MS through the PACCH, this only involves the
takeover of the uplink immediate assignment. To improve the speed of the MS to access
the network, after the packet assignment is taken over to the BTS, the BSC reserves
uplink resources for the BTS. The BTS obtains the channel request information of the MS
When this parameter is set to Yes, the access delay of the
MS reduces.
This parameter specifies whether to support the takeover of the packet immediate
assignment by the BTS. It is relative to the uplink immediate assignment.
To improve the speed of the MS to access the network, the BSS pre-allocates the uplink
TBF resources and sends these resources to the BTS. When the MS initiates the channel
request, the BTS uses the pre-allocated resources to send the immediate assignment
When this parameter is set to Yes, the access delay of the
MS reduces.
When both the MS and the network support PFC, the QoS parameters are obtained
from the ABQP in the PFC.
When the MS or the network does not support PFC, the QoS parameters are obtained
from the DL UNITDAT of the SGSN or from the uplink request of the MS.
Gbr:guaranteed bit rate.
None
This parameter specifies the default MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled downlink.
To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the downlink, you should set the MCS type for
transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. Then, you should dynamically adjust
the MCS types of other TBFs based on the signal transmission quality.
To fixedly use an MCS type on the downlink, you should fixedly use an MCS type for all
For the cell with the good Um interface quality, set the
parameter to MCS6; for the cell with the poor Um interface
quality, set the parameter to MCS4.
This parameter specifies the fixed MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled downlink.
To fixedly use an MCS type on the downlink, you should set this parameter to a value
among MCS1-MCS9.
To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the downlink, you should set this parameter to
UNFIXED.
None
This parameter specifies the default MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled uplink.
To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the uplink, you should set the MCS type for
transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. Then, you dynamically adjust the MCS
types of other TBFs based on the signal transmission quality.
To fixedly use an MCS type on the uplink, you should fixedly use an MCS type for all
None
This parameter specifies the fixed MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled uplink.
To fixedly use an MCS type on the uplink, you should set this parameter to a value
among MCS1-MCS9.
To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the uplink, set this parameter to UNFIXED.
None
This parameter specifies the average period of bit error detected.
This parameter can be used to obtain the forgetting factor, which is used for the MS to
calculate the measurement results.
The higher the value of this parameter is, the larger the
proportion of the BEP history information sent by the MS is;
otherwise, the smaller the proportion of the BEP history
information sent by the MS is.
This parameter specifies the mode of controlling the quality of links. During the data
transmission process, the modulation scheme and coding scheme can be changed to
dynamically adapt to the radio transmission environment, thus improving the quality of
links.
- Setting and effect
None
This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the
downlink TBF to change from CS4 to CS3.
When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is larger than or equals to the value
of this parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS4 to CS3.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to
decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest
value, it is hard to decrease the CS type.
This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the
downlink TBF to change from CS3 to CS2.
When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is larger than or equals to the value
of this parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS3 to CS2.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to
decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest
value, it is hard to decrease the CS type.
This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the
downlink TBF to change from CS2 to CS1.
When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is larger than or equals to the value
of this parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS2 to CS1.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to
decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest
value, it is hard to decrease the CS type.
This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the
downlink TBF to change from CS3 to CS4.
When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value
of this parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS3 to CS4.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to
increase the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest
value, it is hard to increase the CS type.
This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the
downlink TBF to change from CS2 to CS3.
When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value
of this parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS2 to CS3.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to
increase the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest
value, it is hard to increase the CS type.
This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the
downlink TBF to change from CS1 to CS2.
When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value
of this parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS1 to CS2.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to
increase the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest
value, it is hard to increase the CS type.
This parameter specifies the default CS type used on the downlink.
To dynamically adjust the CS type on the downlink, set the CS type for transmitting the
first TBF through this parameter. Then, the CS types of other TBFs are dynamically
adjusted based on the signal transmission quality.
If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the downlink, all TBFs use the default CS
None
This parameter specifies the fixed CS type used on the downlink.
If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the downlink, this parameter can be set to
CS1, CS2, CS3, or CS4.
If the CS type is dynamically adjusted on the downlink, this parameter is set to UNFIXED.
None
This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink
TBF to change from CS4 to CS3.
When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of
this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS4 to CS3.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to
decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest
value, it is hard to decrease the CS type.
This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink
TBF to change from CS3 to CS2.
When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of
this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS3 to CS2.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to
decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest
value, it is hard to decrease the CS type.
This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink
TBF to change from CS2 to CS1.
When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of
this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS2 to CS1.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to
decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest
value, it is hard to decrease the CS type.
This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink
TBF to change from CS3 to CS4.
When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value of
this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS3 to CS4.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to
increase the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest
value, it is hard to increase the CS type.
This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink
TBF to change from CS2 to CS3.
When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value of
this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS2 to CS3.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to
increase the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest
value, it is hard to increase the CS type.
This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink
TBF to change from CS1 to CS2.
When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value of
this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS1 to CS2.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to
increase the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest
value, it is hard to increase the CS type.
This parameter specifies the default CS type used on the uplink.
To dynamically adjust the CS type on the uplink, set the CS type for transmitting the first
TBF through this parameter. Then, the CS types of other TBFs are dynamically adjusted
based on the signal transmission quality.
If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the uplink, all TBFs use the default CS types.
None
This parameter specifies the fixed coding scheme (CS) type used on the uplink.
If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the uplink, this parameter can be set to CS1,
CS2, CS3, or CS4.
If the CS type is dynamically adjusted on the uplink, this parameter is set to UNFIXED.
None
This parameter specifies the weight of QoS background services. The background class
service is a kind of traffic class services.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this kind of
services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to
a modest value, this kind of services occupies low
bandwidth.
This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS THP3.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this kind of
services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to
a modest value, this kind of services occupies low
bandwidth.
This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS THP2.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this kind of
services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to
a modest value, this kind of services occupies low
bandwidth.
This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS Traffic Handle Priority 1 (THP1).
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this kind of
services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to
a modest value, this kind of services occupies low
bandwidth.
This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS ARP3.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this kind of
services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to
a modest value, this kind of services occupies low
bandwidth.
This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS ARP2.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this kind of
services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to
a modest value, this kind of services occupies low
bandwidth.
This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS Allocation/Retention Priority 1
(ARP1).
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this kind of
services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to
a modest value, this kind of services occupies low
bandwidth.
This parameter specifies the timer set to release the Abis timeslots.
When a channel is idle, this timer is started.
When the timer expires, the Abis timeslots are released.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the idle Abis
timeslots cannot be fully used.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the Abis timeslots
may be applied frequently.
This parameter specifies the number of channels reserved for the CS services.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the PS services
are affected.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the CS services
are affected when there are too many PS services.
This parameter specifies the levels of dynamic channels preempted by CS services and
PS services. Only full-rate TCHs are the dynamic channels that can be preempted.
All dynamic channels can be preempted: It indicates that the CS services can preempt all
the dynamic channels.
Control channels cannot be preempted: It indicates that the CS services can preempt all
None
This parameter specifies the timer set to release the idle dynamic channel after all TBFs
on the dynamic channel are released.
If all TBFs on a dynamic channel are released, the dynamic channel is not released
immediately. Instead, a timer is started when the channel is idle.
Before the timer expires, if there are new services, the dynamic channel continues to be
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the dynamic
channel resources may be wasted when there are no
services for a long time.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is possible that
a dynamic channel is requested immediately after being
This parameter specifies the policy for dynamic channel conversion in a concentric cell.
This parameter is configured according to the congestion
counter of the underlaid (UL) and overlaid (OL) voice
services.
If the UL voice service is congested, the dynamic channel is
converted at the UL cell.
This parameter specifies the PDCH downlink multiplex threshold.
The downlink PDCH can carry a maximum of (threshold/10) TBFs.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the TBFs
established on the PDCH and the subscribers are fewer, and
the downlink bandwidth for each subscriber is higher.
If this threshold is set to a higher value, the TBFs established
on the PDCH and the subscribers are more, and the
This parameter specifies the PDCH uplink multiplex threshold.
The uplink PDCH can carry a maximum of (threshold/10) TBFs.
If this parameter is set to a lower value, the TBFs
established on the PDCH and the subscribers are fewer, and
the uplink bandwidth for each subscriber is higher
If this threshold is set to a higher value, the TBFs established
on the PDCH and the subscribers are more, and the uplink
This parameter specifies the downlink multiplex threshold of dynamic channel
conversion.
When the number of subscribers carried over the channel reaches the threshold/10,
dynamic channels are used.
If this threshold is high, it is difficult to seize dynamic
channels.
If this threshold is low, it is easy to seize dynamic channels.
This parameter specifies the uplink multiplex threshold of dynamic channel conversion.
When the number of subscribers carried over the channel reaches the threshold/10,
dynamic channels are used.
If this threshold is high, it is difficult to seize dynamic
channels.
If this threshold is low, it is easy to seize dynamic channels.
This parameter specifies the maximum ratio of PDCHs in a cell. The total number of
TCHs and PDCHs available in a cell is fixed. The PDCH ratio is equal to PDCHs / (TCH/Fs +
static PDCHs). This parameter determines the proportion of PDCHs to the total number
of TCHs + PDCHs.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, there are
excessive PDCHs and insufficient TCHs. This affects CS
services.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, there are
insufficient PDCHs and excessive TCHs. This affects PS
This parameter specifies the multi-frequency reporting value.
Value range: Reporting the frequencies of six strongest cells; Reporting the frequency of
one strongest cell; Reporting the frequencies of two strongest cells; Reporting the
frequencies of three strongest cells
None
This parameter specifies the threshold of HCS signal strength.
The MS uses the signal strength in the MR and this threshold to calculate C31, which is
used for cell reselection.
If the threshold of HCS signal strength is high, it is difficult
for the cell to be selected.
If the threshold of HCS signal strength is low, it is easy for
the cell to be selected.
This parameter specifies the Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS) priority of a GPRS cell.
Value 0 indicates the lowest priority and value 7 indicates the highest priority.
If the priority is high, it is easy for the MS to select this cell
during cell reselection.
If the priority is low, it is difficult for the MS to select this
cell during cell reselection.
This parameter specifies the maximum TX power level for an MS to access the packet
control channel.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the power
consumption and radiation of the MS are high.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the MS may not
be able to access the channel.
This parameter specifies the minimum receive level for an MS in the cell to access the
system.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the coverage
area of the cell is large. The MS on the edge of the cell may
not be able to access the system.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the coverage area
of the cell is small. The usage of cell resources decreases.
This parameter specifies whether the SoLSA exclusive access cell is used. Only the MSs
customizing the Localised Service Area (LSA) service can access the exclusive cell.
None
This parameter specifies whether the cell can be accessed during cell reselection.
Permit Cell Access: Access is permitted.
Prohibit Cell Access: Access is prohibited.
None
This parameter specifies the hysteresis of cell reselection in different routing areas.
When an MS in the ready state performs cell reselection, if the originating cell and the
target cell belong to different routing areas, the MS starts cell reselection only when the
signal level of the neighbor cells in different routing areas is higher than that of this cell,
and when the signal level difference is greater than the value of this parameter.
In different routing areas, if this parameter is set to an
excessive value, it is hard for cell reselection. If this
parameter is set to a modest value, the frequent ping-pong
reselection occurs.
This parameter specifies the period when cell reselection is prohibited.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the period
when cell reselection is prohibited increases.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the period when
cell reselection is prohibited decreases.
This parameter specifies whether the MS can access another cell.
Yes: The MS can access another cell.
No: The MS cannot access another cell.
None
This parameter specifies whether GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is used for C32 calculation
during cell reselection. Value range: 0, 1
0: GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is not used for C32 calculation during cell reselection.
1: GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is used for C32 calculation during cell reselection.
None
This parameter specifies whether GPRS Cell Reselect Hysteresis is applied to the C31
standards.
c31standard: applied
c31notuse: not applied
None
This parameter specifies the hysteresis of cell reselection in the same routing area.
When an MS in the ready state performs cell reselection, if the originating cell and the
target cell belong to the same routing area, the C2 value measured in the overlapped
area of two adjacent cells fluctuates greatly because of the fading feature of radio
channels. Therefore, the MS frequently performs cell reselection. The frequent cell
In the same routing area, if this parameter is set to an
excessive value, it is hard for cell reselection. If this
parameter is set to a modest value, the frequent ping-pong
reselection occurs.
This parameter specifies whether the PSI status message is supported.
Yes: supported
No: not supported
None
This parameter specifies whether the MS is allowed to send a measurement report to
the network.
None
This parameter specifies the repetition period of the PS information PSI1.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the PSI1 cannot be received in real time.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the PSI1 is sent frequently. This occupies
many resources.
None
This parameter specifies the persistence level 4 of radio priority access.
A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. If the priority is higher than the
persistence level, the MS can access the cell. Otherwise, the MS cannot access the cell.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is difficult for
an MS to access the cell. Therefore, radio resources may be
wasted.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is easy for an
MS to access the cell. However, too many MSs may access
This parameter specifies the persistence level 3 of radio priority access.
A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. If the priority is higher than the
persistence level, the MS can access the cell. Otherwise, the MS cannot access the cell.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is difficult for
an MS to access the cell. Therefore, radio resources may be
wasted.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is easy for an
MS to access the cell. However, too many MSs may access
This parameter specifies the persistence level 2 of radio priority access.
A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. If the priority is higher than the
persistence level, the MS can access the cell. Otherwise, the MS cannot access the cell.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is difficult for
an MS to access the cell. Therefore, radio resources may be
wasted.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is easy for an
MS to access the cell. However, too many MSs may access
This parameter specifies the persistence level 1 of radio priority access.
A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. If the priority is higher than the
persistence level, the MS can access the cell. Otherwise, the MS cannot access the cell.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is difficult for
an MS to access the cell. Therefore, radio resources may be
wasted.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is easy for an
MS to access the cell. However, too many MSs may access
This parameter specifies the number of timeslots for extension transmission in random
access. This parameter affects the interval for the MS to send a new Channel Request
after the channel request fails.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the MS sends a
new Channel Request within a long interval after the
channel request fails, thus reducing access collisions but
slowing down the MS access speed.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the MS sends a
This parameter specifies the minimum number of timeslots between two successive
channel requests.
The MS sends an access request and waits for a response. If no response is received
after the minimum number of timeslots, the MS resends the access request.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the MS needs
to wait for a long time before sending the next request. This
may affect MS services.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is possible that
a response is sent, but the MS has not received it because
This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio priority
4.The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request
message has four levels of priorities. Level 1 is the highest priority, and level 4 is the
lowest priority.
None
This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio priority
3.The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request
message has four levels of priorities. Level 1 is the highest priority, and level 4 is the
lowest priority.
None
This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio priority
2.The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request
message has four levels of priorities. Level 1 is the highest priority, and level 4 is the
lowest priority.
None
This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio priority
1.The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request
message has four levels of priorities. Level 1 is the highest priority, and level 4 is the
lowest priority.
None
This parameter specifies the access control class. None
This parameter specifies the number of PRACH blocks. The value of this parameter
ranges from 1 to 12.
Value 1 indicates one PRACH.
Value 2 indicates two PRACHs.
...
None
This parameter specifies the number of PAGCH blocks. The value of this parameter
ranges from 1 to 12.
Value 1 indicates one PAGCH.
Value 2 indicates two PAGCHs.
...
None
This parameter specifies the number of PBCCH blocks. The value of this parameter
ranges from 1 to 4.
Value 1 indicates one PBCCH.
Value 2 indicates two PBCCHs.
Value 3 indicates three PBCCHs.
None
This parameter specifies the period of cell reselection measurement report in packet
transfer mode.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, some
information may be missing.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the reselection
measurement report is sent frequently. This occupies many
bandwidth resources.
This parameter specifies the period of cell reselection measurement report in packet
idle mode.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, some
information may be missing.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the reselection
measurement report is sent frequently. This occupies many
bandwidth resources.
This parameter specifies the minimum duration when the MS stays in non-DRX mode
after the NC NC-measurement report is sent.
The MS should stay in non-DRX mode for a period of time after the measurement report
is sent.
The MS should stay in non-DRX mode for a period of time
after the measurement report is sent.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the MS may
stay in non-DRX mode for a long time and services may be
affected.
This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32. A higher value
indicates a higher access priority.
The principles of cell reselection offset are as follows:
1. For the cell with low traffic and low equipment usage,
Huawei recommends that MSs work in the cell. The value
range 0-20 dB is recommended.
2 For the cell with medium traffic, value 0 is recommended.
This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32. The timer is sent
through the system message broadcast in each cell.
If you do not want a fast-moving MS to access a micro cell,
this parameter should be set to a high value when the
coverage area of the micro cell is large.
When the BCCH frequency of a cell is listed in the neighbor cells for the MS, the negative
offset of C2 is calculated before timer T expires.
This parameter is set to avoid the ping-pong cell reselection by the fast-moving MS.
Therefore, the MS does not select this cell when the duration of signal strength on the
BCCH is shorter than the penalty time.
None
This parameter specifies the interval between two extension measurement reports.
If this parameter is set to a modest value, the extension
measurement report is sent frequently.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, measurement
information is not obtained timely.
This parameter specifies the type of the extension measurement report
Three types of the extension measurement report are type 1, type 2, and type 3.
Type 1: The MS sends the measurement report of the six strongest carriers to the
network regardless of whether the BSIC was decoded. The measurement report should
contain the received signal level and BSIC.
None
This parameter specifies the frequency index of the interference measurement in type 3
of the extension measurement report.
None
This parameter specifies the NCC bitmap of the measurement report sent by the MS.
The MS reports only the NCC bitmap of the BSIC and the carrier measurement report
that matches the bitmap.
None
The network can require the MS to send measurement reports. When the MS is in idle
mode, it sends the extension measurement reports. This parameter can be set to em0
or em1.
None
This parameter specifies whether the CS paging on the A interface is supported.
Yes: The MS can receive CS paging on the A interface when handling the GPRS service.
No: The MS cannot receive CS paging on the A interface when handling the GPRS
service.
None
This parameter specifies whether the 11-bit EGPRS access is supported.
Yes: supported
No: not supported
When this parameter is set to Yes, the access delay of the
EGPRS MS is shortened.
This parameter specifies the routing area color code of a GPRS cell. None
This parameter specifies the priority of packet access of MSs to a cell. The 2bit Radio
Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four
levels of priorities. Level 1 is the highest priority, and level 4 is the lowest priority. When
an MS accesses the network, the BSC compares the Radio Priority in the Channel
Request message with the parameter setting in the cell. The BSC requests for
None
This parameter specifies whether the SPLIT_PG_CYCLE parameter is transmitted on the
CCCH of the cell.
SPLIT_PG_CYCLE is used to set the DRX period. For the BTS and MS supporting the
SPLIT_PG_CYCLE-based paging groups on the CCCH, this parameter is optional.
Yes: The SPLIT_PG_CYCLE parameter is transmitted on the CCCH of the cell.
None
In the cell reselection required by the network, the network requests the MS to send
measurement reports to control its cell reselection. There are three network control
modes.
nc0: Normal MS control. The MS performs automatic cell reselection.
nc1: MS control with measurement reports. The MS sends measurement reports to the
None
This parameter specifies the value of PAN_MAX. It is also the maximum value of N3102.
Value 4 indicates that PAN_MAX is 4; value 32 indicates that PAN_MAX is 32; value No
use indicates that this parameter is not used.
When the radio operating environment is good, decreasing
the parameter value improves the transmission rate.
When the radio operating environment is poor, increasing
the parameter value reduces the times of abnormally
releasing TBFs.
This parameter is used to set the value of N3102. When the MS receives a Packet
Downlink Ack/Nack message from the network for increasing the value of V(S) or V(A),
the MS increases N3102 by PAN_INC.
Value 0 indicates that PAN_INC is 0; value 7 indicates that PAN_INC is 7; value No use
indicates that this parameter is not used.
PAN_INC should be greater than PAN_DEC. Usually,
PAN_INC = 2 x PAN_DEC.
However, N3102 cannot exceed PAN_MAX.
This parameter is used to set the value of N3102. When T3182 expires, the MS
decreases N3102 by PAN_DEC.
Value 0 indicates that PAN_DEC is 0; value 7 indicates that PAN_DEC is 7; value No use
indicates that this parameter is not used.
None
This parameter specifies the maximum countdown value of the MS.
This parameter determines BS_CV_MAX and is used for the MS to calculate the CV. The
parameter also determines the duration of the T3198 timer.
Every time the MS sends an uplink RLC data block, the receive state of the data block is
set to Pending and the T3198 is started. If the MS receives a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack
If the value of this parameter is set to a modest value, the
MS may retransmits the RLC data block before the BSC
sends an Uplink Acknowledgment message. Thus, many
radio resources are not used but occupied.
If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the speed of
This parameter specifies the acknowledgment message type used by the MS.
If four access pulses are used, the timing advance can be obtained without a polling
message.
If the RLC/MAC control block is used, the timing advance can be obtained only by
sending a polling message. Four access pulses are recommended.
None
This parameter specifies the access burst type used by the MS on the PRACH and
PTCCH/U. The access burst type is carried in the packet control acknowledgment
message.
8bit: access using the 8-bit burst
11bit: access using the 11-bit burst
Some MSs do not support the 11-bit access burst.
Therefore, 8bit is recommended.
This parameter specifies the maximum duration of the non-DRX mode. DRX
(discontinuous reception) is a parameter carried by the cell broadcast message.
The MS stays in the DRX mode for a certain period when changing from the packet
transfer mode to the packet idle mode. After the TBF is released, the MS monitors all
the CCCH blocks during the non-DRX mode period and the BSC6000 reserves the MS
It takes a shorter time to send the Immediate Assignment
message on all PCHs and AGCHs in non-DRX mode than in
DRX mode. During the period of non-DRX mode, the TBF
establishment time decreases, but the power consumption
of the MS increases.
This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the TBF release after
receiving the last data block.
When the MS receives the last RLC data block carrying the last block flag (FBI=1) and
confirms that all the RLC data blocks on the TBF are received, the MS sends the Packet
Downlink Ack/Nack message carrying the final acknowledgement flag (FAI=1) and starts
If this parameter is set to a higher value, the TBF resources
(including TFI and timeslots) are reserved for a long time. If
no downlink data needs to be sent, many resources are not
used but occupied for a long time.
If the timer is set to a smaller value, the MS releases the
This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the Packet Uplink
Assignment message.
This parameter specifies the maximum interval set for the MS to wait for the Packet
Uplink Assignment message. After the MS sends the Packet Resource Request or Packet
Downlink Ack/Nack message carrying Channel Request Description, T3168 is started to
If the timer is set to a lower value, the MS can detect the
TBF establishment failure within a shorter period. If the TBF
establishment fails, the average delay of packet access is
short, but the success rate of TBF establishment in bad
radio environment decreases. In addition, the small timer
Based on the paging channel used by the system, the network operation modes are
classified into Network Operation Mode I, Network Operation Mode II, and Network
Operation Mode III.
When the GS interface is configured, Network Operation Mode I is used.
When the Gs interface or the PCCCH is not configured, Network Operation Mode II is
Currently, the GPRS network is not configured with the Gs
interface or the PCCCH. Therefore, Network Operation
Mode II is selected by default.